PROJECT MANUAL

FOR
HILLSHIRE BRANDS



WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY


BID PACKAGE 2
PROCESS MODIFICATIONS







January 28, 2014
Project Number G130547CD









CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

FISHBECK, THOMPSON, CARR & HUBER, INC.
1515 Arboretum Drive, SE
Grand Rapids, Michigan 49546
Phone: (616) 575-3824


















Copyright 2014
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
All rights reserved.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Table of Contents

Section 00 01 10
00 01 10 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_01_10.DOCX
SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 11 16 Invitation to Bid
00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders
00 31 32 Geotechnical Data
00 41 13 Bid - Stipulated Sum
00 43 13 Bid Bond
00 51 00 Notice of Award
00 52 00 Agreement
00 61 14 Performance Bond
00 61 15 Payment Bond
00 65 16 Certificate of Substantial Completion
00 65 26 Affidavit and Consent of Surety

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work
01 12 23 Staking and Inspection Services
01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures
01 29 13 Payment Procedures
01 29 73 Schedule of Values
01 31 19 Project Meetings
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
01 45 24 Testing Services
01 45 36 Special Inspection Services
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements
01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management
01 75 00 Starting and Adjusting
01 78 39 Project Record Documents

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 Selective Demolition
02 42 13 Removal of Existing Equipment
02 83 00 Sewer Bypass Pumping

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE

03 30 03 Cast-in-Place Concrete

DIVISION 04 MASONRY

04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 METALS

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Table of Contents

Section 00 01 10
00 01 10 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_01_10.DOCX
DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
06 16 00 Sheathing
06 17 53 Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses
06 20 13 Exterior Finish Carpentry

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles
07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Ceiling Panels
07 42 13.53 Metal Soffit Panels
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 92 00 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 71 00 Door Hardware
08 80 00 Glazing

DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 91 00 Painting

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

10 14 24 Safety Equipment and Signs
10 14 25 Process Equipment Identification

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING

22 05 00 General Plumbing Provisions
22 05 06 Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing
22 05 09 Copper Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing
22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing
22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 05 31 Penetrations for Plumbing
22 05 73 Testing and Cleaning of Plumbing Systems
22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 10 00 Plumbing Piping and Pumps

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 01 00 Operation and Maintenance of HVAC Systems
23 05 00 General HVAC Provisions
23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
23 05 31 Penetrations for HVAC
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
23 33 13 Dampers
23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators
23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets
23 82 50 Electric Convection Heating Units
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Table of Contents

Section 00 01 10
00 01 10 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_01_10.DOCX

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical
26 05 20 Conductors and Cables - 600V and Below
26 05 27 Grounding and Bonding
26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 34 Raceways for Electrical Systems
26 05 35 Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices
26 24 19 Motor-Control Centers
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 00 Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices
26 28 20 Enclosed Switches
26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers
26 29 23 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
26 43 05 Surge Protective Devices
26 50 00 Lighting

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK

31 10 13 Site Preparation
31 22 00 Grading
31 23 03 Excavation and Fill for Utilities
31 23 06 Excavation and Fill for Structures
31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 13 14 Concrete Walks
32 15 00 Aggregate Surfacing
32 92 00 Turf and Grasses

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES

33 90 10 Site Process Piping Systems

DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION

40 05 13 Process Piping Systems
40 05 23 Process Valves
40 05 33 Heat Tracing Systems
40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

DIVISION 43 PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

43 21 00 Horizontal Non-Clog Centrifugal Pumps
43 21 14 Screw Centrifugal Pumps (Installation of Construction Manager Procured Equipment)

DIVISION 46 WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

46 51 17.01 Aeration Equipment (Installation of Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Table of Contents

Section 00 01 10
00 01 10 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_01_10.DOCX

APPENDIX

Construction Manager Procured Equipment Specifications:

43 21 13.85 Screw Centrifugal Pumps (Procurement Package 1 - Raw Waste Pumps)
46 51 17 Jet Aeration Equipment (Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment)


END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Invitation to Bid

Section 00 11 16
00 11 16 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_11_16.DOCX
SECTION 00 11 16 - INVITATION TO BID


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications

1. RECEIPT OF BIDS
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc. (FTC&H) is the Construction Manager for the Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications. Sealed Bids will be received until February 13, 2014, 2:00 p.m., local time.
No Bids will be received after that time. Bids will be opened privately.
Bids are to be sent to:
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc. (FTC&H)
Attention of Randall J. Oostdyk
1515 Arboretum Drive, SE,
Grand Rapids, MI 49546
Or E-mailed to: [email protected]
Label envelope:
Bid for: Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Bid Category _____________
2. SCOPE OF PROJECT
The Project including all Bid categories is for the construction of a new office and lab expansion, and process piping
and equipment.
This Project will include the following bid categories:
BID CATEGORY 6-1 - General Trades
BID CATEGORY 9-1 - Painting
BID CATEGORY 23-1 - Mechanical
BID CATEGORY 26-1 - Electrical
BID CATEGORY 31-1 - Earthwork and Site Utilities
BID CATEGORY 40-1 - Instrumentation and Controls for Process Systems
See Summary of Work for detailed explanation of bid categories.
3. FINANCING
The Project will be financed with private funds provided by Hillshire Brands.
4. ISSUING OFFICE
Bidding Documents are being issued by FTC&Hs Grand Rapids office. Bidders should direct questions and
correspondence to Randall J. Oostdyk, Construction Manager at [email protected].
5. PRE-BID CONFERENCE
A pre-bid meeting will be held on site on February 4, 2014 at 11 a.m.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Invitation to Bid

Section 00 11 16
00 11 16 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_11_16.DOCX
6. BID SECURITY
Bid security in the amount of 5% of Bid and subject to the conditions provided in the Instructions to Bidders must be
submitted with each Bid.
7. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
Bids may not be withdrawn for a period of 60 days after the actual date of opening thereof. This time period may be
extended by mutual agreement of the Construction Manager and any Bidder or Bidders.
8. RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS
The Construction Manager reserves the right to waive any irregularities and to reject any and all Bids.


END OF SECTION 00 11 16

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Instructions to Bidders

Section 00 21 13
00 21 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_21_13.DOCX
SECTION 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS


ARTICLE 1 - DEFINED TERMS
1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to
both the singular and plural thereof:
A. Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or
change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.
B. Agreement - The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Construction
Manager and Subcontractor covering the Work.
C. Bid - The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the
Work to be performed.
D. Bidder - The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to the Construction Manager.
E. Bidding Documents - The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all
Addenda).
F. Bidding Requirements - The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of
acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.
G. Issuing office the office identified in the Invitation to Bid, from which the Bidding Documents are to be
issued and where the bidding procedures are to be administered.
H. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations - Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations,
ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts
having jurisdiction.
I. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the
Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other
lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Construction Manager.
J. Work - The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be
provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all
labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing,
and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract
Documents.
ARTICLE 2 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.01 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; Construction Manager assumes no
responsibility for errors or misinterpretation resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.02 Construction Manager, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for
the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not authorize or confer a license or grant for any other use.
ARTICLE 3 - QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
3.01 Each Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where the Project is
located or Bidder must covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the Contract.
3.02 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidders representations and
certifications.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Instructions to Bidders

Section 00 21 13
00 21 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_21_13.DOCX
3.03 To demonstrate Bidders qualifications to perform the Work, within 5 days of Construction Manager's
request, Bidder shall submit written evidence of:
A. Financial data, previous experience, present commitments, workers' compensation experience
modification rating (EMR) and other such data as may be requested by Construction Manager.
B. Previous experience in constructing at least 3 projects of a similar type, comparable size and
comparable complexity within the past 5 years.
3.04 When so requested, Bidder shall meet with Construction Manager and give further information in order to
determine Bidder's qualifications, responsibility, ability to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
3.05 Construction Manager reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, a
Bidder fails to satisfy Construction Manager that the Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the
Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein.
ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA, AND SITE
4.01 Underground Facilities
A. Information and data indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to existing Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the Site are based upon information and data furnished to Owner, Construction
Manager, and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or others.
4.02 Hazardous Environmental Condition
A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site are known to
Owner/Construction Manager.
4.03 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data, if any, furnished to prospective Bidders with
respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, Underground Facilities, and Hazardous Environmental
Conditions, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated subsurface or physical
conditions appear in Article 7.3 of the Agreement.
4.04 On request, Construction Manager will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests and studies as Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all
holes, clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests
and studies. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relative to excavation and utility locates.
4.05 Reference is made to the Division 01 Section Summary of Work, for the identification of the general nature
of other work that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime Subcontractors)
that relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. On request, Construction Manager will provide
to each Bidder for examination access to or copies of contract documents, if any, (other than portions thereof related
to price) for such other work.
4.06 Reference is made to the Division 01 Section Summary of Work, for Owner/Construction Manager site
safety and security requirements.
4.07 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:
A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and the other related data identified in the Bidding
Documents;
B. visit the Site and become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local and Site conditions
that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Instructions to Bidders

Section 00 21 13
00 21 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_21_13.DOCX
C. become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may
affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work;
D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the
Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site
(except Underground Facilities) that have been identified and (2) reports and drawings of Hazardous
Environmental Conditions, if any, at the Site that have been identified.
E. consider the information known to Bidder; information commonly known to Subcontractors doing
business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding
Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the
effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the
Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by
Bidder, including applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents; and (3) Bidders safety precautions and programs;
F. agree at the time of submitting its Bid that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,
studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) bid
and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents;
G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner/ Construction Manager and
others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;
H. promptly give Construction Manager written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies
that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by Construction
Manager is acceptable to Bidder; and
I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of
all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work.
4.08 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied
with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the
Work required by the Bidding Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Bidding Documents, that
Bidder has given Construction Manager written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities and discrepancies that
Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Construction Manager are
acceptable to Bidder, and that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work.
ARTICLE 5 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE
5.01 A Pre-bid meeting will be held on site on February 4, 2014 at 11 a.m.
ARTICLE 6 - SITE AND OTHER AREAS
6.01 The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. Easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Bidding
Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, construction
equipment or storage of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by
Bidder.
ARTICLE 7 -INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be directed to Construction
Manager in writing. Interpretations or clarification considered necessary by Construction Manager in response to
such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Construction Manager as
having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than 10 days prior to the date for opening of Bids
may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or
clarifications will be without legal effect.
7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by
Construction Manager.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Instructions to Bidders

Section 00 21 13
00 21 13 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_21_13.DOCX
ARTICLE 8 - BID SECURITY
8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by an original Bid security with affixed seal made payable to Construction
Manager in an amount of 5 % of Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified check, bank money order,
or a Bid bond. Facsimile, telegraphic, or other electronically transmitted Bid Security or Bid bonds submitted with the
Bid will be considered provided that, within 48 hours after the time for receipt of Bids, the original Bid bond form with
the original signature and original required attachments are received by Construction Manager. Attorneys-in-fact who
execute the Bid Security or Bid bond on behalf of the Surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the
power of attorney.
8.02 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Contract
Documents, furnished the required contract security and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon
the Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and
furnish the required contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Construction Manager may consider
Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture
shall be Construction Managers exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. The Bid security of other Bidders whom
Construction Manager believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Construction
Manager until the earlier of 7 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement or 61 days after the Bid opening,
whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned.
8.03 Bid security of other Bidders whom Construction Manager believes do not have a reasonable chance of
receiving the award will be returned within 7 days after the Bid opening.
ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT TIMES
9.01 The dates by which the Work is to be substantially completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the
Agreement.
ARTICLE 10 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 11 - SUBSTITUTE AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
11.01 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the
Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items.
11.02 Whenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the Bidding Documents by using the name
of one or more Suppliers, the Bid shall be based on providing the materials or equipment of one of the Suppliers
named.
11.03 Whenever it is specified or described in the Bidding Documents that a substitute or "or equal" item of
material or equipment may be furnished or used by Bidder if acceptable to Architect/Engineer, application for such
acceptance will not be considered by Architect/Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The
procedure for submission of any such application by Bidder and consideration by Architect/Engineer is set forth in
Division 01 Section Product Substitution Procedures.
ARTICLE 12 - SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
12.01 If Construction Manager requests, the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities to
be submitted to Construction Manager in advance of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, the
apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within 5 days after Bid opening, submit to
Construction Manager a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities proposed for those portions
of the Work for which such identification is required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with
pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualifications for each such Subcontractor,
Supplier, individual or entity if requested by Construction Manager. If Construction Manager, after due investigation,
has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, Construction Manager may,
before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which
case the apparent Successful Bidder shall submit an acceptable substitute, Bidder's Bid price will be increased (or
decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Construction Manager may consider such
price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Instructions to Bidders

Section 00 21 13
00 21 13 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_21_13.DOCX
12.02 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Construction Manager may award the
Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities.
Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder.
Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which Construction Manager makes no written
objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Construction Manager subject to
revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
12.03 Subcontractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity against
whom Subcontractor has reasonable objection except as identified in those Procurement Contracts, if any, which will
be assigned to the Subcontractor and identified in the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 13 - PREPARATION OF BID
13.01 The Bid form is included with the Bidding Documents.
13.02 All blanks on the Bid form shall be completed by printing in ink or by typewriter and the Bid signed in ink.
Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid form. A Bid price shall be indicated for
each section, Bid item, alternative, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item listed therein. In the case of optional
alternatives the words No Bid, No Change, or Not Applicable may be entered.
13.03 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by the president, vice president, or other
corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate seal shall be affixed, if required by
state law, and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation
shall be indicated below the signature.
13.04 A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must
appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official address of the partnership
shall be indicated below the signature.
13.05 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member and
accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm
shall be indicated below the signature.
13.06 A Bid by an individual shall indicate the Bidders name and official address.
13.07 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each joint venture in the manner indicated on the Bid form.
The official address of the joint venture shall be indicated below the signature.
13.08 All names shall be typed or printed in ink below the signatures.
13.09 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall be filled in
on the Bid form.
13.10 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be
indicated.
13.11 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidders authority and qualification to do business in the state where the
Project is located or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and qualification prior to award of the
Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid. Bidders state Subcontractor license number for the state the Project,
if any, shall also be indicated on the Bid form.
ARTICLE 14 - BASIS OF BID; COMPARISON OF BIDS
14.01 Basis of Bid
A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a stipulated (lump) sum basis for the base Bid as set forth in the Bid form.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Instructions to Bidders

Section 00 21 13
00 21 13 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_21_13.DOCX
ARTICLE 15 - SUBMITTAL OF BID
15.01 With each copy of the Bidding documents, a Bidder is furnished one copy of the Bid form. The copy of the
Bid form is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security and the required documents as listed on the Bid
Form.
15.02 A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the
Invitation to Bid.
ARTICLE 16 - MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
16.01 A Bid may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the manner that a Bid
must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the
opening of Bids.
16.02 If, within 24 hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Construction
Manager and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Construction Manager that there was
a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security
will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work.
16.03 No withdrawal of a Bid shall be permitted on account of mistake or any other reason after the expiration of
this 24 hour period.
ARTICLE 17 - OPENING OF BIDS
17.01 Bids will be opened privately. Bid information will not be made available.
ARTICLE 18 - BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid form, but Construction
Manager may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period.
ARTICLE 19 - AWARD OF CONTRACT
19.01 Construction Manager reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation,
nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Construction Manager further reserves the right to
reject the Bid of any Bidder whom it finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible.
Construction Manager may also reject the Bid of any Bidder if Construction Manager believes that it would not be in
the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder. Construction Manager also reserves the right to
waive all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the
Successful Bidder.
19.02 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different names will not
be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work
may be cause for disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest.
19.03 In evaluating Bids, Construction Manager will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed
requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid form or prior to the
Notice of Award.
19.04 In evaluating Bidders, Construction Manager will consider the qualifications of Bidders and may consider the
qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other individuals or entities proposed for those
portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities must be
submitted.
19.05 Construction Manager also may consider the operating costs, maintenance considerations, performance
data and guarantees of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required
to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Instructions to Bidders

Section 00 21 13
00 21 13 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_21_13.DOCX
19.06 Construction Manager may conduct such investigations as Construction Manager deems necessary to
establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers,
individuals or entities proposed for those portions of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
19.07 If the Contract is to be awarded, Construction Manager will award the Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is in
the best interests of the Project.
19.08 If the Contract is to be awarded, Construction Manager will give Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within
35 days after the day of the Bid opening.
ARTICLE 20 - CONTRACT INSURANCE AND BOND REQUIREMENTS
20.01 Insurance
A. Article 9.2 of the Agreement, sets forth Construction Manager's requirements as to insurance. When the
Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Construction Manager, it shall be accompanied by the
required certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Construction Manager).
20.02 Bonds
A. Article 9.3 of the Agreement, and Sections Performance Bond and Payment Bond, sets forth
Construction Manager's requirements as to bonds. When Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to
Construction Manager, it shall be accompanied by the required bonds.
ARTICLE 21 - SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
21.01 When Construction Manager issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by
the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement bound into the Project Manual with the other
Contract Documents which are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto. Within 15 days thereafter,
Successful Bidder shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached
documents to Construction Manager. Within 10 days thereafter, Construction Manager will deliver one fully signed
counterpart to Successful Bidder.
ARTICLE 22 - SALES AND USE TAXES
22.01 Material purchased for this project is deemed tax exempt. All bids should reflect this. This projects tax
exemption certificate is provided at the end of this section.
ARTICLE 23 - RETAINAGE AND PROGRESS PAYMENTS
23.01 Provisions concerning retainage and progress payments are set forth in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 24 BID CATEGORIES
24.01 Refer to Division 01 Section Summary of Work for bid category descriptions.
ARTICLE 25 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIAL
25.01 Refer to Division 01 Section Summary of Work for Owner furnished materials.
ARTICLE 26 - WORK BY OWNER
26.01 Refer to Division 01 Section Summary of Work for work by Owner.
ARTICLE 27 - WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT
27.01 Refer to Division 01 Section Summary of Work for work under separate contract.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Instructions to Bidders

Section 00 21 13
00 21 13 8
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_21_13.DOCX
ARTICLE 28 - PROCUREMENT CONTRACTS TO BE ASSIGNED BY CONSTRUCTION MANAGER TO
SUBCONTRACTOR
28.01 Refer to Division 01 Section Summary of Work for contracts to be assigned to Subcontractor.


END OF SECTION 00 21 13

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD





Geotechnical Data

Section 00 31 32
00 31 32
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_31_32_COVER.D
OCX
SECTION 00 31 32 GEOTECHNICAL DATA




Beginning of Geotechnical Data



Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD





Geotechnical Data

Section 00 31 32
00 31 32
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_31_32_COVER.D
OCX

























THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK












GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
HILLSHIRE BRANDS WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
TRAVERSE CITY, MICHIGAN




Prepared For:

FISHBECK, THOMPSON, CARR & HUBER, INC.
Grand Rapids, Michigan




Prepared By:

MATERIALS TESTING CONSULTANTS, INC.
Grand Rapids, Michigan






December 2013
MTC Project No. 131356








December 18, 2013
Project No. 131356

Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
1515 Arboretum Drive SE
Grand Rapids, Michigan 49546

Attention: Mr. Dave Conklin

Reference: Report of Geotechnical Investigation
Hillshire Brands Wastewater Treatment Plant
Traverse City, Michigan


Dear Mr. Conklin:

We have completed a geotechnical investigation for the above-referenced project. The purpose
of this investigation has been to identify the general subsurface soil conditions in the vicinity of
improvements to the Hillshire Brands wastewater treatment plant and to provide geotechnical
recommendations for the closure of the existing lagoon and construction of a bolted steel aeration
tank. This work has been performed as described in our Budget Update dated November 5, 2013.

Presented herein are descriptions of our understanding of the design considerations, the
geotechnical investigation, encountered conditions and engineering recommendations. The
Appendix contains the report limitations and data collected during this investigation.


DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS


Available Information
We have been provided the following documents and information for use in this investigation:

An existing conditions/demolition plan provided by Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber,
received electronically on October 18, 2013.
A proposed aeration tank section sheet provided by Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber,
received December 2, 2013.
Geotechnical Report for proposed Treatment Plant, prepared by Materials Testing
Consultants as Project No. 170R, dated November 19, 1992.
Telephone conversations with Mr. Dave Conklin of Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber
regarding the type of construction and scope of service.




Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
Project No. 131356
December 18, 2013
Page 2



Location and Type of Structure
The construction generally includes demolition of the existing anaerobic lagoon, removal of
equipment and residuals, placement of engineered fill, and construction of an anaerobic tank in
the southwest corner of the former lagoon area. The lagoon area is shown in plan on the attached
Boring Location Plan, Figure No. 1.

The demolition of the lagoon had been performed at the time of our field investigation and we
understand that engineered fill has been placed within the former lagoon area. The engineered
fill has included material from an existing stockpile that was characterized as meeting MDOT
Class II grading requirements by a series of four mechanical analysis tests performed on samples
obtained during a site visit on October 15, 2013. Laboratory results for the mechanical analysis
tests are attached. The former lagoon tank bottom was near approximate elevation 621 ft and the
proposed finish grade for the engineered fill is elevation 633 ft.

The tank will be of bolted steel construction with a diameter of 45 ft, sidewall height of 23.8 ft,
and maximum water depth of 21 ft. The tank bottom will be at elevation 635 ft with the lowest
elevation of the pump line at elevation 630.5 ft. The tank walls are expected to bear on a
concrete ringwall foundation with a flexible concrete slab tank bottom. The maximum ring wall
load is expected to be less than 3 kips/ft.

We should be informed of any changes between the actual design conditions and those described
herein as this information may affect our recommendations.


INVESTIGATION METHODOLOGY

A conventional soil test boring and sampling along with field engineering reconnaissance were
used to investigate the subsurface conditions. The boring location is shown on the attached
Boring Location Plan, Figure No. 1. Investigation procedures, soil classification information and
the boring log are provided in the Appendix.

Number of Borings 1
Boring Depth, ft. 50

The boring was drilled and other sampling was conducted solely to obtain indications of
subsurface conditions as part of a geotechnical exploration program. No services were
performed to evaluate subsurface environmental conditions.






Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
Project No. 131356
December 18, 2013
Page 3


Laboratory

Soil samples were reviewed by one of our engineers and technically classified according to the
methods of ASTM D 2488 "Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-
Manual Procedure)".

Selected samples from the on-site stockpile for use as engineered fill material were subjected to
various laboratory tests, including:

ASTM D 422 "Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils"
ASTM D 1140 "Test Method for Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-m) Sieve"

Laboratory results are included in the Appendix.


INVESTIGATION RESULTS

Regional Geology

The Map of the Surface Formations of the Southern Peninsula of Michigan, published by the
State of Michigan, indicates the site is in an area of outwash and glacial channels. Soil
conditions are found to be sand and gravel with occasional to frequent cobble and boulder in this
type of geologic area. The Map of Bedrock Topography of the Southern Peninsula of Michigan
indicates bedrock to be at approximately el 250 ft to 300 ft, considerably below the depth of
investigation.

Site Conditions

At the time of our field work, the area of investigation was covered with a drained lagoon area.
The site, in general, sloped down approximately 12 ft to the bottom of the lagoon with elevations
ranging from 621 ft to 633 ft. The existing wastewater treatment plant building was present west
of the lagoon. Mature trees were present surrounding the former lagoon area. Locally, the grade
sloped down from west to east towards Boardman Lake.

Subsurface Conditions

The investigation, in general, encountered loose to very dense brown poorly graded sand (SP).
The loose relative density was limited to the first sample beneath the ground surface. Dense
brown well graded sand with gravel (SW) was encountered from approximately 12 ft to 19 ft
below grade. Layers of few coarse to fine gravel were encountered from approximately 5.5 ft to




Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
Project No. 131356
December 18, 2013
Page 4


27 ft below grade. Cobble and boulder may be present where gravel is found; additional
indications of possible coarse gravel and cobble within the soil profile were observed from
depths of approximately 12 ft to 19 ft and from 23 ft.

Groundwater was encountered during the drilling activities at 25 ft below grade. Groundwater
levels may fluctuate due to seasonal variations such as precipitation, snowmelt, The nearby
Boardman Lake and River levels and other factors that may not be evident at the time of
measurement. Groundwater levels may be different at the time of construction.

This section has provided a generalized description of the encountered subsurface soil conditions.
The boring logs located in the Appendix should be reviewed for detailed soil descriptions. Some
variation from the boring location may be expected.


CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

Foundations

A conventional shallow ringwall foundation system is recommended for support of the proposed
tank walls with the interior supported by a flexible thickened slab. It is important that the
recommendations of this report, in-particular those pertaining to subgrade preparation,
construction observation and testing, be implemented during design and construction.

The following parameters are recommended for foundation design:

Foundation Design Parameters
Bearing pressure for ringwall foundation,
maximum net allowable, psf

3000
Minimum ring wall foundation width, inches 18
Modulus of subgrade reaction for flexible slab, pci 50
Minimum embedment depth for frost protection, inches 42

Foundations are expected to bear on approved engineered fill. Subgrade preparation
recommendations are contained in the following section.

Foundation recommendations presented herein are based on a safety factor to resist bearing
capacity failure of at least 3.0. Maximum anticipated slab settlement is expected to be on the
order of 1 inch at the tank center and less at the tank perimeter. Depending on the connection
detail, the differential settlement between the slab and ringwall is expected to be less than
inch.




Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
Project No. 131356
December 18, 2013
Page 5


Site and Subgrade Preparation

It is anticipated that the tank subgrade will consist of engineered fill placed during abandonment
of the existing lagoon. Conditions should be confirmed to be consistent with this expectation.
Engineered fill is approved on-site or imported soil placed in uniform layers and compacted to a
minimum required density. The engineered fill is expected to consist of on-site material meeting
the requirements of MDOT Class II sand or imported material meeting these requirements.

Granular engineered fill and backfill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the soil's
maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor test (ASTM D 1557). The fill
should be placed and compacted in horizontal layers not exceeding 12 inches. Field density tests
(ASTM D 2922) should be taken on each lift, as the fill is being placed, to verify compliance
with compaction specifications. If the earthwork takes place during winter months, fill must not
be placed on frozen ground and fill with frozen conglomerations of soil must not be used.

Groundwater

Groundwater was generally encountered in the borings at approximate el 597 ft, below the
anticipated depth of excavation for foundation construction and site preparation. Because
groundwater was encountered substantially below the anticipated excavation depth, the control
of groundwater for foundation construction is not expected to be of concern on this project.

Slopes and Temporary Excavations

The owner and the contractor should make themselves aware of and become familiar with
applicable local, state, and federal safety regulations, including current OSHA excavation and
trench safety standards. Construction site safety generally is the sole responsibility of the
contractor. The contractor shall also be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques,
sequences and operations of construction operations. We are providing the following
information solely as a service on this project and, under no circumstances, should our provision
of the following information be construed to mean that we are assuming responsibility for
construction site safety or the contractor's activities; such responsibility is not implied and should
not be inferred.

The contractor should be aware that slope height, slope inclination, and excavation depths
(including utility trench excavations) should in no case exceed those specified in local, state, or
federal safety regulations; e.g., OSHA Health and Safety Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR Part
1926, or successor regulations. For this site, the overburden soil encountered in our exploratory
program is generally a poorly graded sand expected to be substantially below granular
engineered fill in the tank area. We anticipate that OSHA will classify these materials as




Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
Project No. 131356
December 18, 2013
Page 6


Type C. OSHA recommends a maximum slope inclination of 1H:1V for this type of soil under
ideal conditions.


CLOSURE

In this report, descriptions of the geotechnical investigation, encountered conditions and
recommendations for the design of foundations have been presented. The limitations of this
study are described in the Appendix.

The recommendations presented in this report are based upon a limited number of subsurface
samples obtained from the boring location. The samples may not fully indicate the nature and
extent of the variations that actually exist between sampling locations. For that reason, among
others, we strongly recommend that we be retained to observe earthwork construction. If
variations or other latent conditions become evident during construction, it will be necessary for
us to review these conditions and our recommendations as appropriate.







Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
Project No. 131356
December 18, 2013
Page 7


We appreciate the opportunity to provide this service to you on this project. Should you have any
questions or require further assistance, please contact our office.

Sincerely,

MATERIALS TESTING CONSULTANTS, INC.



Melzar L. Coulter, P.E.
Senior Project Engineer



Steven M. Elliott, P.E.
Principal


Attachments: Figure No. 1 - Boring Location Plan
Appendix
- Limitations
- Test Drilling and Sampling Procedures
- Boring Log Terminology
- Soil Classification Chart
- Boring Log
- Laboratory Test Results













APPENDIX

Limitations
Test Drilling and Sampling Procedures
Boring Log Terminology
Soil Classification Chart
Boring Log
Laboratory Test Data











LIMITATIONS


Soil Variations

The recommendations in this report are based upon the data obtained from the soil borings. This
report does not reflect variations which may occur between these borings, and which would not
become evident until construction. If variations then become evident, it would be necessary for a
re-evaluation of recommendations of this report, after performing on-site observations.


Warranties

We have prepared this report in accordance with generally accepted soil and foundation
engineering practices. We make no other warranties, either expressed or implied, as to the
professional advice provided under the terms of our agreement and included in this report. This
report is prepared exclusively for our client and may not be relied upon by other parties without
written consent from our office.


Boring Logs

In the process of obtaining and testing samples and preparing this report, we follow reasonable
and accepted practice in the field of soil engineering. Field logs maintained during drilling
describe field occurrences, sampling locations, and other information. The samples obtained in
the field are subjected to additional testing in the laboratory and differences may exist between
the field logs and the final logs. The engineer reviews the field logs and laboratory test data, and
then prepares the final boring logs. Our recommendations are based on the contents of the final
logs.


Review of Design Plans and Specifications

In the event that any changes in the design of the building or the location, however slight, are
planned, our recommendations shall not be considered valid unless modified or approved in
writing by our office. We recommend that we be provided the opportunity to review the final
design and specifications in order to determine whether changes in the original concept may have
affected the validity of our recommendations, and whether our recommendations have, in fact,
been implemented in the design and specifications.






Boring Log Terminology

Soil Classification Systems:
ASTM D2487 Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D2488 Standard Practice for Description and Identifications of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)

Minor Component Quantifying Terms:
Trace (less than 5%); Few (5 to 10%); Little (15 to 25%); Some (30 to 45%); Mostly (50 to 100%)

Sample Types and Numbering:
S SPT, split-barrel sample, ASTM D1586 U Shelby tube sample, ASTM D1587
*S Other than 2" split barrel sample A Auger cuttings
L SPT with liner, ASTM D1586 R Rock core run
G Geoprobe liner

Grain Size:
Boulder >12"
Cobble 12" to 3"
Coarse Gravel 3" to 0.75"
Fine Gravel 0.75" to No. 4
Coarse Sand No. 4 to No. 10
Medium Sand No. 10 to No. 40
Fine Sand No. 40 to No. 200

Clay - Soil passing a No. 200 sieve that can be made to exhibit plasticity (putty-like properties) and exhibits
considerable strength when air dry (ASTM D2487).
Silt - Soil passing a No. 200 sieve that is nonplastic or very slightly plastic and exhibits little or no strength when air
dry (ASTM D2487).
Peat - A soil composed of decomposed vegetable tissue with organic odor, dark brown to black color, spongy
consistency, and a fibrous to amorphous texture.

"Grades with" or "Grades without" may be used to describe soil when characteristics vary within a stratum.

Moisture Condition:. Dry (absence of visible moist.); Moist (damp but no visible water); Wet (visible free water)

Compactness (Coarse Grained Soils) and Consistency (Fine Grained Soils):

N-value

Relative Density

Compactness

N-value
Approx. Shear
Strength, ksf

Consistency
0 - 4 0 - 20% Very Loose 0 - 2 0.25 Very Soft
5 - 10 20 - 40% Loose 3 - 4 0.25 - 0.5 Soft
11 - 30 40 - 70% Med. Dense 5 - 8 0.5 - 1 Med. Stiff
31 - 50 70 - 90% Dense 9 - 16 1 - 2 Stiff
>50 90 - 100% Very Dense 17 - 32 2 - 4 Very Stiff
>32 >4 Hard

Groundwater Observations:
During - indicates water level encountered during the boring
End - indicates water level immediately after drilling
Date and Depth - Measurements at indicated date

Water observations in pervious soils are considered reliable for the date. Water observations in impervious soils
may not be accurate groundwater measurements unless records are made over several days time. Groundwater
levels will fluctuate for both pervious and impervious soils.





ASTM D2488 Soil Classification Chart - Coarse Grained Soil:

Primary
Soil Type

Group Name and (Group Symbol)

Criteria
GRAVEL Well-graded GRAVEL (GW)
Poorly graded GRAVEL (GP)
<5% fines, <15% sand
Well-graded GRAVEL with sand (GW)
Poorly-graded GRAVEL with sand (GP)
<5% fines, >15% sand
Well-graded GRAVEL with silt (GW-GM)
Poorly graded GRAVEL with silt (GP-GM)
Well-graded GRAVEL with clay (GW-GC)
Poorly-graded GRAVEL with clay (GP-GC)
10% fines, <15% sand
Well-graded GRAVEL with silt and sand (GW-GM)
Poorly graded GRAVEL with silt and sand (GP-GM)
Well-graded GRAVEL with clay and sand (GW-GC)
Poorly graded GRAVEL with clay and sand (GP-GC)
10% fines, >15% sand
Silty GRAVEL (GM)
Clayey GRAVEL (GC)
>15% fines, <15% sand
Silty GRAVEL with sand (GM)
Clayey GRAVEL with sand (GC)
>15% fines, >15% sand
SAND Well-graded SAND (SW)
Poorly-graded SAND (SP)
<5% fines, <15% gravel
Well-graded SAND with gravel (SW)
Poorly-graded SAND with gravel (SP)
<5% fines, >15% gravel
Well-graded SAND with silt (SW-SM)
Poorly-graded SAND with silt (SP-SM)
Well-graded SAND with clay (SW-SC)
Poorly-graded SAND with clay (SP-SC)
10% fines, <15% gravel
Well-graded SAND with silt and gravel (SW-SM)
Poorly-graded SAND with silt and gravel (SP-SM)
Well-graded SAND with clay and gravel (SW-SC)
Poorly-graded SAND with clay and gravel (SP-SC)
10% fines, >15% gravel
Silty SAND (SM)
Clayey SAND (SC)
>15% fines, <15% gravel
Silty SAND with gravel
Clayey SAND with gravel
>15% fines, >15% gravel





ASTM D2488 Soil Classification Outline - Fine Grained Soil:

Primary
Soil Type

Group Name and (Group Symbol)

Criteria
SILT SILT (ML)
Elastic SILT (MH)
<15% plus No. 200
SILT with sand (ML)
Elastic SILT with sand (MH)
15-25% plus No. 200, % sand >% gravel
SILT with gravel (ML)
Elastic SILT with gravel (MH)
15-25% plus No. 200, % gravel >% sand
Sandy SILT (ML)
Sandy Elastic SILT (MH)
>30% plus No. 200, % sand >% gravel,
<15% gravel
Sandy SILT with gravel (ML)
Sandy Elastic SILT with gravel (MH)
>30% plus No. 200, % sand >% gravel,
>15% gravel
Gravelly SILT (ML)
Gravelly Elastic SILT (MH)
>30% plus No. 200, % gravel >% sand,
<15% sand
Gravelly SILT with sand (ML)
Gravelly Elastic SILT with sand (MH)
>30% plus No. 200, % gravel >% sand,
>15% sand
CLAY Lean CLAY (CL)
Fat CLAY (CH)
<15% plus No. 200
Lean CLAY with sand (CL)
Fat CLAY with sand (CH)
15-25% plus No. 200, % sand >% gravel
Lean CLAY with gravel (CL)
Fat CLAY with gravel (CH)
15-25% plus No. 200, % gravel >% sand
Sandy lean CLAY (CL)
Sandy fat CLAY (CH)
>30% plus No. 200, % sand >% gravel,
<15% gravel
Sandy lean CLAY with gravel (CL)
Sandy fat CLAY with gravel (CH)
>30% plus No. 200, % sand >% gravel,
>15% gravel
Gravelly lean CLAY (CL)
Gravelly fat CLAY (CH)
>30% plus No. 200, % gravel >% sand,
<15% sand
Gravelly lean CLAY with sand (CL)
Gravelly fat CLAY with sand (CL)
>30% plus No. 200, % gravel >% sand,
>15% sand
Note: Percentages are based on estimated amounts of fines, sand and gravel to the nearest 5%

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD





Geotechnical Data

Section 00 31 32
00 31 32
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_31_32_COVER.D
OCX

END OF SECTION 00 31 32

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD





Geotechnical Data

Section 00 31 32
00 31 32
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_31_32_COVER.D
OCX















THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Bid - Stipulated Sum

Section 00 41 13
00 41 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_41_13.DOC
SECTION 00 41 13 BID - STIPULATED SUM
Bid of _______________________________________________________________________________ hereinafter
called Bidder, organized and existing under the laws of or a resident of the State of _________________________,
doing business as ___________________________________________________________________________.*
*Insert as applicable: "a corporation", "a partnership" or "an individual".
To Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc., hereinafter called Construction Manager.
1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc. in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work
as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid
and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including
without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. The Bid will remain subject to
acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in
writing upon request by Construction Manager.
3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as set forth in the Agreement, that:
A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data identified
in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged:
Addendum Number Addendum Date





B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site
conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that
may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Bidder has carefully studied all:
(1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all
drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or
contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in Section
00520 - Agreement, and
(2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, which has been
identified in the Construction Documents.
E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all
additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data
concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site
which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder,
including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety
precautions and programs incident thereto.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Bid - Stipulated Sum

Section 00 41 13
00 41 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_41_13.DOC
F. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies or
data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the prices bid and
within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Construction Manager and others
at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.
H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from
visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data with the Bidding Documents.
I. Bidder has given Construction Manager written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or
discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution
thereof by Construction Manager is acceptable to Bidder.
J. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms
and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted.
4.01 Bidder further represents that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any
undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group,
association, organization or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other
Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain
from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder
or over Construction Manager.
5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following prices:

Bid Category 6-1 - General Trades

Base Bid ($ )
(use words) (figures)

Bid Category 9-1 - Painting

Base Bid ($ )
(use words) (figures)

Bid Category 23-1 - Mechanical

Base Bid ($ )
(use words) (figures)
Bid Category 26-1 - Electrical

Base Bid ($ )
(use words) (figures)

Bid Category 31-1 - Earthwork and Site Utilities

Base Bid ($ )
(use words) (figures)






Bidder (Firm or Corporation Name)

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Bid - Stipulated Sum

Section 00 41 13
00 41 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_41_13.DOC
Bid Category 40-1 - Instrumentation and Controls for Process Systems

Base Bid ($ )
(use words) (figures)


6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete on or before July 7, 2014, and completed and
ready for final payment in accordance with the Agreement on or before July 21, 2014.

6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete
the Work within the times specified above, which shall be stated in the Agreement.

7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:

a. Required Bid security.
b. Schedule.

8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings indicated in Section 00 21 13 -
Instructions to Bidders and Section 00 52 00 - Agreement.


SUBMITTED on , 20___ BY:
Date* Name of Bidder*


Street* Signature


City, State, and Zip* Name and Title of Signatory*


Telephone Number*


Facsimile Number*








*Typed or printed in ink.


END OF SECTION 00 41 13
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Bid - Stipulated Sum

Section 00 41 13
00 41 13 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_41_13.DOC













THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Bid Bond

Section 00 43 13
00 43 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_43_13.DOC
SECTION 00 43 13 BID BOND

Construction Manager:
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc. Bid Due Date: February 13, 2014
1515 Arboretum Drive, SE Project: Wastewater Treatment Facility
Grand Rapids, MI 49546 Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the following terms
hereof, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or
representative.

Surety (Principal Place of Business): Bidder:


Name of Surety* Name of Bidder*


Street* Street*


City, State, Zip * City, State, Zip *

(Seal) (Seal)
Surety's Corporate Seal Bidder's Corporate Seal

By: By:
Signature and Title Signature and Title
(Attach Power of Attorney)

Attest: Attest:
Signature and Title Signature and Title


* Typed or printed in ink.


Bond:
Bond Number:
Date (Not later than Bid due date):
Penal Sum:
(Words) (Figures)
Note: (1) Above addresses are to be used for giving required notice.
(2) Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Construction Manager or other party shall be
considered plural where applicable.
1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns to pay to Construction Manager upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond.
2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Construction Manager) the executed Agreement
required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment Bonds required by the Bidding Documents.
3. This obligation shall be null and void if:
3.1. Construction Manager accepts Bidder's Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Construction Manager) the executed Agreement
required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment Bonds required by the Bidding
Documents, or
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Bid Bond

Section 00 43 13
00 43 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_43_13.DOC
3.2. All Bids are rejected by Construction Manager, or
3.3. Construction Manager fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety
when required by paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after
receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Construction Manager, which notice will be given with
reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of and any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice
of Award agreed to in writing by Construction Manager and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of
Award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid due date without Surety's written
consent.
6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default
required in paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety, and in no case later than one year after Bid due
date.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the
state in which the Project is located.
8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses
shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier or by United
States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective
upon receipt by the party concerned.
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority
of the officer, agent or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal and deliver such
Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any
applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length.
If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and
the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.
11. The term "Bid" as used herein includes a Bid, offer or proposal as applicable.


END OF SECTION 00 43 13

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Notice of Award

Section 00 51 00
00 51 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_51_00.DOC
SECTION 00 51 00 - NOTICE OF AWARD

Dated ______________________________________, 20____


TO:
(Bidder)

ADDRESS:





CONTRACT: Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD

You are notified that your Bid dated ___________________________________, 20____ for the above Contract has
been considered. You are the apparent Successful Bidder and have been awarded a Contract for the Hillshire
Brands Wastewater Treatment Facility - Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications.

The Contract Price of your Contract is ______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
($______________). Three copies of the proposed Contract Documents as identified in the Agreement accompany
this Notice of Award.

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is by
______________________________, 20____.

1. Deliver to the Construction Manager three fully executed counterparts of the Contract Documents which
accompany this Notice of Award, each of which must bear your signature at the designated location.

2. Deliver with the executed Contract Documents the Contract security (Bonds) as specified in Article 3.27 of
Section 00 52 00 - Agreement.

3. Deliver with the executed Contract Documents the insurance documents as specified in Articles 9.2 through
9.2.8 of Section 00 52 00 - Agreement.

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Construction Manager to consider your Bid
in default, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid security forfeited.

Within 10 days after you comply with the above conditions, Construction Manager will return to you one fully executed
counterpart of the Contract Documents.

Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.

By:
(Authorized Signature)



(Name and Title)


*Typed or printed in ink

Copy to Engineer

END OF SECTION 00 51 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Notice of Award

Section 00 51 00
00 51 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_51_00.DOC
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD





Agreement

Section 00 52 00
00 52 00
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_52_00_COVER.DOCX
SECTION 00 52 00 AGREEMENT








Beginning of Agreement



Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD





Agreement

Section 00 52 00
00 52 00
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_52_00_COVER.DOCX

























THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


GonsensusDocs 750
STANDARD AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONSTRUCTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1. AGREEMENT
2. SCOPE OF WORK
3. SUBCONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
4. CONSTRUCTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
5. PROGRESS SCHEDULE
6. SUBCONTRACT AMOUNT
7. CHANGES
8. PAYMENT
9. INDEMNITY, INSURANCE, AND BONDS
10. SUSPENSION, NOTICE TO CURE, AND TERMINATION
1 1. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
12. MISCELLANEOUS
1 3. SUBCONTRACT DOCUMENTS
ARTICLE I AGREEMENT
Project Number: G130547 BP2
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -
@2011,
Revsed March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modfcations can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform. Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permils lhe user to print one contract for each party to lhe contracl within one projecl only You
may only make copies of finalized documents for distribution to parties in direct connection with ths contract Any other uses are slrictly
prohibited. Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
C o n s e n s u s D o c s'"
(o
@
C
#
0
AWt
g
mHc
i-
mGr
fsnl
dhhbt
kdl-
\,
lt,VWE,MA
ItLllL'rrilii i\ Btl l'r!( t{AY
This document is proudly endorsed by:
IFE iiciii,f
ENGI NE[,RINC.
This Agreement is made this
by and between the
Day of in the year
CONSTRUCTOR,
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, lnc.
1515 Arboretum Drive SE
Grand Rapids, Michigan 49546
and the
SUBCoNTRACTOR,
t_l
for services in connection with the SUBCONTRACT WORK for the following
Bid Package 2
PROJECT
Process modifications on the site at2314 Sybrandt Road, Traverse City, Michigan 49684
Notice to the Parties shall be given at the above addresses. The Date of Commencement is the date of
this Agreement above.
The OWNER is
The Hillshire Brands Company
400 South Jefferson Street
Chicago, lllinois 60607
and the DESIGN PROFESSIONAL for the Project is
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, lnc.
1515 Arboretum Drive, SE
Grand Rapids, Michigan 49546
ARTICLE 2 SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 PARTIES' RELATIONSHIP The Parties each agree to proceed with the Subcontract Work on the
basis of mutual trust, good faith, and fair dealing. The Parties shall each endeavor to promote harmony
and cooperation.
2.2 SUBCONTRACT WORK The Constructor contracts with the Subcontractor as an independent
contractor to provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary or incidental to complete the
work for the Project described in ARTICLE 1 and as may be set forth in further detail in Exhibit A, in
accordance with, and reasonably inferable from, that which is indicated in the Subcontract Documents,
and consistent with the Progress Schedule, as may change from time to time. The Subcontractor shall
perform the Subcontract Work under the general direction of the Constructor and in accordance with the
Subcontract Documents.
2.3 CONSTRUCTOR'S WORK The Constructor's Work is the construction and services required of the
Constructor to fulfill its obligations pursuant to its agreement with the Owner (the Work). The "Subcontract
Work" is a portion of the Constructor's Work.
2
ConsensusDocsrt 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontrector -
@
201'l, Revised March 201 2. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a reporl of modfcations can be generated lhrough
\
lhe ConsensusDocs platform Consullation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permts the user to print one contract for each party to the contrect wthin one project only You
may only make copies of fnalzed documents for distribution to parles in direcl connection wth this conlract Any other uses are strictly
prohibted Content Secure lD: D8I47345-7L84
2.3.1 ETHICS The Parties shall perform their obligations with integrity, ensuring at a minimum that
each: (a) avoids conflicts of interest and discloses promptly any to the other Party; and (b) warrants
that it has not and shall not pay nor receive any contingent fees or gratuities to or from the other
Party, including its agents, officers and employees, subcontractors or others for whom they may be
liable, to secure preferential treatment.
2.4 SUBCONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Subcontract Documents include this Agreement, the prime
agreement, special conditions, general conditions, specifcations, drawings, addenda issued and
acknowledged prior to execution of this Agreement, amendments, laboratory testing to determine the
nature of encountered hazardous materials, other documents listed in this Agreement, and modifications
issued in accordance with this Agreement. The Constructor shall provide to the Subcontractor, prior to the
execution of this Agreement, copies of the existing Subcontract Documents to which the Subcontractor
will be bound. The Subcontractor shall provide copies of applicable portions of the Subcontract
Documents to its proposed subcontractors and suppliers. Nothing shall prohibit the Subcontractor from
obtaining copies of the Subcontract Documents from the Constructor at any time after the Subcontract
Agreement is executed.
2.4.1 DOCUMENTS lN ELECTRONIC FORM lf the Owner requires that the Owner, Design
Professional, Constructor and Subcontractors exchange documents and data in electronic or digital
form, priorto any such exchange, the Owner, Design Professional, and Constructor shall agree to a
written protocol
,
which, at a minimum, shall specify: (a) the definition of documents and data to be
accepted in electronic or digital form or to be transmitted electronically or digitally; (b) management
and coordination responsibilities; (c) necessary equipment, software, and services; (d) acceptable
formats, transmission methods, and verification procedures; (e) methods for maintaining version
control; (f) privacy and security requirements; and (g) storage and retrieval requirements. The
Subcontractor shall provide whatever input is needed to assist the Constructor in developing the
protocol and shall be bound by the requirements of the written protocol. Except as othenryise agreed
to by the Parties in writing, the Parties shall each bear their own costs as identified in the protocol.
ln the absence of a written protocol, use of documents and data in electronic or digital form shall be
at the sole risk of the recipient.
2.5 CONFLICTS ln the event of a conflict between this ConsensusDocs 750 Standard Agreement as
modified and the other Subcontract Documents, the ConsensusDocs 750 shall govern.
2.6 DEFINITIONS
2.6.1 "Agreement" means this ConsensusDocs 750 Standard Agreement Between Constructor and
Subcontractor, as modified by the Parties, and exhibits and attachments made part of this
agreement upon its execution.
2.6.1.1 The following exhibits are as follows
Exhibit A: The Subcontract Work, Bid pages.
Exhibit B: The Drawings, Specifications, General and Other Conditions issued by the
Design Professional and dated
t_1,
addenda dated
[_],
and other information
Exhibit C: Progress Schedule.
Exhibit D:Alternates and Unit Prices and Estimated Quantities, t_l
pages.
3
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -
@2011,
Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifcations can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform. Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful revew of the entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the documenl permits the user to print one contract for each party to lhe contract within one projec{ only You
may only make copies of finalized documents for distribulion to parties in direct connection with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibted Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
Exhibit E: Performance and Payment Bonds.
Exhibit F: lnsurance Provisions.
2.6.2 "Business Day" means all Days, except weekends and offcial federal or state holidays where
the Project is located.
2.6.3 The term "Day" shall mean calendar day.
2.6.4 "Laws" mean federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations
applicable to the Subcontract Work with which the Constructor and Subcontractor must comply that
are enacted as of the Agreement date.
2.6.5 The "Parties" are collectively the Constructor and the Subcontractor.
2.6.6 Wherever the term "Progress Schedule" is used in this Agreement, it shall be read as Project
Schedule when that term is used in the Subcontract Documents.
2.6.7 A "Subcontract Change Order" is a written order signed by the Constructor and the
Subcontractor after execution of this Agreement, indicating changes in the scope of the Subcontract
Work, the Subcontract Amount or Subcontract Time, including substitutions proposed by the
Subcontractor and accepted by the Constructor.
2.6.8 "Subcontract Time" means the time period on the Progress Schedule between commencing
and completing the Subcontract Work.
2.6.9 "Worksite" means the geographical area of the Project location as identified in ARTICLE 1
where the Work is to be performed.
2.6.'10 All references to Section 00 72 00
-
General Conditions and Section 00 73 00
-
Supplemental Conditions throughout the contract Document shall mean Section 00 52 00
-
Agreement.
2.6.11 The term "Constructor" within this agreement shall mean Construction Manager within the
Division 0 and Division I specification sections.
2.6.12 Design Professional means the licensed Architect, ArchitecUEngineer or Engineer, and its
consultants, retained by Owner to perform design services for the Project. The Owner's Design
Professional for the Project is Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, lnc..
ARTICLE 3 SUBCONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1 OBLIGATIONS The Constructor and the Subcontractor are hereby mutually bound by the terms of
this Agreement. To the extent the terms of the prime agreement apply to the Subcontract Work, then the
Constructor hereby assumes toward the Subcontractor all the obligations, rights, duties, and redress that
the Owner under the prime agreement assumes toward the Constructor. ln an identical way, the
Subcontractor hereby assumes toward the Constructor all the same obligations, rights, duties, and
redress that the Constructor assumes toward the Owner and Design Professional under the prime
4
ConsensusDocslM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -
@2011,
Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful revew ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to print one contract for each party lo the contract within one project only You
may only make copies of f nalized documents for dstributon lo parties in direct connec{ion with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibted. Content Secure lD: D8I47345-7784
contract. ln the event of an inconsistency among the documents, the specific terms of this Agreement
shall govern.
3.2 RESPONSIBILITIES The Subcontractor shall furnish its diligent efforts to perform the Subcontract
Work in an expeditious manner and to cooperate with the Constructor so that the Constructor may fulfill
its obligations to the Owner. The Subcontractor shall furnish all of the labor, materials, equipment, and
services, including but not limited to competent supervision, shop drawings, samples, tools, and
scaffolding as are necessary for the proper performance of the Subcontract Work, all of which shall be
provided in full accord with and reasonably inferable from the Subcontract Documents. The Subcontractor
shall provide the Constructor a list of its proposed subcontractors and suppliers, and be responsible for
taking field dimensions, providing tests, obtaining required permits related to the Subcontract Work and
affidavits, ordering of materials, and all other actions as required to meet the Progress Schedule.
3.3 INCONSISTENCIES AND OMISSIONS The Subcontractor shall examine and compare the drawings,
specifications, other Subcontract Documents, and information furnished by the Owner relative to the
Subcontract Work. Such examination and comparison shall be solely for the purpose of facilitating the
Subcontract Work and not for the discovery of errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Subcontract
Documents nor for ascertaining if the Subcontract Documents are in accordance with Laws. The
Subcontractor shall not have liability for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies discovered under this
subsection unless the Subcontractor knowingly fails to report a recognized problem to the Constructor.
Should the Subcontractor discover any errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Subcontract
Documents, the Subcontractor shall promptly report such discoveries to the Constructor in writing.
Following receipt of written notice, the Constructor shall promptly instruct the Subcontractor as to the
measures to be taken, and the Subcontractor shall comply with the Constructor's instructions. lf the
Subcontractor performs work knowing it to be contrary to Laws without notice to the Constructor and
advance approval by appropriate authorities, including the Constructor, the Subcontractor shall assume
responsibility for such work and bear all associated costs, charges, fines, penalties, fees, and expenses
necessarily incurred to remedy the violation. The Subcontractor may be entitled to additional costs or time
because of clarifications or instructions arising out of the Subcontractor's reports described in this section.
Nothing in this section shall relieve the Subcontractor of responsibility for its own errors, inconsistencies,
and omissions.
3.4 WORKSITE VISITATION Before commencing the Subcontract Work, the Subcontractor shall conduct
a visual inspection of the Worksite to become generally familiar with local conditions and to correlate
Worksite observations with the Subcontract Documents. lf the Subcontractor discovers any discrepancies
between its Worksite observations and the Subcontract Documents, such discrepancies shall be promptly
reported to the Constructor.
3.5 INCREASED COSTS OR TIME The Subcontractor may assert a claim if the Constructor's
clarifications or instructions in responses to requests for information are believed to require additional
time or cost. lf the Subcontractor fails to perform the reviews and comparisons required in sections 0 and
3.4, to the extent the Constructor is held liable to the Owner because of the Subcontractor's failure, the
Subcontractor shall pay the costs and damages to the Constructor that would have been avoided if the
Subcontractor had performed those obligations.
3.6 COMMUNICATIONS Unless otherwise provided in the Subcontract Documents and except for
emergencies, the Subcontractor shall direct all communications related to the Project to the Constructor
3.7 SUBMITTALS
5
ConsensusDocsrt 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -
@2011,
Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANOARO LANGUAGE, and a report of modifcations can be generated through
lhe ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful revew of lhe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to print one contracl for each party to the contract within one projecl only You
may only make copies of finalized documents for distrbution to parties in drect connection with this contract Any other uses are strctly
prohibted Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
3.7.1 The Subcontractor promptly shall submit for approval to the Constructor all shop drawings,
samples, product data, manufacturers' literature, and similar submittals required by the Subcontract
Documents. Submittals shall be submitted in electronic form if required. The Subcontractor shall be
responsible to the Constructor for the accuracy and conformity of its submittals to the Subcontract
Documents. The Subcontractor shall prepare and deliver its submittals to the Constructor in a
manner consistent with the Progress Schedule and in such time and sequence so as not to delay
the Constructor or others in the performance of the Work, but not later than 30 days after notice to
proceed has been issued, unless a revised submittal schedule has been approved by the
Constructor. The Subcontractor's submittals shall identify in writing for each submittal all changes,
deviations, or substitutions from the requirements of the Subcontract Documents. The approval of
any Subcontractor submittal shall not be deemed to authorize changes, deviations, or substitutions
in the requirements of the Subcontract Documents unless express written approval is obtained from
the Constructor and Owner authorizing such change, deviation, or substitution. Such approval shall
be promptly memorialized in a Subcontract Change Order within seven (7) Days following approval
by the Constructor and, if applicable, provide for an adjustment in the Subcontract Amount or
Subcontract Time. lf the Subcontract Documents do not contain submittal requirements pertaining
to the Subcontract Work, the Subcontractor agrees upon request to submit in a timely fashion to the
Constructor for approval any shop drawings, samples, product data, manufacturers' literature, or
similar submittals as may reasonably be required by the Constructor, Owner, or Design
Professional.
3.7.2The Constructor, Owner, and Design Professional are entitled to rely on the adequacy,
accuracy, and completeness of any professional certifications required by the Subcontract
Documents concerning the performance criteria of systems, equipment, or materials, including all
relevant calculations and any governing performance requirements.
3.8 DESIGN DELEGATION
3.8.1 lf the Subcontract Documents (a) specifically require the Subcontractor to procure design
services, and (b) specify all design and performance criteria, the Subcontractor shall provide those
design services necessary to satisfactorily complete the Subcontract Work. As permitted by the
laws, rules, and regulations in the
jurisdiction where the Project is located, the Subcontractor shall
procure such services and any necessary certifications from licensed design professionals. The
signature and seal of Subcontractor's design professional shall appear on all drawings, calculations,
specifications, certifications, shop drawings, and other submittals related to the Subcontract Work
designed or certified by the Subcontractor's design professional. The Constructor shall be entitled to
rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals
performed by the Subcontractor's design professional.
3.8.2lf the Subcontractor's design professional is an independent professional, the design services
shall be procured pursuant to a separate agreement between the Subcontractor and the design
professional. The agreement between the Subcontractor and the Subcontractor's design
professional shall not include any limitation of liability, except to the extent that consequential
damages are waived pursuant to subsection 5.4.1, or exclusion from participation in the multiparty
proceedings requirement of section 1 1.6. The Subcontractor's design professional(s) is
[_].
The
Subcontractor shall notify the Constructor in writing if it intends to change its procured design
professional. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for conformance of its design with the
information given and the design concept expressed in the Subcontract Documents. The
6
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Betwen Constructo and Subcontractor -
@2011,
Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a repol of modifcations can be generated through
',
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultaton with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe enlire documents ere slrongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to print one contracl for each party to the contrac{ within one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution to parties in direct connection with this contract Any other uses are slrictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8I47345-1L84
Subcontractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria
required by the Subcontract Documents.
3.8.3 The Subcontractor shall not be required to provide design services in violation of any
applicable law.
3.9 TEMPORARY SERVICES The Subcontractor's and Constructor's respective responsibilities for
temporary services are set forth in the Project Contract Documents Section 00 50 00 Temporary Facilities
and Controls.
3.10 COORDINATION The Subcontractor shall: (a) cooperate with the Constructor and allothers whose
work may interface with the Subcontract Work, (b) specifically note and immediately advise the
Constructor of any such interface with the Subcontract Work, and (c) participate in the preparation of
coordination drawings and work schedules in areas of congestion.
3.11 SUBCONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The Subcontractor shall designate a person, subject to
the Constructor's approval, who shall be the Subcontractor's authorized representative. This
representative shall be the only person to whom the Constructor shall issue instructions, orders, or
directions, except in an emergency. The Subcontractor's representative is
who is agreed to by the Constructor. lf the Subcontractor changes its representative, the Subcontractor
shall immediately notify the Constructor in writing.
3.12 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS The Subcontractor shall schedule all required tests, approvals and
inspections of the Subcontract Work at appropriate times so as not to delay the progress of the work. The
Subcontractor shall give proper written notice to all required Parties of such tests, approvals, and
inspections. Except as otherwise provided in the Subcontract Documents the Subcontractor shall bear all
expenses associated with tests, inspections, and approvals required of the Subcontractor by the
Subcontract Documents which, unless otherwise agreed to, shall be conducted by an independent testing
laboratory or entity approved by the Constructor and Owner. Required certifcates of testing, approval, or
inspection shall, unless othenruise required by the Subcontract Documents, be secured by the
Subcontractor and promptly delivered to the Constructor.
3.13 WARRANTIES The Subcontractor warrants that all materials and equipment shall be new unless
othenruise specified, of good quality, in conformance with the Subcontract Documents, and free from
defective workmanship and materials. Upon request by the Constructor, the Subcontractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence of the quality and type of materials and equipment furnished. The Subcontractor
further warrants that the Subcontract Work shall be free from material defects not intrinsic in the design or
materials required in the Subcontract Documents. The Subcontractor's warranty does not include
remedies for defects or damages caused by normal wear and tear during normal usage, use for a
purpose for which the Project was not intended, improper or insufficient maintenance, modifications
performed by others, or abuse. The Subcontractor's warranties shall commence on the date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or a designated portion.
3.,I4 CLEANUP
3.14.1 The Subcontractor shall at all times during its performance of the Subcontract Work keep the
Worksite clean and free from debris resulting from the Subcontract Work. Prior to discontinuing the
Subcontract Work in an area, the Subcontractor shall clean the area and remove all its rubbish and
its construction equipment, tools, machinery, waste, and surplus materials. The Subcontractor shall
7
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Stenderd Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -@2011, Revisd March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modilcations can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation wlh legal and insurance counsel and careful revew of the entre documenls are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to print one contract for each party to lhe conlracl within one project only You
may only make copes of fnalized documents for distribution to parties n direct connection wth this contracl Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
make provisions to minimize and confine dust and debris resulting from its construction activities.
The Subcontractor shall not be held responsible for unclean conditions caused by others.
3.14.2|f the Subcontractor fails to commence compliance with cleanup duties within two (2)
business Days after written notification from the Constructor of non-compliance, the Constructor
may implement appropriate cleanup measures without further notice and shall deduct the
reasonable costs from any amounts due or to become due the Subcontractor in the next payment
period.
3.15 SAFETY
3.15.1 The Subcontractor is required to perform the Subcontract Work in a safe and reasonable
manner. The Subcontractor shall seek to avoid injury, loss, or damage to persons or property by
taking reasonable steps to protect:
3.15.1.1 employees and other persons at the Worksite;
3.15.1.2 materials and equipment stored on or off the Worksite for use in performance of
the Subcontract Work; and
3.1 5. 1 .3 all property and structures located at the Worksite and adjacent to work areas,
whether or not said property or structures are part of the Project or involved in the Work.
3.15.2 The Subcontractor shallgive all required notices and comply with all applicable rules,
regulations, orders, and other lawful requirements established to prevent injury, loss, or damage to
persons or property.
3.15.3 The Subcontractor shall implement appropriate safety measures pertaining to the
Subcontract Work and the Project, including establishing safety rules, posting appropriate warnings
and notices, erecting safety barriers, and establishing proper notice procedures to protect persons
and property at the Worksite
3.15.4 and adjacent to the Worksite from injury, loss, or damage.
3.1 5.5 The Subcontractor shall exercise extreme care in carrying out any of the Subcontract Work
which involves explosive or other dangerous methods of construction or hazardous procedures,
materials, or equipment. The Subcontractor shall use properly qualified individuals or entities to
carry out the Subcontract Work in a safe and reasonable manner so as to reduce the risk of bodily
injury or property damage.
3.15.6 Damage or loss not insured under property insurance and to the extent caused by the
negligent acts or omissions of the Subcontractor, or anyone for whose acts the Subcontractor may
be liable, shall be promptly remedied by the Subcontractor. Damage or loss to the extent caused by
the negligent acts or omissions of the Constructor, or anyone for whose acts the Constructor may
be liable, shall be promptly remedied by the Constructor.
3.15.7 The Subcontractor is required to designate an individual at the Worksite in the employ of the
Subcontractor who shall act as the Subcontractor's designated safety representative with a duty to
prevent accidents. Unless othenryise identified by the Subcontractor in writing to the Constructor, the
I
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -
@
201 l, Revised March 2012, THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifcations can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and nsurance counsel and careful revew ofthe entire documents are slrongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits lhe user to print one contract for each party to the contract within one project only. You
may only make copes of finalized documents for distribution to parties in direct conneclion with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
designated safety representative shall be the Subcontractor's project superintendent. Such safety
representative shall attend Worksite safety meetings as requested by the Constructor.
3.15.8 The Subcontractor has an affirmative duty not to overload the structures or conditions at the
Worksite and shall take reasonable steps not to load any part of the structures or Worksite so as to
give rise to an unsafe condition or create an unreasonable risk of bodily injury or property damage.
The Subcontractor shall have the right to request, in writing, from the Constructor loading
information concerning the structures at the Worksite.
3.15.9 The Subcontractor shall give prompt written notice to the Constructor of any accident
involving bodily injury requiring a physician's care, any property damage exceeding five hundred
dollars ($500.00) in value, or any failure that could have resulted in serious bodily injury, whether or
not such an injury was sustained.
3.15.10 Prevention of accidents at the Worksite is the responsibility of the Constructor, the
Subcontractor, and all other subcontractors, persons, and entities at the Worksite. Establishment of
a safety program by the Constructor shall not relieve the Subcontractor or other Parties of their
safety responsibilities. The Subcontractor shall establish its own safety program implementing
safety measures, policies, and standards conforming to those required or recommended by
governmental and quasi-governmental authorities having
jurisdiction
and by the Constructor and the
Owner, including, but not limited to, requirements imposed by the Subcontract Documents. The
Subcontractor shall comply with the reasonable recommendations of insurance companies having
an interest in the Project, and shall stop any part of the Subcontract Work which the Constructor
deems unsafe until corrective measures satisfactory to the Constructor shall have been taken. The
Constructor's failure to stop the Subcontractor's unsafe practices shall not relieve the Subcontractor
of the responsibility therefore. The Subcontractor shall notify the Constructor immediately following
a reportable incident under applicable rules, regulations, orders, and other lawful requirements, and
promptly confirm the notice in writing. A detailed written report shall be furnished if requested by the
Constructor. To the fullest extent permitted by law, each Party to this Agreement shall indemnify the
other Party from and against fines or penalties imposed as a result of safety violations, but only to
the extent that such fines or penalties are caused by its failure to comply with applicable safety
requirements. This indemniflcation obligation does not extend to additional or increased fnes that
result from repeated or willful violations not caused by the Subcontractor's failure to comply with
applicable rules, regulations, orders, and other lawful requirements.
3.15.1 1 Prior to the start of any work on the
jobsite,
the Subcontractor shall furnish the Constructor
a copy of their Safety manual.
3.'16 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Subcontractor shall take necessary precautions to properly
protect the Subcontract Work and the work of others from damage caused by the Subcontractor's
operations. Should the Subcontractor cause damage to the Subcontract Work or property of the Owner,
the Constructor, or others, the Subcontractor shall promptly remedy such damage to the satisfaction of
the Constructor, or the Constructor may, after forty-eight (48) hours written notice to the Subcontractor,
remedy the damage and deduct its cost from any amounts due or to become due the Subcontractor,
unless such costs are recovered under applicable property insurance.
3.17 EMERGENCIES ln an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Subcontractor
shall act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Any change in the Subcontract Amount or the
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructorand Subcontractor -@2011, Revised March 2012, THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifcations can be gene'ated through
the ConsensusDocs pletform Consultation wth legal and insurance counsel and careful review of the entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permts lhe user to print one conlracl for each party to the contracl wthn one projec{ only. You
may only make copies of fnalized documenls for distribution to parties in direc{ conneclion with this contract Any other uses are strclly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8747345-7I84
9
Progress Schedule from actions of the Subcontractor in an emergency situation shall be as determined in
ARTICLE 7.
3.18 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES, AND TAXES The Subcontractor shallgive timely notices to
authorities pertaining to the Subcontract Work, and shall be responsible for all permits, fees, licenses,
assessments, inspections, testing, and taxes necessary to complete the Subcontract Work in accordance
with the Subcontract Documents.
3.19 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS To the extent that the Constructor has rights or obligations under the
prime agreement or by Law regarding hazardous materials as defined by the Subcontract Document
within the scope of the Subcontract Work, the Subcontractor shall have the same rights or obligations.
3.20 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA (MSD) SHEETS The Subcontractor shall submit to the Constructor all
Material Safety Data Sheets required by law for materials or substances necessary for the performance of
the Subcontract Work. MSD sheets obtained by the Constructor from other subcontractors or sources
shall be made available to the Subcontractor by the Constructor.
3.21 LAYOUT RESPONSIBILITY AND LEVELS The Constructor shallestablish principalaxis lines of the
building and Worksite, and benchmarks. The Subcontractor shall lay out and be strictly responsible for
the accuracy of the Subcontract Work and for any loss or damage to the Constructor or others by reason
of the Subcontractor's failure to lay out or perform Subcontract Work correctly. The Subcontractor shall
exercise prudence so that the actual final conditions and details shall result in alignment of finish
surfaces.
3.22 UNCOVERING/CORRECTION OF SUBCONTRACT WORK
3.22.1 UNCOVERING OF SUBCONTRACT WORK
3.22.1.1 lf required in writing by the Constructor, the Subcontractor must uncover any
portion of the Subcontract Work which has been covered by the Subcontractor in violation
of the Subcontract Documents or contrary to a directive issued to the Subcontractor by the
Constructor. Upon receipt of a written directive from the Constructor, the Subcontractor
shall uncover such work for the Constructor's or Owner's inspection and restore the
uncovered Subcontract Work to its original condition at the Subcontractor's time and
expense.
3.22.1.2 The Constructor may direct the Subcontractor to uncover portions of the
Subcontract Work for inspection by the Owner or Constructor at any time. The
Subcontractor is required to uncover such work whether or not the Constructor or Owner
had requested to inspect the Subcontract Work prior to it being covered. Except as provided
by the subsection immediately above, this Agreement shall be adjusted by Subcontract
Change Order for the cost and time of uncovering and restoring any work which is
uncovered for inspection and proves to be installed in accordance with the Subcontract
Documents, provided the Constructor had not previously instructed the Subcontractor to
leave the work uncovered. lf the Subcontractor uncovers work pursuant to a directive
issued by the Constructor, and such work upon inspection does not comply with the
Subcontract Documents, the Subcontractor shall be responsible for all costs and time of
uncovering, correcting and restoring the work so as to make it conform to the Subcontract
Documents. lf the Constructor or some other entity for which the Subcontractor is not
10
GonsensusDocsrt 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractot -@20''1, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a repod of modifcations can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful revew oflhe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to print one conlract for each party to the contracl within one projecl only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution to parties in direct connection with this contract Any other uses are strctly
prohibited Content Secure lD: DB147345-1184
responsible caused the nonconforming condition, the Constructor shall be required to adjust
this Agreement by Subcontract Change Order for all such costs and time.
3.22.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
3.22.2.1 lf the Design Professional or Constructor rejects the Subcontract Work or the
Subcontract Work is not in conformance with the Subcontract Documents, the
Subcontractor shall promptly correct the Subcontract Work whether it had been fabricated,
installed, or completed. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for the costs of correcting
such Subcontract Work, any additional testing, inspections, and compensation for services
and expenses of the Design Professional and Constructor made necessary by the defective
Subcontract Work.
3.22.2.21n addition to the Subcontractor's obligations under section 3.21, the Subcontractor
agrees to promptly correct, after receipt of a written notice from the Constructor, all
Subcontract Work performed under this Agreement which proves to be defective in
workmanship or materials within a period of two years from the date of Substantial
Completion of the Subcontract Work or for a longer period of time as may be required by
specific warranties in the Subcontract Documents. Substantial Completion of the
Subcontract Work, or of a designated portion, occurs on the date when construction is
sufficiently complete in accordance with the Subcontract Documents so that the Owner can
occupy or utilize the Project, or a designated portion, for the use for which it is intended,
without unscheduled disruption. lf, during the two-year period, the Constructor fails to
provide the Subcontractor with prompt written notice of the discovery of defective or
nonconforming Subcontract Work, the Constructor shall neither have the right to require the
Subcontractor to correct such Subcontract Work nor the right to make claim for breach of
warranty. lf the Subcontractor fails to correct defective or nonconforming Subcontract Work
within a reasonable time after receipt of notice from the Constructor, the Constructor may
correct such Subcontract Work pursuant to subsection 10.1 .1 .
3.22.3 The Subcontractor's correction of Subcontract Work pursuant to this section shall not extend
the one-year period for the correction of Subcontract Work, but if Subcontract Work is first
performed after Substantial Completion, the one-year period for corrections shall be extended by
the time period after Substantial Completion and the performance of that portion of Subcontract
Work. The Subcontractor's obligation to correct Subcontract Work within two years does not limit the
enforcement of the Subcontractor's other obligations with regard to the Agreement and the
Subcontract Documents.
3.22.4 lf lhe Subcontractor's correction or removal of Subcontract Work destroys or damages
completed or partially completed work of the Owner, the Constructor, or any separate contractors or
subcontractors, the Subcontractor shall be responsible for the reasonable cost of correcting such
destroyed or damaged property.
3.22.5lf portions of Subcontract Work which do not conform with the requirements of the
Subcontract Documents are neither corrected by the Subcontractor nor accepted by the
Constructor, the Subcontractor shall remove such Subcontract Work from the Project Worksite if so
directed by the Constructor.
11
ConsensusDocsrt 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractot -@2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN IVODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation wth legal and nsurance counsel and careful revew oflhe entre documents are slrongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permts the user to print one contracl for each party 1o the contracl within one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution to parties in drect conneclion with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited. Content Secure lD: 08147345-1184
3.23 MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS lf the scope of the Subcontract Work
includes installation of materials or equipment furnished by others, the Subcontractor is responsible for
exercising proper care in receiving, handling, storing, and installing such items, unless othenruise provided
in the Subcontract Documents. The Subcontractor shall examine the items provided and report to the
Constructor in writing any items it may discover that do not conform to requirements of the Subcontract
Documents. The Subcontractor shall not proceed to install nonconforming items without further
instructions from the Constructor. Loss or damage due to acts or omissions of the Subcontractor shall,
upon two (2) Business Days' written notice to the Subcontractor, be deducted from any amounts due or to
become due the Subcontractor.
3.24 SUBSTITUTIONS No substitutions shall be made in the Subcontract Work unless permitted in the
Subcontract Documents, and only upon the Subcontractor first receiving all approvals required under the
Subcontract Documents for substitutions.
3.25 USE OF CONSTRUCTOR'S EQUIPMENT The Subcontractor, its agents, employees,
subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Constructor's equipment only with the express written
permission of the Constructor's designated representative and in accordance with the Constructor's terms
and conditions for such use. lf the Subcontractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or
suppliers utilize any of the Constructor's equipment, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts, or
similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Constructor, the Subcontractor shall indemnify and
be liable to the Constructor as provided in ARTICLE 9 for any loss or damage (including bodily injury or
death) which may arise from such use, except to the extent that such loss or damage is caused by the
negligence of the Constructor's employees operating the Constructor's equipment.
3.26 WORK FOR OTHERS Until final completion of the Subcontract Work, the Subcontractor agrees not
to perform any work directly for the Owner or any tenants, or deal directly with the Owner's
representatives in connection with the Subcontract Work, unless otherwise approved in writing by the
Constructor.
3.27 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP With the assistance of the Owner's maintenance
personnel and the Constructor, the Subcontractor shall direct the check-out and operation of systems and
equipment for readiness, and assist in their initial startup and the testing of the Subcontract Work.
3.28 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS The Subcontractor agrees to comply with all Laws at its own costs. The
Subcontractor shall be liable to the Constructor and the Owner for all loss, cost, and expense attributable
to any acts or omissions by the Subcontractor, its employees, and agents resulting from the failure to
comply with Laws, including, any fines, penalties, or corrective measures, except as provided in
subsection 3.15.10. However, liability underthis section shallnotapply if noticeto Constructorwas given,
and advance approval by appropriate authorities, including the Constructor is received.
3.28.1 To the extent Constructor receives reimbursement or additional time from the Owner under
the prime agreement, the Subcontract Amount or Progress Schedule shall be equitably adjusted for
changes in Laws enacted after the date of this Agreement, including taxes, affecting the
performance of the Work.
3.29 CONFIDENTIALITY To the extent the prime agreement provides for the confidentiality of any of the
Owner's proprietary or othenruise confidential information disclosed in connection with the performance of
this Agreement, the Subcontractor is equally bound by the Owner's confidentiality requirements.
't2
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Botween Constructor and SubcontractoJ -@2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modfications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform. Consullation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review of the enlire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permts the user to print one contracl for each paly to lhe contract within one projecl only. You
may only make copies of finalized documents for distribution to parties in direcl connection with this contrac{ Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
3.30 ROYALTIES, PATENTS, AND COPYRIGHTS The Subcontractor shall pay all royalties and license
fees which may be due on the inclusion of any patented or copyrighted materials, methods, or systems
selected by the Subcontractor and incorporated in the Subcontract Work. The Subcontractor shall defend,
indemnify, and hold the Constructor and Owner harmless from all suits or claims for infringement of any
patent rights or copyrights arising out of such selection. The Subcontractor shall be liable for all loss,
including all costs, expenses, and attorneys'fees, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss
when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by
the Subcontract Documents. However, if the Subcontractor has reason to believe that a particular design,
process, or product required by the Subcontract Documents is an infringement of a patent, the
Subcontractor shall promptly furnish such information to the Constructor or be responsible to the
Constructor and Owner for any loss sustained as a result.
ARTICLE 4 CONSTRUCTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
4.1 CONSTRUCTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The Constructor shall designate a person who shall be the
Constructor's authorized representative. The Constructor's representative shall be the only person the
Subcontractor shall look to for instructions, orders or directions, except in an emergency. The
Constructor's Representative is Randall J. Oostdyk. lf the Constructor changes its representative, the
Constructor shall promptly notify the Subcontractor in writing.
4.2 OWNER'S ABILITY TO PAY
4.2.1 Unless expressly prohibited by the prime agreement, the Constructor shall promptly provide to
the Subcontractor the following information received from the Owner: (a) upon the Subcontractor's
request, information regarding the Owner's financial ability to pay for the Work, and (b) notice of any
material variation in the Owner's financial ability to pay. The Constructor, however, does not warrant
the accuracy or completeness of the information provided.
4.2.2lf the Subcontractor does not receive the information referenced in the subsection immediately
above with regard to the Owner's ability to pay for the Work as required by the Contract Documents,
the Subcontractor may request the information from the Owner or Owner's lender.
4.3 CONSTRUCTOR APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Upon request, the Constructor shall give the
Subcontractor a copy of the most current Constructor application for payment reflecting the amounts
approved or paid by the Owner for the Subcontract Work performed to date.
4.4 INFORMATION OR SERVICES The Subcontractor is entitled to request through the Constructor any
information or services required for the Subcontractor's performance of the Subcontract Work which is
under the Owner's control. The Subcontractor also is entitled to request through the Constructor any
information necessary to give notice of or enforce mechanics lien rights and, where applicable, stop
notices. This information shall include the Owner's interest in the real property on which the Project is
located and the recorded legal title. To the extent the Constructor receives such information or services,
the Constructor shall provide them to the Subcontractor in a timely manner. The Constructor, however,
does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information provided by the Owner. To the extent
the Owner provides any warranty of Owner provided information, the Constructor agrees to permit the
Subcontractor to prosecute a claim in the name of the Constructor for the use and benefit of the
Subcontractor, pursuant to subsection 5.3.2.
'13
ConsensusDocsrt 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontracto -@2011, Revsed March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform. Consultalion with legal and insurance counsel and careful review of the entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the documenl permits the user to print one contract for each party to the contracl wthin one projecl only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution to parties in direct conneclion wth this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8747345-IIB4
4.5 STORAGE AREAS The Constructor shall allocate adequate storage areas, if available, for the
Subcontractor's materials and equipment during the course of the Subcontract Work. Unless othenruise
agreed upon, the Constructor shall reimburse the Subcontractor for the additional costs of having to
relocate such storage areas at the direction of the Constructor.
4.6 TIMELY COMMUNICATIONS The Constructor shall transmit to the Subcontractor, with reasonable
promptness, all submittals, transmittals, and written approvals relative to the Subcontract Work. Unless
otherwise specified in the Subcontract Documents, if communications are not through the Subcontractor,
the Constructor shall inform the Subcontractor of the communications the Constructor has with the
Subcontractor's subcontractors, and suppliers.
4.7 USE OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT The Constructor, its agents, employees or suppliers
shall use the Subcontractor's equipment only with the express written permission of the Subcontractor's
designated representative and in accordance with the Subcontractor's terms and conditions for such use
lf the Constructor or any of its agents, employees, or suppliers utilize any of the Subcontractor's
equipment, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts, or similar items owned, leased, or under
the control of the Subcontractor, the Constructor shall indemnify and be liable to the Subcontractor as
provided in ARTICLE 9 for any loss or damage (including bodily injury or death) which may arise from
such use, except to the extent that such loss or damage is caused by the negligence of the
Subcontractor's employees operating the Subcontractor's equipment.
ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
5.1 TIME lS OF THE ESSENCE Time is of the essence for both Parties. They mutually agree to see to
the performance of their respective obligations so that the entire Project may be completed in accordance
with the Subcontract Documents and particularly the Progress Schedule as set forth in Exhibit C.
5.2 SCHEDULE OBLIGATIONS The Subcontractor shall provide the Constructor with any scheduling
information proposed by the Subcontractor for the Subcontract Work. ln consultation with the
Subcontractor, the Constructor shall prepare the schedule for performance of the Work ("Progress
Schedule") and shall revise and update such schedule, as necessary, as the Work progresses. Both the
Constructor and the Subcontractor shall be bound by the Progress Schedule. The Progress Schedule and
all subsequent changes and additional details shall be submitted to the Subcontractor promptly and
reasonably in advance of the required performance. The Constructor shall have the right to determine
and, if necessary, make reasonable changes to the time, order, and priority in which the various portions
of the Work shall be performed and all other matters relative to the Subcontract Work. To the extent such
changes increase the Subcontractor's time and costs, the Subcontract Amount and Subcontract Time
shall be equitably adjusted.
5.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
5.3.1 OWNER CAUSED DELAY Subject to the subsection immediately below, if the
commencement or progress of the Subcontract Work is delayed without the fault or responsibility of
the Subcontractor, the Subcontract Time shall be extended by Subcontract Change Order and the
Subcontract Amount equitably adjusted to the extent obtained by the Constructor under the
Subcontract Documents, and the Progress Schedule shall be revised accordingly.
5.3.2 CLAIMS RELATING TO OWNER The Subcontractor agrees to initiate all claims for which the
Owner is or may be liable in the manner and within the time limits provided in the Subcontract
14
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontracto -@2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications cen be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform. Consultaton wth legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permts lhe user lo prinl one conlracl for each party to the contracl within one projecl only You
may only make copies of finalized documents for distribution to parties in direcl connection with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
Documents for like claims by the Constructor upon the Owner and in sufficient time for the
Constructor to initiate such claims against the Owner in accordance with the Subcontract
Documents. At the Subcontractor's request and expense to the extent agreed upon in writing, the
Constructor agrees to permit the Subcontractor to prosecute a claim in the name of the Constructor
for the use and benefit of the Subcontractor in the manner provided in the Subcontract Documents
for like claims by the Constructor upon the Owner.
5.3.3 CONSTRUCTOR CAUSED DELAY Nothing in this article shall preclude the Subcontractor's
recovery of delay damages caused by the Constructor to the extent not othenryise precluded by this
Agreement.
5.3.4 CLAIMS RELATING TO CONSTRUCTOR The Subcontractor shall give the Constructor
written notice of all claims not included in subsection 5.3.2 within fourteen (14) Days of the
Subcontractor's knowledge of the facts giving rise to the event for which claim is made. Thereafter,
the Subcontractor shall submit written documentation of its claim, including appropriate supporting
documentation, within twenty-one (21) Days after giving notice, unless the Parties agree upon a
longer period of time. The Constructor shall respond in writing denying or approving, in whole or in
part, the Subcontractor's claim no later than fourteen (14) Days after receipt of the Subcontractor's
documentation of claim. The Constructor's failure to respond shall be deemed a denial of the
Subcontractor's claim. All unresolved claims, disputes, and other matters in question between the
Constructor and the Subcontractor not relating to claims included in subsection 5.3.2 shall be
resolved as provided for in ARTICLE I 1.
5.4 LIMITED MUTUAL WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
5.4.1 Except for any (a) liquidated, consequential, or other damages that the Owner is entitled to
recover against the Constructor under the prime agreement, and (b) losses covered by insurance
required by the Subcontract Documents, the Constructor and the Subcontractor mutually waive all
claims against each other for consequential damages, including damages for loss of business, loss
of fnancing related to the Project, loss of profits not related to this Project, loss of bonding capacity,
loss of reputation, or insolvency. Similarly, the Subcontractor shall obtain in another agreement from
its Sub-subcontractors mutual waivers of consequential damages that correspond to the
Subcontractor's waiver of consequential damages herein. The provisions of this subsection shall
also apply to and survive termination of this Agreement.
5.5 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
5.5.1 lf the Subcontract Documents provide for liquidated damages or other damages for delay
beyond the completion date set forth in the Subcontract Documents that are not specifically
addressed as a liquidated damage item in this Agreement, and such damages are assessed, the
Constructor may assess a share of the damages against the Subcontractor in proportion to the
Subcontractor's share of the responsibility for the damages. However, the amount of such
assessment shall not exceed the amount assessed against the Constructor. This section shall not
limit the Subcontractor's liability to the Constructor for the Constructor's actual damages caused by
the Subcontractor.
5.5.2 To the extent the prime agreement provides for a mutual waiver of consequential damages by
the Owner and the Constructor, damages for which the Constructor is liable to the Owner, including
those related to section 9.1
,
are not consequential damages for the purpose of this waiver. Similarly,
15
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontracto -@2011, Revsod March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform. Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review of lhe entire documents are strongly
encouraged. Purchase of the documenl permits the user to print one contract for each party to the contracl within one project only You
may only make copies of finalized documents for distribution to parties in direc{ connection with ths contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
to the extent the agreement between the Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor provides for a
mutual waiver of consequential damages by the Owner and the Constructor, damages for which the
Subcontractor is liable to lower-tiered parties due to the fault of the Owner or Constructor are not
consequential damages for the purpose of this warver.
ARTICLE 6 SUBCONTRACT AMOUNT
As full compensation for performance of this Agreement, the Constructor agrees to pay the Subcontractor
in current funds for the satisfactory performance of the Subcontract Work subject to all applicable
provisions of this Agreement:
a. the fxed-price of
t_l
dollars ($t_l) subject to additions and deductions as provided for
in the Subcontract Documents; or
b. alternates and unit prices in accordance with the attached schedule of alternates and unit
prices and estimated quantities, which is incorporated by reference and identified as Exhibit D; or
c. time and material rates and prices in accordance with the attached Schedule of Labor and
Material Costs which is incorporated by reference and identified as Exhibit
t_l.
The fixed-price, unit prices or time and material rates and prices are referred to as the
Subcontract Amount.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES
7.1 The Subcontractor may request or the Constructor may order changes in the Subcontract Work or the
timing or sequencing of the Subcontract Work that impacts the Subcontract Amount or Subcontract Time.
All such changes in the Subcontract Work that affect the Subcontract Amount or the Subcontract Time
shall be formalized in a Subcontract Change Order. Any such requests for a change in the Subcontract
Amount or Subcontract Time shall be processed in accordance with this article.
7.1.1 For changes in the Subcontract Work, the Constructor and the Subcontractor shall negotiate
in good faith an appropriate adjustment to the Subcontract Amount or the Subcontract Time and
shall conclude these negotiations as expeditiously as possible. Acceptance of the Subcontract
Change Order and any adjustment in the Subcontract Amount or Subcontract Time shall not be
unreasonably withheld.
7.2 INTERIM DIRECTED CHANGES ln the absence of agreement on the terms of a Subcontract Change
Order, the Constructor may issue a written lnterim Directed Change directing the Subcontractor to
proceed with the Subcontract Work in question. lf such lnterim Directed Change is issued as a result of
the Owner's issuance of an lnterim Directed Change, Construction Change Directive, or equivalent
directive, then the applicable provisions of the prime agreement shallgovern. Otherwise, the
Subcontractor shall separately submit its costs for the resulting change, beginning with its next regularly
scheduled application for payment submitted after the issuance of the lntenm Directed Change. lf there is
a dispute as to the cost, the Constructor shall pay the Subcontractor fifty percent (50%) of its estimated
cost to perform the Subcontract Work. ln such event, the Parties reserve their rights as to the disputed
amount. lf and when the Parties agree upon an adjustment in Subcontract Amount or Subcontract Time,
such agreement shall be reflected in a Subcontract Change Order, and the payments to date shall be
16
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractot -@2011, Rvsed March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
lhe ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review oflhe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits lhe user to print one contract for each party to lhe contract within one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution to parties in direct conneclion with this contracl Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
adjusted to reflect the Subcontract Change Order. lf no agreement is reached, the Parties shall resolve
the matter as provided in ARTICLE 1 1.
7.3 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN SITE CONDITIONS lf the conditions encountered at the Worksite are
(a) subsurface or other physical conditions materially different from those indicated in the Contract
Documents, or (b) unusual and unknown physical conditions materially different from conditions ordinarily
encountered and generally recognized as inherent in Work provided for in the Contract Documents, the
Subcontractor shall stop affected Work after the condition is first observed and give prompt written notice
of the condition to the Constructor. The Subcontractor shall not be required to perform any Work relating
to the unknown condition without the written mutual agreement of the Parties. Any change in the Contract
Price or the Contract Time as a result of the unknown condition shall be determined as provided in
ARTICLE 5.
7.4 ADJUSTMENTS lN SUBCONTRACT AMOUNT lf a Subcontract Change Order requires an
adjustment in the Subcontract Amount, the adjustment shall be established by one of the following
methods:
7.4.1 mulual acceptance of an itemized lump sum; or
7.4.2 unit prices as indicated in the Subcontract Documents or as subsequently agreed to by the
Parties; or
7.4.3 costs as determined in the Subcontract Documents or in a manner othenruise acceptable to
the Parties, and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee.
7.5 SUBSTANTIATION OF ADJUSTMENT lf the Subcontractor does not respond promptly or disputes
the method of adjustment, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Constructor on the
basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,
including, in the case of an increase in the Subcontract Amount, an allowance for overhead and profit of
the percentage provided in section 7.6, or if none is provided, as mutually agreed upon by the Parties.
The Subcontractor may contest the reasonableness of any adjustment determined by the Constructor.
The Subcontractor shall maintain for the Constructor's review and approval an appropriately itemized and
substantiated accounting of the following items attributable to the Subcontract Change Order:
7.5.1 labor costs, including Social Security, health, welfare, retirement, and otherfringe benefits as
normally required, and state workers' compensation insurance;
7.5.2 costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, whether incorporated in the Subcontract Work or
consumed, including transportation costs;
7.5.3 costs of renting machinery and equipment other than hand tools'
7.5.4 costs of bond and insurance premiums, permit fees, and taxes attributable to the change; and
7.5.5 costs of additional supervision and field offce personnel services necessitated by the change.
7.6 Adjustments shall be based on net change in the Subcontractor's reasonable cost of performing the
changed Subcontract Work plus, in case of a net increase in cost, an agreed upon sum for overhead and
profit not to exceed ten percent (10%).
17
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractot -@2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications cn be generated through
lhe ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review of the entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of lhe document permits the user to print one contracl for each party to lhe contrac{ within one project only You
may only make copies of fnalzed documents for distribution lo parties in direcl connection with this contract. Any other uses are striclly
prohibited. Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
7.7 NO OBLIGATION TO PERFORM The Subcontractor shall not be obligated to perform changes in the
Subcontract Work that impact Subcontract Amount or Subcontract Time until a Subcontract Change
Orderhas been executed orwritten instructions have been issued in accordancewith sections7.2or7.8.
7.8 INCIDENTAL CHANGES The Constructor may direct the Subcontractor to perform incidental changes
in the Subcontract Work which do not involve adjustments in the Subcontract Amount or the Subcontract
Time. lncidental changes shall be consistent with the scope and intent of the Subcontract Documents.
The Constructor shall initiate an incidental change in the Subcontract Work by issuing a written order to
the Subcontractor. Such written notice shall be carried out promptly and is binding on the Parties.
ARTICLE 8 PAYMENT
8.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES As a condition precedent to payment, the Subcontractor shall provide a
schedule of values satisfactory to the Constructor not more than fifteen (15) Days from the date of
execution of this Agreement.
8.2 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
8.2.1 APPLICATIONS The Subcontractor's applications for payment shall be itemized and
supported by substantiating data as required by the Subcontract Documents. lf the Subcontractor is
obligated to provide design services pursuant to section 3.8, the Subcontractor's applications for
payment shall show its design professional's fee and expenses as a separate cost item. The
Subcontractor's application for payment shall be notarized if required and if allowed under the
Subcontract Documents may include properly authorized Subcontract Construction Change
Directives or lnterim Directed Changes. The Subcontractor's application for payment for the
Subcontract Work performed in the preceding payment period shall be submitted for approval by the
Constructor in accordance with the schedule of values if required and subsections 8.2.2 through
8.2.4.The Constructor shall incorporate the approved amount of the Subcontractor's application for
payment into the Constructor's application for payment to the Owner for the same period and submit
it to the Owner in a timely fashion. The Constructor shall promptly notify the Subcontractor of any
changes in the amount requested on behalf of the Subcontractor.
8.2.2 RETAINAGE The rate of retainage shall be ten percent (10%), which is equal to the
percentage retained from the Constructor's payment by the Owner for the Subcontract Work. lf the
Subcontract Work is satisfactory and the prime agreement provides for reduction of retainage, the
Subcontractor's retainage shall also be reduced when the Constructor's retainage of the
Subcontract Work has been so reduced by the Owner.
8.2.3 TIME OF APPLICATION The Subcontractor shall submit progress payment applications to the
Constructor no later than the 24th Day of each payment period for the Subcontract Work performed
up to and including the 20th Day of the payment period indicating work completed and, to the extent
allowed under the subsection below, materials suitably stored during the preceding payment period.
8.2.4 STORED MATERIALS Unless otherwise provided in the Subcontract Documents, applications
for payment may include materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the Subcontract Work but
delivered to and suitably stored on or off the Worksite including applicable insurance, storage, and
costs incurred transporting the materials to an off-site storage facility. Approval of payment
applications for such stored items on or off the Worksite shall be conditioned upon submission by
18
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standad Agreement Between Constructor end Subcontractor -
@
201 I, Revised March 201 2. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review of the entire documenls are slrongly
encouraged. Purchase of the documenl permts the user to print one contracl for each party to the contracl wthin one projecl only. You
mey only make copies of fnalized documenls for distribution to parties in direct connection with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
the Subcontractor of bills of sale and required insurance or such other procedures satisfactory to the
Owner and Constructor to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment, or othenruise
to protect the Owner's and Constructor's interest including transportation to the Worksite.
8.2.5 TIME OF PAYMENT Progress payments to the Subcontractor for satisfactory performance of
the Subcontract Work shall be made no later than seven (7) Days after receipt by the Constructor of
payment from the Owner for the Subcontract Work. lf payment from the Owner for such Subcontract
Work is not received by the Constructor, through no fault of the Subcontractor, the Constructor will
make payment to the Subcontractor within a reasonable time for the Subcontract Work satisfactorily
performed.
8.2.6 PAYMENT DELAY lf the Constructor has received payment from the Owner and if for any
reason not the fault of the Subcontractor, the Subcontractor does not receive a progress payment
from the Constructor within seven (7) Days after the date such payment is due, as defined in the
subsection immediately above, or, if the Constructor has failed to pay the Subcontractor within a
reasonable time for the Subcontract Work satisfactorily performed, the Subcontractor, upon giving
seven (7) Days'written notice to the Constructor, and without prejudice to and in addition to any
other legal remedies, may stop work until payment of the full amount owing to the Subcontractor
has been received. The Subcontract Amount and Time shall be adjusted by the amount of the
Subcontractor's reasonable and verified cost of shutdown, delay, and startup, which shall be
effected by an appropriate Subcontractor Change Order.
8.2.7 PAYMENTS WITHHELD The Constructor may reject a Subcontractor application for payment
in whole or in part or withhold amounts from a previously approved Subcontractor application for
payment, as may reasonably be necessary to protect the Constructor from loss or damage for which
the Constructor may be liable and without incurring an obligation for late payment interest based
upon:
8.2.7.1 the Subcontractor's repeated failure to perform the Subcontract Work as required by
this Agreement;
8.2.7.2 except as accepted by the insurer providing Builders Risk or other property
insurance covering the Project, loss or damage arising out of or relating to this Agreement
and caused by the Subcontractor to the Owner, the Constructor, or others to whom the
Constructor may be liable;
8.2.7.3 the Subcontractor's failure to properly pay for labor, materials, equipment, or
supplies furnlshed in connection with the Subcontract Work;
8.2.7.4 rejected, nonconforming, or defective Subcontract Work which has not been
corrected in a timely fashion;
8.2.7 .5 reasonable evidence of delay in performance of the Subcontract Work such that the
Work will not be completed within the Subcontract Time, and that the unpaid balance of the
Subcontract Amount is not sufficient to offset the liquidated damages or actual damages
that may be sustained by the Constructor as a result of the anticipated delay caused by the
Subcontractor;
19
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Betveen Constructor and Subcontractor -
@2011,
Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a repol of moditicatons can be generated through
lhe ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance c,ounsel and careful revew of the entire documents are slrongly
encouraged. Purchase of the document permits the user lo print one contract for each party to the contract within one project only You
may only make copies of finalized documents for distribution to parlies n direct connection with this conlract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8747345-7784
8.2.7.6 reasonable evidence demonstrating that the unpaid balance of the Subcontract
Amount is insufficient to cover the cost to complete the Subcontract Work; and
8.2.7.7 uninsured third-party claims involving the Subcontractor or reasonable evidence
demonstrating that third-party claims are likely to be filed unless and until the Subcontractor
furnishes the Constructor with adequate security in the form of a surety bond, letter of
credit, or other collateral or commitment sufficient to discharge such claims if established.
No later than seven (7) Days after receipt of an application for payment, the Constructor
shall give written notice to the Subcontractor, at the time of disapproving or nullifying all or
part of an application for payment, stating its specific reasons for such disapproval or
nullification, and the remedial actions to be taken by the Subcontractor in order to receive
payment. When the above reasons for disapproving or nullifying an application for payment
are removed, payment will be promptly made for the amount previously withheld.
8.2.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
8.2.8.1 Upon substantial completion of the Subcontract Work or a designated portion
thereof to the extent required to allow the Constructor to accept the Subcontract Work to
allow succeeding Work to proceed, the Constructor shall assume responsibility for security
and protection of the Subcontract Work pending the achievement of Substantial Completion
of the Project. However, acceptance of the Subcontract Work for the purpose of allowing
succeeding Work to proceed shall not result in the commencement of the warranty period
for the Subcontract Work unless otherwise provided in the prime agreement.
8.2.8.2 Unless otherwise provided for in the prime agreement, partial Owner occupancy or
use of completed portions of the Subcontract Work shall constitute Substantial Completion
of that portion of the Subcontract Work and the warranty period applicable to the
Subcontract Work shall commence upon the achievement of Substantial Completion of the
Project and acceptance by the Owner under the terms of the prime agreement.
8.3 FINAL PAYMENT
8.3.1 APPLICATION Upon acceptance of the Subcontract Work by the Owner and the Constructor
and receipt from the Subcontractor of evidence of fulfillment of the Subcontractor's obligations in
accordance with the Subcontract Documents and the subsection below, the Constructor shall
incorporate the Subcontractor's application for final payment into the Constructor's next application
for payment to the Owner without delay, or notify the Subcontractor if there is a delay and the
reasons for the delay.
8.3,2 REQUIREMENTS Before the Constructor shall be required to incorporate the Subcontractor's
application for final payment into the Constructor's next application for payment, the Subcontractor
shall submit to the Constructor:
8.3.2.1 an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other
indebtedness connected with the Subcontract Work for which the Owner or its property or
the Constructor or the Constructor's surety might in any way be liable, have been paid or
othenruise satisfied;
20
ConsensusDocsrt 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -
o2011,
Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE SANDARD LANGUAGE, end e report of modifcations can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation wilh legal and insurance counsel and careful revew of the entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to prinl one contract for each party to the contrac,t within one projecl only You
may only mke copies of finelized documents for distribution to parties in direcl connection with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibted Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
8.3.2.2 consent of surety to final payment, if required;
8.3.2.3 satisfaction of required closeout procedures;
8.3.2.4 other data, if required by the Constructor or Owner, such as receipts, releases, and
waivers of liens to the extent and in such form as may be required by the Subcontract
Documents;
8.3.2.5 written warranties, equipment manuals, startup and testing required in section 3.27;
and
8.3.2.6 as-built drawings if required by the Subcontract Documents.
8.3.2.7 Certification that insurance required by the Subcontract Documents to remain in
effect beyond payment pursuant to Subparagraphs 9.2.3.1 and 9.2.6 is in effect and will not
be cancelled or allowed to expire without at least thirty (30) day written notice to the
Constructor unless a longer period is stipulated in this Agreement.
8.3.3 TIME OF PAYMENT Final payment of the balance due of the Subcontract Amount shall be
made to the Subcontractor within seven (7) Days after receipt by the Constructor of final payment
from the Owner for such Subcontract Work.
8.3.4 FINAL PAYMENT DELAY lf the Owner or its designated agent does not issue a certificate for
final payment or the Constructor does not receive such payment for any cause which is not the fault
of the Subcontractor, the Constructor shall promptly inform the Subcontractor in writing. lf final
payment from the Owner for such Subcontract Work is not received by the Constructor, through no
fault of the Subcontractor, the Constructor will make payment to the Subcontractor within a
reasonable time.
8.3.5 WAIVER OF CLAIMS Final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the
Subcontractor relating to the Subcontract Work, but shall in no way relieve the Subcontractor of
liability for the obligations assumed under sections 3.21 and 3.22, or for faulty or defective work or
services discovered after final payment, nor relieve the Constructor for claims made in writing by the
Subcontractor as required by the Subcontract Documents prior to its application for final payment as
unsettled at the time of such payment.
8.4 LATE PAYMENT INTEREST Progress payments or final payment due and unpaid under this
Agreement, as defined in subsections 8.2.5, 8.3.3 and 8.3.4, shall bear interest from the date payment is
due at the prevailing statutory rate at the place of the Project. However, rf the Owner fails to timely pay
the Constructor as required under the prime agreement through no fault or neglect of the Constructor,
and the Constructor fails to timely pay the Subcontractor as a result of such nonpayment, the
Constructor's obligation to pay the Subcontractor interest on corresponding payments due and unpaid
under this Agreement shall be extinguished by the Constructor promptly paying to the Subcontractor the
Subcontractor's proportionate share of the interest, if any, received by the Constructor from the Owner on
such late payments.
8.5 CONTINUING OBLIGATIONS Provided the Constructor is making payments on or has made
payments to the Subcontractor in accordance with this Agreement, the Subcontractor shall reimburse the
Constructor for any costs and expenses for any claim, obligation, or lien asserted before or after final
payment is made that arises from the performance of the Subcontract Work. The Subcontractor shall
21
ConsensusDocslt 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractot -2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful revew ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits lhe user to print one conlracl for each party to the contracl within one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distrbulion to parties in direct connection with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
reimburse the Constructor for costs and expenses including attorneys' fees and costs and expenses
incurred by the Constructor in satisfying, discharging, or defending against any such claims, obligation, or
lien, including any action brought or
judgment
recovered. lf any Law or bond require the Subcontractor to
take any action prior to the expiration of the reasonable time for payment referenced in subsection 8.2.5
in order to preserve or protect the Subcontractor's rights with respect to mechanic's lien or bond claims,
then the Subcontractor may take that action prior to the expiration of the reasonable time for payment and
such action will not: (a) create the reimbursement obligation recited above, (b) be in violation of this
Agreement, or (c) considered premature for purposes of preserving and protecting the Subcontractor's
rights.
8.6 PAYMENT USE RESTRICTION Payments received by the Subcontractor shall be used to satisfy the
indebtedness owed by the Subcontractor to any person furnishing labor or materials, or both, for use in
performing the Subcontract Work through the most current period applicable to progress payments
received from the Constructor before it is used for any other purpose. ln the same manner, payments
received by the Constructor from the Owner for the Subcontract Work shall be dedicated to payment to
the Subcontractor. This provision shall bear on this Agreement only, and is not for the benefit of third
parties. Moreover, it shall not be construed by the Parties to this Agreement or third parties to require that
dedicated sums of money or payments be deposited in separate accounts, or that there be other
restrictions on commingling of funds. Neither shall these mutual covenants be construed to create any
fiduciary duty on the Subcontractor or Constructor, nor create any tort cause of action or liability for
breach of trust, punitive damages, or other equitable remedy or liability for alleged breach.
8.7 PAYMENT USE VERIFICATION lf the Constructor has reason to believe that the Subcontractor is not
complying with the payment terms of this Agreement, the Constructor shall have the right to contact the
Subcontractor's subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they are being paid by the
Subcontractor in accordance with this Agreement.
8.8 PARTIAL LIEN WAIVERS AND AFFIDAVITS As a prerequisite for payments, the Subcontractor shall
provide, in a form satisfactory to the Owner and Constructor, partial lien or claim waivers in the amount of
the application for payment and affidavits (sworn statements) covering its subcontractors and suppliers
for completed Subcontract Work. Such waivers may be conditional upon payment. ln no event shall the
Constructor require the Subcontractor to provide an unconditional waiver of lien or claim, either partial or
final, prior to receiving payment or in an amount in excess of what it has been paid.
8.9 SUBCONTRACTOR PAYMENT FAILURE Upon payment by the Constructor, the Subcontractor shall
promptly pay its subcontractors and suppliers the amounts to which they are entitled. lf the Constructor
has reason to believe that labor, material, or other obligations incurred in the performance of the
Subcontract Work are not being paid, the Constructor may give written notice of a potential claim or lien
to the Subcontractor and may take any steps deemed necessary to assure that progress payments are
utilized to pay such obligations, including but not limited to the issuance of
joint
checks. lf upon receipt of
notice, the Subcontractor does not (a) supply evidence to the satisfaction of the Constructor that payment
owed has been paid; or (b) post a bond indemnifying the Owner, the Constructor, the Constructor's
surety, if any, and the premises from a claim or lien, the Constructor shall have the right to withhold from
any payments due or to become due to the Subcontractor a reasonable amount to protect the Constructor
from any and all loss, damage, or expense including attorneys' fees that may arise out of or relate to any
such claim or lien.
8.10 SUBCONTRACTOR ASSIGNMENT OF PAYMENTS The Subcontractor shall not assign any
payment due or to become due under this Agreement, without the written consent of the Constructor,
22
ConsensusDocsr 750 - Standard Agreoment Between Constructor and Subcontracto -@2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifcations can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultaton wth legal and insurance counsel and careful review of the entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of lhe document permts the user to print one contract for each party to the contracl within one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distributon to parties in direct connection with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibted Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
unless the assignment is intended to create a new security interest within the scope of Article 9 of the
Uniform Commercial Code. Should the Subcontractor assign all or any part of any payment due or to
become due under this Agreement to create a new security interest or for any other purpose, the
instrument of assignment shall contain a clause to the effect that the assignee's right in and to any money
due or to become due to the Subcontractor shall be subject to the claims of all persons, firms, and
corporations for services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the Subcontract Work.
8.11 PAYMENT NOT ACCEPTANCE Payment to the Subcontractor does not constitute or imply
acceptance of any portion of the Subcontract Work.
ARTICLE 9 INDEMNITY, INSURANCE, AND BONDS
9.I INDEMNITY
9.1.1 INDEMNITY To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Subcontractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless the Constructor, the Design Professional, the Owner, and their agents, consultants, and
employees (the lndemnitees) from all claims for bodily injury and property damage other than to the
Work itself that may arise from the performance of the Subcontract Work, including reasonable
attorneys' fees, costs, and expenses, that arise from the performance of the Work, but only to the
extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Subcontractor, the Subcontractor's
subcontractors, or anyone employed directly or indirectly by any of them or by anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable. The Subcontractor shall be entitled to reimbursement of any
defense cost paid above the Subcontractor's percentage of liability for the underlying claim to the
extent attributable to the negligent acts or omissions of the lndemnitees.
9.1.2 NO LIMITATION ON LIABILITY ln any and all claims against the lndemnitees by any
employee of the Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Subcontractor or
anyone for whose acts the Subcontractor may be liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be
limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits
payable by or for the Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or
other employee benefit acts.
9.2INSURANCE
9.2.1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE Before commencing the SubcontractWork, and as a
condition precedent to payment, the Subcontractor shall purchase and maintain insurance that will
protect it from the claims arising out of its operations under this Agreement, whether the operations
are by the Subcontractor, or any of its consultants or subcontractors or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them for whose acts the Subcontractor may be liable.
9.2.2 MINIMUM LIMITS OF LIABILITY The Subcontractor shall procure and maintain with insurance
companies licensed in the
jurisdiction
in which the Project is located and acceptable to the
Constructor, which acceptance shall not be unreasonably withheld, at least the limits of liability as
set forth below:
9.2.2.1 Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability lnsurance in accordance with
the laws of the State of Michrgan.
9.2.2.2 Commercial General Liability lnsurance
23
GonsensusDocsrM 750 - Standerd Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontracto
.@2O11,
Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifcations can be generaled through
lhe ConsensusDocs platform Consultation wth legal and nsurance counsel and careful review of the entire documenls are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to print one conlract for each party to the contract wthn one projeci only You
may only make copies of fnalized documenls for dstribution to parties in direct connection with lhis contract Any other uses are strictly
prohibited. Content Secure lD: DB147345-1184
a. Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000.
b. General Aggregate $2,000,000.
c. Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000
d. Personal and Advertising lnjury Limit $1,000,000.
9.2.2.3 Comprehensive Automobile Liability lnsurance
Combined Single Limit bodily lnjury and Property Damage $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
9.2.2.4 ADDITIONAL INSUREDS Policies under Clauses 9.2.2.2 shall list Fishbeck,
Thompson, Carr & Huber, lnc. and the Owner on as additional insureds, as well as
other parties if required by the Contract Documents.
9.2.3 PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY INSURANCE
9.2.3.1The Subcontractor shall require its design professional(s) to maintain professional
liability insurance with a company reasonably satisfactory to the Constructor, including
contractual liability insurance against the liability assumed in section 3.8, and including
coverage for any professional liability caused by consultants of its design professional. Said
insurance shall have specific minimum limits as set forth below:
Limit of One Million dollars ($1,000,000) per claim.
General Aggregate of Two Million dollars ($2,000,000) for the subcontract services
rendered.
The professional liability insurance shall contain prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all
subcontract services rendered by the design professional. Said insurance shall be
continued in effect with an extended period of two years following final payment to the
design professional. Such insurance shall have a maximum deductible amount of One
Hundred Fifty Thousand dollars ($150,000) per occurrence. The deductible shall be paid by
the Subcontractor or its design professional.
9.2.3.2 The Subcontractor shall require its design professional to furnish to the
Subcontractor and Constructor, before the design professional commences its services, a
copy of its professional liability policy evidencing the coverages required in this subsection
No policy shall be cancelled or modified without thirty (30) Days' prior written notice to the
Subcontractor and Constructor.
9.2.4 NUMBER OF POLICIES Commercial General Liability lnsurance (CGL) and other liability
insurance may be arranged under a single policy for the full limits required or by a combination of
underlying policies with the balance provided by an Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy.
9.2.5 CANCELLATION, RENEWAL, AND MODIFICATION To the extent commercially available to
the Subcontractor from its current insurance company, insurance policies required under subsection
9.2.1 shall contain a provision that the insurance company or its designee must give the Constructor
written notice transmitted in paper or electronic format: (a) 30 Days before coverage is nonrenewed
by the insurance company and (b) within 10 Business Days after cancelation of coverage by the
insurance company. Prior to commencing the Work and upon renewal or replacement of the
insurance policies, the Subcontractor shall furnish the Constructor with certificates of insurance until
24
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -
@2011,
Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged. Purchase of the document permits the user to print one contract for each party to the contract within one projecl only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for dstrbuton to partes n direcl connecton with this contract Any olher uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
one year after Substantial Completion or longer if required by the Contract Documents. ln addition,
if any insurance policy required under subsection 9.2.1 is not to be immediately replaced without
lapse in coverage when it expires, exhausts its limits, or is to be cancelled, the Subcontractor shall
give Constructor prompt written notice upon actual or constructive knowledge of such condition.
9.2.6 CONTINUATION OF COVERAGE The Subcontractor shall continue to carry Completed
Operations Liability lnsurance for at least one year after final payment to the Constructor. Before
commencing the Work, the Subcontractor shall furnish the Constructor with certificates evidencing
the required coverages.
9.2.7 PROPERTY INSURANCE
9.2.7.1 Upon written request of the Subcontractor, the Constructor shall provide the
Subcontractor with a copy of the Builder's Risk policy of insurance or any other property or
equipment insurance in force for the Project and procured by the Owner or Constructor. The
Constructor shall advise the Subcontractor if a Builder's Risk policy of insurance is not in
force.
9.2.7.2 lf the Owner or Constructor has not purchased property insurance reasonably
satisfactory to the Subcontractor, the Subcontractor may procure such insurance as will
protect the interests of the Subcontractor, its subcontractors, and their subcontractors in the
Subcontract Work. The cost of this insurance shall be charged to the Constructor in a
Subcontract Change Order.
9.2.7.3|f not covered under the Builder's Risk policy of insurance or any other property or
equipment insurance required by the Subcontract Documents, the Subcontractor shall
procure and maintain at the Subcontractor's own expense property and equipment
insurance for the Subcontract Work including portions of the Subcontract Work stored off
the Worksite or in transit, when such portions of the Subcontract Work are to be included in
an application for payment under ARTICLE 8.
9.2.8 WAIVER OF SUBROGATION
9.2.8.1 The Constructor and Subcontractor waive all rights against each other, the Owner
and the Design Professional, and any of their respective consultants, subcontractors, sub-
subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by perils to the extent
covered by the proceeds of the insurance provided in section 9.2.7, except such rights as
they may have to the insurance proceeds and such rights as they may have for the Owner's
failure to obtain and maintain any Project Builders Risk Coverage that the Owner may be
obligated to provide. The Subcontractor shall require similar waivers from its
subcontractors.
9.2.8.2 The policies under c|auses9.2.2,9.2.3 and 9.2.7 shallalso be endorsed to state
that the carrier waives any right against the Owner, Constructor, Design Professional,
Subcontractors, material Suppliers, or Sub-subcontractors.
9.2.9 ENDORSEMENT lf the policies of insurance referred to in this article require an endorsement
to provide for continued coverage where there is a waiver of subrogation, the owners of such
policies will cause them to be so endorsed.
25
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractor -@2011, Revised March 2012, THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a reporl of modfications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform. Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entre documents are strongly
encouraged. Purchase of the document permits the user to print one contract for each party to the contract within one projecl only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution to parties in direct connection with this contracl. Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
9.2.10 CONSTRUCTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Constructor shall obtain and maintain its
own liability insurance for protection against claims arising out of the performance of this Agreement
including without limitation, loss of use and claims, losses, and expenses arising out of the
Constructor's acts or omissions.
9.2.11 ADDITIONAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE The Constructor shall require the
Subcontractor to purchase and maintain additional liability coverage, primary to the Constructor's
coverage pursuant to the subsection immediately above.
9.2.11.1 lf required by the subsection immediately above, the additional liability coverage
required of the Subcontractor shall be:
1. ADDITIONAL INSURED. The Owner and Constructor shall be named as an additional
insured on the Subcontractor's CGL specified, for operations and completed operations, but
only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage, or personal and advertising
injury to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Subcontractor, or those
acting on the Subcontractor's behalf, in the performance of Subcontract Work for the
Constructor at the Worksite.
2. Deleted
Any documented additional cost in the form of a surcharge associated with procuring the
additional general liability coverage in accordance with this subsection shall be paid by the
Constructor directly or the costs may be reimbursed by the Constructor to the Subcontractor
by increasing the Subcontract Amount to correspond to the actual cost required to purchase
and maintain the coverage. Before commencing the Subcontract Work, the Subcontractor
shall provide either a copy of the OCP policy, or a certificate and endorsement evidencing
that the Constructor has been named as an additional insured, as applicable.
9.2.12 RISK OF LOSS Except to the extent a loss is covered by applicable insurance, risk of loss or
damage to the Subcontract Work shall be upon the Subcontractor until the Date of Substantial
Completion, unless otherwise agreed to by the Parties.
9.3 BONDS
9.3.1 Performance and Payment Bonds are required of the Subcontractor contracts equaling
$100,000 or more in contract value. Such bonds shall be issued by a surety admitted in the state in
which the Project is located and must be acceptable to the Constructor. The Constructor's
acceptance shall not be withheld without reasonable cause. The penal sum of the Payment Bond
and of the Performance Bond shall each be in the full Subcontract Amount.
9.3.2 The Subcontractor shall be reimbursed, without retainage, for the cost of any required
performance or payment bonds simultaneously with the first progress payment. The reimbursement
amount for the Subcontractor bonds shall be actual invoiced amount, which sum is included in the
Subcontract Amount..
9.3.3 lf the Subcontractor shall fail to promptly provide any required bonds, the Constructor may
terminate this Agreement and enter into a subcontract for the balance of the Subcontract Work with
26
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agroement Between Constructorand Subcontractor -@2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modfications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultaton with legal and insurance counsel and careful revew ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user lo print one contract for each paty to the contract within one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distrbution to parties n direcl connecton with this contracl. Any olher uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
another subcontractor. All Constructor costs and expenses incurred by the Constructor as a result
of said termination shall be paid by the Subcontractor.
9.3.4 PAYMEN BOND REVIEW The Constructor has provided the Owner a payment bond. A
copy of the Constructor's payment bond for the Project, if any, shall be furnished by the Owner or
Constructor upon the Subcontractor's written request.
ARTICLE IO SUSPENSION, NOTICE TO CURE, AND TERMINATION
10.1 FAILURE OF PERFORMANCE AND TERMINATION
10.1 .1 NOTICE TO CURE A DEFAULT lf the Subcontractor persistently fails to supply enough
qualified workers, proper materials, or equipment, to maintain the Progress Schedule, or fails to
make prompt payment to its workers, sub-subcontractors, or suppliers, or disregards Laws or orders
of any public authority having
jurisdiction,
or othenruise is guilty of a material breach of a provision of
this Agreement, the Subcontractor shall be deemed in default of this Agreement. lf the
Subcontractor fails within three (3) Business Days after written notification to commence and
continue satisfactory correction of the default with diligence and promptness, then the Constructor
shall give a second notice to the Subcontractor and surety, if any, to correct the default within a two
(2) Business Day period. lf the Subcontractor fails to promptly commence and continue satisfactory
correction of the default following receipt of such second notice, the Constructor without prejudice to
any other rights or remedies, shall have the right to any or all of the following remedies:
10.1.1.'l supply workers, materials, equipment, and facilities as the Constructor deems
necessary for the completion of the Subcontract Work or any part which the Subcontractor
has failed to complete or perform after written notification, and charge the Subcontractor
costs and expenses, including reasonable overhead, profit, and attorneys'fees that are due
or to become due. The Subcontractor shall be liable for the payment of any amount by
which such expense may exceed the unpaid balance of the Subcontract Amount. At the
Subcontractor's request, the Constructor shall provide a detailed accounting of the costs to
finish the Subcontract Work;
10.1.1.2 contract with one or more additional contractors to perform such part of the
Subcontract Work as the Constructor determines will provide the most expeditious
completion of the Work, and charge the cost to the Subcontractor as provided under the
subsection above;
10.1.1.3 withhold any payments due or to become due the Subcontractor pending
corrective action in amounts sufficient to cover losses and compel performance to the
extent required by and to the satisfaction of the Constructor. ln the event of an emergency
affecting the safety of persons or property, the Constructor may proceed as above without
notice, but the Constructor shall give the Subcontractor notice promptly after the fact as a
precondition of cost recovery; or
10.1.1.4 terminate the Agreement by written notice
10.1.2 USE OF SUBCONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT lf the Constructor performs work underthis
article, either directly or through other subcontractors, the Constructor or other subcontractors shall
have the right to take and use any materials, implements, equipment, appliances, or tools furnished
27
GonsensusDocsrn 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constfuctof and Subcontractot -@2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permts the user to print one contract for each party to the contrac{ within one projec{ only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distributon to parties in direct conneclion with this contract Any other uses are striclly
prohibired. Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
by, or belonging to the Subcontractor and located at the Worksite for the purpose of completing any
remaining Subcontract Work. lmmediately upon completion of the Subcontract Work, any remaining
materials, implements, equipment, appliances, or tools not consumed or incorporated in
performance of the Subcontract Work, and furnished by, belonging to, or delivered to the Project by
or on behalf of the Subcontractor, shall be returned to the Subcontractor in substantially the same
condition as when they were taken, normal wear and tear excepted.
10.2 BANKRUPTCY
10.2.1 TERMINATION ABSENT CURE lf the Subcontractor files a petition under the Bankruptcy
Code, this Agreement shall terminate if the Subcontractor or the Subcontractor's trustee rejects the
Agreement or, if there has been a default, and the Subcontractor is unable to give adequate
assurance that the Subcontractor will perform as required by this Agreement or otherwise is unable
to comply with the requirements for assuming this Agreement under the applicable provisions of the
Bankruptcy Code.
10.2.2 INTERIM REMEDIES lf the Subcontractor is not performing in accordance with the Progress
Schedule at the time a petition in bankruptcy is filed, or at any subsequent time, the Constructor,
while awaiting the decision of the Subcontractor or its trustee to reject or to assume this Agreement
and provide adequate assurance of its ability to perform, may avail itself of such remedies under
this article as are reasonably necessary to maintain the Progress Schedule. The Constructor may
offset against any sums due or to become due the Subcontractor all costs incurred in pursuing any
of the remedies provided including, but not limited to, reasonable overhead, profit, and attorneys'
fees. The Subcontractor shall be liable for the payment of any amount by which costs incurred may
exceed the unpaid balance of the Subcontract Amount.
10.3 SUSPENSION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Should the Owner suspend the Work or any part
which includes the Subcontract Work for the convenience of the Owner and such suspension is not due
to any act or omission of the Constructor, or any other person or entity for whose acts or omissions the
Constructor may be liable, the Constructor shall notify the Subcontractor in writing and, upon receiving
notification, the Subcontractor shall immediately suspend the Subcontract Work. To the extent provided
for under the prime agreement and to the extent the Constructor recovers such on the Subcontractor's
behalf, the Subcontract Amount and the Subcontract Time shall be equitably adjusted by Subcontract
Change Order for the cost and delay resulting from any such suspension. The Constructor agrees to
cooperate with the Subcontractor, at the Subcontractor's expense, in the prosecution of any
Subcontractor claim arising out of an Owner suspension and to permit the Subcontractor to prosecute the
claim, in the name of the Constructor, for the use and benefit of the Subcontractor.
10.4 TERMINATION BY OWNER Should the Owner terminate its contract with the Constructor or any
part which includes the Subcontract Work, the Constructor shall notify the Subcontractor in writing within
three (3) Business Days of the termination and, upon written notification, this Agreement shall be
terminated and the Subcontractor shall immediately stop the Subcontract Work, follow all of the
Constructor's instructions, and mitigate all costs. ln the event of Owner termination, the Constructor's
liability to the Subcontractor shall be limited to the extent of the Constructor's recovery on the
Subcontractor's behalf under the Subcontract Documents, except as otherwise provided in this
Agreement. The Constructor agrees to cooperate with the Subcontractor, at the Subcontractor's expense,
in the prosecution of any Subcontractor claim arising out of the Owner termination and to permit the
Subcontractor to prosecute the claim, in the name of the Constructor, for the use and benefit of the
Subcontractor, or assign the claim to the Subcontractor. lf the Owner terminates the Constructor for
28
ConsensusDocsrm 750 - Standard Agreement Betwoen Constructor and Subcontractor -@2011, Revised March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
lhe ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged. Purchase of the document permits lhe user to print one contract for each party to the contract wthin one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution to palies in direct connecton with this contract Any other uses are striclly
prohibted Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
cause, through no fault of the Subcontractor, the Subcontractor shall be entitled to recover from the
Constructor its reasonable costs arising from the termination of this Agreement, including reasonable
overhead and profit on Work not performed.
10.5 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF THIS AGREEMENT The Constructor's contingent assignment of
this Agreement to the Owner, as provided in the prime agreement, is effective when the Owner has
terminated the prime agreement for cause and has accepted the assignment by notifying the
Subcontractor in writing. This contingent assignment is subject to the prior rights of a surety that may be
obligated under the Constructor's bond, if any. The Subcontractor consents to such assignment and
agrees to be bound to the assignee by the terms of this Agreement, provided that the assignee fulfills the
obligations of the Constructor.
10.6 SUSPENSION BY CONSTRUCTOR The Constructor may order the Subcontractor in writing to
suspend all or any part of the Subcontract Work for such period of time as may be determined to be
appropriate for the convenience of the Constructor. Phased Work or interruptions of the Subcontract
Work for short periods of time shall not be considered a suspension. The Subcontractor, after receipt of
the Constructor's order, shall notify the Constructor in writing in sufficient time to permit the Constructor to
provide timely notice to the Owner in accordance with the prime agreement of the effect of such order
upon the Subcontract Work. The Subcontract Amount or Subcontract Time shall be adjusted by
Subcontract Change Order for any increase in the time or cost of performance of this Agreement caused
by such suspension. No claim under this section shall be allowed for any costs incurred more than
fourteen (14) Days prior to the Subcontractor's notice to the Constructor. Neither the Subcontract Amount
nor the Progress Schedule shall be adjusted for any suspension, to the extent that performance would
have been suspended, due in whole or in part to the fault or negligence of the Subcontractor or by a
cause for which the Subcontractor would have been responsible. The Subcontract Amount shall not be
adjusted for any suspension to the extent that performance would have been suspended by a cause for
which the Subcontractor would have been entitled only to a time extension under this Agreement.
10.7 WRONGFUL EXERCISE lf the Constructor wrongfully exercises any option under this article, the
Constructor shall be liable to the Subcontractor solely for the reasonable value of Subcontract Work
performed by the Subcontractor prior to the Constructor's wrongful action, including reasonable overhead
and profit on the Subcontract Work performed, less prior payments made, together with reasonable
overhead and profit on the Subcontract Work not executed, and other reasonable costs incurred by
reason of such action.
10.8 TERMINATION BY SUBCONTRACTOR lf the Subcontract Work has been stopped for thirty (30)
Days because the Subcontractor has not received progress payments or has been abandoned or
suspended for an unreasonable period of time not due to the fault or neglect of the Subcontractor, then
the Subcontractor may terminate this Agreement upon giving the Constructor seven (7) Days'written
notice. Upon such termination, the Subcontractor shall be entitled to recover from the Constructor
payment for all Subcontract Work satisfactorily performed but not yet paid for, including reasonable
overhead, profit, and attorneys'fees, costs, and expenses. However, if the Owner has not paid the
Constructor for the satisfactory performance of the Subcontract Work through no fault or neglect of the
Constructor, and the Subcontractor terminates this Agreement under this article because it has not
received corresponding progress payments, the Subcontractor shall be entitled to recover from the
Constructor, within a reasonable period of time following termination, payment for all Subcontract Work
executed and for any proven loss, cost, or expense in connection with the Work, including all
demobilization costs plus reasonable overhead and profit on Subcontract Work not performed. The
Constructor's liability for any other damages claimed by the Subcontractor under such circumstances
29
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructorand SubcontractoJ -@20'11, Revisod March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modifications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation wth legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to print one conlracl for each party to the contract within one project only You
may only make copies of finalized documenls for distribulion to parties in direct conneclon with this contract Any other uses are strictly
prohbted Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
shall be extinguished by the Constructor pursuing said damages and claims against the Owner on the
Subcontractor's behalf as provided for in sections 10.3 and 10.4.
ARTICLE I1 DISPUTE MITIGATION AND RESOLUTION
1 1.1 WORK CONTINUATION AND PAYMENT Unless othenvise agreed in writing, the Subcontractor
shall continue the Subcontract Work and maintain the Progress Schedule during any dispute resolution
proceedings. lf the Subcontractor continues to perform, the Constructor shall continue to make payments
in accordance with this Agreement
11.2 DISPUTES BETWEEN CONSTRUCTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR lf the dispute resolution
provisions between the Constructor and the Owner in the Subcontract Documents do not permit
consolidation or
joinder
with disputes of third parties, such as the Subcontractor, or if such dispute is only
between the Constructor and the Subcontractor, then the Parties shall submit the dispute to the dispute
resolution procedures set forth in the section below.
1 1,3 CONSTRUCTOR-SUBCONTRACTOR DISPUTE RESOLUTION
1 1.3.1 DIRECT DISCUSSIONS lf the Parties cannot reach resolution on a matter relating to or
arising out of the Agreement, the Parties shall endeavor to reach resolution through good faith direct
discussions between the Parties' representatives, who shall possess the necessary authority to
resolve such matter and who shall record the date of first discussions. lf the Parties' representatives
are not able to resolve such matter within five (5) business Days, the Parties' representatives shall
immediately inform senior executives of the Parties in writing that resolution was not affected. Upon
receipt of such notice, the senior executives of the Parties shall meet within five (5) business Days
to endeavor to reach resolution. lf the matter remains unresolved after fifteen (15) Days from the
date of first discussion, the Parties shall submit such matter to the dispute resolution procedures
selected in ARTICLE 1 1.
1 1.3.2 Deleted.
1 1.3.3 BINDING DISPUTE RESOLUTION lf the matter is unresolved after Direct Discussion, the
Parties shall submit the matter to the binding dispute resolution procedure selected below:
Litigation in either the state or federal court having
jurisdiction
of the matter in the location of
the Project.
1 1.4 COST OF DISPUTE RESOLUTION The costs of any binding dispute resolution procedure and
reasonable attorneys' fees shall be borne by the non-prevailing Party, as determined by the adjudicator of
the dispute.
I 1.5 VENUE The venue for any binding dispute resolution proceeding shall be the location of the Project
unless the Parties agree on a mutually convenient location.
1 1.6 MULTIPARTY PROCEEDING All parties necessary to resolve a matter agree to be parties to the
same dispute resolution proceeding. To the extent disputes between the Constructor and Subcontractor
involve in whole or in part disputes between the Constructor and the Owner, disputes between the
Subcontractor and the Constructor shall be decided by the same tribunal and in the same forum as
disputes between the Constructor and the Owner.
30
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Standard Agreomsnt Between Constructor and Subcontracto -@2O11, Revsed March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modfications can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultalion with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the documenl permts the user to print one contract for each party to the contract within one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution lo parties in direct conneclion with ths contac{ Any other uses are strictly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
1 1.7 NO LIMITATION OF RIGHTS OR REMEDIES Nothing in this article shall limit any rights or remedies
not expressly waived by the Subcontractor which the Subcontractor may have under lien laws or payment
bonds.
ARTICLE 12 MISCELLANEOUS
12.1 EXTENT OF AGREEMENT Except as specifically as provided, this Agreement is for the exclusive
benefit of the Parties, and not for the benefit of any third party. This Agreement represents the entire and
integrated agreement between the Parties, and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or
agreements, either written or oral.
12.2 ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACT WORK Except as provided in section 8.10, the Subcontractor
shall neither assign the whole nor any part of the Subcontract Work without prior written approval of the
Constructor.
12.3 GOVERNING LAW This Agreement shall be governed by the Law in effect at the location of the
Project.
12.4 SEVERABILITY The partial or complete invalidity of any one or more provisions of this Agreement
shall not affect the validity or continuing force and effect of any other provtston.
12.5 NO WAIVER OF PERFORMANCE The failure of either Party to insist, in any one or more instances,
upon the performance of any of the terms, covenants, or conditions of this Agreement, or to exercise any
of its rights, shall not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment of term, covenant, condition, or right with
respect to further performance.
12.6 TITLES The titles given to the articles and sections of this Agreement are for ease of reference only
and shall not be relied upon or cited for any other purpose.
12.7 JOINT DRAFTING The Parties expressly agree that this Agreement was
jointly
drafted, and that they
both had opportunity to negotiate its terms and to obtain the assistance of counsel in reviewing its terms
prior to execution. Therefore, this Agreement shall be construed neither against nor in favor of either
Party, but shall be construed in a neutral manner.
ARTICLE I3 SUBCONTRACT DOGUMENTS
13.1 INTERPRETATION OF SUBCONTRACT DOCUMENTS
13.1 .1 The drawings and specifications are complementary. lf Work is shown only on one but not on
the other, the Subcontractor shall perform the Subcontract Work as though fully described on both
consistent with the Subcontract Documents and reasonably inferable from them.
13.1 .2 ln case of conflicts between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall govern
ln any case of omissions or errors in figures, drawings, or specifications, the Subcontractor shall
immediately submit the matter to the Constructor for clarification by the Owner. The Owner's
clarifications are final and binding on all Parties, subject to an equitable adjustment in Subcontract
Time or Subcontract Amount pursuant to dispute mitigation and resolution.
31
ConsensusDocsrM 750 - Stendard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontractot -@2011, Revsed March 2012. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARO LANGUAGE, and a report of modifcalions can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review of the entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user to print one contract for each party to the contraci wlhn one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documenls for distribution to perties n drect connection with this contract Any other uses are striclly
prohibited Content Secure lD: D8I47345-ILB4
13.1.3 Where figures are given, they shall be preferred to scaled dimensions.
13.1 .4 Unless otherwise specifically defined in this Agreement, any terms that have well-known
technical or trade meanings shall be interpreted in accordance with their well-known meanings.
13.1 .5 ln case of any inconsistency, conflict or ambiguity among the Subcontract Documents, the
documents shall govern in the following order: (a) Subcontract Change Orders and written
amendments to this Agreement; (b) the ConsensusDocs 750 Agreement as modified by the Parties;
(c) subject to subsection 13.1 .2 the drawings (large scale governing over small scale), specifrcations
and addenda issued prior to the execution of this Agreement; (d) information furnished by the
Owner that is identified as a Subcontract Document; (e) other documents listed in this Agreement.
Among categories of documents having the same order of precedence, the term or provision that
includes the latest date shall control. lnformation identified in one Contract Document and not
identified in another shall not be considered a conflict or inconsistency.
CONSTRUCTOR
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, lnc.
BY:
PRINT NAME Rick W. Davis
PRINT TITLE: Vice President
WITNESS
NAME
TITLE
SUBCONTRACTOR:
BY:
PRINT
PRINT TITLE:
WITNESS
NAME
TITLE
END OF DOCUMENT
32
ConsensusDocsrt 750 - Standard Agreement Between Constructor and Subcontracto -
@
2011, Revsed March 201 2. THIS
DOCUMENT MAY HAVE BEEN MODIFIED FROM THE STANDARD LANGUAGE, and a report of modificalions can be generated through
the ConsensusDocs platform Consultation with legal and insurance counsel and careful review ofthe entire documents are strongly
encouraged Purchase of the document permits the user lo print one contract for each party to the conlracl withn one project only You
may only make copies of fnalized documents for distribution to parties in direct conneclon with this contrect Any other uses are strictly
prohbted. Content Secure lD: D8147345-1184
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD





Agreement

Section 00 52 00
00 52 00
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_52_00_COVER.DOCX

END OF SECTION 00 52 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD





Agreement

Section 00 52 00
00 52 00
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_52_00_COVER.DOCX















THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Performance Bond

Section 00 61 14
00 61 14 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_61_14.DOC
SECTION 00 61 14 PERFORMANCE BOND

Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Construction Manager or other party shall be considered plural where
applicable.

Contractor (Name and Address):




Surety (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):




CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
1515 Arboretum Drive, SE
Grand Rapids, MI 49546


CONTRACT

Date (Date of Notice of Award): ________________________________
Amount: ________________________________
Description: Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Traverse City, Michigan

BOND

Date (Not earlier than Contract Date): _____________________
Amount: _____________________
Modifications to this Bond Form: _____________________

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the following terms hereof, do each cause this
Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative.


CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: (Corp. Seal)

Signature: Signature:

Name and Title: Name and Title:
(Attach Power of Attorney)

IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list
(Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in Michigan. Attach Power of Attorney for those
signatures executing for the Surety, certifying authority to bind the Surety as of the date of the Bond:

1. Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns to Construction Manager for the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein
by reference.

2. If Contractor performs the Contract, the Surety and Contractor have no obligation under this Bond, except to
participate in conferences as provided in paragraph 3.1.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Performance Bond

Section 00 61 14
00 61 14 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_61_14.DOC
3. If there is no Construction Manager Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

3.1. Construction Manager has notified Contractor and the Surety at the addresses described in
Paragraph 10 below, that Construction Manager is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has
requested and attempted to arrange a conference with Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than 15
days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Contract. If Construction Manager,
Contractor and the Surety agree, Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Contract, but
such an agreement shall not waive Construction Manager's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor
Default; and

3.2. Construction Manager has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated Contractor's right to
complete the Contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than 20 days after Contractor
and the Surety have received notice as provided in paragraph 3.1; and

3.3. Construction Manager has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to:

3.3.1. The Surety in accordance with the terms of the Contract;

3.3.2. Another contractor selected pursuant to paragraph 4.3 to perform the Contract.

4. When Construction Manager has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the
Surety's expense take one of the following actions:

4.1. Arrange for Contractor, with consent of Construction Manager, to perform and complete the
Construction Contract; or

4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Contract itself, through its agents or through independent
contractors; or

4.3. Obtain Bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to Construction Manager
for a contract for performance and completion of the Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for
execution by Construction Manager and Contractor selected with Construction Manager's concurrence, to be
secured with performance and payment Bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the Bonds issued
on the Contract, and pay to Construction Manager the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in
excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by Construction Manager resulting from Contractor's
Default; or

4.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with
reasonable promptness under the circumstances;

4.4.1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to Construction
Manager and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to
Construction Manager; or

4.4.2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify Construction Manager citing reasons therefor.

5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be
deemed to be in default on this Bond 15 days after receipt of an additional written notice from Construction Manager
to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and Construction Manager shall be
entitled to enforce any remedy available to Construction Manager. If the Surety proceeds as provided in
Subparagraph 4.4, and Construction Manager refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in
whole or in part, without further notice Construction Manager shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to
Construction Manager.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Performance Bond

Section 00 61 14
00 61 14 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_61_14.DOC
6. After Construction Manager has terminated Contractor's right to complete the Contract, and if the Surety elects
to act under paragraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to Construction Manager shall
not be greater than those of Contractor under the Contract, and the responsibilities of Construction Manager to the
Surety shall not be greater than those of Construction Manager under the Contract. To a limit of the amount of this
Bond, but subject to commitment by Construction Manager of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs
and damages on the Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for:

6.1. The responsibilities of Contractor for correction of defective Work and completion of the Contract.

6.2. Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from Contractor's Default, and
resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and

6.3. Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract, actual damages
caused by delayed performance or non-performance of Contractor.

7. The Surety shall not be liable to Construction Manager or others for obligations of Contractor that are
unrelated to the Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any
such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than
Construction Manager or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors.

8. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Contract or to related
subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in
the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located and shall be instituted within 2 years after Contractor
Default or within 2 years after Contractor ceased working or within 2 years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform
its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by
law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be
applicable.

10. Notice to the Surety, Construction Manager or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address indicated
on the signature page.

11. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where
the Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall
be deemed deleted here from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be
deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a
common law bond.

12. Definitions:

12.1. Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by Construction Manager to Contractor
under the Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to Contractor of any
amounts received or to be received by Construction Manager in settlement of insurance or other Claims for
damages to which Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of
Contractor under the Contract.

12.2. Contract: The agreement between Construction Manager and Contractor identified on the signature
page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

12.3. Contractor Default: Failure of Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or
otherwise to comply with the terms of the Contract.

12.4. Construction Manager Default: Failure of Construction Manager, which has neither been remedied
nor waived, to pay Contractor as required by the Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other
terms thereof.


END OF SECTION 00 61 14
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Performance Bond

Section 00 61 14
00 61 14 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_61_14.DOC
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Bond

Section 00 61 15
00 61 15 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_61_15.DOC
SECTION 00 61 15 PAYMENT BOND


Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Construction Manager or other party shall be considered plural where
applicable.

Contractor (Name and Address):




Surety (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):




CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc.
1515 Arboretum Drive, SE
Grand Rapids, MI 49546


CONTRACT

Date (Date of Notice of Award): ________________________________
Amount: ________________________________
Description: Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Traverse City, Michigan

BOND

Date (Not earlier than Contract Date): _____________________
Amount: _____________________
Modifications to this Bond Form: _____________________

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the following terms hereof, do each cause this
Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative.

Contractor AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

Contractor AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: (Corp. Seal)

Signature: Signature:

Name and Title: Name and Title:
(Attach Power of Attorney)

IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list
(Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in Michigan. Attach Power of Attorney for those
signatures executing for the Surety, certifying authority to bind the Surety as of the date of the Bond.

1. Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns to Construction Manager to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the
performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Bond

Section 00 61 15
00 61 15 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_61_15.DOC
2. With respect to Construction Manager, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor:

2.1. promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and

2.2. defends, indemnifies and holds harmless Construction Manager from all claims, demands, liens or
suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the
Contract, provided Construction Manager has promptly notified Contractor and the Surety (at the addresses
described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims,
demands, liens or suits to Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Construction Manager Default.

3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor promptly makes payment, directly
or indirectly, for all sums due.

4. The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until:

4.1. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with Contractor have given notice to the
Surety (at the addresses described in paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Construction
Manager, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the
claim.

4.2. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with Contractor:

4.2.1. Have furnished written notice to Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to
Construction Manager, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or
equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the
name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done
or performed; and

4.2.2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from Contractor, or not received within
30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from Contractor by which Contractor had
indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and

4.3.3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety
and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Construction Manager, stating that a claim is being made under
this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to Contractor.

5. If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by Construction Manager to Contractor or to the Surety, that is
sufficient compliance.

6. When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's
expense take the following actions:

6.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to Construction Manager, within 45 days after receipt of
the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are
disputed.

6.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

7. The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be
credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

8. Amounts owed by Construction Manager to Contractor under the Contract shall be used for the performance
of the Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Performance Bond. By Contractor furnishing and Construction
Manager accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by Contractor in the performance of the Contract are
dedicated to satisfy obligations of Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to Construction Manager's
priority to use the funds for the completion of the Work.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Bond

Section 00 61 15
00 61 15 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_61_15.DOC
9. The Surety shall not be liable to Construction Manager, Claimants or others for obligations of Contractor that
are unrelated to the Contract. Construction Manager shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any
Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, give notices on behalf
of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Contract or to related
subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent
jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located or after the expiration of one year from the
date (1) on which the Claimant give the notice required by paragraph 4.1 or paragraph 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last
labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the
Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by
law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be
applicable.

12. Notice to the Surety, Construction Manager or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the addresses
indicated on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, Construction Manager or Contractor, however
accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address indicated on the signature page.

13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where
the Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall
be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed
incorporated herein. The intent is, that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory Bond and not as a common law
bond.

14. Upon request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, Contractor shall
promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

15. DEFINITIONS:

15.1. Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with a Subcontractor of
Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of Contract. The intent of this
Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas,
power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Contract, architectural and
engineering services required for performance of the Work of Contractor and Contractor's Subcontractors, and
all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or
equipment were furnished.

15.2. Contract: The agreement between Construction Manager and Contractor identified on the signature
page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

15.3. Construction Manager Default: Failure of Construction Manager, which has neither been remedied
nor waived, to pay Contractor as required by the Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other
terms thereof.


END OF SECTION 00 61 15
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Bond

Section 00 61 15
00 61 15 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_61_15.DOC
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Certificate of Substantial Completion

Section 00 65 16
00 65 16 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_65_16.DOC
SECTION 00 65 16 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION


Date of Issuance:

Construction Manager:

Contractor:

Contract: Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to the following
specified parts thereof:

.

The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Construction
Manager, Contractor and Engineer, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially complete in accordance
with the Contract Documents on:


Date of Substantial Completion

A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the
failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents. The items in the tentative list shall be completed or corrected by Contractor within
10 days of the above Date of Substantial Completion.

The responsibilities between Construction Manager and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat,
utilities, insurance and warranties and guarantees shall be as follows:

Construction Manager:



Contractor:



The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate:

1. List of items to be completed or corrected before final payment.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Certificate of Substantial Completion

Section 00 65 16
00 65 16 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_65_16.DOC
This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a
release of Contractors obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Executed by Construction Manager on
Date


Construction Manager

By:
(Authorized Signature)


Contractor accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on
Date


Contractor

By:
(Authorized Signature)


END OF SECTION 00 65 16

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Affidavit and Consent of Surety

Section 00 65 26
00 65 26 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_65_26.DOC
SECTION 00 65 26 AFFIDAVIT AND CONSENT OF SURETY


STATE OF MICHIGAN )
) ss.
COUNTY OF )


The undersigned Contractor, being duly sworn, deposes and says that he entered into an Agreement (Contract) with
Fishbeck, Thompson, Carr & Huber, Inc. (Construction Manager), on the _____ day of ________________, 20___,
for the performance of certain Work generally described as follows: Hillshire Brands Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications

Contractor further says that the Work under the terms of the Contract has been completed and all sums due to
Contractors, Subcontractors, Suppliers and laborers with whom Contractor has contracted for performance under the
Contract have been paid in full.

Furthermore, in consideration of final payment under the Contract, Contractor hereby waives and releases any and all
claims or rights which Contractor may have in connection with the Contract against Owner or the premises upon
which the Work was performed, and agrees to indemnify Owner against any and all such claims or rights which may
be asserted by Contractors, Subcontractors, Suppliers or laborers with whom Contractor has contracted for
performance under the Contract.


Signed in the presence of:


Contractor*


Signature


Name and Title*


Subscribed and sworn to before me this ______ day of ________________________, 20___



Notary Public

My commission expires: County

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Affidavit and Consent of Surety

Section 00 65 26
00 65 26 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\00_65_26.DOC
CONSENT OF SURETY

The undersigned, as Surety on the Contract, hereby consents to the making of final payment to the Contractor under
the Contract.


Date: , 20___
Surety Company*


Attorney-in-Fact (Signature)


Name and Title*


*Typed or printed in ink.


(Attach copy of power of attorney certified to date of consent.)


END OF SECTION 00 65 26

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Summary of Work

Section 01 11 00
01 11 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_11_00.DOCX
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work covered by the Contract Documents comprises construction of a building addition to an existing
pump building, as well as replacement of existing pieces of process equipment for Hillshire Brands located
in Traverse City, Michigan.
B. The Work includes the following major items:
1. Mechanical.
2. Electrical.
3. Masonry.
4. Demolition.
5. Instrumentation and Controls.
6. Sitework.
7. Finishes.
C. Drawings and Specifications: For multiple-prime Contracts:
1. Drawings and Specifications which apply to specific contracts are so indicated. All Drawings,
Specifications and other Contract Documents which are not identified as pertaining to only one
Contract apply to all contracts.
1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. Construct the Work of this Contract under a single lump sum Contract.
1.4 GENERAL
A. Imperative Language: These Specifications (Divisions 01 through 49) are written in the imperative and
abbreviated form. This imperative language of the technical specifications is directed at Subcontractor
unless specifically noted otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting "shall", "shall be"
and similar mandatory phrases by inference in the same manner as they are applied to notes on Drawings.
The words "shall", "shall be" and similar mandatory phrases shall be supplied by inference where a colon (:)
is used within sentences or phrases. Except as worded to the contrary, fulfill (perform) all indicated
requirements whether stated in the imperative or otherwise.
B. Related Sections: Some Sections of these Specifications (Divisions 01 through 49) may include a
paragraph titled "Related Sections". This paragraph is an aid to the Project Manual user and is not intended
to include all Sections which may be related. It is Subcontractor's obligation to coordinate all Sections
whether indicated under "Related Sections" or not.
C. Reference to General Conditions: In Divisions 02 thru 49, a reference to the General Conditions shall be
taken to mean the Agreement, and includes by inference all amendments or supplements to the Contract.
1.5 WORK BY OWNER
A. Not Applicable.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Summary of Work

Section 01 11 00
01 11 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_11_00.DOCX
1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Construction Manager has procured process items that will be installed under this Contract.
B. Construction Manager has contracted for the installation of a bolted stainless steel tank on a concrete
foundation.
C. Construction Manager has contracted for installation of 4 new blower VFDs.
D. Coordinate the schedule of work under other contracts with Construction Manager.
1.7 PROCUREMENT CONTRACTS
A. The Construction Manager has executed a Procurement Contract for the following Work:
1. Furnishing and delivery of raw wastewater pumps.
2. Furnishing and delivery of jet aeration equipment.
3. Furnishing, delivery, and installation of bolted steel tank.
B. Installation is by the Subcontractor, except for the bolted steel tank. This is to be installed by the tank
Contractor.
C. Refer to the following Sections for technical specifications of the material and installation requirements:
1. Division 43 Section Screw Centrifugal Pumps.
2. Division 46 Section Aeration Equipment.
D. Shop prime painting coats and surface preparation will be performed by the Supplier in accordance with the
Procurement Contracts.
E. Field finish painting, touch-up, and surface preparation shall be performed by painting Subcontractor in
accordance with Division 09 Section Painting.
F. Delivery and completion dates have been established in the contracts to be assigned and are incorporated
in the overall Project schedule.
1.8 BID CATEGORY DESCRIPTIONS
A. Bid Category 6-1 General Trades: This bid category includes, but is not limited to, all labor, material, tools,
equipment, coordination and supervision to complete all work as indicated on the drawings and as specified
in the following sections outlined below. The bid category includes all specification sections of BIDDING
REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE
CONTRACT AND THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
02 41 19 - Selective Demolition
03 30 03 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry
05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
06 16 00 - Sheathing
06 17 53 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses
06 20 13 - Exterior Finish Carpentry
07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation
07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles
07 42 13.13 - Formed Metal Ceiling Panels
07 42 13.53 - Metal Soffit Panels
07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 92 00 - Joint Sealants
08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 71 00 - Door Hardware
08 80 00 - Glazing
10 14 24 - Safety Equipment and Signs
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Summary of Work

Section 01 11 00
01 11 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_11_00.DOCX
32 13 14 - Concrete Walks
32 15 00 - Aggregate Surfacing
32 92 00 - Turf and Grasses
1. Clarifications:
a. Includes all equipment pads (mechanical, process, and electrical).
b. Install all anchor bolts supplied by others.
c. Coordinate roof openings with other trades.
d. Install embedded items supplied by others.
e. Perform all demolition as noted in Architectural Demo Notes shown on Sheet D-1.
f. Perform work noted in Keynote 3 on Sheet C-1.
g. Perform work noted in Keynotes 2, 15 and 16 on Sheet C-2.
2. Excludes:
a. Concrete foundation and slab for equalization tank.
b. Concrete testing.
c. All excavation.
B. Bid Category 9-1 Painting: This bid category includes, but is not limited to, all labor, material, tools,
equipment, coordination and supervision to complete all work as indicated on the drawings and as specified
in the following sections outlined below. The bid category includes all specification sections of BIDDING
REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE
CONTRACT AND THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
09 91 00 - Painting
1. Clarifications:
a. Prepare all surfaces per manufacturers recommendations.
b. Includes touch-up of all areas prior to final Owner acceptance.
c. Perform painting work noted in Keynotes 1, 2, 10, and 14 on Sheet A-1.
d. Perform painting work noted in Keynotes 11 and 17 on Sheet A-2.
2. Excludes:
a. Concrete sealers and/or hardeners.
b. Masonry cleaning.
C. Bid Category 23-1 Mechanical: This bid category includes, but is not limited to, all labor, material, tools,
equipment, coordination and supervision to complete all work as indicated on the drawings and as specified
in the following sections outlined below. The bid category includes all specification sections of BIDDING
REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE
CONTRACT AND THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
02 41 19 - Selective Demolition
02 42 13 - Removal of Existing Equipment
02 83 00 - Sewer Bypass Pumping
10 14 25 - Process Equipment Identification
22 05 00 - General Plumbing Provisions
22 05 06 - Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing
22 05 09 - Copper Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing
22 05 23 - General Duty Valves for Plumbing
22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 05 31 - Penetrations for Plumbing
22 05 73 - Testing and Cleaning of Plumbing Systems
22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 10 00 - Plumbing Piping and Pumps
23 01 00 - Operation and Maintenance of HVAC Systems
23 05 00 - General HVAC Provisions
23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
23 05 31 - Penetrations for HVAC
23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
23 33 13 - Dampers
23 34 23 - HVAC Power Ventilators
23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets
23 82 50 - Electric Convection Heating Units
33 90 10 - Site Process Piping Systems
40 05 13 - Process Piping Systems
40 05 23 - Process Valves
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Summary of Work

Section 01 11 00
01 11 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_11_00.DOCX
43 21 00 - Horizontal Non-clog Centrifugal Pumps
43 21 14 - Screw Centrifugal Pumps (Installation of Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
46 51 17.01 - Aeration Equipment (Installation of Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
1. Clarifications:
a. Include all fees and permits as required for your trade.
b. Coordinate concrete equipment pad sizes with Bid Category 6-1 - General Trades.
c. Perform all process and mechanical demolition as noted in the Demolition Notes shown on
Sheet D-1.
d. Perform work noted in Keynotes 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 on Sheet C-2.
e. Install procured process equipment.
f. Coordinate with subcontractors providing Work under Bid Categories 26-1 Electrical and
40-1 Instrumentation and Controls for Process Systems.
g. See Division of Work Table for Bid Categories 23-1, 26-1, and 40-1.
h. Include all temporary bypass pumping as needed to perform your work.
D. Bid Category 26-1 Electrical: This bid category includes, but is not limited to, all labor, material, tools,
equipment, coordination and supervision to complete all work as indicated on the drawings and as specified
in the following sections outlined below. The bid category includes all specification sections of BIDDING
REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE
CONTRACT AND THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
02 41 19 - Selective Demolition
26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical
26 05 20 - Conductors and Cables - 600V and Below
26 05 27 - Grounding and Bonding
26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 34 - Raceways for Electrical Systems
26 05 35 - Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems
26 05 73 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices
26 24 19 - Motor-Control Centers
26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
26 28 00 - Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices
26 28 20 - Enclosed Switches
26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers
26 29 23 - Variable Frequency Motor Controllers
26 43 05 - Surge Protective Devices
26 50 00 - Lighting
40 05 33 - Heat Tracing Systems
1. Clarifications:
a. Provide temporary power service for construction, 200 amp minimum.
b. Disconnect and remove power from Construction Managers trailer at end of Project.
c. Includes all fees and permits as required for your trade.
d. Includes all testing, start-up and training work to insure proper performance of electrical
systems.
e. Furnish sleeves to be installed in concrete foundations.
f. Includes fire-resistant joint sealants for all electrically associated penetrations.
g. Provide all access doors required but not shown for access to electrical systems.
h. Includes hook up of electrical systems to any process or facility equipment.
i. Coordinate, install and wire all instrumentation and controls furnished in Bid Category 40-1
Instrumentation and Controls for Process Equipment.
j. Coordinate concrete equipment pad sizes with Bid Category 6-1 - General Trades.
k. Perform all electrical demolition work as shown on Sheet D-1.
l. Perform electrical demolition work noted in Keynote 1 on Sheet C-1.
m. Perform work as noted in Keynote 5 on Sheet C-2.
n. Coordinate with subcontractors providing Work under Bid Categories 23-1 Mechanical and
40-1 Instrumentation and Controls for Process Systems.
o. See Division of Work Table for Bid Categories 23-1, 26-1, and 40-1.
p. See I-Sheets for additional Work.
2. Excludes:
a. Concrete pads required for electrical equipment, transformers, and housekeeping.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Summary of Work

Section 01 11 00
01 11 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_11_00.DOCX
E. Bid Category 31-1 Earthwork and Site Utilities: This bid category includes, but is not limited to, all labor,
material, tools, equipment, coordination and supervision to complete all work as indicated on the drawings
and as specified in the following sections outlined below. The bid category includes all specification sections
of BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF
THE CONTRACT AND THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
31 10 13 - Site Preparation
31 22 00 - Grading
31 23 03 - Excavation and Fill for Utilities
31 23 06 - Excavation and Fill for Structures
31 25 00 - Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
1. Clarifications:
a. Protect all trees, landscaping and existing structures within the construction zone.
b. Clean roads of any dirt or debris during the course of this contract, on an as needed basis or as
directed by the Construction Manager.
c. Protect all open excavations.
d. Clear/grub site as necessary for performance of your work.
e. Strip and stockpile topsoil on site as directed by Construction Manager for reuse as necessary.
f. Obtain SESC permit and implement and maintain soil erosion, sedimentation and stabilization
control as directed within the permit.
g. Removal of temporary erosion control items at completion of project or as directed by permit.
h. Provide dust control as needed or as directed by the Construction Manager throughout the
duration of this contract.
i. Call Miss Dig prior to starting any work.
j. All earthwork and fine grading required to balance the site to elevations indicated on the
drawings and to blend into adjacent areas. Additional fill is the responsibility of this bid category.
k. Include a $5,000 allowance in the Base Bid for unknown quantity of landscape irrigation repair.
l. Perform work as noted in Keynote 1 on Sheet C-1 (except for electrical service demolition).
m. Perform work as noted in Keynotes 2, 4, 5, and 6 on Sheet C-1.
n. Perform work as noted in Keynotes 1, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18, 19, and 20 on Sheet C-2.
2. Excludes:
a. Site concrete (walks, slabs, etc.).
F. Bid Category 40-1 Instrumentation and Controls for Process Systems: This bid category includes, but is
not limited to, all labor, material, tools, equipment, coordination and supervision to complete all work as
indicated on the drawings and as specified in the following sections outlined below. The bid category
includes all specification sections of BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, AND
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT AND THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
40 90 00 - Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems
1. Clarifications:
a. Coordinate with subcontractors providing Work under Bid Categories 23-1 Mechanical and
26-1 Electrical.
b. See Division of Work Table for Bid Categories 23-1, 26-1, and 40-1.
c. See E-Sheets for additional Work.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Summary of Work

Section 01 11 00
01 11 00 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_11_00.DOCX
Division of Work Table for Bid Categories 23-1, 26-1, and 40-1
Work Item
Electrical
Contractor
Mechanical
Contractor
Systems
Integrator
Strut and associated hardware Furnish and Install
Instrument pipe/floor stands Furnish and Install
Ultrasonic level sensors Install Furnish
Blind flanges, gaskets, and associated
hardware Furnish and Install
Ultrasonic level transmitters Install Furnish
Magnetic flow meter tubes Install Furnish
Grounding rings Bond/Ground Install Furnish
Magnetic flow meter transmitters Install Furnish
DO probes Install Furnish
Extension pipe and mounting hardware Furnish and Install
Cord hangers Furnish and Install
Cord grips Furnish and Install
DO analyzers/transmitters Install Furnish
DO analyzer sun shields Furnish and Install
Pressure switches Install Furnish
Temperature switches Install Furnish
Thermal dispersion flow switches Install Furnish
Conduit Furnish and Install
Wiring Furnish and Install
Terminations Furnish and Install
Instrument backplates Furnish and Install
Demolition of existing instruments As noted on Drawings
Work at existing I/O panels As noted on Drawings As noted on Drawings
Loop checkouts Cooperate/Coordinate Cooperate/Coordinate
Start-up Cooperate/Coordinate Cooperate/Coordinate
1.9 SUBCONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Limit use of premises to allow for Owner occupancy.
B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of the Construction Manager.
C. Where the Contract Documents identify certain site elements within the construction limits, such as
sidewalks, drives, and streets, that must be kept open for public or the Owners use during construction, the
Subcontractor shall be responsible for protection and maintenance of such elements as well.
D. Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent
thereto, all Work at the site shall be restricted to the following hours:
1. Monday Through Friday (Except Legal Holidays): 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m.
2. Saturday, Sundays or legal holidays with written approval of the Owner.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Summary of Work

Section 01 11 00
01 11 00 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_11_00.DOCX
1.10 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner Occupancy During Construction:
1. The Owner will occupy or utilize premises during entire period of construction, for conduct of the
Owners normal operations. Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate the
Owner's operations.
2. Access to Abutting Properties: Provide at all times.
3. Access for Emergency Vehicles:
a. Provide at all times.
b. Provide at least one clear lane during nonwork periods.
4. Fire Hydrants: Provide access to at all times.
5. Do not block fire access routes.
6. Detours and Street Closure:
a. When provided for in the Contract Documents or approved by the Construction Manager.
b. Routes and barricades as indicated or as approved by road authority.
7. Limit parking for construction vehicles to an area designated by the Construction Manager.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OTHER MATERIALS
A. General: All other materials which are not specified herein and are not indicated on the Drawings, but are
required for proper and complete performance of the Work.
B. Procedure:
1. Select new, first quality material.
2. Obtain Construction Manager's review.
3. Provide and install.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE
A. See attached schedule following this Section.


END OF SECTION 01 11 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Staking and Inspection Services

Section 01 12 23
01 12 23 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_12_23.DOC
SECTION 01 12 23 STAKING AND INSPECTION SERVICES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, bidding requirements, and contracting requirements of the Contract, including the Agreement and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes staking and inspection services to be provided by Engineer and others.
1.3 PROJECT LAYOUT
A. Responsibilities:
1. Construction Manager will furnish stakes as follows:
a. For steel process tank:
1) Center of tank and offset stakes.
2) Benchmark for elevation control.
2. Provide Construction Manager 48 hours notice to schedule staking.
B. Expense:
1. Staking described above will be authorized by and paid for by Construction Manager.
2. Restaking or staking in excess of that described above will be at the expense of Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.


END OF SECTION 01 12 23


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Contract Modification Procedures

Section 01 26 00
01 26 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_26_00.DOCX
SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedures for modifying the Contract Documents.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Abbreviation:
1. Request for Information (RFI).
2. Construction Change Directive (CCD).
3. Change Order (CO).
B. Terms:
1. Bulletin: A document delineating possible changes to the Contract Documents which is issued by
Construction Manager/Engineer and requests add or deduct costs from Subcontractor.
2. Construction Change Directive: A written statement to Subcontractor issued on or after the Effective
Date of the Agreement and signed by Construction Manager and recommended by Engineer ordering
an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or
physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies.
3. Change Order: A document signed by Construction Manager and authorizes an addition, deletion, or
revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after
the Effective Date of the Agreement.
4. Request for Information: A written document initiated by Subcontractor which requests clarifications to
items of the Work from Construction Manager/Engineer.
1.4 BULLETIN
A. Procedures: As indicated herein.
B. Changes in Cost:
1. Indicate add or deduct lump sum for each item.
2. Include:
a. Labor.
b. Material.
c. Overhead and profit.
d. All related work.
3. Provide a complete cost breakdown with supporting documentation on attached form.
C. Notification to Construction Manager: Notify Construction Manager in writing if any of the listed items will
cause a change in the Work for which a cost item is not provided in this Bulletin.
D. Submit:
1. One copy.
2. To Construction Manager.
3. On or before due date noted.
E. If Bulletin is accepted, Construction Manager may issue 1 or more Change Orders for some or all items
listed.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Contract Modification Procedures

Section 01 26 00
01 26 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_26_00.DOCX
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Procedures:
1. Construction Manager to initiate the Construction Change Directive and complete the general
information and description of the work portions of the form.
2. Construction Manager will obtain the Engineer/Architect approval signature and submit to the
subcontractor.
3. Subcontractor to complete the pricing and timing information section of the form, sign and date the
form, and return to the Construction Manager.
4. Construction Manager will sign and date the form, retain the original for the file copy and return a copy
to the Subcontractor and Engineer.
5. Upon receipt of the signed Construction Change Directive, Subcontractor is to proceed with the work
in a timely manner.
6. Cost of the work and schedule extensions beyond that stated on the Construction Change Directive
require further approval before proceeding.
7. Upon completion of the work, Subcontractor shall submit all required documentation for the cost of the
Construction Change Directive to the Construction Manager.
8. Construction Manager will review all pricing documentation and approve or may request additional
information.
9. Upon final pricing agreement, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order to modify the Contract
Price and/or schedule to include the Construction Change Directive.
10. Upon receipt of the Change Order, Subcontractor may invoice for the Construction Change Directive
with their next monthly invoice.
11. If the Construction Change Directive does not modify the Contract Price or schedule, then the
Construction Change Directive will be used to document the Construction Change and no Change
Order will be written.
1.6 CHANGE ORDER
A. Procedures:
1. A Change Order is required for any adjustment to the Subcontractors Contract amount and/or time.
2. Construction Manager will complete the Change Order form and submit 2 copies to the Subcontractor
for authorized signature.
3. Subcontractor is to sign both forms and return both copies to the Construction Manager.
4. Construction Manager will sign both forms and return 1 to the Subcontractor and retain 1 for the record
files.
1.7 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
A. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Times not permitted by use of RFIs.
B. Format:
1. At Subcontractors option, generate form or contact Construction Manager for acceptable form.
2. Minimum required content of Subcontractors RFI form:
a. Project name.
b. Name and address of Subcontractor.
c. RFI number.
d. RFI date.
e. Name of initiator.
f. Complete written request, with sketches as required.
g. Signature of initiator.
h. Space for written response by Construction Manager/Engineer, signature and date.
i. Cost impact.
j. Proposed solution.
k. Response date required to maintain Construction Schedule.
C. Procedures:
1. Maintain a log of RFIs, including the RFI date and the date of the response.
2. Do not submit RFIs for information already included in the Contract Documents.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Contract Modification Procedures

Section 01 26 00
01 26 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_26_00.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.


END OF SECTION 01 26 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX
SECTION 01 29 13 PAYMENT PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes submittal to the Construction Manager of Applications for Payment and supporting
documentation as specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Application for Payment: Submit 1 copy on AIA documents G702 and G703.
B. Supporting Documentation for Application for Payment:
1. General:
a. Submit with each application.
b. Submit 1 copy.
2. From Subcontractor:
a. All Applications for Payment:
1) Sworn Statement.
2) Partial Unconditional Waiver: For the amount of the Application for Payment.
b. Second and Subsequent Applications for Payment for Partial Unconditional Waiver: For the
amount paid to date.
1) Sent with payment from Construction Manager.
2) To be signed and returned.
c. Any Application for Payment where the total amount paid will exceed 95% of the Contract Price:
Affidavit and Consent of Surety - Progress Payment.
d. Final Application for Payment:
1) Final Sworn Statement with Full Unconditional Waiver from each sub-subcontractor or
vendor listed on Sworn Statement.
2) Affidavit and Consent of Surety for final payment provided by bonding Company.
e. After Final Payment is Received: Full Unconditional Waiver.
3. From Subcontractors and Suppliers:
a. First Applications for Payment:
1) Sworn Statement.
2) Partial Conditional Waiver: For the amount of payment requested.
b. Second and Subsequent Applications for Payment requires Sworn Statement and Partial
Unconditional Waiver for the amount paid to date.
c. Final Application for Payment: Full Conditional Waiver.
d. After Final Payment is Received: Full Unconditional Waiver.
4. From Laborers Listed on a Sworn Statement:
a. Partial Conditional Waiver: The amount of wages, fringe benefits and/or withholdings indicated
to be currently owing to that laborer.
b. Partial Unconditional Waiver: For the amount paid to date.
c. Full Conditional Waiver: After completion of Work.
d. Full Unconditional Waiver:
1) When discharged or quitting.
2) After receipt of final payment.
5. From All Laborers: Construction Manager legally has the right to require that laborers execute partial
unconditional waivers whenever they are paid. However, because this would put an undue
administrative burden upon Subcontractor and Subcontractors Subcontractors, Construction Manager
is foregoing this right, unless Construction Manager in the future determines that the additional
construction lien protection provided by such waivers is merited on this Project.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX
1.4 COMPLETION OF FORMS
A. General:
1. All forms must be fully executed.
2. Sworn Statement Forms:
a. Include the full legal description of the real property as indicated in the Notice of
Commencement.
b. Do not include materials from inventory which have not been purchased specifically for the
purpose of performing Work under this Contract.
3. Partial Conditional Waiver Amount:
a. Shall not include retainage amount.
b. Same as amount indicated on Sworn Statement.
4. Partial Unconditional Waiver Forms: Circle the appropriate item immediately above the signature line
of the form.
B. Incomplete or incorrect Application for Payment packages will be returned without action.
1.5 FORMS
A. Copies of the forms to be used for the above requirements are attached and include the following:
1. Application and Certificate for Payment (AIA G702 and AIA G703 not attached).
2. Sworn statement.
3. Partial conditional waiver.
4. Full conditional waiver.
5. Partial unconditional waiver.
6. Full unconditional waiver.
B. Alternative forms will not be accepted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX
SWORN STATEMENT

State of Michigan )
) ss.
County of )

(NAME OF DEPONENT (representative of contractor or subcontractor), being sworn, states
the following:

(NAME OF CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR) is the contractor/subcontractor for an
improvement to the following real property in County, Michigan, described as follows:

(insert legal description of property)

The following is a statement of each subcontractor and supplier, and laborer for whom payment
of wages or fringe benefits and withholdings is due but unpaid, with whom the contractor/subcontractor
has contracted/subcontracted for performance under the contract with the owner or lessee of the
property, and the amounts due to the persons as of the date of this statement are correctly and fully set
forth opposite their names:

Name,
address and
telephone
number of
subcontractor,
Supplier, or
laborer
Type of
improvement
furnished
Total
contract
price
Amount
already
paid
Amount
currently
owing
Balance to
complete
(optional)
Amount of
laborer
wager due
but unpaid
Amount of
laborer
fringe
benefits and
withholdings
due but
unpaid








TOTALS:

(Some columns are not applicable to all persons listed)

The contractor has not procured material from, or subcontracted with, any person other than
those set forth and owes no money for the improvement other than the sums set forth.

I make this statement as the (contractor) (subcontractor) or as of the
(contractor) (subcontractor) to represent to the owner or lessee of the property and his or her agents
that the property is free from claims of construction liens, or the possibility of construction liens, except as
specifically set forth in this statement and except for claims of construction liens by laborers that may be
provided under section 109 of the construction lien act, 1980 PA497, MCL 570.1109.

WARNING TO OWNER OR LESSEE: AN OWNER OR LESSEE OF THE PROPERTY MAY
NOT RELY ON THIS SWORN STATEMENT TO AVOID THE CLAIM OF A SUBCONTRACTOR,
SUPPLIER, OR LABORER WHO HAS PROVIDED A NOTICE OF FURNISHING OR A LABORER WHO
MAY PROVIDE A NOTICE OF FURNISHING UNDER SECTION 109 OF THE CONSTRUCTION LIEN
ACT, 1980 PA 497, MCL 570.1109, TO THE DESIGNEE OR TO THE OWNER OR LESSEE IF THE
DESIGNEE IS NOT NAMED OR HAS DIED.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX
ON RECEIPT OF THIS SWORN STATEMENT, THE OWNER OR LESSEE, OR THE OWNER'S
OR LESSEE'S DESIGNEE, MUST GIVE NOTICE OF ITS RECEIPT, EITHER IN WRITING, BY
TELEPHONE, OR PERSONALLY, TO EACH SUBCONTRACTOR, SUPPLIER, AND LABORER WHO
HAS PROVIDED A NOTICE OF FURNISHING UNDER SECTION 109 OR, IF A NOTICE OF
FURNISHING IS EXCUSED UNDER SECTION 108 OR 108A, TO EACH SUBCONTRACTOR,
SUPPLIER, AND LABORER NAMED IN THE SWORN STATEMENT. IF A SUBCONTRACTOR,
SUPPLIER, OR LABORER WHO HAS PROVIDED A NOTICE OF FURNISHING OR WHO IS NAMED IN
THE SWORN STATEMENT MAKES A REQUEST, THE OWNER, LESSEE, OR DESIGNEE SHALL
PROVIDE THE REQUESTER A COPY OF THE SWORN STATEMENT WITHIN 10 BUSINESS DAYS
AFTER RECEIVING THE REQUEST.


Name of Deponent
(NAME OF CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR)

WARNING TO DEPONENT: A PERSON WHO GIVES A FALSE SWORN STATEMENT WITH INTENT
TODEFRAUD IS SUBJECT TO CRIMINAL PENALTIES AS PROVIDED IN SECTION 110 OF THE
CONSTRUCTION LIEN ACT, 1980 PA 497, MCL 570.1110.

Subscribed and sworn to before me on this
_____ day of ____________ 20 .


Notary Public
County, Michigan
Acting in County
My commission expires:



Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX
PARTIAL CONDITIONAL WAIVER
I/we have a contract with
to provide for the improvement to the property described as:

(Put Description of Property Here)

and by signing this waiver waive my/our construction lien to the amount of $
, for labor/materials provided through .
(date)
This waiver, together with all previous waivers, if any, (circle one) does / does not cover
all amounts due to me/us for contract improvement provided through the date shown
above. This waiver is conditioned on actual payment of the amount shown above.
If the owner or lessee of the property or the owner's or lessee's designee has received a
notice of furnishing from me/one of us or if I/we are not required to provide one, and the
owner, lessee, or designee has not received this waiver directly from me/one of us, the
owner, lessee, or designee may not rely upon it without contacting me/one of us, either
in writing, by telephone, or personally, to verify that it is authentic.
Name of Company
Address
Phone Number


By:
Date: Its:


DO NOT SIGN BLANK OR INCOMPLETE FORMS. RETAIN A COPY.


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX
FULL CONDITIONAL WAIVER


My/our contract with
to provide for the improvement of the property described as:

(Put Description of Property Here)

has been fully paid and satisfied. By signing this waiver, all my/our construction lien
rights against the described property are waived and released.

This waiver is conditioned on actual payment of .

If the owner or lessee of the property or the owner's or lessee's designee has received a
notice of furnishing from me/one of us or if I/we are not required to provide one, and the
owner, lessee, or designee has not received this waiver directly from me/one of us, the
owner, lessee, or designee may not rely upon it without contacting me/one of us, either
in writing, by telephone, or personally, to verify that it is authentic.

Name of Company
Address
Phone Number


By:
Date: Its:


DO NOT SIGN BLANK OR INCOMPLETE FORMS. RETAIN A COPY.


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX
PARTIAL UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER
I/we have a contract with
to provide for the improvement to the property described as:

(Put Description of Property Here)

and by signing this waiver waive my/our construction lien to the amount of $
, for labor/materials provided through .
(date)
This waiver, together with all previous waivers, if any, (circle one) does / does not cover
all amounts due to me/us for contract improvement provided through the date shown
above.
If the owner or lessee of the property or the owner's or lessee's designee has received a
notice of furnishing from me/one of us or if I/we are not required to provide one, and the
owner, lessee, or designee has not received this waiver directly from me/one of us, the
owner, lessee, or designee may not rely upon it without contacting me/one of us, either
in writing, by telephone, or personally, to verify that it is authentic.
Name of Company
Address
Phone Number


By:
Date: Its:

DO NOT SIGN BLANK OR INCOMPLETE FORMS. RETAIN A COPY.





Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 8
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX
FULL UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER
My/our contract with
to provide for the improvement of the property described as:

(Put Description of Property Here)

has been fully paid and satisfied. By signing this waiver, all my/our construction lien
rights against the described property are waived and released.

If the owner or lessee of the property or the owner's or lessee's designee has received a
notice of furnishing from me/one of us or if I/we are not required to provide one, and the
owner, lessee, or designee has not received this waiver directly from me/one of us, the
owner, lessee, or designee may not rely upon it without contacting me/one of us, either
in writing, by telephone, or personally, to verify that it is authentic.

Name of Company
Address
Phone Number


By:
Date: Its:


DO NOT SIGN BLANK OR INCOMPLETE FORMS. RETAIN A COPY.


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Payment Procedures

Section 01 29 13
01 29 13 9
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_13.DOCX


END OF SECTION 01 29 13

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Schedule of Values

Section 01 29 73
01 29 73 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_73.DOC
SECTION 01 29 73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, and Contracting Requirements of the Contract, including the Agreement
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preparation and submittal of a schedule of values.
1.3 GENERAL
A. Timing of Submittal: Submit to Construction Manager a schedule of values allocated to the various portions
of the Work, within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
B. Supporting Data: Upon request of Construction Manager, support the values with data which will
substantiate their correctness.
C. Use of Schedule: The schedule of values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications
for Payment.
1.4 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Form and Identification:
1. Type schedule on 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch white paper.
2. Contractor's standard forms and automated printout may be used.
3. Identify schedule with:
a. Title of Project and location.
b. Engineer.
c. Project number.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Contract designation.
f. Date of submission.
B. Detail: Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve
as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.
C. Format:
1. Follow the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as the format for listing component items.
2. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major Section of the Specifications
unless otherwise approved in advance by Construction Manager.
D. Subvalues: For each major line item list subvalues of major Products or operations under the item.
E. Change Orders: For each Application for Payment, revise schedule to list Change Orders.
F. For the Various Portions of the Work:
1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.
2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value
into:
a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid.
b. The total installed value.
G. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Price.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Schedule of Values

Section 01 29 73
01 29 73 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_29_73.DOC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.


END OF SECTION 01 29 73

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Project Meetings

Section 01 31 19
01 31 19 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_31_19.DOCX
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes scheduling and administering of preconstruction and progress meetings.
B. Scheduling and Administration of Meetings:
1. Responsibility:
a. Preconstruction Meeting: Construction Manager.
b. Progress Meetings: Construction Manager.
2. Procedures:
a. Prepare agenda.
b. Make physical arrangements for the meetings.
c. Preside at meetings.
d. Record minutes and include significant proceedings and decisions.
e. Distribute copies of the minutes within 4 days after meetings to:
1) Participants.
2) Others affected by proceedings.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule: Preconstruction meeting will be scheduled by Construction Manager:
1. Within 20 days after the Effective Date of Agreement.
2. Before starting the Work at the Site.
B. Attendance: Representatives of the following parties are to be in attendance at the meeting:
1. Owner.
2. Construction Manager.
3. Subcontractors.
4. Governmental or regulatory agencies when appropriate.
1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Types of Progress Meetings:
1. Regular.
2. Called.
3. Preinstallation: To be determined.
B. Schedule meetings as follows unless otherwise approved by Construction Manager:
1. Regular: Bi-weekly.
2. Called: As the progress of the Work dictates.
3. Preinstallation: At least 5 working days prior to start of installation.
C. Location: Hold meetings at job site or as indicated in the notice.
D. Attendance: Representatives of the following parties are to be in attendance at the meeting:
1. Construction Manager.
2. Subcontractors.
3. Owner's representative as appropriate.
4. Governmental or other regulatory agencies as appropriate.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Project Meetings

Section 01 31 19
01 31 19 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_31_19.DOCX
E. Minimum Agenda: The minimum agenda for progress meetings shall consist of the following:
1. Review and approve minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review progress of the Work since the previous meeting.
3. Note field observations, problems and decisions.
4. Identify problems which impede planned progress.
5. Review offsite fabrication problems.
6. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain plan schedule.
7. Revise construction schedule as indicated.
8. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required to maintain schedule.
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
10. Review changes proposed by Owner for their effect on the construction schedule and completion date.
11. Identify all claims and potential claims.
12. Pending changes and substitutions.
13. Complete other current business.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.


END OF SECTION 01 31 19

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedures for the submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Operation
and Maintenance Manuals, and other information.
B. Related Sections include pertinent Sections of these Specifications for the individual Submittals required.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Submittal: Information sent by Subcontractor to convey information about systems, equipment, materials,
products, and administrative matters for the Work.
B. Resubmittal: Submittal sent for review a second or further time.
C. Product Data: Illustrations, standard schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions, brochures, or
manufacturers literature that describe the physical size, appearance, and other characteristics of materials
or equipment for a portion of the work.
D. Shop Drawings: All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are
specifically prepared or assembled by or for Subcontractor and submitted by Subcontractor to illustrate
some portion of the Work.
E. Samples: Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some
portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged.
F. Action Submittals: Submittal that requires Engineers response.
G. Informational Submittals: Submittal that does not require Engineers response.
H. Delegated-Design: In certain individual Specification Sections, design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically delegated to the Subcontractor. Performance and design criteria are defined in
the individual Specification Sections or on the Drawings. Subcontractor is solely responsible for design of
those items or systems, and achieving specified performance.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submittal Schedule:
1. Prepare and submit a Submittal schedule that identifies the following for each Submittal:
a. Specification Section number
b. Submittal description
c. Projected date Submittal will be submitted.
d. Estimated duration for fabrication and delivery.
2. An electronic copy (MS Excel file) of a blank Submittal schedule, in the preferred format, will be
furnished by Construction Manager via e-mail to all subcontractors. See form attached at the end of
this section.

/1 01 33 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
3. Submittal Numbers:
a. Use the applicable Specification Section number followed by a dash and then a sequential
number (e.g., 06 10 00-01). Where a Submittal is required via a Drawing (instead of a
Specification Section), use the applicable Drawing Number followed by a dash and then a
sequential number (e.g., M501.1-1).
b. Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after a decimal point (e.g., 06 10 00-1.A).
B. Delivery Method: Submittals may be delivered as paper copies or electronic files at Subcontractors option.
Advise Construction Manager of delivery method to be used at the preconstruction meeting.
1. Paper Copies: Unless indicated otherwise, submit 2 copies of each Submittal. One copy of each
Action Submittal will be returned to Subcontractor. Extra copies submitted by Subcontractor will be
discarded.
2. Electronic Files (preferred method):
a. Unless indicated otherwise, submit 1 electronic copy of each Submittal in a format capable of
being read using Adobe Acrobat Reader.
b. Scanned Submittals shall be produced in such a way as to not compromise the graphic quality
or accuracy of scale where applicable; text shall be searchable. One electronic copy of each
Action Submittal will be returned to Subcontractor.
c. Submitted electronic documents shall not contain security to limit viewing, editing, or printing.
d. Where submittals include information that is intended to be printed out on sheets larger than
11 inches x 17 inches, submit 2 paper copies.
e. Submittals may be transmitted via electronic mail (e-mail) or on a read-only CD or DVD.
3. Transmit Submittals to party and address identified by Construction Manager at preconstruction
meeting.
C. Coordination and Timing: Coordinate preparation and processing of Submittals with performance of
construction activities. Subcontractor is responsible for cost of delays caused by lack of coordination or
tardiness of Submittals. Incomplete Submittals will be rejected.
1. Coordinate each Submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other Submittals, and related
activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of Submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will
not be delayed because of need to review Submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Construction Manager reserves the right to withhold action on a Submittal requiring coordination
with other Submittals until related Submittals are received.
D. Processing Time: Allow 15 full working days for Construction Manager and Engineer to review each
Submittal, including Resubmittals. Time for review shall commence on Construction Managers receipt of
Submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit Submittals
enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including Resubmittals. Construction Manager will
advise Subcontractor when a Submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
E. Identification: Place a permanent label on each Submittal or generate a separate cover sheet.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared Submittal.
2. Provide space to record Construction Manager's review and approval markings and action taken by
Engineer.
3. Include the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Construction Manager.
d. Name and address of Subcontractor(s).
e. Name and address of Supplier(s).
f. Name of Manufacturer.
g. Submittal number, including revision identifier.
h. Drawing number and detail references, as applicable.
i. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as applicable.
j. Other necessary identification.

/1 01 33 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
F. Deviations: Encircle or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on
Submittals. Submittals that include deviations that are not identified may be rejected. Construction
Manager/Engineer may or may not consider deviations.
G. Transmittal: Package each Submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit
each Submittal using a transmittal form. Construction Manager will reject Submittal(s) received from
sources other than Subcontractor.
H. Resubmittals: Make Resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial Submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous Submittal.
2. Clearly identify additions and revisions.
3. Resubmit Submittals until they are marked, Reviewed, No Exceptions Noted or Reviewed With
Corrections Noted.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of Submittals with mark indicating, Reviewed, No Exceptions Noted or
Reviewed With Corrections Noted, to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers,
authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities.
J. Use for Construction: Unless otherwise indicated by Construction Manager, use only Submittals with mark
indicating, Reviewed, No Exceptions Noted or Reviewed With Corrections Noted.
1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR'S USE OF ENGINEERS ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES
A. At Subcontractor's written request, copies of Engineers electronic Drawing files may be provided to
Subcontractor for Subcontractor's use in connection with Project, including Submittal preparation. Electronic
files may be furnished by Engineer for the convenience of the Subcontractor. Conclusions or information
obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the Subcontractors sole risk. Materials furnished by
Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to printed Contract Documents.
B. When Subcontractor uses Engineers electronic Drawing files to facilitate Submittal preparation, prepare
Submittals to be project specific. Submittals that are not project specific, including Engineers Drawing files
submitted on a new title block, will be rejected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit project specific Action Submittals required by individual Specification
Sections. Do not use highlighting that would not be reproducible.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single Submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for Submittal because standard printed data are not suitable
for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each Submittal to indicate which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts.
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams.
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
l. Testing by recognized testing agency.

/1 01 33 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n. Notation of coordination requirements.
4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
5. Maintain copy of returned Submittal for Project records.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale where appropriate. Do not
base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Scale shall be
sufficiently large to indicate pertinent features of the item and its method of connection to the Work.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements of the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, control, and
communication wiring. Differentiate between Manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
f. Manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
2. Sheet Size: Submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 x 11 inches but no larger than
36 x 48 inches.
3. Maintain copy of returned Submittal for Project records.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics
with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between Submittal and actual component
as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components, such as accessories, together in one
Submittal package.
2. Identification: On unexposed side of Samples, attach label that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of Manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Construction Manager will maintain sets of approved Samples at Site, available for
quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used
by Construction Manager/Engineer to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each
set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples shall be in an undamaged condition at time of Substantial Completion.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated to become Owner's property,
are the property of Subcontractor.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Unless indicated otherwise, submit 2 full set(s) of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from Manufacturer's
product line. Construction Manager will return 1 Submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same
material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, physically identical with
material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected.
6. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials;
swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.

/1 01 33 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
7. Number of Samples: Unless indicated otherwise, submit 2 sets of Samples. Construction Manager
will retain 1 Sample set; remainder will be returned.
a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,
connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.
b. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product
represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets of paired units that show approximate limits of
variations.
8. Maintain returned Sample set for Project records.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. General:
a. Where manuals are required to be submitted covering items included in the Work, prepare such
manuals in durable plastic binders approximately 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches in size and with at
least the following:
1) Identification on, or readable through, the front cover stating general nature of the manual.
2) Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual.
3) Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment involved,
including:
a) Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b) Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
c) Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and
control, shutdown, and emergency conditions.
d) Maintenance instructions, including lubrication requirements where applicable.
e) Guide to "troubleshooting".
f) Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
g) Project specific outline and cross sections, assembly drawings, engineering data,
and wiring diagrams. Wiring diagrams shall reflect final, as-installed conditions and
include wire numbers.
h) Test data and performance curves.
4) Complete nomenclature of all replaceable parts, their part numbers, current costs, and
name and address of nearest vendor of parts.
5) Copies of all guarantees and warranties issued.
6) Copies of the reviewed Submittals.
7) Copies of all data concerning all changes made during construction.
2. Extraneous Data: Where contents of the manuals include Manufacturer's catalog pages, clearly
indicate the precise items included in this installation and delete or otherwise clearly indicate all
Manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. Do not use highlighting that would
not be reproducible.
3. Number of Copies Required: Unless otherwise specifically directed by Construction Manager, or
stipulated in the pertinent Section of these Specifications:
a. For review, submit 1 paper and 1 electronic copy.
b. For record, deliver 4 paper and 1 electronic copies to Construction Manager.
4. Schedule delivery of record copies of operation and maintenance manuals at least 60 days prior to
startup of respective equipment, unless otherwise specified.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Do not
use highlighting that would not be reproducible.
B. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible
for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual
authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects/engineers and owners, and other information specified.

/1 01 33 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on Manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by Manufacturer
for this Project.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on Manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing
experience where required.
G. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on Manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on Manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract
Documents.
J. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by Manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
Manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
K. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the
following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
L. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for
compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
M. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
N. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form,
indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product
is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
O. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents Manufacturer's
recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include
name of product and name, address, and telephone number of Manufacturer. Include the following, as
applicable:
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

/1 01 33 00 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
P. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections of factory-
authorized service representative. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.
2. Statement of substrate condition and acceptability of substrate for installation or application of product.
3. Statement that products at Site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not,
what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Document all settings in writing.
8. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Q. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information separately directly to Construction Manager.
1. Construction Manager will not review Submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire
Submittal for separate Resubmittal.
2.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SUBMITTALS
A. Where design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Subcontractor by
the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design
criteria indicated.
B. Performance type design documents and calculations shall be prepared by a design professional as
required by the individual Specification Section, licensed in the State jurisdiction where the Project is being
constructed. Design shall be signed and sealed by the responsible design professional. Prepare and
submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of
applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and
design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Identify name and version of
software, if any, used for calculations.
C. In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required Submittals, submit 3 copies of a statement,
signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned
to Subcontractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Indicate that products and systems
comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and
other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each Submittal and check for coordination with other work of the Contract and for compliance with
the Contract Documents. Verify all field dimensions and conditions; note corrections as necessary. Mark
with approval stamp before submitting to Construction Manager.
1. Approval Stamp: Stamp each Submittal with an approval stamp. Use the same stamp format for each
Submittal. Include Project name and location, Submittal number, Specification Section title and
number, name of reviewer, date of Subcontractor's approval, and statement certifying that Submittal
has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Submittals that are not approved and stamped by Subcontractor will be rejected.

/1 01 33 00 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
3.2 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER/ENGINEERS REVIEW
A. Action Submittals: Construction Manager/Engineer will review Action Submittals, make marks to indicate
corrections or modifications required, and return Submittal. Construction Manager/Engineer will stamp each
Submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. Reviewed, No Exceptions Noted: Submittal appears to conform to the information given in the
Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.
2. Reviewed With Corrections Noted: Upon incorporation of review comments, it appears that Submittal
will conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design
concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.
3. Revise and Resubmit: Submittal has one or more specific segments that are incomplete, do not
appear to conform to the information given in the Contract Documents, or are incompatible with the
design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract
Documents. Subcontractor shall resubmit information for review to demonstrate understanding of
comments and portions of Work to be provided. Except as noted, Subcontractor shall not proceed
with work related to Submittal.
4. Rejected, Resubmit: Submittal as a whole is incomplete, does not appear to conform to the
information given in the Contract Documents, or is incompatible with the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Subcontractor
shall resubmit information for review to demonstrate understanding of comments and portions of Work
to be provided. Subcontractor shall not proceed with work related to Submittal.
5. Received for Record: Submittal for closeout document appears to conform to the information given in
the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Submittal will not be returned to the
Subcontractor without a specific request. The Submittal has been accepted as a record document.
B. Informational Submittals: Other Submittals required by the Contract Documents are for information only.
Construction Manager/Engineer will acknowledge receipt of Informational Submittals. Such Submittals
include, but are not limited to:
1. Qualifications Data.
2. Certificates.
3. Test Reports.
4. Manufacturers Instructions.
5. Maintenance Data.
6. Field Reports.
C. Delegated-Design Submittals: Review of Delegated-Design Submittals by Construction Manager/Engineer
shall not relieve Subcontractor of Subcontractors sole responsibility for design and achieving specified
performance.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned without being reviewed.
E. Partial Submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be rejected.
3.3 RE-REVIEW COSTS
A. Compensation:
1. Should Construction Manager/Engineer be required to review a Submittal more than twice because of
failure of the Submittal to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, Construction
Manager/Engineer will record their expenses for performing all additional reviews.
2. Subcontractor will compensate Construction Manager/Engineer for these additional services and
deduct the amount paid from payments to Subcontractor.


END OF SECTION 01 33 00



/1 01 33 00 8
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Submittal Procedures

Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

Project Name:

C.M.'s Project No.:

Bid Category Description:

Bid Category No.:

Subcontractor:

Date:


Specification
Section
ID No. Item Description
Project Date to
be Submitted
Estimated
Duration for
Fab. & Del.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

NOTE: Identifying no. is to start at one for each specification section listed.


/1 01 33 00 9
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_33_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Testing Services

Section 01 45 24
SECTION 01 45 24 TESTING SERVICES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, bidding requirements, and contract requirements of the Contract, including the Agreement and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes testing services.
1. Testing services which will be paid for from an allowance performed by an independent testing
laboratory selected by the Construction Manager:
a. Fine and coarse aggregate at the Construction Manager's request.
b. Bedding materials at the Construction Manager's request.
c. Fill material from onsite and offsite.
d. Welding and bolting of steel members.
e. Soil compaction tests.
f. Collecting and transporting soil samples to laboratory.
g. Laboratory soil proctor tests.
h. Travel expense of the independent testing laboratory.
i. Verification of soil bearing capacity.
j. Making concrete cylinders and performing concrete tests.
k. Transporting cylinders to testing laboratory.
l. Concrete trial mix testing.
2. Testing services and certifications which are not included under the cash allowance, but included in
the Contractor's Base Bid:
a. Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances or by a plan approval authority and made
by a legally constituted authority.
b. Inspections, testing services and certifications including, but not limited to, the following:
1) Pipe leakage tests.
2) Tank leakage tests.
3) Tank welding tests.
4) Welder certifications.
5) Structural steel yield strength mill tests.
6) Pipe material yield strength tests.
7) Cement Manufacturers' certification tests at the Engineer's request.
8) Fine and coarse aggregate certification tests by Supplier at the Engineer's request.
9) Bedding material certification tests by Supplier at the Engineer's request.
10) Testing performed for the Contractor's convenience.
3. Owner Paid Items:
a. The Owner may elect to test or to employ either the Engineer or an independent testing agency
to test materials or systems on the Project other than those specified above.
b. The cost of this testing will be paid for by the Owner.
B. Related Sections include: Additional requirements for testing of materials and systems mentioned in this
Section may be described in other Sections of these Specifications.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Standard Specifications:
a. C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
b. C39 - Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
c. C42 - Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.

/1 01 45 24 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_24.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Testing Services

Section 01 45 24
d. C138 - Test for Unit Weight, Yield and Air Content of Concrete.
e. C140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.
f. C143 - Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
g. C157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and
Concrete.
h. C172 - Sampling Fresh Concrete.
i. C173 - Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
j. C192 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
k. C231 - Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.
l. C567 - Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete.
m. C1019 - Sampling and Testing Grout.
n. C1140 - Preparing and Testing Specimens from Shotcrete Test Panels.
o. C1202-97 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concretes Ability to Resist
Chloride Ion Penetration.
p. D698 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort.
q. D1188 - Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens.
r. D1556 - Density of Soil In Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
s. D1557 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soils Aggregate Mixture Using 10 Pound
Rammer and 18 Inch Drop.
t. D1586 - Penetration Test and Split Barrel Sampling of Soils.
u. D2166 - Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil.
v. D2167 - Density of Unit Weight of Soil In Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.
w. D2922 - Density of Soil and Soil Aggregates by Nuclear Methods.
x. D2937 - Density of Soil in Place by Drive Cylinder Method.
y. D2950 - Test Methods for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods.
2. AWS - American Welding Society: D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
3. ACI - American Concrete Institute:
a. 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass
Concrete.
b. 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
c. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
4. Michigan Building Code.
5. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections: Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts.
6. MDOT:
a. Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Density Control Handbook.
7. AASHTO:
a. T259 - Method of Test for Resistance of Concrete to Chloride Ion Penetration.
b. Provisional Standard - TP 23-93 Standard Test Method for Water Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying.
1.4 TEST REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with:
1. Laws and Regulations.
2. Sections of these Specifications.
3. Reference procedures and requirements.
4. Pertinent standards for testing.
5. Michigan Building Code.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Approved by building official in accordance with Michigan Building Code.
1.5 COLLECTING AND TRANSPORTING SAMPLES
A. Samples: Collected by the independent testing laboratory and transported by the independent testing
laboratory to a location determined by the Construction Manager.

/1 01 45 24 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_24.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Testing Services

Section 01 45 24
1.6 RETESTING COSTS
A. Retesting:
1. When initial tests of all items except soil compaction indicate noncompliance with the Contract
Documents, all subsequent testing occasioned by the noncompliance shall be performed by the same
testing laboratory, and the costs thereof will be deducted by the Construction Manager from the
Contract Sum.
2. Soil Compaction:
a. The first retesting of soil compaction shall be paid for from the allowance.
b. The second and subsequent retesting for soil compaction due to noncompliance with the
Contract Documents shall be performed by the same testing laboratory, and the costs thereof
will be deducted by the Construction Manager from the Contract Sum.
B. Costs: Uncovering costs shall be paid for as described in the General Conditions.
1.7 REPORTS
A. Provide the Construction Manager's Project Representative with a copy of the daily report prior to leaving
the Project Site each day on which Work is performed on the Site.
B. Provide typed copies of all laboratory reports, inspections and certifications to:
1. The Construction Manager's Office: Two copies.
2. The Contractor's Office: One copy.
1.8 SCHEDULES FOR TESTING
A. Establishing Schedule: By advance discussion with the independent testing laboratory, determine the time
required to perform tests and to issue findings.
B. Revising Schedule: When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction, coordinate
all such changes of schedule with the independent testing laboratory as required.
C. Adherence to Schedule: When the independent testing laboratory is ready to test according to the
determined schedule, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of the Work,
all extra costs for testing attributable to the delay may be charged to the Contractor and shall not be borne
by the Owner.
1.9 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES
A. Coordinate and schedule the work of the independent testing laboratory.
1. Notify the Construction Manager and the independent testing laboratory 24 hours prior to expected
time when testing services will be required.
2. Provide the following as necessary for laboratory to properly perform its functions:
a. Access to the Work.
b. Facilities for access to the Work.
c. Tools.
d. Samples of materials.
e. Storage.
f. Assistance as requested.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.

/1 01 45 24 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_24.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Testing Services

Section 01 45 24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Fine and Coarse Aggregate and Bedding Material: Test to ensure compliance with the materials
specifications, at the request of the Construction Manager.
B. Fill Material from Onsite and Offsite: Test to ensure compliance with the materials specifications.
C. Welding and Bolting of Steel Members: Perform ultrasonic, mag particle or x-ray testing on welded
structural steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1. This does not relieve the Contractor of the
Contractors design and performance responsibility relative to connections.
D. Soil Compaction:
1. Predominately Granular Soils:
a. Perform all necessary laboratory and field testing required to verify compaction of fill, bedding,
trench backfill and structure backfill to 95% Modified Proctor in accordance with ASTM D1557.
b. Verify the compaction of the first 12 inches of the existing subgrade below all structures, utility
structures, paved areas, and areas to be filled to 95% Modified Proctor in accordance with
ASTM D1557.
2. Independent testing laboratory shall inform the Engineer's Resident Project Representative, and the
Contractor's onsite supervisor immediately of all onsite test results.
3. Place no additional fill in areas where compaction results do not meet Specification requirements.
E. Bituminous Pavement:
1. Test to ensure compliance with the materials specifications, at the request of Engineer.
2. Perform compaction tests in accordance with ASTM D1188 and D2950.
F. Concrete Testing:
1. Point of sampling and the method of securing the Samples:
a. Determined by the independent testing laboratory.
b. In accordance with ASTM C172.
2. Slump Tests:
a. Perform slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143.
b. Perform one slump test on the job for each 10 cubic yards of concrete.
c. At the Engineer's request, also perform slump tests at batch plant before adding water reducer.
d. Perform more slump tests if deemed necessary by the Engineer.
3. Perform 1 air-entraining test in accordance with ASTM C231 or C173 for each truckload or every
10 yards of concrete placed, whichever is more frequent.
4. Test the concrete unit weight in accordance with ASTM C138 or C567, as applicable.
5. Test the air content and fresh concrete temperature of each set of concrete cylinders.
6. Concrete Cylinder Testing:
a. In accordance with ASTM C31 and C39.
b. Take concrete cylinder Samples as follows:
1) Once each day a given class of concrete is placed, nor less than
2) Once for each 150 cubic yards (or fraction thereof) of each class of concrete placed each
day, nor less than
3) Once for each 5,000 square feet of slab or wall surface area placed each day.
c. Concrete cylinder Sample shall consist of 4 standard 6-inch cylinders.
d. Handle cylinders carefully.
e. Onsite Storage:
1) 12 hours, minimum, 48 hours maximum.
2) At a temperature range of 60 to 80 degrees F and in a moist environment.
3) Shielded from direct sunlight and radiant heat.
4) The Contractor shall construct heated or water bath enclosures, as applicable, if
conditions require.
f. Laboratory Curing: For duration of curing after onsite storage.
g. Test 1 of the cylinders at 7 days and 2 cylinders at 28 days. Save 1 cylinder as a spare.
h. Acceptance and evaluation of the concrete shall be based on ACI 301.

/1 01 45 24 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_24.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Testing Services

Section 01 45 24
7. Core and Load Tests:
a. Perform concrete core tests in accordance with ASTM C42 at the direction of the Engineer.
b. Cost of core tests and load tests, when required, shall be paid for in accordance with 1.6.
8. At the Engineers request, perform chloride ion penetration test in accordance with ASTM C1202-97.
9. At the Engineers request, perform a ASHTO T-259 for resistance to chloride ion penetration.
G. Verification of Soil Bearing Capacity: Inspect the subgrade below all structures, perform all required testing
and produce written documentation that the soil is capable of supporting the structures at the design soil
bearing value indicated in the Drawings with acceptable anticipated settlement.
H. Concrete Trial Mix Testing:
1. Proportions of materials for concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 211.1, in order to produce
concrete with the specified compressive strength, good placability and durability, and other specified
properties.
2. It is recognized in the industry that some cement Manufacturers grind their product finer than others
causing higher ultimate strength, more heat during curing, and faster set. The amount of fly ash has
been set at 25% of the cementitious content by weight to help minimize the effects of the fine grind.
3. Concrete mixes as noted in the proportioning table in Division 03 Section Cast-In-Place Concrete,
shall receive a high range water-reducing or a mid range water-reducing admixture added at the
Redimix plant.
4. To ensure concrete of adequate strength, concrete proportions shall be selected and documented in
accordance with ACI-318 paragraph 5.3.3.2 except as noted herein. The criteria listed in the
Proportioning Table in Division 03 Section Cast-In-Place Concrete shall be met. This will determine
the required mix proportions:
a. Redimix Supplier shall consult with a testing laboratory and prepare trial mixes of 1 cubic yard
each minimum which shall be delivered to the Project Site for each mix design. Upon Contractor
request, Engineer may waive trial mix testing for some mix designs.
b. Trial mixes shall be made using at least 3 different cementitious contents that will produce a
range of compressive strengths encompassing the required average compressive strength (fcr).
fcr = 5,200 psi.
c. Trial mixes shall be designed to produce a slump within 0.75-inch of maximum permitted, and
for air-entrained concrete, within 0.5% of maximum allowable air content.
d. The required average target compressive strength (fcr) shall be as follows:
Mix Design
Specified Compressive
Strength, fc psi

Required Target Average
Compressive Strength, fcr psi
Less than 3,000 Fc + 1,000
3,000 to 5,000 Fc + 1,200
Over 5,000 Fc + 1,400
e. Six cylinders shall be made from each trial mix and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 or
C192, as applicable. The testing laboratory will test the cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39
at the times listed as follows:
1) 1 at 3 days.
2) 1 at 7 days.
3) 1 at 14 days.
4) 2 at 28 days.
5) 1 spare.
f. From results of cylinder tests testing laboratory will plot a curve showing relationship between
cementitious content and compressive strength at the 28 day test age.
g. The trial mixes and the accepted mix designs shall meet the Mix Design Criteria stated in the
proportioning table in this Section.
h. Provide mix design, test records, calculations and other documentation to Engineer at least
14 days prior to placement.
i. No concrete shall be placed until results from the 28-day tests have been reviewed by Engineer.

/1 01 45 24 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_24.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Testing Services

Section 01 45 24
5. A drying shrinkage test shall be conducted on the preliminary trial batch with the maximum water-
cementitious materials ration used to qualify each proposed concrete mix design using the concrete
materials, including admixtures, that are proposed for the project. Three test specimens shall be
prepared for each test. Drying shrinkage specimens shall be 4-inch x 4-inch x 11-inch prisms with an
effective gage length of 10 inches, fabricated, cured, dried and measured in accordance with
ASTM C157 except with the following modifications:
a. Specimens shall be removed from the molds at an age of 23 hours 1 hour after trial batching,
shall be placed immediately in water at 73 degrees F 3 degrees F for at least 30 minutes, and
shall be measured within 30 minutes thereafter to determine original length and then submerged
in lime saturated water as specified in ASTM C157. Measurement to determine expansion
expressed as a percentage of original length shall be taken at age 7 days. The length at 7 days
shall be the base length of drying shrinkage calculations (0 days drying age). Specimens then
shall be stored immediately in a humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees F
3 degrees F and 50% 4% relative humidity for the remainder of the test. Measurements to
determine shrinkage expressed as percentage of base length shall be reported separately for 7,
14, and 21 days r hours of drying from 0 day after 7 days of moist curing.
b. Drying shrinkage deformation for each specimen shall be computed as the difference between
the base length (at 0 days drying age) and the length after drying at each test age. Results of
the shrinkage test shall be reported to the nearest 0.001%. If drying shrinkage of any specimen
deviates from the average for that test age by more than 0.004%, the results for that specimen
shall be disregarded.
c. The average drying shrinkage of each set of test specimens cast in the laboratory from a trial
batch as measured at the 21 days drying age shall not exceed 0.036% for concrete to be used
in liquid containing structures and 0.048% for concrete to be used in other structures.
I. Miscellaneous Tests: The Owner or the Engineer may elect to order testing of other materials under the
cash allowance.


END OF SECTION 01 45 24


/1 01 45 24 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_24.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Special Inspection Services

Section 01 45 36
01 45 36 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_36.DOCX
SECTION 01 45 36 SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes inspection services as follows:
1. Inspection services which Construction Manager will contract and pay for and will be performed by a
special inspector or inspectors selected by Construction Manager:
a. Steel construction.
b. Soils.
c. Proof-rolling.
2. Owner Paid Items: Owner may elect to inspect or to employ either Engineer or a special inspector to
inspect materials or systems on the Project other than those specified above. The cost of this
inspection will be paid for by Owner.
B. Inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These
services do not relieve Subcontractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ACI:
a. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
b. 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
c. 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.
2. AWS: D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
3. Michigan Building Code.
4. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections: Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts.
1.4 INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. In accordance with:
1. Laws and Regulations.
2. Reference procedures and requirements.
3. Michigan Building Code.
4. Contract Documents.
5. Manufacturers requirements, as applicable.
6. Reviewed Shop Drawings, as applicable.
B. Weld Inspectors: Certified in accordance with AWS D1.1.
C. Special Inspectors:
1. Qualified under Michigan Building Code and by local building official.
2. Familiar with code requirements for special inspections.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Special Inspection Services

Section 01 45 36
01 45 36 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_36.DOCX
1.5 REINSPECTION COSTS
A. Reinspection: When initial inspections indicate noncompliance with the Contract Documents, all subsequent
inspections occasioned by the noncompliance shall be performed by the same special inspector, and the
costs thereof will be deducted by Construction Manager from the Subcontractors Contract amount of the
responsible Subcontractor.
B. Costs: Uncovering costs shall be paid for as described in the Agreement.
1.6 REPORTS
A. Provide typed electronic copy of all inspection reports to: Construction Manager with distributions as
determined by Construction Manager.
B. Discrepancies: Bring to immediate attention of Construction Manager.
C. Final Report:
1. Documenting completion of all specified special inspections and correction of all discrepancies.
2. Submit as specified for inspection reports.
1.7 SCHEDULES FOR INSPECTION
A. Establishing Schedule: By advance discussion between special inspector and Construction Manager,
determine the time required to perform inspection and to issue findings.
B. Revising Schedule: When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction, coordinate
all such changes of schedule with the special inspector as required.
C. Adherence to Schedule: When the special inspector is ready to inspect according to the determined
schedule, but is prevented from inspecting due to incompleteness of the Work, all extra costs for inspection
attributable to the delay may be charged to Subcontractor and shall not be borne by Owner.
1.8 SUBCONTRACTOR'S DUTIES
A. Cooperate with Special Inspector:
1. Notify Construction Manager 24 hours minimum prior to expected time when inspection services will
be required.
2. Provide the following as necessary for special inspector to properly perform its functions:
a. Access to the Work.
b. Facilities for access to the Work.
c. Tools.
d. Storage.
e. Assistance as requested.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Steel Construction:
1. Inspect in accordance with MBC Table 1704.3 and this Specification.
2. Inspect and verify materials receiving for:
a. Bolts, nuts and washers.
b. Structural steel.
c. Weld filler materials.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Special Inspection Services

Section 01 45 36
01 45 36 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_45_36.DOCX
3. Inspect and Verify Erection:
a. Welding.
b. Details of the framing for conformance to the design.
c. High strength bolting.
B. Masonry Construction: Inspect in accordance with Table 1704.5.1 and this Specification.
C. Soils:
1. Inspect earthwork except where fill is less than 12 inches deep.
2. Verify that Site preparation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents.
3. Verify that fill materials and fill thicknesses conform to requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Proof-Rolling:
1. Witness proof-rolling of exposed subgrade of building footprint and paved areas.
2. Subcontractor shall provide heavy rubber tired truck and labor for proof-rolling.
3. Identify areas of subgrade requiring compaction or replacement.


END OF SECTION 01 45 36

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Temporary Facilities and Controls

Section 01 50 00
01 50 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_50_00.DOCX
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of construction facilities as follows:
1. Temporary Utilities: Water, electricity, and telephone.
2. Subcontractor's and Construction Manager's field offices.
3. Sanitary facilities.
4. Temporary heat.
5. Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades and canopies.
6. Storage areas.
1.3 TRASH REMOVAL
A. Construction Manager will provide a dumpster for general construction trash removal for all trades to use
except for masonry rubble.
B. All trash placed within the dumpster is to be broken down and compacted as much as reasonably practical
prior to placing in the dumpster.
1.4 STORAGE AREAS
A. Locations:
1. Specific storage locations within the general areas:
a. Carefully coordinate with Construction Manager.
b. Subject to approval of Construction Manager.
B. Protection and Restoration:
1. Protect trees and shrubs in the storage areas.
2. Take reasonable means to prevent spillage of fuel, oil, chemicals and similar materials.
3. Clean up spills and, if necessary, remove soil and replace with uncontaminated soil so as to allow
vegetation to be quickly reestablished.
4. Provide secondary containment as required by governing agencies for storage of hazardous materials.
C. Cleaning: Keep storage areas clean in accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste
Management.
D. Storage: Maintain in accordance with Division 01 Section Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. New or used.
2. Adequate in capacity for the required usage.
3. Provide safe conditions.
4. Comply with requirements of applicable codes and standards.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Temporary Facilities and Controls

Section 01 50 00
01 50 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_50_00.DOCX
2.2 UTILITIES
A. Temporary Utilities:
1. Equipment Testing: Owner will pay utility charges for all power, water and other utilities.
2. Water: Owner will pay for water usage charges, except for tank testing.
3. Electricity:
a. Owner will pay for electrical usage charges.
b. Obtain electrical power by connecting to Owner's existing system.
c. Construction Telephones: Subcontractors are to provide telephones for their own use.
2.3 FIELD OFFICES
A. Construction Manager will provide a field office for meetings and his own use.
B. Subcontractors will provide their own field office as necessary and shall pay for all heat, electricity, hook up
expenses, and telephone charges for their office.
2.4 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Construction Manager will provide sanitary toilets for use of all workers in compliance with all minimum
requirements of the Health Department or other public agency having jurisdiction; and will maintain in a
sanitary condition.
2.5 HEATING
A. Construction Heating: Subcontractors to provide any heat, including fuel and weather protection, necessary
for the completion of their work to maintain the project schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used.


END OF SECTION 01 50 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Product Storage and Handling Requirements

Section 01 66 00
01 66 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_66_00.DOCX
SECTION 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes provisions for the storage and protection of Products.
1.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Storage:
1. Coordinate location of onsite storage with Construction Manager.
2. Maintain ample way for foot traffic at all times, except as otherwise approved by Construction
Manager.
3. Repair or replace property damaged by reason of storing of material at no additional cost to
Construction Manager.
4. Packaged Materials:
a. Delivered in original, unopened containers.
b. Stored until ready for use.
5. Materials shall meet the requirements of these Specifications at the time that they are used in the
Work.
6. Store Products in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protection:
1. Use all means necessary to protect from weather, damage, and theft the:
a. Products of every Section before, during and after installation.
b. Installed work and materials of all trades.
2. All materials shall be delivered, stored and handled to prevent:
a. The inclusion of foreign materials.
b. Damage by water, breakage or other causes.
3. When necessary, provide weathertight storage sheds with raised floors to adequately protect those
materials and Products stored on the Site which may require protection from damage by the elements.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of Construction Manager and at no additional cost to Construction Manager.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.


END OF SECTION 01 66 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Cleaning and Waste Management

Section 01 74 00
01 74 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_74_00.DOCX
SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes provisions for maintaining structures and the Site in a standard of cleanliness. All
Subcontractors are responsible for cleaning and waste management pertaining to the operations of their
trade in accordance with this Section.
B. Related Sections: In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with all requirements for
cleaning up as described in various other Sections of these Specifications.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection:
1. Daily and more often if necessary.
2. Conduct inspections to verify that requirements of cleanliness are being met.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Hazards Control:
1. Volatile Wastes:
a. Store in covered metal containers.
b. Remove from premises daily.
2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cleaning and Disposal:
1. Conduct operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
2. Not Allowed:
a. Burning or burying of rubbish or waste materials onsite.
b. Disposal of volatile wastes in storm or sanitary sewers: Volatile wastes include, but are not
limited to, mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner.
c. Disposal of wastes into streams or waterways.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Compatibility:
1. Compatible with the surface being cleaned.
2. Recommended by the Manufacturer of the material being cleaned.
3. As reviewed by Construction Manager.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Cleaning and Waste Management

Section 01 74 00
01 74 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_74_00.DOCX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General:
1. Store Materials:
a. In an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access.
b. To allow unimpeded drainage and traffic.
c. Provide for the required protection of materials.
2. Scrap, debris, waste material and other items not required for construction of the Work:
a. Do not allow accumulation.
b. Remove from Site at least each week and more often if necessary.
c. Provide adequate storage for all materials awaiting removal.
3. Observe all requirements for fire protection and protection of the environment.
B. Site:
1. Daily, and more often if necessary:
a. Inspect the Site.
b. Pick up all scrap, debris and waste material; remove all such items to the place designated for
their storage.
2. Weekly, and more often if necessary:
a. Inspect all arrangements of materials stored onsite.
b. Restack or otherwise service all arrangements to meet the requirements of paragraph 3.1.A.1
above.
3. At all times maintain the Site in a neat and orderly condition which meets the approval of Construction
Manager.
4. Paved Surfaces: Keep clean.
5. Dust Control:
a. Control dust on or near the Work by the application of water or other approved means.
b. If Subcontractor fails to correct unsatisfactory conditions with 24 hours after due notification:
1) Construction Manager may arrange for such work to be performed by other means.
2) Pay costs.
C. Structures:
1. Weekly, and more often if necessary:
a. Pick up all scrap, debris and waste material; remove all such items to the place designated for
their storage.
b. Sweep all Interior Spaces Clean. Clean as used above shall be defined to be free from dust and
other material capable of being removed by reasonable diligence using a hand-held broom.
2. Preparation for installation of succeeding material:
a. Clean the structures or pertinent portions thereof:
1) To the degree of cleanliness recommended by the Manufacturer of the succeeding
material.
2) Using all equipment and materials required to achieve the required cleanliness.
3. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning operations
will not fall on wet, recently painted surfaces.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. Definitions for Clean: The level of cleanliness generally provided by commercial building maintenance
subcontractors using commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials.
B. Prior to Completion of the Work: Remove from the Site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris
and waste.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Cleaning and Waste Management

Section 01 74 00
01 74 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_74_00.DOCX
C. Site:
1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by Construction Manager:
a. Hose down all paved areas onsite and all public sidewalks directly adjacent to the Site.
b. Rake clean other surfaces of the grounds.
2. Remove all resultant debris.
D. Timing: Schedule final cleaning as approved by Construction Manager to enable Owner to accept a
completely clean Project.
3.3 OWNER OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. If Owner occupies the Work, or a portion of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion and acceptance, then
each Subcontractor is responsible to minimize disruption to Owners operations and maintain the
established cleanliness of the area.


END OF SECTION 01 74 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Starting and Adjusting

Section 01 75 00
01 75 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_75_00.DOCX
SECTION 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes provisions for facility startup and demonstration of the following systems:
1. Equipment.
2. Mechanical Systems.
3. Process Systems.
4. Process Controls and Instrumentation.
5. Electrical systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Preliminary Schedules:
1. Submit 2 weeks prior to earliest proposed date.
2. List time and date for the following for each system:
a. Startup.
b. Demonstration.
B. Completion Reports:
1. Submit within 1 week after each system demonstration.
2. List time, date and persons present for the following for each system:
a. Start-up.
b. Demonstration.
3. Include Manufacturer's representative's report indicating:
a. Approval of installation.
b. Satisfactory start-up.
c. Functioning correctly.
4. Indicate that demonstration and instructions were satisfactorily completed.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Provide when required by individual Section.
2. Provide the following services except where indicated otherwise in individual Sections.
a. Inspect, check and approve system installation.
b. Supervise system start-up.
c. Provide written report indicating that system:
1) Has been properly installed and lubricated.
2) Is in accurate alignment.
3) Is free from undue stress imposed by connecting lines or anchor bolts.
4) Has been satisfactorily operated under full load conditions.
d. Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.
e. Instruct Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that:
1. Excess packing and shipping bolts have been removed.
2. Interdependent systems have been checked and are operational.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Starting and Adjusting

Section 01 75 00
01 75 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_75_00.DOCX
1.6 CORRECTION PERIOD
A. Provide periodic continuing warranty services as necessary to ensure proper functioning of mechanical
systems after occupancy of the Project, and for a period of 1 year after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STARTING OF SYSTEMS
A. Inspection:
1. Verify that Project conditions comply with requirements.
2. Verify that status of Work meets requirements for starting of systems.
B. Preparation:
1. Coordinate sequence for start-up of various systems including Owner-provided equipment.
2. Notify Construction Manager 7 days prior to start-up of each system.
3. Have at hand during entire start-up process:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Shop Drawings.
c. Product data.
d. Operation and maintenance data.
4. Verify that each piece of equipment has been checked for:
a. Proper lubrication.
b. Drive rotation.
c. Belt tension.
d. Control sequence.
e. Other conditions which may cause damage.
5. Verify control systems are fully operational in automatic mode.
6. Verify that tests, meter readings and specific electrical characteristics agree with those specified by
electrical equipment Manufacturer.
C. Start-up:
1. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible persons in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Place equipment in operation in proper sequence.
3.2 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
A. Preparation:
1. Verify that system:
a. Has been inspected and put in service.
b. Is fully operational.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
a. Completed.
b. Sufficient copies available for use in demonstrations and instructions.
B. Demonstrations and Instructions:
1. Demonstration of and instruction on operation and maintenance of system:
a. To Owner's personnel.
b. Two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.
2. Equipment requiring seasonal operation: Demonstrate within 6 months.
3. Instruction:
a. Operation and maintenance manual as basis.
b. Review contents of manual in detail.
c. Explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Starting and Adjusting

Section 01 75 00
01 75 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_75_00.DOCX
4. Demonstrate:
a. Start-up.
b. Operation.
c. Control.
d. Adjustment.
e. Troubleshooting.
f. Servicing.
g. Maintenance.
h. Shutdown.
3.3 PERFORMANCE TEST
A. Performance Test:
1. Test the entire Work, including all of its individual systems for 2 weeks before final payment will be
made.
2. Make final tests in the presence of Owner, Construction Manager and Engineer.
3. If any part of the Work or equipment does not meet Specifications:
a. Correct the situation.
b. Obtain approval of Engineer before final payment is made.
4. Provide the personnel and bear all costs for correcting all malfunctions.
5. Owner will provide operating personnel and utilities.


END OF SECTION 01 75 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Project Record Documents

Section 01 78 39
01 78 39 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_78_39.DOCX
SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedures for the maintenance, recording and submittal of Project record documents.
1.3 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Storage: Store documents and Samples in Subcontractor's field office apart from documents used for
construction.
B. Filing: File record documents in accordance with CSI Masterformat.
C. Maintenance:
1. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order.
2. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
D. Availability: Make documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by Construction Manager.
1.4 RECORDING
A. Labeling: Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.
B. Recording:
1. Record actual revisions to the Work.
2. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
3. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
C. Drawings:
1. Legibly mark, with notes or graphic representations, to record actual construction.
a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to approved datum.
b. Horizontal and vertical locations of Underground Facilities and appurtenances, referenced to
permanent surface improvements.
c. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to
visible and accessible features of the structure.
d. Field changes of dimension and detail.
e. Changes made by Field Order, Work Change Directive or Change Order.
f. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
1.5 SUBMITTAL
A. Delivery: At Contract closeout, deliver record documents to Construction Manager for Owner.
B. Transmittal Letter:
1. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, containing:
a. Date.
b. Project title and number.
c. Subcontractor's name and address.
d. Title and number of each Record Document.
e. Signature of Subcontractor or their authorized representative.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Project Record Documents

Section 01 78 39
01 78 39 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\01_78_39.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.


END OF SECTION 01 78 39

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the modification, alteration, conversion, and renovation of existing structures:
1. Be aware of the many incidental items which exist which must be demolished, relocated, or replaced
in order to accomplish the remodeling work of trades.
2. Include the price of such demolition, relocating, and replacement in the base Bid.
3. These incidental items may or may not be indicated in the Contract Documents.
4. Contractor and Subcontractors performing remodeling work are expected to be familiar with the
unknown nature of existing utilities serving an area to be remodeled and shall calculate the base Bid
to include the demolition, removal, relocation, and replacement of these utilities.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
pertinent provisions of the following:
1. American National Standards Institute: ANSI A10.6 - Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations.
2. ASTM: D1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.
3. EPA: Rule 406(b) of the Toxic Substances Control Act of 1992.
4. NFPA: NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms:
1. Abandon:
a. Remove an item to the extent that it is not visible and does not interfere with new construction.
b. Portions of the abandoned item may be left in place.
c. No abandoned items shall be left below new footings.
2. Demolish:
a. Remove existing items from their present location in the Project area and haul to an area
outside of the Project area.
b. Remove utilities serving these items.
3. Relocate:
a. Move existing items from their present location to another location in the Project area.
b. Extend utilities serving the present location to the new location.
4. Remove:
a. Except for items indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain
Owners property, demolished materials shall become Contractors property.
b. Remove existing items from their present location in the Project area and haul to an area
outside of the Project area.
c. Remove utilities serving these items.
5. Replace:
a. Remove existing items from their present location in the Project area, haul them to an area
outside of the Project area, and furnish and install new items in the same or another location.
b. Extend utilities serving the present location to the new location.
6. Reuse: Move existing items from their present location to another location in the Project area. Extend
utilities serving the present location to the new location.
7. Historic Items:
a. Historic items, relics, and similar object including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owners property.

/2 02 41 19 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
b. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver
promptly to Owner.
1.5 DIVISION OF WORK
A. Work: In accordance with the General Conditions, Contractor is responsible for dividing the Work among
the Subcontractors and Suppliers and for delineating the work to be performed by specific trades. The
following are suggestions as to how the Work may be divided. This is not a complete list of the work:
1. Contractor:
a. Cut and patch walls, floors, and ceilings to allow for recessed utilities and ductwork.
b. Remove and reinstall existing suspended ceilings to allow for above ceiling construction.
c. Replace damaged units.
d. Install new ceilings as indicated on the Drawings.
e. Place sleeves in new concrete structures.
f. Patch roof at new penetration and curbs and where existing penetrations and curbs are
removed.
g. Furnish and install new structural steel where required for reinforcement at floor, wall, and roof
openings.
h. Install fire stop and smoke stop systems at penetrations for ratings indicated in accordance with
local building codes.
2. Mechanical, Electrical, and Fire Protection Subcontractors:
a. Furnish sleeves for use in new concrete construction.
b. Install fire stop and smoke stop systems at utility penetrations in accordance with local building
codes.
c. Furnish and install sleeves in gypsum board and masonry construction.
d. Core drill existing concrete for new utilities and sleeves after obtaining Engineer's review of
locations.
e. Remove and reinstall existing fire protection heads to allow for ceiling removal and installation.
f. Furnish new heads, piping, and connections as required for completion of the Work.
3. Miscellaneous:
a. Each trade shall be financially responsible for cutting and patching for sleeves, penetrations,
and installation of isolated components as necessary for its work unless herein specifically
stated to the contrary.
b. On renovation projects, cut and patch walls, floors, and ceilings to allow for continuous runs of
recessed utilities and ductwork.
c. Patching shall be done by the trade whose work is damaged.
d. Costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible.
e. Each trade shall do fitting of its own work as required to make its several components fit
together or to receive the work of other trades.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Predemolition Photographs:
1. Submit showing existing conditions of construction to remain that could be misconstrued as damage
caused by construction activities.
2. Including building and Site, as well as interior and exterior finishes.
3. Submit prior to commencing Work.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar to material and
extent indicated for this Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition.
2. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
4. Comply with 29 CFR 1926.62-(OSHA Paint Standard).

/2 02 41 19 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
C. Pre-Demolition Conference:
1. Conduct pre-demolition conference at Site in accordance with in Division 01 Section Project
Meetings.
2. Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
b. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
c. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and to avoid delays.
d. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by
selective demolition operations.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner Occupancy:
1. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
2. Conduct selective demolition so Owners operations will not be disrupted.
3. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owners operations.
B. Access:
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
2. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written
permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Conditions:
1. Owner and Engineer assume no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
2. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner as far as
practicable.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on Site will not be permitted.
E. Maintenance of Utilities:
1. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during
selective demolition operations.
2. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
F. Lead Paint: Remove and remediate existing lead paint as required to comply with all codes and
requirements while performing the requirements of the Work. Either remove lead paint completely or
partially as required to achieve this.
1.9 WARRANTIES
A. Existing Warranties:
1. Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective
demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
2. If possible, retain original installer or fabricator to patch exposed work that is damaged during selective
demolition.
3. If it is not possible to engage original installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced,
and specialized firm.

/2 02 41 19 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of other Sections of the Specifications.
2. Where no materials are specified in these specifications, use materials of an equivalent type, quality,
and size to match those existing in other areas of the facility.
3. If none exist, use materials and workmanship recognized as of the highest quality in the industry.
4. Obtain Engineer's review of such material and workmanship.
B. Piping: Existing piping which is removed from its present location shall not be reused where new piping is
required unless specifically noted on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled, and of items to be removed and
salvaged.
D. Conflicts:
1. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or
design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
2. Promptly submit written report to Engineer.
E. Survey, or engage a competent person to survey condition of the building, in accordance with requirements
of OSHA, to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned
collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Perform additional surveys as the work progresses to detect hazards resulting from operations to date.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Maintain existing services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition
operations.
B. Interruptions:
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by
Owner and other authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Provide at least 72 hours notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
C. Utility Requirements:
1. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively
demolished.
2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
3. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
4. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with
selective demolition, provide temporary utilities that bypass areas of selective demolition and that
maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
5. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.
6. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

/2 02 41 19 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before and
during selective demolition operations.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls:
1. Conduct selective demolition and debris removal operations to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
2. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission
from Owner and other authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
4. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Protect existing Site improvements, appurtenances, and landscape features to remain.
6. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line or groups
of trees to remain.
C. Temporary Facilities:
1. Protection:
a. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and
damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
b. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area, and to
and from occupied portion of building.
c. Weather Protection:
1) Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
2) Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide
insulated temporary enclosures.
3) Coordinate enclosures with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid
dangerous conditions and effects.
d. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
e. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
2. Shoring and Bracing:
a. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent
movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or
uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
b. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selected demolition.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Dust Control:
1. Use water mist, temporary closures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt.
2. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
3. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure.
4. Vacuum carpeted areas.
5. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.
B. Disposal:
1. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
2. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey
debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

/2 02 41 19 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
3.5 GENERAL
A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated.
B. Methods:
1. Use methods required to complete the work within limitations of governing regulations.
2. Level by Level:
a. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
b. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
3. Cutting Openings:
a. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
b. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or to adjoining construction.
c. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
d. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
4. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished
surfaces.
5. Flame Cutting:
a. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.
b. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe chases, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations.
c. Maintain [ fire watch and ] portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
d. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials, and promptly and
legally dispose of off Site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to
prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
C. Existing Facilities: Comply with Owners requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways,
loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during the selective demolition operations.
D. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owners storage area on Site.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
E. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Paint equipment to match new equipment.
3. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing, and identify contents of containers.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Reinstall items in locations indicated.
6. Comply with requirements for new materials and equipment.
7. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use
indicated.
F. Existing Items to Remain:
1. Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.
2. When permitted by Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location [ and
cleaned ] and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

/2 02 41 19 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
3.6 DEMOLITION
A. Structures:
1. Cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish or otherwise remove parts of the existing structures or
appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, herein specified and necessary to permit completion of
the Work.
2. Dispose of demolished materials in an approved manner.
3. Include necessary cutting, bending, and welding of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous
metal work found embedded in the existing structures.
4. When removing materials or portions of existing structures, shore up, underpin, and protect adjacent
structures.
5. Concrete:
a. Demolish in small sections.
b. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4-inch at junctures with construction to remain, using a
power driven saw.
c. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement to remain at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut
reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated.
d. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
6. Engineer's review of cutting: No existing structure, equipment or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut,
removed or otherwise altered without obtaining review of Engineer.
B. Equipment:
1. Dismantle, remove, and relocate existing equipment, piping, and other appurtenances required for the
completion of the Work.
2. Cut existing pipelines for the purpose of making connections thereto.
3. Cut off anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel indicated to be removed 1-inch below the
concrete surface.
4. Patch remaining concrete surface to smooth even finish.
5. Remove air conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants, if applicable.
C. Piping, Fire Protection, and Electrical Components:
1. When a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, install additional new piping, extending to and
including the most convenient new valve.
2. Piping, conduit, and wiring indicated or required to be demolished shall be done so to the nearest
reasonable connection outside of the Project area or as directed by Engineer.
3. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, cut existing pipelines in a
manner to provide an approved joint.
4. Weld beads, flanges, and provide Dresser couplings on existing and new piping.
5. Remove and reinstall existing fire protection heads to allow for new construction.
6. Comply with applicable fire protection codes.
7. Furnish new heads, piping, and connections as required for completion of the Work.
8. Remove junction boxes and electrical outlets which will no longer be in use.
9. At existing walls which are made thicker, extend piping and wiring to accommodate additional wall
thickness.
10. Remove and reinstall fixtures and electrical outlets, switches, etc.
D. Masonry Walls:
1. Where masonry walls are to be removed and replaced, and where filling existing openings, allow for
toothing in of the new masonry at alternate courses so that the existing running bond pattern is
maintained.
2. Brick:
a. Existing brick which becomes exposed due to the removal of materials such as adjacent walls,
windows, doors, cabinetry, equipment, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned, scraped, brushed, and
tuck pointed to match adjacent existing brick.
b. Blend appearance of exposed brick with the adjacent brick.
c. Replace damaged brick.

/2 02 41 19 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
E. Floor Slabs:
1. Where new utilities must be installed below the existing floor slab, saw cut the slab for at least 1-inch
of depth.
2. Break out the remaining depth with jack hammers or hand tools to provide a rough surface.
3. Leave existing steel reinforcing so that it laps at least 6 inches into the new concrete slab over the
trench.
4. The exact width of the concrete removed shall depend upon the required depth and diameter of the
new utility.
5. Allow for sufficient working space in the trench.
F. Conceal Utilities: Recess new piping, conduit, and other utilities into floors, wires, and ceilings in finished
areas.
G. Ownership of Salvaged Materials:
1. Materials and equipment removed shall remain the property of Owner at Owner's option.
2. Items not salvageable, as determined by Engineer and Owner, and items Owner elects not to keep
shall become the property of Contractor to be properly disposed of off the Site.
3. Salvaged equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, lubricated, and greased for protection during
prolonged storage.
H. Nonshrink Grout: Use nonshrink grout for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling pump bases, doweling
anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as indicated.
I. Protect Facility from Water Damage: Provide flumes, hoses, piping, suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other
means to divert or hold back the flow of wastewater, water, or other liquids, as required for proper
performance of the Work.
J. Blasting: Not permitted.
K. Sleeves:
1. Subcontractors for mechanical, electrical, and other trades shall furnish sleeves and inserts for pipes,
conduits, and similar items in forms, walls, partitions, and floors.
2. Perform work in cooperation with Contractor.
3. Place items in ample time so as not to delay operations.
4. Do not place sleeves so they pass through beams, girders, and similar construction.
L. Roofing: If existing roofing is to remain, obtain original roofing Manufacturer's approval and warranty on new
roof penetrations and where removing existing roof penetrations and curbs.
M. Firestopping and Smokestopping: Install firestop and smokestop systems at utility penetrations in
accordance with local building codes.
N. Earthwork: In accordance with Division 31 Section Excavation and Fill for Utilities.
O. Miscellaneous: At existing walls which are made thicker, reinstall fire extinguisher cabinets, clocks,
thermostats, and other wall hung items in new wall to accommodate additional wall thickness.
3.7 PATCHING AND REFINISHING
A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.
B. Patching:
1. Patch and repair existing surfaces from which items have been removed leaving holes, fasteners, and
surface blemishes exposed to view.
2. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
3. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved
masonry patching material applied according to Manufacturers written recommendations.

/2 02 41 19 8
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Selective Demolition

Section 02 41 19
C. Refinishing:
1. Prepare existing surfaces for finishes by scraping, sanding, filling, acid etching, and sand blasting to
ensure bonding and a smooth finish.
2. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish.
3. Refinish continuous surfaces to the nearest intersection and entirely finish assemblies.
4. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a
manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
5. Refinish entire surfaces if necessary to remediate existing lead painted surfaces.
D. Floors and Walls:
1. Where floors or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair
floor and wall surfaces in the new space.
2. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance.
3. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve
uniform color and appearance.
4. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
5. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
6. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate coats over the patch and
apply final coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.
7. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
8. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.
E. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing materials as necessary to provide even plane surface of uniform
appearance.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean materials installed under this Section in accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste
Management.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations.
C. Return adjacent areas to conditions existing before selective demolition operations began.


END OF SECTION 02 41 19


/2 02 41 19 9
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_41_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Removal of Existing Equipment

Section 02 42 13
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_42_13.DOCX
02 42 13 1
SECTION 02 42 13 - REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: the removal of existing equipment and all pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances not
required for the proper operation of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Do not proceed with removal of any equipment, piping or appurtenances without specific approval of
Engineer. All equipment, piping or appurtenances removed without proper authorization, which is necessary
for the operation of the existing facility, shall be replaced to the satisfaction of Engineer at Contractor's
expense.
B. All existing tubing, insulation, hangers and supports shall become the property of Contractor immediately
upon removal from their present locations. Contractor shall remove such material from the Site at his own
expense and it shall not be reused.
C. All existing valves, and other special piping and utility elements, greater than 3-inch diameter, removed shall
remain the property of Owner. Contractor shall furnish all labor and material to identify, clean, protect, crate
and box and store them at the Site.
D. Provide pieces of equipment weighing 150 pounds or more with suitable skids before storing.
E. Wherever piping is removed, adjacent pipe and headers that are to remain in service shall be blanked off or
plugged and then anchored in an approved manner.
F. Equipment to be retained by Owner shall be carefully removed from the present location, cleaned and
immediately stored onsite as designated by Owner.
G. Take all necessary precautions against damaging the material and equipment to be stored. Repair all
damage resulting from Contractor operations, as directed by and to the satisfaction of Engineer.
H. Give itemized lists of materials removed and stored to Engineer daily. A final typed itemized list shall be
furnished to Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of construction. The list shall include items, method of
packaging, and place of storage.
3.2 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED
A. The following is a list of items which shall be removed and remain the property of Owner. The list is not
intended to be complete, but only to convey the general types of equipment to be retained by Owner:
1. Process feed pumps.
2. Raw waste pumps.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Removal of Existing Equipment

Section 02 42 13
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_42_13.DOCX
02 42 13 2
3. Lagoon recirculation pumps.
4. Lagoon recirculation blowers.
5. Lagoon recirculation piping.
B. All equipment removed shall remain the property of Owner unless designated otherwise by Owner.
C. If Owner elects not to retain ownership of certain items, the items will become the property of Contractor and
shall be removed from the Site at Contractor's expense.


END OF SECTION 02 42 13

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Sewer Bypass Pumping

Section 02 83 00
02 83 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_83_00.DOCX
SECTION 02 83 00 SEWER BYPASS PUMPING


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes furnishing of all pipes, pumps, manhole structures, electrical equipment, valves,
appurtenances and all other items required to provide bypass pumping as described herein and on the
drawings.
1.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design Criteria:
1. Pumping range: 20-350 gpm.
2. Wastewater Characteristics:
a. Solids no larger than 3-inch diameter.
b. ph range 4-11.
B. Performance:
1. System shall operate for a period of 4 weeks.
2. Pumps and piping materials shall be compatible with the wastewater as described above.
3. Provide electrical standby power either through the Owners standby power system or provide trailer
mounted electrical standby power generation.
4. Coordinate all activities with the Owner and schedule operations no less than 2 weeks in advance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: All materials which are not specified herein and are not indicated on the Drawings, but are
required for proper and complete performance of the Work.
B. Procedure:
1. Select new, first quality material.
2. Obtain Engineer's review.
3. Provide and install.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. General:
1. The bypass pumping contractor shall be responsible to perform consistent and reliable raw waste
water bypassing of the existing wet well while new pumps are being installed and start-up is
successfully performed under separate contract.
2. Provide standby and redundant equipment as necessary to assure 24-hour a day operation.
3. Provide labor to operate and maintain temporary pumps, piping, controls, and appurtenances 24 hours
a day during bypass pumping period.
4. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials to maintain raw waste pumping during
replacement of the submersible pumps, including temporary pumps, piping, hoses, supports, thrust
blocks, controls, valves, power, fuel, fuel storage, maintenance, temporary electrical power, and other
necessary items for a fully operational bypass pumping system.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Sewer Bypass Pumping

Section 02 83 00
02 83 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\02_83_00.DOCX
5. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall provide a written plan describing the bypass pumping system
including number and types of pumping equipment, control system, electrical requirements, layout of
pumps and piping, pipe and hose material, intended location of pipe/hose supports or thrust blocks,
safety plan and staffing plan for review by the Engineer and Owner.
6. The Contractor shall meet with the Engineer and Owner on the Project Site to review the plan prior to
installation of temporary bypass equipment.
B. The following description of bypass pumping is suggested and does not imply a complete schedule for
bypass pumping nor does it exclude other possible means and methods for performing the bypass pumping.
1. Bypass pumping shall occur from an existing manhole (MH-4) upstream from the existing raw waste
wet well.
2. The flow in MH-4 can be backed up to a maximum depth of 3 feet.
3. The pumping system shall consist of a duplex arrangement with one self priming pump able to handle
the full range of flows.
4. Plug the manhole outlet such that the raw water is completely isolated from the plant.
5. Provide temporary controls to control the operation of the bypass pumps. Float switches and a duplex
control panel shall control the pumps in a lead-lag manner. A high level float alarm shall be provided
and shall be tied into the plants SCADA system. An alarm shall be initiated locally and remotely such
that the bypass contractor shall be automatically contacted upon a high level alarm. Upon activation
of a high level alarm, both pumps shall turn on (provide a time delay to prevent simultaneous starting)
and an alarm shall be initiated remotely and locally via the SCADA system.
6. Test the pump and controls prior to plugging the wet well inlet pipe and isolating the wet well.
7. All temporary electrical connections and controls shall be intrinsically safe.
8. Temporary electrical power shall be obtained from an existing 480 VAC, 3 phase electrical service at
the existing pump house within 40 feet of MH-4. Temporary motor starters for the bypass pumps can
be located at the exterior of the pump house or adjacent to the raw waste pump panel which is under a
roof but exposed to ambient temperature. Each pump motor shall be limited to a maximum of 20
horsepower.
9. All temporary wiring shall be installed in conduit where subject to physical damage. All temporary
wiring and conduit sizing and routing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Electric utility costs
for bypass pumping will be paid for by the Owner.
10. Temporary discharge piping shall be routed over the ground and to the existing digester tank. Access
to the digester tank shall be through a cored hole in the concrete wall of the blower room. Alternately
the discharge piping can be mounted to the wall and routed over the top of the digester tank wall.


END OF SECTION 02 83 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Cast-in-Place Concrete

Section 03 30 03
03 30 03 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\03_30_03.DOCX
SECTION 03 30 03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of formwork, reinforcement and concrete.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Standard Specifications, Test Methods, and Classifications:
a. A185 - Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
b. A615 - Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
c. C33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
d. C94 - Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
e. C150 - Specification for Portland Cement.
f. C260 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
g. C309 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
h. C494 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
2. ACI - American Concrete Institute:
a. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass
Concrete.
b. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
c. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
d. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
e. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.
f. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.
g. ACI - 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
h. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
3. MDOT Publications:
a. Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Formwork: The design and engineering of formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of
Contractor.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel.
B. Mix Designs: Submit concrete mix design for review prior to placing concrete.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing of concrete: In accordance with Division 01 Section Testing Services.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Cast-in-Place Concrete

Section 03 30 03
03 30 03 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\03_30_03.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Formwork:
1. Form grade plywood or metal panels; no torn edges or worn plywood.
2. Form Release Agent:
a. Non-staining, non-emulsifiable type.
b. Magic Kote by Symons; or equal.
3. Form ties, spreaders and accessories.
4. Provide chamfered strips in exposed corners of concrete.
B. Reinforcement:
1. Reinforcing Bars:
a. ASTM A615.
b. Yield Stress: Fy = 60,000 psi, Grade 60.
2. Welded Wire Fabric:
a. ASTM A185.
b. Yield Stress: Fy = 65,000 psi.
3. Accessories resting on surfaces to be left exposed as finished surfaces shall have plastic coated legs.
C. Concrete Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
2. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
3. Water: Clean, fresh and potable.
4. Air-Entrainment:
a. ASTM C260
b. For all concrete mixes except interior floor slabs.
5. Water Reducing Agents: ASTM C494.
6. No calcium chloride allowed in materials used in concrete mix.
7. Membrane Curing Compounds: ASTM C309.
2.2 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Proportioning:
1. Proportions of materials for concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 211.1.
2. Mix Design 1:
a. Minimum Design Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi.
b. Minimum Cementitious Content: 5.5 sacks.
c. Replacement of Cement by Fly Ash or Slag: Permitted, up to 20% combined.
d. Water-Cementitious Ratio: 0.52 maximum.
e. Slump Limits: 4 inches 1-inch before addition of water reducer, if any.
f. Entrained Air Content: 6% 1%.
3. Mix Design 2:
a. Minimum Design Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi.
b. Minimum Cementitious Content: 5.5 sacks.
c. Replacement of Cement by Fly Ash or Slag: Permitted, up to 20% combined.
d. Water-Cementitious Ratio: 0.52 maximum.
e. Slump Limits: 4 inches 1-inch before addition of water reducer, if any.
f. Entrained Air Content: 0%.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Production and Delivery:
1. Ready mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94.
2. Ready-mix delivery tickets shall be furnished with each batch of concrete before unloading at the Site,
on which is printed, stamped or written the following information:
a. Name of ready-mix batch plant.
b. Serial number of ticket.
c. Date and truck number.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Cast-in-Place Concrete

Section 03 30 03
03 30 03 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\03_30_03.DOCX
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Job name and location.
f. Specific class of designation of concrete.
g. Amount of concrete (cubic yards).
h. Time loaded or of first mixing of cement and aggregates.
i. Type, name and amount of admixture.
3. Minor amounts of concrete may be mixed on Site with prior approval of Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION AND PLACEMENT
A. Forms:
1. Provide required forms, shores, bracing, breast timbers, form ties and accessories in sufficient
quantities so as not to delay the work.
2. Coordinate work with other trades for the installation of embedded items and form penetrations.
3. Form Removal:
a. No earlier than 3 days for columns and walls.
b. No earlier than 7 days for beams and slabs.
B. Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it, shall be free from rust scale,
loose mill scale, oil, paint and other coatings which will destroy or reduce bond between steel and concrete.
C. Concrete:
1. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit in carts, buggies or conveyors.
2. Compact concrete by mechanical vibration equipment, but do not transport concrete through forms by
vibrating.
3. Slab Finish:
a. Interior Slabs: Smooth troweled finish unless specified otherwise.
4. As soon as possible after finishing or removing forms, treat surfaces with a liquid membrane-forming
curing compound unless specified otherwise.
5. Protect freshly placed concrete from damage due to extreme temperatures in accordance with
ACI 305R and ACI 306R.


END OF SECTION 03 30 03

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Concrete masonry lintels.
3. Mortar and grout.
4. Steel reinforcing bars.
5. Masonry joint reinforcement.
6. Miscellaneous anchors.
7. Embedded flashing.
8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
9. Masonry-cell insulation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include data on material properties.
b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

/3 04 22 00 - 1 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and
mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,
mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to
Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and
equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source
from single manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including
color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from
single source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements
in the Contract Documents.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become
wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in
place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
three days after building masonry walls or columns.

/3 04 22 00 - 2 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI
530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is
40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days
after completing cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-
resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent
masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Density Classification: Medium weight unless otherwise indicated.
2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8-inch less than nominal dimensions.
2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY LINTELS
A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs
with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before
handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.

/3 04 22 00 - 3 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no
other ingredients.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.
b. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Brikset Type N Citadel Type S Dixie Type S Kosmortar
Type N Richmortar Victor Plastic Cement.
c. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment Velvet.
d. Holcim (US) Inc.; Mortamix Masonry Cement Rainbow Mortamix Custom Buff
Masonry Cement White Mortamix Masonry Cement.
e. Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Masonry Cement Lafarge Masonry Cement
Trinity White Masonry Cement.
f. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement Lehigh White Masonry
Cement.
g. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.
E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement Magnolia Superbond Mortar
Cement.
F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4-inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 sieve.
G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.
b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.
I. Water: Potable.
2.5 STEEL REINFORCING BARS AND MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (9 gauge) diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (9 gauge) diameter.
5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet with prefabricated corner and tee units.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder with single pair of side rods.

/3 04 22 00 - 4 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
2.6 ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60zinc coating.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM
A 563hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM
A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.
2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal
flashing.
3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal
flashing with a drip edge.
4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing.
B. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU
web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers that prevent
UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed to be built into
mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls and that extend into
the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Blok-Flash.
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:
1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended
by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
E. Drainage Mattes: Mesh mattes to allow moisture drainage to flashing system and to weep holes.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; 7-inch x 16-inch Blok-Flash Drainage Mattes and Bug
Guards.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).

/3 04 22 00 - 5 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
2.10 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
A. Loose-Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for
water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water repellency
and to limit dust generation).
2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime masonry cement mortar.
5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified
28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C
143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

/3 04 22 00 - 6 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern
or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with
cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2-inch or
minus 1/4-inch.
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus
1/2-inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4-inch in a story height or 1/2-inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than
1/4-inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet, 1/4-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet,
3/8-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet,
1/4-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet, 3/8-inch
in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than
1/4-inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8-inch,
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2-inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more
than 1/8-inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8-inch
or minus 1/4-inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8-inch.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other
locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running
bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or
jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond. Bond and interlock each
course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar before laying fresh masonry.

/3 04 22 00 - 7 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill
in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items unless otherwise indicated.
H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
A. Pour granular insulation into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show
presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been
confirmed. Limit the fall of insulation to one story high, but not more than 20 feet.
3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8-inch
on exterior side of walls, 1/2-inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.8 CONTROL JOINTS
A. General: Install control joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow
materials to span control joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint.
Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

/3 04 22 00 - 8 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
3.9 LINTELS
A. Provide masonry and steel lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches for
block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 FLASHING
A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward
flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and
sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end
dams.
3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than
1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric
sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application
indicated.
4. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking
hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2-inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal
drip edge.
C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located
below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall.
Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and
extend from face shell to face shell.
D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie,
and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

/3 04 22 00 - 9 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Concrete Unit Masonry

Section 04 22 00
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in
fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04 22 00

/3 04 22 00 - 10 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\04_22_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Metal Fabrications

Section 05 50 00
05 50 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\05_50_00.DOCX
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing, fabrication and erection of metal fabrications, including the major items
listed below:
1. Loose angle and wide flange lintels.
2. Expansion bolts for the general trades.
3. Galvanizing of selected items.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
pertinent provisions of the following:
1. ASTM Standard Specifications:
a. A36 - Structural Steel.
b. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
c. A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
d. A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi, Tensile Strength.
e. A325 - Structural Bolts, Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
f. A366 - Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Cold-Rolled.
g. A490 - Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
h. A563 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
i. A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
j. B633 - Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
k. D520 - Zinc Dust Pigment for Paint.
l. E488 - Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.
m. E1512 - Testing Bond Performance of Adhesive-Bonded Anchors.
n. F436 - Hardened Steel Washers.
o. F593 - Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
p. F594 - Stainless Steel Nuts.
q. F1267 - Expanded Metal, Steel.
r. F1554 - Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength.
2. AISC publications:
a. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (excluding Section 4.2.1).
b. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
c. Detailing for Steel Construction.
d. Manual of Steel Construction.
e. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
3. AWS publications:
a. ANSI/AWS A5.1 - Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Arc Welding.
b. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
4. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
a. ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 - Heavy Hex Structural and Askew Head Bolts.
b. ANSI/ASME B18.6.1 - Wood Screws.
c. ANSI/ASME B18.6.3 - Slotted and Recessed Head Machine Screws.
d. ANSI/ASME B18.21.1 - Lock Washers.
e. ANSI/ASME B18.22.1 - Plain Washers.
5. Federal Specifications: FS FF-B-588C(1) - Bolt, Toggle, and Expansion Sleeve, Screw.
6. American Hot-Dip Galvanizers Association.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Metal Fabrications

Section 05 50 00
05 50 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\05_50_00.DOCX
7. Occupational Safety and Health Act.
8. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For all members to be furnished to include:
1. Detail Drawings of Members and Connections:
a. In accordance with AISC - Detailing for Steel Construction.
b. Dimensions.
c. Connection angles and plates.
2. Erection Drawings: Locate and identify members.
3. Welding: In accordance with AWS welding symbols.
4. Type of paint.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Erection Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the type of work being performed.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B. Welders, Welding Operators and Tackers Qualifications:
1. Qualified by tests in accordance with Section 5 of AWS D1.1.
2. Qualification Papers:
a. Given by an independent testing laboratory.
b. Dated no earlier than 6 months prior to beginning of Project.
3. Engineer, at Engineer's discretion, may accept evidence of previous qualifications.
C. Testing of Welds: In accordance with Division 01 Section Testing Services.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign
matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or distorted material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace rejected
materials with new material at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Embedded Items:
1. Includes anchor rods and other anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place
concrete or masonry.
2. Delivered on the Project Site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete or
masonry operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials shall be new, top quality of their respective kinds, standard sizes and fabricated in a
shop whose principal business is manufacturing the items specified in this Section.
B. Yield Stress and Type of Steel:
1. For S Shapes, Channels, Angles, Bars, Plates and Rods: ASTM A36 with yield stress of 36,000 psi.
C. Paint: In accordance with Division 09 Section Painting.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Metal Fabrications

Section 05 50 00
05 50 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\05_50_00.DOCX
D. Fasteners:
1. Bolts:
a. Use carbon or alloy steel, ASTM A325 3/4-inch diameter bolts or larger as required by
connection design.
b. Use ASTM A490 3/4-inch diameter bolts or larger only if required by connection design.
c. If conditions require that galvanized materials be used, use ASTM A307 or A325 bolts. Do not
galvanize A490 bolts, as that could possibly cause hydrogen embrittlement, and will affect
hardness.
d. Stainless steel: ASTM F593, used where conditions of severe corrosion could occur.
2. Nuts:
a. Carbon Steel: ASTM A563.
b. Stainless Steel: ASTM F594.
3. Washers:
a. Hardened Steel Washers: ASTM F436.
b. Plain Washers: ASME B18.22.1, round, carbon steel.
c. Lock Washers: ASME B18.21.1, helical, spring type, carbon steel.
4. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1, square or hex head type.
5. Toggle Bolts: Tumble wing type in accordance with FS FF-B-588.
6. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
7. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Anchors:
1. Expansion:
a. Wedge style anchor.
b. Capable of withstanding 6 times the imposed load capacity in unit masonry and 4 times the
imposed load capacity in concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM E488.
c. Hilti Kwik Bolt 3; Powers Rawl Power Stud; or equal.
d. Submerged or Subject to Becoming Wet: Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593.
e. Dry Areas: Mild steel, galvanized in accordance with ASTM B633.
2. Injectable Adhesive Anchors:
a. In Concrete or Solid Grouted Masonry: Hilti HIT HY-150; Powers Rawl Power Fast; or equal.
b. In Hollow Brick or Hollow Masonry: Hilti HIT HY-20; Powers Rawl Power Fast with screen
tubes; or equal.
c. Anchored Material: Carbon steel or stainless steel rods, or reinforcing bars as indicated on the
Drawings.
d. Bonding Strength: Tested in accordance with ASTM E1512.
3. Sleeve Anchors:
a. Hilti Sleeve Anchor; Powers Rawl Lok Bolt; or equal.
b. Hex, acorn, round, or flat head as situation requires or as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Submerged or Subject to Becoming Wet: Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593.
d. Dry Areas: Mild steel, galvanized in accordance with ASTM B633.
F. Other Materials: All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation of the work of this Section, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and as selected by
Contractor subject to approval of Engineer.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Workmanship: Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion and defects.
2. Temporary Bracing:
a. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing.
b. Keep work in alignment.
3. Welding:
a. Steel welding shall be performed in accordance with AISC Specification Section J and AWS
D1.1.
b. Filler metal requirements for steel welding processes shall be as shown in Table 4.1 of AWS
D1.1 and AWS A5.1.
c. Welding shall be continuous along entire area of contact.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Metal Fabrications

Section 05 50 00
05 50 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\05_50_00.DOCX
4. Painting: Prime paint metal fabrications in accordance with Division 09 Section Painting.
5. Normal structural steel fabrication tolerances will not be acceptable where in conflict with the intent
and requirements of this Section.
6. Straightness tolerances, additive to deflection, shall not exceed 1/16-inch to 10 feet.
7. Fastening shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness or metal and details of assembly and
supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude
water. Provide holes and connections for the work of other trades.
B. Galvanizing:
1. Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123.
2. 2 oz/ sq ft minimum.
3. Galvanize items so indicated on the Drawings.
C. Galvanized Fasteners:
1. Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153.
2. Class C (1.25 oz/sq ft) minimum coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Workmanship: Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion and defects.
B. Erection:
1. Bracing:
a. Provide all shoring, bracing and accessories required for complete erection.
b. Safety and adequacy of bracing and temporary bracing are the responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Touch-up:
1. After erection is complete, touch up all shop priming coats damaged during transportation and
erection.
2. Prime all field welds, bolt heads, nuts and abrasions using the priming paint specified for shop priming.
3. Touch up all damaged galvanized areas with a zinc rich paint meeting ASTM D520 and ASTM A780.
D. Welding: Field welding shall be performed to the same standards and requirements of shop welding.
E. Protection: Where required, provide approved protection against galvanic action between contacts of
dissimilar metal or situations that will cause deterioration of metal in contact or associated in any way.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials and related areas in
accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste Management.


END OF SECTION 05 50 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Rough Carpentry

Section 06 10 00
06 10 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_10_00.DOC
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Wood blocking and nailers.
3. Wood furring.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing."
2. Division 06 Section "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from
dimension lumber.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Rough Carpentry

Section 06 10 00
06 10 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_10_00.DOC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
B. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of
Review.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or
concrete.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the
following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
7. Northern species; NLGA.
8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA,
NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
4. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.
5. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
6. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of
any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Rough Carpentry

Section 06 10 00
06 10 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_10_00.DOC
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5.
2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
5. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 coating designation.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with
ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Rough Carpentry

Section 06 10 00
06 10 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_10_00.DOC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate
furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
C. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function
of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family
Dwellings.
F. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
G. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06 10 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Sheathing

Section 06 16 00
06 16 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_16_00.DOC
SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes roof sheathing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Preservative-treated plywood or OSB.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-
retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Plywood: DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Sheathing

Section 06 16 00
06 16 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_16_00.DOC
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete
or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.3 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4-inch.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4-inch.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof sheathing, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,
except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for
material being fastened.
1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other
corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours
according to ASTM B 117.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces
do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these
materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed assembly.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Sheathing

Section 06 16 00
06 16 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_16_00.DOC
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at
edges of wall sheathing panels.
b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8-inch apart at edges and ends.
END OF SECTION 06 16 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

Section 06 17 53
SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal-plate-connected wood trusses and related items.
B. Division of Work: In accordance with the General Conditions, Contractor is responsible for dividing the Work
among the Subcontractors and Suppliers and for delineating the work to be performed by specific trades.
The following are suggestions as to how the work may be divided. This is not a complete list of all the work:
1. Truss Supplier:
a. Designs and supplies trusses for loads and criteria specified herein.
b. Supplies gable end trusses, where required, with verticals designed for column buckling due to
roof loads.
c. Designs and supplies connections, where required, of trusses to truss girders, of truss plies to
each other, of supported trusses to supporting trusses, and of truss field splices.
d. Where truss chords are not sheathed, indicates permanent bracing locations for truss chord
members as required by truss Suppliers design, and compressive forces in those chords.
e. Indicates permanent bracing locations for truss diagonal and vertical members as required by
truss Suppliers design, and compressive forces in those members.
f. Indicates permanent bracing locations, and bracing thicknesses if thicknesses affect layouts, for
special truss designs such as cantilevers, piggybacks, and multiple spans.
2. Truss Installer:
a. Installs trusses in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings.
b. Designs and installs temporary construction bracing of trusses.
c. Installs permanent bracing system.
3. General Contractor:
a. Coordinates the work of all trades, including the truss Suppliers quantity of member bracing
locations with the truss installer.
b. Ensures that permanent bracing has been installed at each member brace location designated
by the truss Supplier.
C. Definitions:
1. Valley Frame: Pre-engineered wood infill frame used over and perpendicular to supporting wood
trusses to create dormer and valley roof shapes.
2. Piggyback Truss: Pre-engineered multi-piece wood truss assembly in which infill frames are used
over and parallel with structural wood trusses to complete a roof line, generally because of fabrication
or shipping limitations.
3. Carrying (or Supporting) Truss: The lower truss of a piggyback assembly or below a valley frame.
4. Cap (or Supported) Truss: The upper truss of a piggyback assembly.
5. Scab, T, L and U-Brace: Brace configurations for individual truss members, consisting of framing
added to the wide face of the truss member (scab style), or framing added to create a T-, L-, or U-
shaped cross section.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
pertinent provisions of the following:
1. AF&PA - American Forest and Paper Association: National Design Specifications for Wood
Construction, and Supplement.
2. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee.

/1 06 17 53 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_17_53.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

Section 06 17 53
3. ASME:
a. B18.2.1 - Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series).
b. B18.6.1 - Wood Screws (Inch Series).
4. ASTM:
a. A153 - Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware.
b. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
c. A563 - Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
d. A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
e. A666 - Specification for Annealed of Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate,
and Flat Bar.
5. International Code Council: NES NER-272 - Pneumatic or Mechanically Driven Staples, Nails, P-
Nails, and Allied Fasteners for Use in All Types of Building Construction.
6. TPI - Truss Plate Institute:
a. TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction.
b. DSB-89 - Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal-Plate-Connected
Wood Trusses.
c. HIB 91 - Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing and Bracing Metal-Plate-
Connected Wood Trusses.
7. Michigan Building Code.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design:
1. Trusses shall be designed by the truss Supplier, for design loads and within limits and under
conditions indicated, for requirements of references indicated.
2. The truss web configuration, member sizes and connection details indicated on the Drawings shall not
be construed to relieve the truss Supplier from truss Supplier's design responsibility.
3. Connections between 2 or more wood members, all of which are designed or specified by the truss
Supplier, shall be designed or specified by the truss Supplier.
4. Design Loads:
a. Top Chord Dead Load: 10 psf.
b. Top Chord Snow Load: 56 psf.
c. Bottom Chord Dead Load: 5 psf.
d. Bottom Chord Live Load: 0 psf.
e. Wind Loads: 6.5 psf downward, 35.1 psf uplift.
f. Concentrated Loads: 300 lbs.
g. Temperature Range: -20 to 180 degrees F.
h. Moisture Conditions: 19% maximum wood moisture content.
i. Note: Truss self-weights are not included in the above loads.
5. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span under design snow load, and 1/240 of span
under combined dead and snow load.
B. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design
Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For wood trusses, for review prior to fabrication, to include:
1. Truss placement plan.
2. Individual dimensioned truss geometries with joint locations and member sizes.
3. Vertical and horizontal deflections for design load combinations.
4. Design loads.
5. Lumber species and grade.
6. Allowable and actual stresses in wood members.
7. Metal plate connector types, sizes, thicknesses, and materials.
8. Duration of load adjustment used.
9. Minimum bearing areas required and each truss reaction and direction.

/1 06 17 53 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_17_53.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

Section 06 17 53
10. Required permanent truss member bracing locations to prevent buckling of compression members.
11. Maximum compression forces in truss members to be braced for buckling.
12. Connection requirements for:
a. Truss-to-truss girder.
b. Truss ply to ply.
c. Field splices.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that
complies with quality-control procedures of TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies
with quality control procedures in TPI 1.
C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with TPI recommendations. Adequately support trusses to prevent damage and lateral bending.
Cover to protect from weather. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace
trusses that are damaged or defective.
C. Handle trusses into final position in accordance with truss Supplier's recommendations.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of
other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber:
1. Graded by an agency approved by the Board of Review of the ALSC.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19%.
3. Species and grade chosen by truss Supplier in accordance with truss Supplier's design.
4. Bracing Materials: In accordance with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
B. Metal Connector Plates:
1. Manufactured by a Wood Truss Council of America (WTCA) Member Plate Manufacturer.
2. Comply with TPI 1.
3. Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653, minimum of G60 coating, and not less than
0.036-inch thick.
C. Fasteners:
1. General:
a. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated on the Drawings, and as required to carry the
design loads.
b. Hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153, with G90 coating thickness.
2. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.
3. Powder Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
4. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

/1 06 17 53 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_17_53.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

Section 06 17 53
5. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
6. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
D. Metal Framing Anchors and Accessories:
1. Provide framing anchors made by Manufacturer and of type and size indicated on the Drawings.
2. Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G90 coating designation.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close fitting joints.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to
withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and
accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to
produce design camber indicated. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both
sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Erect the trusses in conformance with:
1. Local Building Codes.
2. TPI Guidelines.
3. Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
B. Erect wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place, braced, and secured.
C. Before erecting, splice trusses delivered to Project Site in more than one piece.
D. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not
to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
E. Erect trusses plumb, square, and true to line, and securely fasten to supporting construction. Brace trusses
until permanent bracing is in place.
F. Space trusses as indicated on the Drawings and the reviewed Shop Drawings; adjust and align trusses in
location before permanently fastening.
G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points with metal framing anchors as indicated on the Drawings. Install
fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to Manufacturers fastening
schedules and written instructions.
H. Do not place concentrated loads on trusses until permanent bracing is installed, or until temporary bracing is
in place and can remain in place until permanent bracing is installed.
I. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses as directed by truss Supplier:
Anchor trusses to girder trusses as directed by truss Supplier.

/1 06 17 53 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_17_53.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

Section 06 17 53
J. Install and fasten permanent bracing as indicated herein and on the Drawings:
1. Install permanent wood bracing for truss members at each location indicated on the truss Shop
Drawings.
2. Continuous wood bracing shall be 2 x 4 minimum size, and fastened to each braced member with a
minimum of (2) 16d nails:
a. Splice continuous wood bracing by lapping bracing 1 truss space, minimum.
b. Anchor continuous wood bracing to diaphragms with 2 x 4 minimum diagonals, attached with a
minimum of (2) 16d nails each end and at every truss the diagonals cross.
c. Use diagonals in pairs, each with one end adjacent to the continuous wood bracing and the
other attached to a truss near the ceiling or roof diaphragm. Angle the diagonals at
approximately 45 degrees to the continuous wood brace.
d. Space diagonals 20 feet on center maximum along the length of continuous wood bracing.
e. Do not splice diagonals.
3. Where different truss shapes make continuous wood bracing impractical, install scab, T-, U-, or
L-bracing on each truss member requiring bracing:
a. Bracing shall be 2 x 4 minimum size, and fastened to the truss member with a minimum of 16d
nails at 12 inches on center, minimum.
b. Bracing of truss web members shall run continuously from under the top chord to the top of the
bottom chord.
4. Install 2 x 4 braces in a T configuration to each vertical member of gable end trusses, with a minimum
of 16d nails at 12 inches on center. Run braces continuously from top to bottom of truss and attach to
roof and ceiling diaphragm.
K. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
L. Do not cut or remove truss members.
M. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements: Do not alter trusses in field.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean the work installed under this Section and all affected areas in accordance with Division 01 Section
Cleaning and Waste Management.


END OF SECTION 06 17 53


/1 06 17 53 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_17_53.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Exterior Finish Carpentry

Section 06 20 13
06 20 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_20_13.DOC
SECTION 06 20 13 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plywood siding.
B. Related Section includes Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other
carpentry work not exposed to view.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application
details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include
chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Compliance Certificates:
1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp.
2. For preservative-treated wood that is not marked with treatment-quality mark.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.
C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather
conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied
without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Exterior Finish Carpentry

Section 06 20 13
06 20 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_20_13.DOC
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Water-Repellent Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: AWPA N1; dip, spray, flood,
or vacuum-pressure treatment.
B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 18
percent respectively.
2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical
formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect
finishes.
4. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
5. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of
each piece.
6. Application: All exterior lumber and plywood.
2.3 PLYWOOD SIDING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
2. Hardel Mutual Plywood Corporation.
3. Hood Industries.
4. K Ply Inc.
5. Pacific Wood Laminates, Inc.
6. Plum Creek Timber Company, Inc.
7. Roseburg Forest Products Co.
8. Roy O. Martin Lumber Management, L.L.C.
9. SDS Lumber Company; Bingen Plywood Division.
10. Stimson Lumber Company, Inc.
11. Swanson Group; Plywood Division.
12. Textured Forest Products, Inc.
B. Plywood Type: APA-rated siding, pressure-preservative treated, in panel sizes indicated.
1. Face Grade: 303-OC.
2. Face Grade: 303-6W.
C. Thickness: 5/8-inch to match existing.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Exterior Finish Carpentry

Section 06 20 13
06 20 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_20_13.DOC
D. Face Species: To match existing.
E. Pattern: Plain.
F. Surface: Smooth.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate
not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.
1. For face-fastening siding, provide ringed-shank siding nails or hot-dip galvanized-steel
siding nails.
2. For redwood, provide stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized-steel fasteners.
3. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face
fastening is required.
4. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless steel fasteners.
B. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for
flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install to tolerance of 1/8-inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry.
3.4 SIDING INSTALLATION
A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Exterior Finish Carpentry

Section 06 20 13
06 20 13 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\06_20_13.DOC
B. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first
course of siding with lower edge at least 1/8-inch below starter strip and subsequent courses
lapped 1-inch over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than
one thickness of siding.
1. Leave 1/8-inch gap at trim and corners unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer,
and apply sealant.
2. Butt joints only over framing or blocking, nailing top and bottom on each side and
staggering joints in subsequent courses.
C. Plywood Siding: Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Nail at 6 inches o.c. at
panel perimeter and 12 inches o.c. at intermediate supports unless manufacturer recommends
closer spacing. Leave 1/16-inch gap between adjacent panels and 1/8-inch gap at perimeter,
openings, and horizontal joints unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.
1. Seal butt joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
D. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding
manufacturer.
E. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up
factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 06 20 13
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Thermal Insulation

Section 07 21 00
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
B. Related Section includes Division 04 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in
masonry cells.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM
E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project
site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.

/1 07 21 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_21_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Thermal Insulation

Section 07 21 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive
strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and
450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
2. Type IV, 25 psi.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced),
Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor
barrier).
C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit
between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces
and vented eaves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications
indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,
widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless
multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

/1 07 21 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_21_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Thermal Insulation

Section 07 21 00
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's
recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade
line.
END OF SECTION 07 21 00

/1 07 21 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_21_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Asphalt Shingles

Section 07 31 13
SECTION 07 31 13 - ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Asphalt shingles.
2. Underlayment.
3. Ridge vent.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing.
2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing.
1.3 DEFINITION
A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle, shingles and ridge vent indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected:
1. Asphalt Shingle: Full size.
2. Ridge Vent: 12-inch long Sample.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle required, from the ICC.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft. of each type, in unbroken bundles.

/3 07 31 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_31_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Asphalt Shingles

Section 07 31 13
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge shingles, ridge vents, felt underlayment, and self-adhering
sheet underlayment from single source from single manufacturer.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle
manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised
surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.
1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent
damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.
B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when
roofing work is not in progress.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is
operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by manufacturer.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt
shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Manufacturing defects.
b. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a
reasonable time.
2. Material Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with
first 5 years nonprorated.
3. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by
wind speeds up to 100 mph for 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Algae-Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor 10 years from date
of Substantial Completion.
5. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Glass-Fiber Reinforced Asphalt Shingles: Manufacturers standard to match existing shingles.
Contractor to field verify type, material, size, profile and color of existing ridge vent. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:
1. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. GAF Materials Corporation.
4. IKO.
5. Owens Corning.
6. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc.

/3 07 31 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_31_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Asphalt Shingles

Section 07 31 13
B. Contractor to provide and install asphalt shingle to match type, size and color of existing asphalt
shingles. Contractor to field verify type, size and color of existing asphalt shingle. Contractor to
tie into existing asphalt shingles as required to maintain existing asphalt shingle warranty,
seamless appearance between new and existing shingles and maintain weathertight roof system
for both new and existing roof systems.
C. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration.
D. Color and Blends: To match existing
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil
thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt
adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace, W. R.
& Co. "Ice and Water Shield" or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.
b. Johns Manville.
c. Owens Corning.
d. Polyguard Products, Inc.
2.3 RIDGE VENTS
A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard to match existing ridge vent; for use under ridge
shingles. Contractor to field verify type, material, size, profile and color of existing ridge vent.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Air Vent, Inc.; a Gibraltar Industries company.
b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc.
c. GAF Materials Corporation.
d. Lomanco, Inc.
e. Mid-America Building Products.
f. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated.
g. Owens Corning.
h. RGM Products, Inc.
i. Trimline Building Products.
2. Minimum Net Free Area: Match existing.
3. Width: Match existing.
4. Thickness: Match existing.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire
shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum
3/8-inch diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4-inch into solid wood decking
or extend at least 1/8-inch through OSB or plywood sheathing.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as
flashing.
C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-
profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter.

/3 07 31 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_31_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Asphalt Shingles

Section 07 31 13
2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Sheet Metal: Match existing material, profile, finish and color.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other
characteristics of the item.
1. Metal wrapped wood fascia: Match existing.
2. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof-deck flange and
1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and
blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely
anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through
asphalt shingles.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap
sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger
end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment nails.
1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment.
Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction
to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet
underlayment.
2. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch o.c.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-
temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at
locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches.
Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller.
Cover underlayment within 7 days.
1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment.
2. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall.
3. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall.
4. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot.

/3 07 31 13 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_31_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Asphalt Shingles

Section 07 31 13
3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 07
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt
Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck.
C. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof
sheathing.
3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions,
recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle
recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip to match existing
with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.
1. Extend asphalt shingles to match existing over fasciae at eaves and rakes.
2. Install starter strip along rake edge.
C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck
with offset pattern to match existing at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.
D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck
with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform
exposure.
E. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure.
Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in
succeeding courses.
F. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement
spots.
2. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles
with asphalt roofing cement spots.
G. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
H. Ridge Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap
cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing
nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.
END OF SECTION 07 31 13

/3 07 31 13 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_31_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Formed Metal Ceiling Panels

Section 07 42 13.13
07 42 13.13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_13.DOC
SECTION 07 42 13.13 - FORMED METAL CEILING PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal ceiling panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions,
joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,
and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of
not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied finishes.
1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below:
1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and
other metal panel accessories.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment
capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed
products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or
deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Formed Metal Ceiling Panels

Section 07 42 13.13
07 42 13.13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_13.DOC
B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of
water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits,
and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-
applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL CEILING PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side
edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed
fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
B. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels to match existing metal ceiling panels.
Contractor to verify specified Basis of Design Product does match existing metal ceiling panels.
Contractor to provide and install metal ceiling panel that matches existing metal ceiling panels.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fabral
MP-PANEL GR3 PLUS; or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Architectural Metal Systems; a Nucor company.
b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
c. Butler Manufacturing Company; a BlueScope Steel company.
d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
e. Firestone Metal Products, LLC.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Formed Metal Ceiling Panels

Section 07 42 13.13
07 42 13.13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_13.DOC
f. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.
g. MBCI.
h. McElroy Metal, Inc.
i. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.
j. Morin; a Kingspan Group company.
k. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM
A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality.
Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a. Nominal Thickness: 29 gauge.
b. Exterior Finish: Siliconized polyester.
c. Color: White to match existing metal ceiling panels.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel
sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50
aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's
standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,
fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are
not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae,
parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as
adjacent metal panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied
coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with
panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inchthick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain
weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements
demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Formed Metal Ceiling Panels

Section 07 42 13.13
07 42 13.13 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_13.DOC
B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may
be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same
profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according
to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of
panel.
D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide
a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from
movements.
E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that
apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant
and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal
wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being
secured.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if
they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
C. Steel Panels and Accessories:
1. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with
a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat.
2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Formed Metal Ceiling Panels

Section 07 42 13.13
07 42 13.13 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_13.DOC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking
and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,
sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.
2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be
concealed by metal panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.
Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use
galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Formed Metal Ceiling Panels

Section 07 42 13.13
07 42 13.13 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_13.DOC
D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at
location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for
neat and weathertight enclosure.
2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal panels.
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use
proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of
washer.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in
predrilled holes.
5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.
E. Watertight Installation:
1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using
sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and
elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.
2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and
accessories.
3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and
fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings,
corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar
items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated,
provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that are permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to
line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of
corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less
than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel
manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and
sealant.
C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 42 13.13
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Metal Soffit Panels

Section 07 42 13.53
SECTION 07 42 13.53 - METAL SOFFIT PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal soffit panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions,
joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures,
and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not
less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color
finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and
other metal panel accessories.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment
capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed
products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work.

/2 07 42 13.53 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_53.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Metal Soffit Panels

Section 07 42 13.53
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or
deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of
water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of walls,
and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-
applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the
following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.
B. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM
E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

/2 07 42 13.53 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_53.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Metal Soffit Panels

Section 07 42 13.53
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A. General: Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side
edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed
fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of existing metal soffit panels.
1. Finish: Match finish and color of existing metal soffit panels.
2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
C. V-Groove-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: Solid and perforated panels formed with vertical panel
edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced or a flat pan between panel edges;
with a V-groove joint between panels. Contractor to verify material, finish and profile of existng
metal soffit panels and provide and install metal soffit panels that match existing metal soffit
panels.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. ATAS International, Inc.
b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
c. Dimensional Metals, Inc.
d. Fabral.
e. McElroy Metal, Inc.
f. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM
A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality.
Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a. Nominal Thickness: Match existing.
b. Exterior Finish: Match existing.
c. Color: White (match existing).
3. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
a. Thickness: Match existing.
b. Surface: Match existing.
c. Exterior Finish: Match existing.
d. Color: White (match existing).
4. Panel Coverage: Match existing.
5. Panel Height: Match existing.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel
sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50
aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's
standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match
material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

/2 07 42 13.53 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_53.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Metal Soffit Panels

Section 07 42 13.53
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim
with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied
coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with
panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2-inch wide and 1/8-inch thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain
weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements
demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may
be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same
profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according
to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of
panel.
D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide
a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from
movements.
E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that
apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant
and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal
soffit panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being
secured.

/2 07 42 13.53 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_53.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Metal Soffit Panels

Section 07 42 13.53
2.5 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if
they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
C. Steel Panels and Accessories:
1. Match existing finish and color.
2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
D. Aluminum Panels and Accessories: Match existing finish and color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1. Examine framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel
support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required
by metal panel manufacturer.
2. Examine sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and
that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer.
a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1. Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with
requirements for assemblies indicated.
3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation,
sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.
2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be
concealed by metal panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.

/2 07 42 13.53 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_53.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Metal Soffit Panels

Section 07 42 13.53
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use
galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
2. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at
location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.
2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal panels.
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use
proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of
washer.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress
washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in
predrilled holes.
E. Watertight Installation:
1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using
sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels and
elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.
2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and
accessories.
3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and
fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, corners,
seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
Provide types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types
recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that are permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling, and tool marks, and that is true
to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to achieve waterproof performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of
corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inch
deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

/2 07 42 13.53 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_53.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Metal Soffit Panels

Section 07 42 13.53
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of
metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and
sealant.
C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 42 13.53

/2 07 42 13.53 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_42_13_53.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Section 07 62 00
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Aluminum wrapped wood fascia.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Division 07 Section Asphalt Shingles for materials and installation of sheet metal flashing
and trim integral with roofing.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,
joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of
fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction
of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
10. Include details of special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-
applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and
in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

/2 07 62 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_62_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Section 07 62 00
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color
required.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1 tested.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing
and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.
1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be listed as
able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight
and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim
installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet
metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

/2 07 62 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_62_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Section 07 62 00
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual"
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles
shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A
755/A 755M.
1. Surface: Match existing.
2. Color: Match existing.
3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film
thickness of 0.5 mil.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and
as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers
under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal
being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape
1/2-inch wide and 1/8-inch thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide or silicone polymer
sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal
flashing and trim and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

/2 07 62 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_62_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Section 07 62 00
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and
trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of 1/4-inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within
1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inch deep, filled
with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for
proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard
for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form
seams, and solder.
I. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
J. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal
with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
K. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

/2 07 62 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_62_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Section 07 62 00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet
metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling
and tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-
treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where
flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1-inch deep, filled
with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than
1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4-inch for wood screws.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
members not less than 1-inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.

/2 07 62 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_62_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Section 07 62 00
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges
of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned
surface would show in completed Work.
1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet.
2. Do not pre-tin.
3. Do not use torches for soldering.
4. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.
Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
H. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum or zinc where necessary for strength.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of
1/4-inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances
specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean
finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain
sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 62 00

/2 07 62 00 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_62_00.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Joint Sealants

Section 07 92 00
07 92 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_92_00.DOC
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Latex joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint
fillers and gaskets.
2. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint sealant product indicated.
B. Joint Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint sealant formulation.
4. Joint sealant color.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from
joint substrates.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Joint Sealants

Section 07 92 00
07 92 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_92_00.DOC
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match adjacent floor, wall, roof, or ceiling surface.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: Sealant A, ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000 UltraGlaze SSG4000AC.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 200 GPN Bondaflex Sil 201 FC.
d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631.
e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG Tremsil 600.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: Sealant B, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1 Sonalastic TX1 Sonolastic Ultra.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 900 915 916 Textured.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 25 Bondaflex PUR 25 Textured
Bondaflex PUR 40 FC.
d. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II.
e. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 1000.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Joint Sealants

Section 07 92 00
07 92 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_92_00.DOC
f. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100 Permathane SM7108Permathane
SM7110.
g. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.
h. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic Vulkem 116.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Sealant C, Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600 Bondaflex Sil-A 700.
d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),
and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Joint Sealants

Section 07 92 00
07 92 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_92_00.DOC
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply
with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous
joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint sealant substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Joint Sealants

Section 07 92 00
07 92 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\07_92_00.DOC
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact
and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure
8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.6 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. SEALANT A: Control joints in interior and exterior (non-traffic) masonry. Joints between interior
masonry non-bearing walls or partitions and underside of floors, beams and slabs. Joints around
pipes, conduits, and ducts that penetrate walls and partitions. Exterior joints at perimeter of
metal frames, including door and window frames.
B. SEALANT B: Isolation and control joints in exposed interior concrete floors. Expansion and
control joints in exterior curbs and walks, and in paving other than concrete road paving, subject
to pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
C. SEALANT C: Interior joints at the perimeter of hollow metal door frames.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 11 13
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes standard hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work
into masonry construction.
2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
3. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
3. Details of each different wall opening condition.
C. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision
of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on
Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do
not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

/3 08 11 13 - 1 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_11_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 11 13
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
5. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of
fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.

/3 08 11 13 - 2 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_11_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 11 13
2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with
smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
a. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with
thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when
tested according to ASTM C 1363.
1) Locations: Exterior doors.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and
model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from
same material as door face sheets.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042-inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide
by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177-inch thick.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042-inch thick, and as
follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032-inch thick, fabricated from same material as
door face sheet in which they are installed.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8-inch high
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032-inch thick, fabricated from same
material as frames in which they are installed.

/3 08 11 13 - 3 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_11_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 11 13
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly
identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4-inch
beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow
metal work.
2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type
of installation indicated.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

/3 08 11 13 - 4 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_11_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 11 13
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;
comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,
and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel
to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch, measured at jambs at floor.

/3 08 11 13 - 5 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_11_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 11 13
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8-inch, plus or minus 1/16-inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8-inch, plus or minus 1/16-inch.
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8-inch.
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum
3/4-inch.
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow
metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13

/3 08 11 13 - 6 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_11_13.DOC
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Door Hardware

Section 08 71 00
08 71 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_71_00.DOC
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes mechanical door hardware for swinging doors.
B. Related Section includes Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with
submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate
submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work
to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction
schedule.
b. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence
and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and
date each page.
c. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers
as in the Contract Documents.
d. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each
door and frame.
2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
6) Mounting locations for door hardware.
7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and
frame.
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's
final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key
set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.
B. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of
comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for
door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Door Hardware

Section 08 71 00
08 71 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_71_00.DOC
C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.
Include final hardware and keying schedule.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.
1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:
1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do
not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2-inch high.
4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the
leading edge of the door.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware
schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each
item or package.
C. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for
locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's
security consultant.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Door Hardware

Section 08 71 00
08 71 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_71_00.DOC
C. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing
conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide
proper door operation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to
comply with requirements in this Section.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named
manufacturers' products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.
2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations
and requirements for description, quality, and function.
2.2 SURFACE CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch
speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers,
adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on schedule.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Door Hardware

Section 08 71 00
08 71 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_71_00.DOC
2.3 DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for
gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or
flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by
manufacturer.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on schedule.
2.4 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on schedule.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade
name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as
otherwise approved by Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming
method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and
hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware
units and BHMA A156.18.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared
for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not
permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction,
and other conditions affecting performance.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Door Hardware

Section 08 71 00
08 71 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_71_00.DOC
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been
completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every
30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support
for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
F. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
G. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Door Hardware

Section 08 71 00
08 71 00 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_71_00.DOC
3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Hardware Group No. 01
For use on mark/door #(s):

101A

Provide each RU door(s) with the following:

Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
1 EA NOTE DOOR AND HARDWARE TO REMAIN AS IS.
NO WORK REQUIRED.
UNK

Hardware Group No. 02 - Mount weatherstrip prior to closer. Special template for closer required
For use on mark/door #(s):

101B

Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA CYLINDRICAL LOCK REUSE EXISTING LOCK FROM EXISTING
DOOR (Schlage ND)
626 SCH
1 EA CLOSER REUSE EXISTING CLOSER FROM EXISTING
DOOR (LCN 1461)
689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE
1 SET SEALS 700SA CL NGP
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 119NA CL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD RCS PHG5 1/2" GRY MIS

Hardware Group No. 03 - Mount weatherstrip prior to closer and OH stop. Special template for closer and
OH Stop required
For use on mark/door #(s):

101C

Provide each PR door(s) with the following:

Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr
8 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53PD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 81H 630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SHCUSH 689 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW 630 IVE
1 SET SEALS 700SA CL NGP
1 EA MULLION SEAL 5100 BLK NGP
2 EA DOOR BOTTOM 119NA CL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD RCS PHG5 1/2" GRY MIS
1 EA NOTE ASTRAGAL BY DR SUPPLIER UNK

KEYING: COORDINATE KEYING WITH OWNER.
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Glazing

Section 08 80 00
08 80 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_80_00.DOC
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM
C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
1. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph.
2. Importance Factor: 1.15.
3. Exposure Category: B.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass;
12 inches square.
1. Insulating glass.
C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
D. Qualification Data: For installers and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated,
low-e coatings.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A
qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Glazing

Section 08 80 00
08 80 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_80_00.DOC
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited
according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain coated float glass and insulating glass from single source
from single manufacturer for each glass type.
F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer
for each product and installation method.
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's
name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one
component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in
which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Glazing

Section 08 80 00
08 80 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_80_00.DOC
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which
insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal
under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float
glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide
Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT
heat-treated float glass.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
2. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
3. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
4. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
2.3 INSULATING GLASS
A. Low-Emissivity Argon-Filled Insulated Glazing:
1. Outer and Inner Lites: 6.0 mm thick clear glass.
2. System thickness: 1-inch.
3. Airspace: 1/2-inch thick, argon filled.
4. Low emissivity coating on second surface.
5. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard aluminum or stainless steel spacer.
2.4 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM gaskets
complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Glazing

Section 08 80 00
08 80 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_80_00.DOC
C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
c. Pecora Corporation; 890.
d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990.
e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
2.6 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Glazing

Section 08 80 00
08 80 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_80_00.DOC
2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with
slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.9 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-inch.
2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4-inch.
3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
4. Interspace Content: Argon.
5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
7. Provide safety glazing labeling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide
necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,
with reasonable tolerances.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Glazing

Section 08 80 00
08 80 00 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_80_00.DOC
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Provide sealant glazing to secure glass units in interior doors and interior borrowed lites.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Glazing

Section 08 80 00
08 80 00 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\08_80_00.DOC
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 80 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and application of paint, stain and labeling products:
1. Surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following interior and
exterior surfaces for all items furnished or installed under this Work, plus existing items as indicated on
the Drawings, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or herein specified:
a. Machinery and equipment.
b. Ferrous metals.
c. Galvanized steel.
d. Exposed pipe and fittings including wall and floor sleeves (if pipe is insulated, insulation to be
painted).
e. Exposed pipe, fittings, and pipe supports including surfaces between pipes and supports.
f. Concrete block.
g. Exposed ducts and dampers.
h. Exposed conduit and appurtenances (except conduit mounted on unpainted surfaces).
i. Railings (except aluminum or galvanized).
j. Steel doors and frames.
k. Concrete floors.
l. Submerged cast-in-place concrete.
m. All other surfaces not specifically excluded in the following paragraph. A completely finished job
is required, regardless of whether every individual item is mentioned herein or not.
2. Surfaces not to be painted or finished include the following unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings:
a. Glass.
b. Manufacturer's name and identification plates.
c. Concealed ducts, pipes and conduits.
d. Prefinished electrical and control panels with factory applied final finish.
e. Aluminum (unless indicated in the schedule to be painted).
f. Door and window hardware.
g. Stainless steel (unless indicated in the schedule to be painted).
h. Prefinished wall, ceiling and floor coverings.
i. Items with factory applied final finish, such as cabinets, anodized door and window frames, and
the like, but excluding machinery and equipment.
j. Items indicated on the Drawings as not to be painted.
k. PVC insulation jackets for pipe.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
pertinent provisions of the following:
1. ASME/ANSI: A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
2. ASTM:
a. A780 - Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
b. D16 - Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications.
c. D520 - Zinc Dust Pigment.
d. D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.
e. D7234-05 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using
Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers.
f. F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

/2 09 91 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
3. Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board of State Public Health & Environmental Managers:
a. Ten States Standards 2.14 - Recommended Standards for Water Works.
b. Ten States Standards 54.5 - Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities.
4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
a. AB-1 - Mineral and Slag Abrasives.
b. PA-1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel.
c. PA-3 - A Guide to Safety in Paint Application.
d. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning.
e. SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning (SSI-St2).
f. SP-3 - Power Tool Cleaning (SSI-St3).
g. SP-5 - White Metal Blasting (SSI-Sa3) (NACE #1).
h. SP-6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSI-Sa2) (NACE #3).
i. SP-7 - Brush-off Blast (SSI-Sa1) (NACE #4).
j. SP-8 - Pickling.
k. SP-10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning (SSI-Sa2-1/2) (NACE #2).
l. SP-11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.
m. VIS-1 - Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel.
5. Michigan Administrative Code: R 325.51992 Part 603 - Lead Exposure in Construction.
6. United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): 29 CFR
1926.62.
7. International Concrete Repair Institute: Guideline No. 03732 - Selecting and Specifying Concrete
Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms:
1. Environment:
a. Severe: Highly corrosive industrial atmospheres with sustained exposure to high humidity and
condensation, frequent cleaning using strong chemicals, heavy concentrations of strong
chemical fumes, and frequent splashing and spilling of harsh chemical products.
b. Moderate: Corrosive industrial atmospheres with intermittent exposure to high humidity and
condensation, occasional mold and mildew development, regular cleaning with strong
chemicals, and occasional splashing and spilling of chemical products.
c. Mild: Industrial atmospheres with normal exposure to moderate humidity and condensation,
occasional mold and mildew development, infrequent cleaning with strong chemicals, low levels
of mild chemical fumes, occasional splashing and spilling of chemical products, and normal
outdoor weathering.
2. Exposure:
a. Environmental conditions to which different surfaces may be exposed as follows:
1) Concealed: Surfaces within the confines of a building or other enclosure not constantly
exposed to weather, trapped moisture, high heat or other deteriorating conditions, and
normally concealed from view.
2) Immersed:
a) Surfaces below a water surface or exposed to spray.
b) Surfaces exposed to spray include areas to 8 inches above maximum water surface
in quiescent tanks and to 18 inches above maximum water surface in mixed or
agitated tanks.
c) Immersed surfaces also include floors, walls, and the underside of the roof of an
enclosed tank.
3) Interior: Surfaces within the confines of a building or other enclosure not constantly
exposed to weather, trapped moisture, high heat or other deteriorating conditions, and
exposed to view.
4) Exterior:
a) Above Grade: Surfaces above finished grade and not included in 1), 2), or 3)
above.
b) Below Grade: Surfaces below finished grade and not included in 1), 2), or 3) above.

/2 09 91 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
3. Gloss range shall mean following levels as determined by ASTM D523:
a. High Gloss: A high sheen finish of more than 70 when measured at a 60 degree meter.
b. Semi Gloss: A medium sheen finish of 35 - 70 when measured at a 60 degree meter.
c. Satin: A low-to-medium sheen finish of 15 - 35 when measured at a 60 degree meter.
d. Eggshell: A low sheen finish of 20 - 35 when measured at a 60 degree meter.
e. Flat: A lusterless or matte finish of less than 5 when measured at an 60 degree meter.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: Specification data sheets and color charts for materials proposed for use on the
Work. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) as requested by Engineer.
B. Manufacturer's Certificates: Submit signed affidavit from coatings Manufacturer that submitted coatings are
of same or better quality than those specified, and Manufacturers approval of applicator.
C. Product and Maintenance Schedules:
1. Provide pipe coding schedules listing pipe name, coating Manufacturer's name, type of coating and
color.
2. Provide maintenance manuals detailing the proper procedures and materials to be used for
maintenance and repainting of the various coatings.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:
1. Acceptability of materials and performance shall be determined by Engineer.
2. Testing or certifications may be required to aid Engineer's determination.
3. Expense of testing and certifications when required and, unless noted otherwise in the Contract
Documents, shall be borne by Contractor.
4. If destructive testing is required, Contractor shall repair damaged area. Expense of repair shall be
borne by Contractor.
5. If initial testing results are unsatisfactory or yield failing results, additional testing will be required. Cost
of additional testing will be borne by Contractor.
6. Coating Reviews:
a. Request, in writing, a review of each coat by Engineer of first finished surface of each type for
color, texture and workmanship.
b. First accepted surface of each type and color shall be visibly labeled by Engineer with
removable label as Project standard for that type and color of item.
c. Labels shall remain in place until job is finished.
d. For spray application, paint a surface of 100 square feet as Project standard.
7. Work may be inspected as to proper surface preparation, pretreatment, priming, dry film thickness,
curing, color, and workmanship.
8. Applicable standards, test methods, and inspection equipment includes, but is not necessarily limited
to the following:
a. SSPC-VIS-1 photographic blast cleaning standards (latest revision).
b. Inspector's wet film and dry film thickness gages.
c. Zorelco 369/PHD pin hole detector.
d. Mark II Tooke Gage.
B. Coating Subcontractors:
1. Applicators shall have experience with the coating systems specified.
2. Experience shall be substantiated by previous project experience, certifications, seminar attendance,
Manufacturer validation, or similar means.
C. Coordination and Compatibility:
1. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to ensure the compatibility of painting materials proposed for this
Contract.
2. Contractor shall coordinate this work with other trades to ensure compliance with these Specifications.
3. Provide block fillers, finish coats, and related materials that are compatible with one another, and the
substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the Manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.

/2 09 91 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
D. Review Meeting: Prior to ordering any of the materials of this Section, Contractor, Engineer, painting
Subcontractor, and paint Manufacturer's representative shall attend a progress meeting in accordance with
Division 01 Section Project Meetings, and review the work to be performed under this Section.
E. Manufacturer's Conditions Report:
1. Manufacturer shall review environmental Site conditions for surface preparation and coating
application.
2. Manufacturer shall inform paint Subcontractor, Contractor, and Engineer of measures to be taken to
ensure high quality coating performance.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original sealed containers of the Manufacturer with labels legible and intact. Include the
following on labels on each container:
1. Manufacturer's name.
2. Type of coating.
3. Manufacturer's stock number.
4. Manufacturer's batch identification.
5. Color name and number.
6. Instructions for mixing and reducing, where applicable.
7. Percent total solids by volume.
8. Identification of toxic substances and special instructions.
9. VOC content.
B. Storage:
1. Store materials in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F.
2. Store materials in a well ventilated area and in such a manner as to comply with all safety
requirements including applicable federal, state, and local rules and requirements.
3. Storage shall also be in accordance with instructions of the paint Manufacturer and requirements of
insurance underwriters.
4. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue:
a. Protect from freezing.
b. Keep storage area neat and orderly.
c. Remove oily rags and waste daily and dispose of legally.
C. Handle volatile products carefully and use caution so as not to puncture containers. Keep open flame away
from areas while handling containers and be aware of material flash points.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Waterborne Paints:
a. Apply only when temperature of surface to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and
90 degrees F.
b. Maintain temperature range throughout the minimum cure time recommended by the
Manufacturer.
2. Solvent-Thinned Paints:
a. Apply only when temperature of surface to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and
95 degrees F.
b. Maintain temperature range throughout the minimum cure time recommended by the
Manufacturer.
3. Inclement Weather:
a. Do Not Apply Paint:
1) In snow, rain, fog, or mist.
2) When relative humidity exceeds 85%.
3) When steel temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point.
4) To damp or wet surfaces.
b. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the Manufacturer during application
and drying periods. Refer to Paragraph 1.7 C. for further restrictions.

/2 09 91 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
B. Existing Painted Surfaces:
1. When painting is specified over existing painted surfaces and existing coating types are not known,
analyze Samples of existing coatings by a laboratory approved by Engineer to determine generic type
of coating present and the presence of lead.
2. Submit written report from the lab to Engineer before coating is applied.
3. Required modifications to painting schedule caused by existing paint shall not be justification for extra
payment.
4. Existing Coat Bonding Failure:
a. Remove existing coating by abrasive blasting or other means, obtaining surface cleanliness and
profile, required for coating specified without damaging the substrate to the point of affecting its
appearance.
b. Paint as new surface.
c. Unforeseen failure conditions may be justification for extra payment.
C. Epoxy Coatings:
1. Do not expose epoxies during application and cure to sunlight and heaters that emit carbon dioxide
and carbon monoxide.
2. Use caution when applying and curing epoxy coatings to ensure that surrounding areas are not
occupied and that adequate ventilation and fresh air are present.
D. Contractor shall demonstrate acceptability of environmental conditions as required by Engineer.
1.9 LEAD PAINT REMOVAL
A. Comply with all applicable rules and regulations for lead based paint removal.
B. All personnel assigned to perform demolition activities in areas, if any, containing lead based paint shall be
properly trained as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.62 (OSHA Lead Standard). In addition, task specific exposure
monitoring shall be conducted to establish either a positive or negative initial determination.
C. Remove and remediate existing lead paint as required to comply with all codes and regulations while
performing the requirements of the Work. Either remove lead paint completely or partially as required to
achieve this.
D. Notify Engineer when lead paint removal is complete.
E. Dispose of lead paint in an approved manner.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Leave with Owner at least 1 gallon of each type and color of paint used for finish coats and one gallon of
each type of thinner required.
B. Containers shall be tightly sealed and clearly labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Tnemec Company.
2. Carboline.
3. ICI/DeVoe.
4. Sherwin Williams.
B. Single Manufacturer:
1. Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the product of a single
Manufacturer.
2. Provide primers and undercoats produced by the same Manufacturer as the finish coats.

/2 09 91 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
C. VOC Compliance:
1. All individual coatings and coating systems shall have VOC levels at or below the EPA
recommendations identified in 40 CFR Part 59 and the coating systems listed in the schedule.
2. VOC content shall be tested in accordance with EPA Method 24.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Material Types:
1. Paint, primer and related materials are included by Manufacturer's product numbers in the Schedules
in this Section.
2. Paint used for repair of galvanizing shall have minimum 95% zinc dust in accordance with
ASTM D520.
B. Colors: Colors of all finish coats shall be as selected by Engineer.
C. Blast Abrasives:
1. Level of ionic contaminants shall be in accordance with SSPC-AB 1.
2. Products and Manufacturers:
a. Magnum Blast by Dust Net, Wedron, Illinois.
b. Black Magnum by Dust Net, Wedron, Illinois.
c. Black Beauty by Reed Minerals, Highland, Indiana.
2.3 MIXES
A. Mixing:
1. Deliver paints to the Site ready-mixed, when this is possible.
2. Mix two-component paints at the Site and observe pot life as recommended by Manufacturer.
3. Proceed with mixing until paint becomes smooth, homogeneous, and free of surface swirls or pigment
lumps.
4. When mixing multi-component paints, remix each component individually, then blend the components,
as recommended by the Manufacturer, until the mixture is completely uniform in color.
B. Thinning:
1. No other thinning will be permitted unless absolutely necessary.
2. Paint shall be spray-applied in as-received condition to demonstrate necessity for thinning.
3. Use only thinners as recommended by paint Manufacturer for specific use.
4. Amount of thinner used shall be reported to Engineer.
5. Measure viscosity to ensure proper thinning ratios have been used.
6. Absolutely no thinning of elastomeric based coatings.
C. Tinting:
1. Onsite tinting permitted only when accepted in writing by Engineer.
2. Use only tinting colors recommended by the Manufacturer for the specific type of coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspection:
1. Prior to the commencement of surface preparation or other coating activities, thoroughly inspect the
surfaces to determine if the Work is ready to be prepared and painted.
2. Report in writing to Engineer all conditions that may potentially affect proper application.
3. Do not commence surface preparation or other coating activities until such defects have been
corrected.
B. Correction of Defects:
1. Correct defects and deficiencies in surfaces which may adversely affect work of this Section.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the applicators acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a
particular area.

/2 09 91 00 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with this Article, the paint Manufacturer's recommendations and as
specified in the painting schedule of this Section.
2. Cleanliness of Abrasive Blast-Cleaned Steel:
a. Determined by Engineer using Steel Structures Painting Council Manual SSPC-VIS-1.
b. Small steel panels which have been abrasive blast-cleaned and approved for a specific
cleanliness may be used for comparative purposes to facilitate inspection and approval.
c. Securely wrap these panels in clear plastic, seal to protect them from deterioration and mark
with appropriate SSPC-SP6 cleaning specification.
3. Cleanliness of Compressed Airs:
a. Periodically check compressed air used for blasting to verify that it is clean, dry and oil-free by
directing its flow toward a sheet of clean white paper.
b. Place oil and water separators in the air line as close as possible to blast-cleaning equipment.
c. Do not use contaminated air for blast cleaning.
4. Make measurements of surface profile of abrasive blast-cleaned steel with a Keane-Tator Surface
Profile Comparator or Testex Press-O-Film and Micrometer.
5. Abrasive Media:
a. Select abrasive media to provide the type of profile required by the Manufacturer of the coating
product.
b. Abrasive media shall contain less than 5% free silica sand.
6. Protective Covers:
a. Protect motors, bearings, chain drives, and other moving parts by wrapping with plastic and
sealing with tape.
b. Maintain protective covers in dust tight condition.
7. Correct steel and fabrication defects revealed by surface preparation, such as weld imperfections,
delamination, scabs, and slivers by appropriate trade before proceeding further with surface
preparation.
8. Clean Up of Blast Cleaned Areas:
a. Remove dust and blast products from the abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces by high pressure air
or vacuum cleaning.
b. Completely clean up all residue from blasting operations within the entire space to be painted
prior to applying any coatings.
9. Inspect surfaces after surface preparation is complete and prior to application of coatings.
10. Remove hardware, accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place
that are not to be painted, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and
painting, and then replace items after paint has dried.
11. When acid etching is the approved means of preparing surfaces for coating systems, the surrounding
areas shall be protected, all dispensed solutions shall be neutralized and disposed of properly.
12. Moisture Testing: Where moisture testing is specified or otherwise required, comply with the following:
a. Securely tape a 12-inch x 12-inch piece of heavy gage plastic film to the surface in various
locations.
b. Carefully seal the film with tape to prevent the escape of moisture and keep in place for a
minimum of 16 hours.
c. If, after this period of time, moisture is present between the plastic and the surface, additional
time for the surfaces to dry will be required. Also, it may be appropriate to execute other means
of testing for moisture.
d. Other Means of Testing for Moisture:
1) ASTM F1869-98.
2) Qualifying moisture meters capable of reading 2 to 100% moisture content on a surface.
B. Masonry Walls:
1. Do not coat new masonry walls for at least 28 days.
2. Moisture Testing:
a. Test surfaces for moisture.
b. Do not proceed until achieving successful moisture tests.
3. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder and other foreign matter from masonry surfaces which are to
be painted by scrubbing with a stiff brush.
4. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate, rinse well and allow to thoroughly dry.

/2 09 91 00 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
5. Remove stains from masonry surface caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of
sodium metasilicate after being thoroughly wetted with water and allow to thoroughly dry.
6. Coat masonry walls prior to installation of wall mounted equipment.
C. Concrete:
1. Do not coat new concrete for at least 28 days.
2. Moisture Testing:
a. Test surfaces for moisture.
b. Do not proceed until achieving successful moisture tests.
3. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate prior to the commencement of any
coating or blasting activities.
4. Abrasive brush blasting shall have the surface profile as defined by the International Concrete Repair
Institute of CSP3.
5. Additional surface preparation may be required by the coating Manufacture prior to application of
coating systems.
6. Concrete shall be clean and dry before coating.
D. Ferrous Metals:
1. Non-Immersed Ferrous Metals:
a. Surface Preparation - Shop:
1) Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1.
2) Abrasive blast clean surfaces to specification required for coating to be applied.
3) Perform abrasive blast cleaning only when the relative humidity is no higher than 75% and
the surface temperature of the steel is at least 5 degrees F above the dew point.
4) Coat cleaned surfaces before visible rust forms on the surface. Do not leave cleaned
surfaces uncoated for more than 24 hours.
5) Apply coating as specified under this Section.
b. Surface Preparation - Field:
1) Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1.
2) Prepare field welds by grinding to remove sharp edges, undercuts, recesses and pin
holes.
3) Completely remove weld slag and spatter.
4) Thoroughly clean damages, scratches or abraded areas of shop primers and all field
welds and all areas within 4 inches of field welds before painting using surface preparation
methods at least as effective as those specified for the structure itself.
5) Feather out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.
6) Clean surfaces with solvent.
7) Contractor may, at Contractors option, clean and apply one overall coat of primer for each
specified shop coat in place of touch-up or spot priming.
8) Contractor shall meet all applicable surface preparation and application specifications.
2. Immersed Ferrous Metals:
a. Surface Preparation - Field:
1) Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1.
2) Prepare field welds by grinding to remove sharp edges, undercuts, recesses, and pin
holes.
3) Completely remove weld slag and spatter.
4) Abrasive blast clean surfaces to specification required for coating to be applied.
5) Perform abrasive blast cleaning only when the relative humidity is no higher than 75% and
the surface temperature of the steel is at least 5 degrees F above the dew point.
6) Coat cleaned surfaces before any visible rust forms on the surface.
7) Do not leave cleaned surfaces uncoated for more than 24 hours.
8) Apply coating as specified under this Section.
E. Stainless Steel:
1. Limit the coating of stainless steel to the bottom portion of the tank wall if the stainless steel tank
alternate is accepted.
2. Prepare welds by grinding to remove sharp edges, undercuts, recesses and pin holes.
3. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1.
4. Use only solvents and cleaning solutions containing less than 200 ppm of halogens to prevent stress
corrosion cracking.

/2 09 91 00 8
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
F. Nonferrous Metals and Galvanized Steel:
1. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1. For Solvent
Cleaning, test surface with copper sulfate solution. If galvanizing turns black, then surface is clean
and ready for paint application. Otherwise abrade surface or brush blast in accordance with
SSPC-SP7.
2. Remove white rust by hand or power brushing being careful not to damage or remove the galvanizing.
3. Remove rust in accordance with SSPC-SP2 or SSPC-SP3.
4. On galvanized steel, touch-up exposed metal areas using zinc-rich epoxy primer in accordance with
ASTM A780.
G. Tanks and Equipment: Open doors, hatches, and covers, and remove all removable appurtenances and
prepare surfaces separately in accordance with this Section.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Take necessary safety precautions in accordance with this Article, SSPC-PA Guide 3, Manufacturer's
recommendations, federal, state, and local rules and requirements, and insurance underwriters
guidelines.
2. Apply coatings in accordance with this Article, SSPC-PA1, and the Manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Moisture Content:
a. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended
by paint Manufacturer.
b. Determine moisture content as specified herein.
4. Mil Thickness:
a. Apply coats in a uniform manner and of the minimum dry film thickness as indicated in the
painting schedule.
b. Maximum mil thickness shall be as recommended by coating Manufacturer.
c. Where the mil thickness is omitted, it shall be as recommended by coating Manufacturer.
5. Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5 feet.
6. Additional Coats:
a. Apply within recoat recommendation of the Manufacturer based on temperature and humidity
variations.
b. Schedule inspection so as not to interfere with recoat time.
7. Each coat shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile-up of paint, and skipped or
missed areas.
8. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.
9. Spray apply coatings on hollow metal units.
10. Finish door tops, edges, and bottoms the same as exposed surfaces.
11. Except for contact surfaces, surfaces of fabricated assemblies that are inaccessible after erection shall
receive all field coats of paint before erection.
12. Ensure that concrete cracks and defects have been repaired prior to applying coating, then fill all
remaining depressions and crevices with paint if practical.
13. Protect wet paint against damage from dust or other detrimental foreign matter as much as is
practicable.
14. Remove grills, covers, and access panels from mechanical and electrical systems and tanks from
location and paint separately.
15. Paint the interior surface of all ducts flat black in the immediate area of all supply and exhaust grilles.
16. Coat masonry walls prior to mounting equipment.
17. Where epoxy coatings are scheduled over existing paint:
a. Test existing paint and substrate for lifting.
b. If existing paint lifts or alligators, remove it down to bare substrate.

/2 09 91 00 9
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
3.4 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. General:
1. Identify nonburied piping installed as part of this Work in accordance with ASME/ANSI A13.1, this
Section, as required in the Pipe Identification Schedule, and as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Concealed piping above suspended ceilings does not require painting or banding, but labels as
specified following are required.
3. Identify pumps, tanks, and equipment.
B. Color Bands:
1. Where color bands are indicated for piping identification, use colored vinyl tape spaced every 6 feet,
before and after each valve and where pipe enters or leaves a wall.
2. Band Widths:
a. Pipe up to and including 2-inch diameter: 3/4-inch wide.
b. Pipe 2-1/2-inch to 6-inch diameter: 2 inches wide.
c. Pipe 8-inch to 12-inch diameter: 4 inches wide.
d. Pipe 14-inch diameter and over: 6 inches wide.
C. Labels and Arrows:
1. Label all pipes at intervals not to exceed 20 feet and where pipe enters or leaves a wall, to identify the
contents of the pipe as determined by Engineer.
2. Place an arrow adjacent to every pipe label to indicate direction(s) of flow.
3. Use preprinted labels and arrows manufactured by a company which normally manufactures pipe
identification systems.
4. Supply pipe labels, arrows, and color bands by a single Manufacturer.
5. Labels and Arrow Heights:
a. Pipe or covering over 3-inch diameter: 2-1/4 inches.
b. Pipe or covering 1-inch to 3-inch diameter: 1-1/8 inches.
c. Pipe or covering under 1-inch diameter: 1/2-inch.
6. Materials shall be suitable for the use intended.
7. Label pumps, tanks, and equipment items, including description and tag number, with lettering size
coordinated with Engineer depending on equipment size.
D. Valves, Fittings, and Supports:
1. Paint valves and fittings the same base color as the pipe they adjoin.
2. Paint floor stands the same base color as the pipe they adjoin.
3. Wall Brackets and Pipe Hangers:
a. Paint the same base color as the wall or ceiling they adjoin.
b. Use gray color if wall or ceiling is not painted.
3.5 PHYSICAL HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
A. General:
1. Identify all physical hazards of the facilities constructed and installed under this Work.
2. Identify all physical hazards in accordance with the requirements and standards of OSHA, and other
governing state and local laws, ordinances, and codes.
3. In the event of discrepancy between regulations and standards, the more strict requirements shall
govern.
3.6 VENTILATION
A. General:
1. Mandatory ventilation shall be provided, exhausting all fumes and odors to the exterior at a location
where existing HVAC systems shall not pick up these fumes and odors.
2. Provide negative air pressure to those spaces receiving coatings without reducing air temperatures in
those spaces which may impede the curing process of those coating systems.
3. Ventilation is required for surface preparation, application of coating systems, and the curing period for
those systems.
4. Provide temporary enclosures as required to isolate dust, fumes and odors.

/2 09 91 00 10
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:
1. To facilitate painting and inspection, each coat of paint shall be of a different color or tint.
2. Finished metal surfaces shall be free of skips, voids or pinholes in any coat when tested with a low
voltage detector.
3. Do not apply additional coats until previous coat has been inspected and acknowledged in writing by
Engineer.
4. Only coats of paint acknowledged in writing will be considered in determining number of coats applied.
B. Final Touch-Up:
1. Surface damage shall be repaired with touch-up paint matching material used for original coating.
2. All repaired areas shall be rubbed out and polished to match surrounding finish.
3. Finish repair shall be of the quality typically found within the auto body industry.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Remove spilled, splashed, or spattered paint from surfaces.
B. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned.
C. Prior to acceptance of the Work of this Section, thoroughly clean all painted surfaces and related areas in
accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste Management.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage.
2. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection.
B. Protective Materials: Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or
droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation
area.
C. Fire Hazards: Place cotton waste, cloths, and materials which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal
containers and remove daily from Site.
D. Electrical Plates and Hardware:
1. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to painting operations.
2. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced upon completion of work in each area.
3. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish.
E. Equipment with Factory-Applied Final Finishes:
1. Certain equipment with factory-applied finishes may be accepted by Engineer at Engineers discretion.
2. Protect finishes of equipment with approved factory-applied final finishes from scratches and
abrasions by all practical means.
3. Repair surface damage with touch-up paint furnished by equipment Manufacturer by workmen skilled
in this type of work.
4. Rub out and polish repaired areas to match surrounding finish.
5. Finish repair shall be of the quality typically found within the auto body industry.
6. If damage to item is severe in the judgment of Engineer, the equipment will be rejected or a new finish
coat shall be applied after proper surface preparation at the discretion of Engineer, at no additional
cost to Owner.

/2 09 91 00 11
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
3.10 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. The following schedule indicates systems by all acceptable manufacturers. See Article 2.1 for acceptable
Manufacturers.
B. Minimum percent solids by volume is indicated in parentheses after each coating type:

1. Interior Ferrous Metals Non-Immersed: Gloss Zinc/Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Third
Coat
Tnemec (Shop):
SSPC-SP6
commercial
blast cleaning
(Shop) and
(Field Touch-up, Prime):
90-97 Tneme-Zinc (63%)
2.5-3.5 Mils
(Field):
69-Hi-Build Epoxoline
(69%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
1074 Endura-Shield II
(69%)
3.0-5.0 Mils
Carboline (Shop):
SSPC-SP6
commercial
blast cleaning
(Shop) and
(Field Touch-up, Prime):
Carboline Carbozinc 859
2.5-3.5 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carbothane
134HB
3.0-5.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Shop):
SSPC-SP6
commercial
blast cleaning
(Shop) and
(Field Touch-up, Prime):
CATHCOAT 302 H
Reinforced Inorganic Zinc
(78%)
2.5-3.5 Mils
(Field):
BAR-RUST 231 Epoxy
Mastic (71%)


4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVTHANE 379
Aliphatic Urethane
Gloss (63%)

3.0-5.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Shop):
SSPC-SP6
commercial
blast cleaning
(Shop) and
(Field Touch-up, Prime):
Corothane | Galvapac NSF
2.5-3.5 Mils
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Acrolon 218HS/HS
Polyurethane
3.0-5.0 Mils
2. Interior Non-Ferrous and Galvanized Metals Non-Immersed: Gloss Zinc/Aliphatic Acrylic
Polyurethane System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning and
SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP7 (abrade to
create a 1.0 - 1.5 mil profile)
(Field)
69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (69%)

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
1074 Endura-Shield II (66%)

2.0-3.0 Mils
Carboline (Field):
SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning and
SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP7 (abrade to
create a 1.0 - 1.5 mil profile)
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carbothane 134HB

2.0-3.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Field):
SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning and
SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP7 (abrade to
create a 1.0 - 1.5 mil profile)
(Field):
DEVRAN 205 Universal Epoxy
Primer (58%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVTHANE 379 Aliphatic
Urethane Gloss (63%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning and
SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP7 (abrade to
create a 1.0 - 1.5 mil profile)
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Acrolon 218HS/HS
Polyurethane
2.0-3.0 Mils


/2 09 91 00 12
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
3. Exterior Ferrous Metals Non-Immersed: Gloss Zinc/Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Third
Coat
Tnemec (Shop):
SSPC-SP6
commercial
blast cleaning
(Shop) and
(Field Touch-up, Prime):
90-97 Tneme-Zinc (63%)
2.5-3.5 Mils
(Field):
69-Hi-Build Epoxoline
(69%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
1074 Endura-Shield II
(69%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
Carboline (Shop):
SSPC-SP6
commercial
blast cleaning
(Shop) and
(Field Touch-up, Prime):
Carboline Carbozinc 859
2.5-3.5 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carbothane
134HB
2.0-3.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Shop):
SSPC-SP6
commercial
blast cleaning
(Shop) and
(Field Touch-up, Prime):
CATHCOAT 302 H
Reinforced Inorganic Zinc
(78%)
2.5-3.5 Mils
(Field):
BAR-RUST 231 Epoxy
Mastic (71%)


4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVTHANE 379
Aliphatic Urethane
Gloss (63%)

2.0-3.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Shop):
SSPC-SP6
commercial
blast cleaning
(Shop) and
(Field Touch-up, Prime):
Corothane | Galvapac NSF
2.5-3.5 Mils
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Acrolon 218HS/HS
Polyurethane
2.0-3.0 Mils
4. Exterior Non-Ferrous and Galvanized Metals Non-Immersed: Gloss Zinc/Aliphatic Acrylic
Polyurethane System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning and
SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP7 (abrade to
create a 1.0 - 1.5 mil profile)
(Field):
69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (69%)

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
1074 Endura-Shield II (66%)

4.0-6.0 Mils
Carboline (Field):
SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning and
SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP7 (abrade to
create a 1.0 - 1.5 mil profile)
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carbothane 134HB

4.0-6.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Field):
SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning and
SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP7 (abrade to
create a 1.0 - 1.5 mil profile)
(Field):
DEVRAN 205 Universal Epoxy
Primer (58%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVTHANE 379 Aliphatic
Urethane Gloss (63%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning and
SSPC-SP3 or SSPC-SP7 (abrade to
create a 1.0 - 1.5 mil profile)
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Acrolon 218HS/HS
Polyurethane
4.0-6.0 Mils


/2 09 91 00 13
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
5. Concrete Slab of Bolted Steel Tank, and 10-inches up tank sidewall - immersed:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
SSPC-SP13/ICRI 4-6; thoroughly
abrade/blast lined tank wall surfaces
to be coated as recommended by
Manufacturer
(Field):
Series 161 Tneme-Fascure
3.0-5.0 mils DFT
(Field):
Series 462 Elasto-Shield
50.0-80.0 Mils**
Carboline (Field):
SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6;
thoroughly abrade/blast lined tank
wall surfaces to be coated as
recommended by Manufacturer.
Fill bugholes and surface defects in
concrete with surfacing agent:
Carboguard 501 or 510
Field):
Reactamine 760
60.0-80.0 Mils**

ICI/DeVoe No equivalent specified No equivalent specified No equivalent specified
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
SSPC-SP13/ICRI CSP4-6;
thoroughly abrade/blast lined tank
wall surfaces to be coated as
recommended by Manufacturer
(Field):
Concrete: Dura-Plate 235
Epoxy; 4.0-8.0 mils DFT
Tank Wall: Industrial Wash
Primer; 0.2-0.4 mils DFT
(Field):
Sherflex S (50.0-80.0 Mils**

** Apply approximately 8-inch wide stripe coat centered on the tank wall/slab joint prior to final coat; 30.0 60.0 mils
DFT.
6. Cast-In-Place Concrete Floors Gloss Polyamidoamine Epoxy System (add aggregate as required to
achieve slip resistant finish):
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
SSPC-SP13/ICRI-CSP3
(Field):
280 Series Tneme-Glaze
(98%)
6.0-12.0 Mils
(Field):
280 Series Tneme-Glaze
(98%)
6.0-12.0 Mils
Carboline (Field):
SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 Surface
Preparation of Concrete or use a
Blastrac Machine (obtain profile of
ICRI-CSP3)
(Field):
Carboline Semstone 945SL


6.0-12.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Semstone 945SL


6.0-12.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe No equivalent No equivalent No equivalent
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
See Paragraph 3.2.C.
(Field):
Control Tech Cor-Crete HP
6.0-12.0 Mils
(Field):
Control Tech Cor-Crete HP
6.0-12.0 Mils


/2 09 91 00 14
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
7. Interior Concrete Block: Satin Polyamidoamine Epoxy System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Third
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
See Paragraph
3.2.B.
(Field):
130 Envirofill

60-80 sf/gal
(Field):
69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
(69%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
(69%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
Carboline (Field):
SP13/NACE
No. 6 Surface
Preparation of
Concrete
(Field):
Carboline Sanitile 100


60-80 sf/gal
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890


4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard
890

4.0-6.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Field):
See Paragraph
3.2.B.
(Field):
TRU-GLAZE WB 4015
Epoxy Block Filler (53%)

60-80 sf/gal
(Field):
DEVRAN 224HS Hi-Solids
Epoxy (75%)

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVRAN 224HS Hi-
Solids Epoxy (75%)

4.0-6.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
See Paragraph
3.2.B.
(Field):
Cement-Plex 875
60-80 sf/gal
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC
4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC
4.0-6.0 Mils
8. Exterior Concrete Block: Satin Water Base Acrylic Epoxy System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Third
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
See Paragraph
3.2.B.
(Field):
130 Envirofill (68%)

60-80 sf/gal
(Field):
113 Hi-Build Tneme-
Tufcoat (44%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
113 Hi-Build Tneme-
Tufcoat (44%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
Carboline (Field): SSPC-
SP13/NACE
No. 6 Surface
Preparation of
Concrete
(Field):
Carboline Sanitile 100


60-80 sf/gal
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard
893SG

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carbothane
134 HB

4.0-6.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Field):
See Paragraph
3.2.B.
(Field):
BLOXFIL 4000 HD Acrylic
Block Filler (45%)
60-80 sf/gal
(Field):
TRU-GLAZE WB 4418
Acrylic Epoxy (40%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
TRU-GLAZE WB 4418
Acrylic Epoxy (40%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
See Paragraph
3.2.B.
(Field):
Cement-Plex 875

60-80 sf/gal
(Field):
ProIndustrial WB HB Epoxy

4.0-6.0 Mils
(Field):
ProIndustrial WB HB
Epoxy
4.0-6.0 Mils
9. Interior Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Surfaces:
Satin Polyamidoamine Epoxy System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (69%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (69%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
Carboline (Field):
SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890
2.0-3.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
DEVRAN 205 Universal Epoxy
Primer (58%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVRAN 224HS Hi-Solids
Epoxy (75%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC
2.0-3.0 Mils

/2 09 91 00 15
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00

10. Exterior Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Surfaces:
Gloss Zinc/Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
69-Hi-Build Epoxoline (69%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
1074 Endura-Shield II (69%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
Carboline (Field):
SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carbothane 134HB
3.0-3.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
DEVRAN 205 Universal
Epoxy Primer (58%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVTHANE 379 Aliphatic
Urethane Gloss (63%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
Macropoxy 646 FC

2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Acrolon 218HS/HS
Polyurethane
2.0-3.0 Mils
11. Interior Insulated Pipe and Duct: Satin Acrylic Epoxy System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
6 Tneme-Cryl (43%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (69%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
Carboline (Field):
SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning
(Field):
Carboline Carbocrylic 120
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Sanitile 255
4.0-6.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
DEVRAN 205 Universal
Epoxy Primer (58%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVRAN 224HS Hi-Solids
Epoxy (75%)
4.0-6.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
ProIndustrial WB HB Epoxy
4.0-6.0 Mils
12. Exterior Insulated Pipe and Duct: Satin Acrylic Epoxy System:
System
Manufacturer
Surface
Preparation
First
Coat
Second
Coat
Third
Coat
Tnemec (Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
6 Tneme-Cryl (43%)

2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
(69%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
1074 Endura-Shield II
(66%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
Carboline (Field):
SSPC-SP1
Solvent
cleaning
(Field):
Carboline Carbocrylic 120

2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carboguard 890

2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Carboline Carbothane
134 HB
2.0-3.0 Mils
ICI/DeVoe (Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
DEVRAN 205 Universal
Epoxy Primer (58%)

2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
BAR-RUST 231 Multi-
Purpose Epoxy (71%)

2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
DEVTHANE 379
Aliphatic Urethane
Gloss (63%)
2.0-3.0 Mils
Sherwin
Williams
(Field):
Clean and dry
(Field):
DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish

2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Centurian WB
Polyurethane
2.0-3.0 Mils
(Field):
Centurian WB
Polyurethane
2.0-3.0 Mils

/2 09 91 00 16
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Painting

Section 09 91 00
3.11 PIPE IDENTIFICATION COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Exposed pipes shall be identified with the following colors from the Tnemec Colorbook color card or
equivalent colors of other Manufacturers indicated in Part 2 of this Section.
B. In situations where 2 colors do not have sufficient contrast to easily differentiate between them, paint a
6-inch band of contrasting color at 30-inch intervals.
C. The name of the liquid or gas should also be on the pipe and arrows indicating the direction of flow.
Waste Water Plant Piping
Color Description
Tnemec Colorbook ID

Raw Sludge Brown with Black Bands
Weathered Bark 84BR with Black
Bands
Sludge Recirculation Brown with Yellow Bands
Weathered Bark 84BR with Yellow
Bands
Sludge Draw Off
Brown with Orange
Bands
Weathered Bark 84BR with Orange
Bands
Sludge Recirculation Discharge Brown Weathered Bark 84BR
Natural Gas
Orange/Red with Black
Bands
International Orange 05SF with Black
Bands
Diesel Fuel Orange/Red International Orange 05SF
Potable Water Blue Safety Blue SC06
Nonpotable Water Blue with Black Bands Safety Blue SC06Black Bands
Fire Protection Red Safety Red 06SF
Sanitary/Sewage Lines Dark Gray Gray 33GR
Sodium Hydroxide/Caustic Yellow with Green Bands Safety Yellow 02SF with Green Bands
Drain Lines, Vent Lines Gray Slate Gray 31GR
Other Lines Gray Slate Gray 31GR


END OF SECTION 09 91 00


/2 09 91 00 17
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\09_91_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Safety Equipment and Signs

Section 10 14 24
10 14 24 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\10_14_24.DOCX
SECTION 10 14 24 SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND SIGNS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of safety equipment, signs, and related items.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. MIOSHA.
2. WEF: Water Environment Federation: Manual of Practice No. 1.
3. State and Local laws and ordinances having jurisdiction.
4. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Signs:
1. Label all hazardous substances and areas including flammable, toxic, combustible, and corrosive
liquids, solids, and gases.
2. Hazardous substances and areas shall be clearly labeled and identified as dangerous or hazardous
with wording DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION, plus a list of precautionary measures and remedies.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For signs.
1. Quantities.
2. Locations.
3. Mounting details.
4. Wording of each sign.
C. Samples: For signs. Submit 1 representative Sample of each type of material and type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Pipe Labels: As specified in Division 09 Section Painting.
B. First Aid Kits: Furnish 1 industrial first aid kit. Mount in the Aeration Equipment Building.
C. Accident Prevention Signs:
1. Meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.
2. Rounded corners.
3. Provide, at a minimum, the signs indicated the schedule at the end of this Section.
4. Fastening:
a. Exterior Doors: Stainless steel screws.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Safety Equipment and Signs

Section 10 14 24
10 14 24 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\10_14_24.DOCX
b. Interior Doors: 3M #4432 foam tape or pressure sensitive tape.
c. Hatches: Mount on hatch lid on the tank side of the lid with stainless steel fasteners.
5. Lettering: Block style, silk-screened.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Lab Safety Supply.
b. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment and signs according to with the submittals reviewed by Engineer, and the Manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Install signs after painting in adjacent areas is complete.
C. Provide temporary identification signage when applicable chemicals are present onsite until final signage is
installed.
D. Coordinate actual mounting locations with Owner.
3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Accident Prevention Signs:

Recommended
Location
Sign Type Message Substrate Size
Hatches DANGER Confined Space - Enter by Permit Only Aluminum 7" x 10"
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean materials installed under this Section according to Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste
Management.


END OF SECTION 10 14 24

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Process Equipment Identification

Section 10 14 25
10 14 25 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\10_14_25.DOCX
SECTION 10 14 25 PROCESS EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of proper identification for process equipment
components, and major items requiring identification or labeling as follows:
1. Process tanks.
2. Process equipment.
3. Instrumentation equipment.
4. Valves.
5. Enclosures.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Identification shall include equipment name or function (i.e., Sodium Hypochlorite Tank, Transfer
Pump, etc.), and shall include equipment tag number if one is indicated on the Drawings (i.e., P-1,
NaOCl-3, etc.).
2. Coordinate with requirements of related sections to avoid duplication.
3. Lettering:
a. Height to width ratio shall be no greater than 2:1.
b. Typeface: Sans serif gothic bold, or as approved by Engineer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings to include:
1. Text and location for each nameplate, label, and tag.
2. Product data for nameplates and tags.
B. Samples: Submit 1 sample of each type of identification media to be supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Engraved Nameplate:
1. Plastic laminate with engraved lettering.
2. Minimum 3/8-inch white letters on a black background.
B. Engraved Tag:
1. Brass round tags.
2. Engraved lettering on one side.
3. Fill letters with high contrast paint.
4. Tag diameter: 2-inch.
C. Vinyl Label:
1. Vinyl lettering with high tack adhesive backing.
2. Custom manufactured labels. Individual letters not allowed.
3. Label color shall be black typically, but white where mounting location is black.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Process Equipment Identification

Section 10 14 25
10 14 25 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\10_14_25.DOCX
D. Stenciled Label:
1. Custom cut stencil board for each label. Individual letter stencils not allowed.
2. Paint label using coating compatible with equipment finish and in accordance with Division 09 Section
"Painting."
3. Label color shall be black typically, but white where mounting location is black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Locate identification media where highly visible.
2. Location shall not interfere with operation of equipment or create a safety hazard.
3. Firmly attach all media.
4. Nameplates shall be affixed to a flat, smooth surface.
5. Clean mounting location in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions prior to applying adhesives.
B. Tanks and Bins:
1. Steel and FRP: Vinyl or stenciled label. Use stenciled label if tank surface is rough and will not provide
an adequate bond with adhesive.
2. Concrete: stenciled label.
3. Letter Height:
a. Process Tanks: 3-inch minimum.
C. Process Pumps: Engraved nameplate where equipment surface is flat and smooth enough to provide
strong bond with adhesive, otherwise vinyl or stenciled label.
D. Enclosure, Instruments, Sensors, Transmitters, Etc.:
1. For enclosures not specified in Division 22 - Plumbing, Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning, Division 26 - Electrical, Division 27 - Communications.
2. Engraved nameplate.
E. Valves:
1. Engraved tag.
2. Required only for process valves identified with a number on the Drawings.
3. Valves require tag number only. Number on tag shall be the same as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Attach with brass jack chain or nylon tie below or behind operator. Do not attach chain or tie to
handwheels, chainwheels, or valve chains. Use adhesive to attach tags where no operator is provided,
or where hanging the tag could interfere with valve operation or cause a safety hazard.
F. Process Equipment: Engraved nameplate.
G. SCADA Computer:
1. Engraved nameplate.
2. Indicate primary computer and backup computer.
3. Coordinate mounting location with Owner.
H. Piping Covered Under this Section:
1. Vinyl label.
2. Letter height in accordance with ANSI A131 or the pipe identification paragraph in Division 09 Section
"Painting."


END OF SECTION 10 14 25

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Plumbing Provisions

Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_00.DOCX
SECTION 22 05 00 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes specifying the general requirements for execution of that portion of the Work defined in
Division 22 of these Specifications and as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Division of Work: In accordance with the General Conditions, Contractor is responsible for dividing the Work
among the Subcontractors and Suppliers and for delineating the Work to be performed by specific trades.
The following are suggestions as to how the Work may be divided. This is not a complete list of all the
Work:
1. General Contractor:
a. Install access doors.
b. Provide concrete isolation and housekeeping pads for plumbing equipment.
c. Provide access doors in walls and ceilings for access to plumbing equipment.
2. Plumbing Subcontractor:
a. Bear financial responsibility for cutting and patching of walls, ceilings, and floors for Division 22
Work.
b. Furnish location, size and quantity of openings to Contractor before construction of new walls,
ceilings, and floors.
c. Furnish size and locations of concrete equipment isolation and housekeeping pads as required
for this Work and as indicated on the Drawings to Contractor before slabs are poured.
d. Furnish size and location of access doors required for this work as indicated on the Drawings to
Contractor.
e. Provide excavation and backfilling required in connection with the Work of Division 22.
f. Provide miscellaneous structural steel required in connection with support of the Work of
Division 22.
g. Perform final cleaning of plumbing systems and equipment.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of Division 22 shall comply with the
following:
1. ANSI: A13.1 - Standard for the Identification of Piping Systems.
2. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers: B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
3. ASTM: A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
4. International:
a. Currently enforced edition of Building Code, including state amendments.
b. Currently enforced edition of Plumbing Code, including state amendments.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Construction details, components, accessories, sizes and model numbers indicated on the Drawings or in
these specifications are used to indicate minimum levels of quality and coordination requirements.
B. Equipment supplied, whether as scheduled or selected from list of acceptable Manufacturers, must meet
minimum requirements listed in specifications or on Drawings, be compatible with facility and intended use,
and meet requirements for a functional system.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Plumbing Provisions

Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_00.DOCX
C. Drawings:
1. Are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work included.
2. Do not necessarily indicate every required valve, fitting, trap, thermometer, gage, duct, elbow,
transition, turning vane, mounting support and access panel.
3. Shall not be scaled for measurement or installation location.
4. Shall not serve as Shop Drawings.
D. Schedules and model numbers shall not be used to:
1. Serve as final, definitive quantity requirements. Contractor shall make own count as indicated on
Drawings.
2. Determine proper type or model with arrangement, mounting and accessories applicable.
E. Coordinate installation work of Division 22 with work of other trades to provide a complete and functional
system. Generally, the location of ductwork, sanitary, storm and vent piping take precedence over fire
protection and HVAC piping, electrical conduit and cable trays.
1.5 PRODUCT UNLOADING AND HANDLING
A. Unload equipment and materials required for completion of the Work.
B. Handle and store equipment and materials carefully to prevent damage. Method of rigging and handling
shall be subject to the approval of an authorized representative of the equipment Manufacturer whose
equipment is being handled.
1.6 TROUBLESHOOTING
A. By Contractor: If, during the start-up or warranty period, mechanical systems operational problems occur for
which the root cause is not readily apparent, Contractor shall promptly, through a Subcontractor or other
resource designated by Subcontractor, provide diagnostic and investigative services to determine the cause
or causes.
B. By Engineer:
1. At Contractor's request, Engineer will provide the services necessary to determine the cause or
causes of the operational problems.
2. Under the provisions of the General Conditions, Engineer will also provide these services if Contractor
fails to respond satisfactorily to operational problems within a reasonable time after written notice from
Engineer.
3. If while working at Contractor's request or under the provisions of the General Conditions, Engineer
determines that the problems are due to failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, Owner will compensate Engineer for additional services and deduct the amount
paid from payment or payments to Contractor.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Special Tools: Where special tools are required for operation, furnish these to Owner.
B. Loose and Detachable Parts:
1. Retain loose and small detachable parts of the apparatus and equipment furnished until the
completion of the Work.
2. Turn over these parts to Owner.
C. Construction Strainers:
1. Remove after flushing and cleaning and prior to turn over to Owner.
2. Attach removed construction strainer to piping where removed as proof of removal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Plumbing Provisions

Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_00.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATIONS
A. Miscellaneous Structural Steel:
1. Comply with the requirements of Division 05 Section Metal Fabrications, where applicable.
2. Structural steel work shall be done in accordance with the AISC Specification for Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, except that allowable stresses shall be reduced 25%.
3. Where required, high strength structural steel bolting conforming to ASTM Specification A325 and
assembled to AISC "Specifications for Assembly of Structural Joints. Using High Strength Steel Bolts"
or welding shall be used in place of rivets.
4. Connections shall be properly designed for the type of connection and the loads to be carried, and
shall be subject to Engineer's or Owner's approval.
5. Welding shall be done by operators who have been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in the
American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure" to perform the type of work required.
6. Welding techniques shall conform to the American Welding Society "Code for Arc and Gas Welding in
Building Construction", Section 4, Workmanship.
7. Finished members shall be true to line and free from twist, bends and open joints.
B. Material installed in a ceiling plenum shall be either non combustible or have a maximum flame spread of 25
and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Character of Work: Installation shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat
mechanical appearance when completed.
B. Laying Out of Work:
1. Layout piping, equipment and components in accordance with the Contract Documents and the
Manufacturers recommended practice, including provision of adequate space for maintenance.
Review layout with Engineer prior to installation.
2. Check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum
head room and space conditions at all points. Where head room or space conditions appear
inadequate, notify Engineer before proceeding with installation.
3. If directed by Engineer, Contractor shall make reasonable modifications in the layout as required to
permit proper execution of the Work and to prevent conflict with work of other trades.
4. Work shall be installed so as to be ready for operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from
Drawings may be made to accomplish this. Changes shall not be made without approval of Engineer.
3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 31 Section Excavation and Fill for Utilities.
3.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. Provide insulating couplings or unions where dissimilar materials are joined.
B. Provide unions at valves and at equipment for making repairs.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Paint exposed, non-insulated piping.
1. Surface Preparation:
a. Comply with Steel Structures Paint Council Specifications.
b. Remove rust and mill scale using power tool.
c. Clean using power tool and water wash to remove weld spatter, flux and alkali contaminants.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Plumbing Provisions

Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_00.DOCX
2. Application:
a. One coat water base inhibitive metal primer.
b. Two coats water base glass acrylic epoxy.
1) 275 square feet per gallon minimum.
2) Color: as selected by Owner.
B. Provide labels as specified below. Comply with OSHA Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards
and ANSI A13.1 for pipe labels and colors.
C. Valves, Fittings, and Supports:
1. Paint valves and fittings the same base color as the pipe they adjoin.
2. Paint floor stands the same base color as the pipe they adjoin.
3. Paint wall brackets and pipe hangers the same base color as the wall or ceiling they adjoin, or gray, if
wall or ceiling is not painted.
3.5 CODING AND TAGGING
A. Piping:
1. Applied to new piping after installation, insulation, and final painting.
2. Conform to Owners existing standards or conventions.
3. Markings:
a. Painted on, 1-inch high black letters.
b. Color coded band, conforming to ANSI A13.1.
c. Directional arrow.
4. Place markers at 20-foot centers with at least 1 in each room.
5. Plastic coated "Set Mark-Snap-Around" pipe markers manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corp., New
Haven, Connecticut; or approved equal, may be used in lieu of painted markers and bands.
B. Valves:
1. Provide brass or minimum 1/16-inch thick laminated plastic tags indicating assigned valve number on
valves.
2. Furnish schedule(s) of tagged valves with number, location and purpose of each valve.
3. Place a copy of each schedule in the Maintenance Instructions.
C. Equipment:
1. Provide for:
a. Plumbing equipment.
b. Labeled with its tag name/number as given on the Drawings.
c. Use 2-inch high stenciled painted lettering.
2. Similarly label control components associated with the above named equipment items.
3.6 START-UP
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section Starting and Adjusting.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and align equipment for smooth operation:
1. Plumb true and with parts in proper position and alignment.
2. Rotating parts shall turn freely and in the correct direction.
3. Flexible couplings shall be checked for alignment subject to Owner's approval.
4. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. The work of installation shall be executed in conformity with the best practice, so as to contribute to
efficiency of operation, minimum noise or vibration, minimum maintenance, accessibility and sightliness.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Plumbing Provisions

Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_00.DOCX
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Provide when required by individual Section.
2. Provide the following services except where indicated otherwise in individual Sections:
a. Inspect, check and approve system installation.
b. Supervise system start-up.
c. Provide written report indicating that system:
1) Has been properly installed and lubricated.
2) Is in accurate alignment.
3) Is free from undue stress imposed by connecting lines or anchor bolts.
4) Has been satisfactorily operated under full load conditions.
d. Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.
e. Instruct Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
B. Performance Test:
1. Test the entire Work, including all of its individual systems for 2 weeks before final payment will be
made.
2. Every phase of plumbing plant shall be operated separately, or in conjunction one with the other to
demonstrate to Engineer the ability of the plant to meet capacity and performance requirements while
maintaining design condition, in accordance with the true intent and purpose of these Specifications.
3. Make final tests in the presence of Owner and Engineer.
4. If a part of the Work or equipment does not meet Specifications:
a. Correct the situation.
b. Obtain approval of Engineer before final payment is made.
5. Provide the personnel and bear costs for correcting malfunctions.
6. Owner will provide operating personnel and utilities.
C. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section Starting and Adjusting.
D. Preparation:
1. Verify That System:
a. Has been inspected and put in service.
b. Is fully operational.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
a. Completed.
b. Sufficient copies available for use in demonstrations and instructions.
3. Air and hydronic system balancing shall have been completed prior to these performance tests.
E. Demonstration and Instructions:
1. Demonstration Of and Instruction On Operation and Maintenance of System:
a. To Owner's personnel.
b. Two weeks prior to final inspection.
2. Equipment Requiring Seasonal Operation: Demonstration within 12 months.
3. Instruction:
a. Operation and maintenance manual as basis.
b. Review contents of manual in detail.
c. Explain aspects of operation and maintenance.
4. Demonstrate:
a. Start-up.
b. Operation.
c. Control.
d. Adjustment.
e. Troubleshooting.
f. Servicing.
g. Maintenance.
h. Shutdown.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Plumbing Provisions

Section 22 05 00
22 05 00 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_00.DOCX
3.9 CLEANING AND FINISHING
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste Management.
B. Entire installation shall be free from surface oil and grease before work will be considered for final payment.
C. After tests have been made and the system pronounced tight:
1. Clean piping and equipment.
2. Lubricate bearings.
D. Final cleaning includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Equipment with Factory Finishes:
a. Wash factory-finished equipment with mild soap and water and leave in first-class condition,
entirely free of stains or streaks.
b. Do not use abrasive materials. Touch up scratches or other violations of the factory finish paint
with matching paint from the equipment Manufacturer prior to cleaning.
2. Plumbing Fixtures:
a. Clean with mild soap and water containing a disinfecting agent.
b. Set trim handles at same angle and polish.
c. Remove, clean and reinstall aerators.
d. Check pop-up wastes for proper operation.
3. Clean sumps, pits, trenches, manholes, catch basins and floor drains and leave free of foreign
material.


END OF SECTION 22 05 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing

Section 22 05 06
22 05 06 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_06.DOCX
SECTION 22 05 06 CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR PLUMBING


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the basic requirements of all cast iron pipe and fittings. Refer to Division 22 Section
Plumbing Piping and Pumps for project specific requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Specifications:
a. A74 - Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
b. A888 - Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
c. C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
d. C1277 Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) Specification:
a. 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary System.
b. 310 - CISPI's Patented Joints for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary System.
3. AWWA Standard:
a. Couplings for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste and
Vent Piping Applications.
b. C110 - Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 inches through 48 inches, for water and other
liquids.
c. C111 - Rubber Gasketed Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
d. C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds for water or
other liquids.
e. C153 - Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch through 24-inch.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 Section Submittal Procedures.
B. Manufacturer's Literature: For cast iron pipe and fittings and couplings. Includes Manufacturer name,
Manufacturer location, dimensions, and details of construction and installation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the installation of the material.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with local code applicable to installation of the material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HUB AND SPIGOT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. ASTM A74, Service class.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing

Section 22 05 06
22 05 06 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_06.DOCX
B. Gaskets:
1. ASTM C 564.
2. Elastomeric double seal compression type.
C. All pipe and fittings shall be made in the United States and bear the CISPI trademark.
2.2 HUBLESS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. ASTM A888 and CISPI 301.
B. Couplings:
1. ASTM C1277 Couplings.
2. ASTM C1540 Heavy Duty Couplings.
3. Corrosion resistant fasteners.
4. ASTM C564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
5. Above Ground or Corrosive Soils:
a. Heavy Duty, Type 304, Stainless Steel Couplings: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless steel
shield; stainless steel bands; and sleeves.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch wide shield with 4 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch wide shield with 6 bands.
b. Heavy Duty, Cast Iron Couplings: ASTM A48, 2 piece, cast iron housing; stainless steel bolts
and nuts; and sleeve.
6. Below Ground (Non-Corrosive Soils):
a. Heavy Duty, Type 301, Stainless Steel Couplings: ASTM A666, Type 301, stainless steel
shield; stainless steel bands; and sleeve.
1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch wide shield with 4 bands.
2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch wide shield with 6 bands.
C. All pipe and fittings shall be made in the United States and bear the CISPI trademark.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. System shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and Code requirements.
B. Hubless piping shall not be used for pressurized applications.
3.2 JOINTS AND FITTINGS
A. Mitered joints will not be permitted.
B. Joints between CI soil pipe and "DWV" (drain, waste and vent) copper pipe are to be made with calking
ferrule for bell and spigot pipe or a compatible adapter for hubless pipe.
C. Pipe and fittings shall be joined by 1 of the following 3 methods:
1. Calked lead and oakum.
2. Positive double seal elastomeric compression type gasket.
3. No hub clamp assembly.
D. Service weight pipe shall be joined with service weight gasket.
E. Use extra heavy gasket with extra heavy pipe.


END OF SECTION 22 05 06

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Copper Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing

Section 22 05 09
22 05 09 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_09.DOCX
SECTION 22 05 09 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the basic requirements of copper pipe and fittings. Refer to Division 22 Section
Plumbing Piping and Pumps for project specific requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Specifications:
a. B75 - Copper Fittings.
b. B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
c. B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
2. ANSI Publications: A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: For copper pipe and fittings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B. Testing of Copper Piping: In accordance with Division 22 Section Testing and Cleaning of Plumbing
Systems.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration and contamination with foreign
matter.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
removed materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Seamless Copper Tubing:
1. Factory coded and marked.
2. Conform to the following schedule:
a. Aboveground: ASTM B88, Type L or K, hard drawn.
b. Buried: ASTM B88, Type K soft temper.
c. Drainage: ASTM B306, Type DWV.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Copper Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing

Section 22 05 09
22 05 09 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_09.DOCX
3. Pipe Markings:
a. All piping longer than 2'-0" shall have a permanent marking in accordance with ASTM or ANSI
specifications.
b. This identification shall include the following:
1) Manufacturer's name.
2) Pipe pressure rating.
3) Pipe size.
B. Solder type shall conform to the following schedule:
1. Hot and cold water and recirculation lines: 95% tin, bismuth, copper and 5% silver.
a. IAPMO listed lead free.
2. Drain Piping: 50% tin and 50% lead.
C. Fittings:
1. General Service:
a. Sweat type, wrought copper, long radius elbows.
b. Cast fittings shall only be allowed with written permission from the Engineer.
2. Drainage:
a. Sweat type, wrought copper, drainage pattern.
b. Specialty items, such as closet elbows, may be cast brass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. During Freezing Weather:
1. Protect all materials in such a manner that no harm can be done to:
a. Installations already made.
b. Materials and equipment on the Site.
2. Furnish all necessary protection for such installations and equipment as may be required.
3.2 ERECTION
A. General:
1. All Piping: Follow approved paths as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Connect to existing lines where required, or to equipment in an approved manner.
3. Locate Pipes, Valves and Equipment to Provide:
a. Access for maintenance.
b. Minimum obstruction of passageways and working space.
4. Normally, all pipe runs shall be plumb, parallel with the building and level, except for drain slope.
5. Be responsible for establishing and maintaining drain slope of piping in order to ensure drainage.
6. Expansion of Piping:
a. All pipe connections shall provide freedom of movement of the piping during expansion and
contraction without springing of piping or injury to building steel or structure.
b. Any damage to building steel or structure as a result of work installed by Contractor shall be
repaired at Contractor's expense.
7. As Piping Material is Erected:
a. Thoroughly clean the inside of all piping.
b. Remove foreign material such as scale, sand, weld spatter, particles and cutting chips.
8. Provide caps or plugs in all openings at the end of each day's work and as otherwise directed for the
protection of the piping.
B. Pipe Joints:
1. Cut ends of copper tubing squarely using only sharp tube cutters.
2. Ream pipe to full I.D. before preparing the joint.
3. Soldering:
a. Solder or braze joints by cleaning outside ends of all copper tubings and inside of fittings
immediately before joining and soldering.
b. Apply solder flux to both tube and fitting.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Copper Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing

Section 22 05 09
22 05 09 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_09.DOCX
c. Insert tube full depth into fitting, apply heat and solder in such a manner as to draw solder into
and completely around the joint.
4. Joining Valves:
a. When joining copper lines to valves follow Manufacturer's instructions.
b. In general:
1) Valve shall be in the fully open position.
2) Solenoid shall be broken down.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clean and test piping in accordance with Division 22 Section Testing and Cleaning of Plumbing Systems.


END OF SECTION 22 05 09

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Duty Valves for Plumbing

Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_23.DOCX
SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all valves.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the following:
1. General: Provide valves with features indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide proper
valve features as determined by Installer for installation requirements. Comply with ASME B31.9 for
building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
2. Flanged: Valve flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5 (steel), or ANSI B16.24
(bronze).
3. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.
4. Solder-Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.
5. Flangeless: Valve bodies manufactured to fit between flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast iron),
ANSI B16.5 (steel), or ANSI B16.24 (bronze).
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. This Section is provided as a guide in the application and specification of specific valves intended for
use in this Project. This Section does not instruct where to install these valves unless specifically
noted. Refer to other specific Plumbing Specification Sections and Drawing details for instruction for
location and use.
2. As indicated on the Drawings.
3. As called out in the Piping Systems Schedules.
B. Valves not specifically indicated on the Drawings: Size and class of valve to agree with line in which
installed.
C. Valves shall have Manufacturer's name, trademark and working pressure rating cast into the valve body.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for all valves.
B. Manufacturer's Literature: For All Valves:
1. Manufacturer's name.
2. Details of construction.
3. Performance characteristics.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Made in USA:
1. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all valves shall comply with the Federal Trade Commission Made
in USA standard.
2. Supplier shall furnish documentation of USA content if requested by Engineer.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Duty Valves for Plumbing

Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_23.DOCX
B. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the material and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Valves shall be manufactured by one Manufacturer for each type of valve. Where valve Manufacturers are
not specifically indicated, they shall be one of the following:
1. Nibco.
2. Kennedy.
3. Crane.
4. Milwaukee.
5. Keystone.
6. Stockham.
7. Grinnell.
8. Mueller.
9. Jamesbury.
10. DeZurik.
11. Hammond.
12. Apollo.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Bronze Valves:
1. All brass alloys used in valves shall contain no more than 15% zinc.
2. Alloys must comply with ASTM B61, B62 or B584.
2.3 HAND VALVES
A. General:
1. Provide extended stem handles with a minimum clearance of 1-1/2-inch on insulated service.
2. All valves used for throttling/balancing shall have adjustable memory stops.
3. Pressure ratings are at service indicated by application.
B. Gate Valves:
1. Gate valves used in connection with piping 2 inches in size and smaller shall be all bronze, union
bonnet, rising stems, solid wedge taper seat, screwed or sweat ends and back seat, designed for 125
psi SWP. Valves used for piping 2-1/2-inch in size and larger shall be IBBM, OS&Y, bolted bonnet,
rising stem, solid wedge, bronze mounted, flanged ends, and designed for 125 pounds.
2. Based on Nibco T-124 for 2-inch and less, Nibco F-617-O for 2-1/2 inches or larger.
C. Globe Valves:
1. Threaded end 2-inch and smaller (125 psig and less): 125 pounds wsp, bronze body, rising stem,
screwed bonnet, Teflon disc, Grinnell No. 3210, Crane No. 7.
2. Threaded end 2-inch and smaller (above 125 psig): 300 pounds wsp, bronze body, rising stem, union
bonnet, renewable Teflon disc, Grinnell No. 3251, Crane No. 362-E.
3. Solder joint end 2-inch and smaller: 125 pounds wsp, bronze body, rising stem, screwed bonnet,
Teflon disc, Grinnell No. 3210SJ, Crane No. 1310.
D. Ball Valves:
1. Ball valves used in connection with piping 2 inches in size and smaller shall have screwed or sweat
ends, 2 piece bronze body, standard port with cadd plated ball and a like stem. VA rated for
150 pound SWP and 600 WOG. Seats and seals shall be virgin teflon for standard duty cycle. Provide
reinforced teflon for applications identified for extended duty cycle.
2. Based on Jamesbury Series 300 or Eliminator Series.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
General Duty Valves for Plumbing

Section 22 05 23
22 05 23 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_23.DOCX
E. Drain Valves: Furnish at each low point 3/4-inch gate or ball valves as specified above. Install nipple with
cap at valve outlet.
F. Plug Valves: Plug valves shall be nonlubricated eccentric plug type rated for 175 pound WOG with semi -
steel body neoprene coated plug and epoxy coated seat; equal to DeZurik Series 100 or Homestead
Ballcentric. Furnish with compatible wrench.
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valve:
1. 2-Inch and Smaller: 125 psi valves for domestic hot and cold water.
a. MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B62; with horizontal
swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends.
b. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line.
c. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end connections,
where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are not available.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves in conformance with:
1. The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
2. The Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install Valves:
1. At all branch piping connection to mains.
2. At all connections to equipment.
3. As required for complete control or isolation of any piece of equipment or service to branch lines.
4. In accessible locations.
5. Equal in flow area to connecting piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. No valve shall be installed with its stem below the horizontal.
D. Install flanged valves at equipment in a manner which allows equipment side of valve to be opened up
without draining piping system.


END OF SECTION 22 05 23

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Section 22 05 29
SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all pipe hanging and support systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers: B31.5 - Building Services Piping.
2. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society:
a. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.
b. SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application - 1996.
c. SP-90 - Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or in these Specifications, this Contractor shall be responsible to
design and provide all pipe hangers, supports, restraints, braces, framing, etc., as required to comply with all
applicable building codes, ASME B31 and MSS SP-69.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: For structural steel attachment devices, hangers and rollers. Include name of
Manufacturer; model number and MSS Type, if applicable; and piping systems to be used with.
B. Submit Shop Drawings for all engineered hanger, restraints and support assemblies.
C. Upon request by Engineer, submit calculations for all engineered hanger, restraints and support assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The materials of all pipe hanging and supporting elements shall be in accordance with the latest
requirements of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.1 and MSS Standard Practice MSS SP-58 and
MSS SP-69 except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of these Specifications.
B. The material in contact with the pipe shall be compatible with the piping material so that neither shall have a
deteriorating action on the other.
C. Special Finishes and Materials:
1. All ferrous hangers and supports used in the following areas shall be hot dip galvanized unless noted
otherwise:
a. Outside.
b. In wet or potentially wet areas.

/2 22 05 29 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_29.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Section 22 05 29
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Elcon.
B. Michigan Hanger.
C. Anvil.
D. Bergen.
E. Hilti.
F. Lindapter.
2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Horizontal Piping Hangers: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750).
2. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 degrees F (49 to 232 degrees
C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN100 to DN400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
3. Carbon or Alloy Steel, Double Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24 (DN20 to DN600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN15 to
DN600), if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN15 to DN100), to allow
off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable Swivel Split or Solid Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN20 to DN200).
7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS
1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN200).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200).
9. Adjustable Swivel Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN15 to DN50).
10. Split Pipe Ring With or Without Turnbuckle Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN10 to DN200).
11. Extension Hinged or 2 Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN10 to DN80).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
B. Supports and Rollers:
1. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN100 to DN900),
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange.
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN100 to DN900),
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 36 (DN65 to DN900), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support
and cast iron floor flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN25 to DN750), from
2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20 (DN65 to
DN500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN50 to DN1050), if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.

/2 22 05 29 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_29.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Section 22 05 29
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN50 to DN600), if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment
is not necessary.
8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN50 to
DN750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion
and contraction.
C. Vertical Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specification
sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20
to DN500).
2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20
(DN20 to DN500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
D. Hanger Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system specification
sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 degree F (49 to 232 degree C) piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type II, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building
attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 degree F (49 to 232 degree C) piping
installations.
2.4 HANGER RODS
A. Minimum rod diameters for rigid rod hangers shall be as shown in MSS SP-69 Table 4 (Minimum Rod
Diameter for Single Rigid Rod Hangers) and as indicated in Part 3 of these Specifications.
B. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is
anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing.
C. Rod material must be compatible with hanger and comply with above. Do not field cut thread on galvanized
rod.
D. Do not use perforated strap.
E. Multiple Supports:
1. Horizontal banks of pipe may be supported on a common base member without regard to the pipe
centerline elevation.
2. In the supporting of multiple pipe runs, provisions shall be made to keep the lines in their relative
lateral positions, using clamps or clips as required. Lines subject to thermal expansion shall be free to
roll axially or slide.
2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS
A. All Piping:
1. Saddle: MSS Type 39 (Grinnell #160-164), or Anvil Figure 162 or 165.
2. Shield: MSS Type 40 (Grinnell #167), provide and install in accordance with Manufacturer's shield size
selection tables.
3. The contour of the saddle shall match the radius of the pipe insulation.
2.6 FABRICATED STEEL SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS
A. Provide as required:
1. Steel shapes and plates.
2. Bolts.
3. Welds.

/2 22 05 29 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_29.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Section 22 05 29
B. Materials and fabrication in accordance with:
1. AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
2. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (except Section 4.2.1.).
C. Design: Responsibility of Subcontractor.
2.7 MANUFACTURED METAL FRAMING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Bee Line.
2. Elcen.
3. Super Strut, Inc.
4. Unistrut Building Systems.
B. Provide products from one Manufacturer.
C. Channel (Standard Applications):
1. Mild strip steel.
2. 12-gage minimum material.
3. Factory painted equal to Unistrut Perma-Green.
4. Equal to Unistrut Part No. P1000.
D. Clamps and Supports:
1. Beam clamp equal to Unistrut Part No. P2785.
2. Pipe strap equal to Unistrut Part No. P2558.
3. Pipe roller equal to Unistrut Part No. P2474.
4. All items fabricated in material equal to channel specifications.
5. Copper pipes supported on metal framing support channels shall be protected from galvanic corrosion
by special insulators between the pipe clamp and the channel.
E. Clamp Nuts:
1. Electro-galvanized stainless steel for use with stainless steel and fiberglass parts.
2. Mild bar steel for standard applications.
3. Class 2 American Standard threads.
4. Equal to Unistrut Part No. P1012.
2.8 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. As indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications.
B. Concrete Attachments:
1. Provide galvanized finish for all attachments used in wet or potentially wet areas.
2. Provide stainless steel bolts and nuts in wet and potentially wet areas.
3. Poured Concrete:
a. Use cast-in-place inserts or bolted surface mounted attachments, at Contractors option.
b. Expansion style anchors are not permitted on piping systems subject to vibration.
C. Horizontal Piping:
1. Steel W, I, or S shapes: MSS Type 23 clamp with retaining clip, (Grinnell Fig. 87) up to 2-inch; MSS
Type 28 (Grinnell Fig. 292) or MSS Type 21 (Grinnell Fig. 133, 134) above 2-inch.
2. Steel Channel: MSS Type 20 universal channel clamp.
3. Bar Joists: Steel washer plate (Grinnell Fig. 60).
4. Concrete: See "B" above.
5. Timber: Angle bracket and lag screws or as detailed on Drawings.
6. Steel Z Shapes: Custom attachment required.

/2 22 05 29 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_29.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Section 22 05 29
D. Vertical Piping:
1. Steel Shapes: Welded brackets as approved by Engineer.
2. Concrete: See "B" above.
3. Timber: Ceiling hanger flange (Grinnell Fig. 128R, 153) angle brackets and lag screws, or as detailed
on Drawings.
E. In the absence of a Specification for a particular type of attachment, furnish attachments comparable in type
and quality to that specified above for a similar situation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. General Requirements:
1. The selection of pipe hangers and supports shall be based on the overall design concept of the piping
system and any special requirements which may be called for in these Specifications or as indicated
on the Drawings. The support systems shall provide for, and control, the free or intended movement
of the piping including its movement in relation to that of the connected equipment. They shall prevent
excess stress resulting from the transfer of weight being introduced into the pipe or connected
equipment.
2. The selection of hangers and supports shall be made to provide the piping system with the degree of
control that its operating characteristics require.
3. The selection of hangers or supports will take into consideration the combined weight of the supported
systems, including system contents and test water.
4. Select and install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
system, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
5. The spans in MSS SP-69 Table 3 do not apply where concentrated weights, such as valves or heavy
fittings, or where changes in direction of the piping occur between hangers.
6. Select all hangers and supports rated for the maximum potential loading with pipe full.
7. Select hangers for cold (less than 50 degrees F) piping service for installation over the insulation.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system
Specification sections.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. General:
1. Adjust all components as required for proper operation and required pipe slope.
2. Double nut all support rods at hangers.
3. Location and Routing:
a. Install Piping as Indicated:
1) On the Drawings.
2) On the reviewed Shop Drawings.
b. Secure Engineer's approval for all pipe routing changes.
4. Coordinate with other trades for placement of concrete attachments prior to concrete pouring.
5. Install all items in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
C. Horizontal Runs:
1. General:
a. Provide adequate supports for the loads with a factor of safety of at least 5 (400 pounds
minimum).
b. Provide protective shield at all hangers and rollers supporting plastic pipe and coated pipe.
c. Support spacing not to exceed MSS SP-69 Table 3, or the requirements for seismic restraint,
whichever is more stringent.

/2 22 05 29 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_29.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
Section 22 05 29
d. Hanger rod diameter shall not be less than the requirements of MSS SP-69 Table 4, or the
requirements for seismic restraint, whichever is more stringent.
2. Bar Joists: Attachments to bar joists shall be made to top member and at panel points.
D. Ductile Iron Piping: The size of hanger components shall be suitable for the O.D. of the pipe to be
supported.
E. Cast Iron Soil Piping:
1. The size of hanger components shall be suitable for the O.D. of the pipe to be supported.
2. Spacing shall comply with MSS SP-69 Table 3.
3.3 VIBRATION ELIMINATORS
A. Install so as to cause minimum restraint to normal thermal movements.
3.4 INSULATION PROTECTION
A. Provide Protection Saddle:
1. Equal to insulation thickness.
2. At each hanger.
3. For all insulated piping systems where longitudinal expansion exceeds 1-inch per 100 feet.
B. Provide preservative treated wood block "saddle" for all insulated domestic cold water piping systems larger
than 3-inch IPS. Grinnell Fig. #159 is also acceptable.
C. Provide insulation protection shield:
1. At each hanger for all "cold" (less than 50 degrees F) piping services.
2. In accordance with the following table:
Pipe Size (IPS) Shield Gage Length
5" and Smaller 16 12"
3. Installed as follows:
a. Surround lower covering.
b. Straddle equidistant on hanger.
c. Flared at both ends as required to avoid damage to pipe covering, jacket and vapor barrier.


END OF SECTION 22 05 29



/2 22 05 29 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_29.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Penetrations for Plumbing

Section 22 05 31
22 05 31 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_31.DOCX
SECTION 22 05 31 PENETRATIONS FOR PLUMBING


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of the major items listed below:
1. Pipe sleeves.
2. Prefabricated and site built curb assemblies.
3. Flashing and sealing of all mechanical openings through weather or waterproofed walls, roofs and
floors.
4. Sealing and finishing of all mechanical openings.
B. Division of Work: In accordance with the General Conditions, Contractor is responsible for dividing the Work
among the Subcontractors and Suppliers and for delineating the work to be performed by specific trades.
The following are suggestions as to how the Work may be divided. This is not a complete list of all the work:
1. General Contractor:
a. Locate and place all sleeved and framed openings as part of constructing the wall and floor
surfaces in which the openings occur.
b. Provide all lintels and required stiffening members for wall and floor openings.
c. Cut roofing and install flashing for all required openings in proprietary roof membrane systems.
d. Cut all roof deck openings and provide required framing supports.
2. Mechanical Subcontractor:
a. Advise General Contractor of quantity, location and size of all required openings.
b. Provide all curbs, sleeves, seals, escutcheons and related materials required for finishing,
sealing and waterproofing mechanical openings. Furnish all flashing and counterflashing.
c. Arrange and pay for all openings required after wall, roof and floor construction is complete.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the Work of this Section shall comply with
ASTM D2202 - Test Method for Slump of Sealants.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: For all premanufactured curbs and sealing assemblies.
1. Manufacturer's name.
2. Model number.
3. Details of construction and installation.
4. Certified load-bearing data for all curbs.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Codes and Standards: "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" as published by SMACNA.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Penetrations for Plumbing

Section 22 05 31
22 05 31 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_31.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Prefabricated Stack Sleeve Assemblies:
1. Josam.
2. Wade.
3. Zurn.
B. Pipe Seals and Boots:
1. The Pate Company.
2. Portals Plus, Inc.
3. Roof Products and Systems Corporation.
4. Thunderline Corporation.
5. Thycurb Corporation.
C. Modular Mechanical Seals:
1. Thunderline/Link-Seal.
2. As approved.
D. Backer Rod: Industrial Thermo Polymers, Standard Backer Rod.
E. Expanding Resilient Foam: General Electric, RTF762.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Backer Rod:
1. Extruded round, closed cell, polyethylene foam.
2. Resilient, non-exuding.
3. Density: 2.0 pounds per cubic foot.
4. Tensile Strength: 50 psi.
5. Nonabsorbent to water and gasoline.
6. Suitable for use as a backing for acoustical sealant.
7. Compatible with sealant and approved by sealant Manufacturer.
B. Packing Material for Penetrations:
1. Glass Fiber or Mineral Fiber:
a. Noncombustible.
b. Resistant to water, mildew, and vermin.
2. Expanding Resilient Foams:
a. Acceptable alternative if manufactured for this purpose.
b. Minimum material density: 60 pounds per cubic foot.
2.3 SLEEVES
A. Materials:
1. 18-Gage Galvanized Steel: For pipe penetrations in non-bearings walls.
2. Schedule 40 Steel Pipe:
a. For all bearing walls.
b. For all floors.
3. Cast Iron Pipe: For all exterior below grade installations.
B. Size All Sleeves:
1. To allow for movement due to expansion.
2. As indicated on the Drawings.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Penetrations for Plumbing

Section 22 05 31
22 05 31 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_31.DOCX
2.4 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Stack Sleeves and Flashing Fittings:
1. Provide as required for roof and floor pipe penetrations.
2. Equal to Josam 264xx series products.
B. Exterior Pipe Opening Seals:
1. Compatible with installation conditions.
2. Equal to One of the Following:
a. Pate "Pipe Seal".
b. Portals Plus Model C-126.
3. Link-Seal.
C. Modular Mechanical Seals:
1. Provide modular, mechanical type, consisting of inter-locking synthetic rubber links shaped to
continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and the wall opening.
2. The elastomeric element shall be sized and selected in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations and have the following properties as designated by ASTM:
a. For Standard Service Applications:
1) -40 to +250 degrees F (-40 to +121 degrees C).
2) EPDM = ASTM D2000 M3 BA510.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROOF OPENINGS
A. Piping:
1. As indicated on the Drawings.
2. For Multiple Pipes Through Single Opening:
a. Select sleeve of ample size to accommodate pipes.
b. Prefabricated insulated curbs acceptable.
3. Fill Annulus Opening:
a. Use non-combustible insulation material.
b. Full depth of sleeve.
4. Provide Moisture Protection Using:
a. Elastomeric boot.
b. Metal hood.
c. Flashing fitting.
B. Locate curbs and sleeves a minimum of 12 inches from walls to permit proper flashing.
3.2 INTERIOR WALL AND FLOOR OPENINGS
A. Flash all floor-mounted drains except in slabs on grade:
1. Use integral flashing flange and clamp.
2. As specified in Division 22 Section Plumbing Piping and Pumps.
B. Use riser sleeve with integral flashing flange and clamp for all waterproof membrane floors.
C. Pipe Penetrations:
1. Domestic Water, Sewer, Drain and Vent Piping:
a. Where a pipe passes through a wall, ceiling, or floor slab, cast or grout a steel sleeve into the
structure.
b. Internal diameter of the sleeve: 2 inches (50 mm) larger than the external diameter of the pipe
passing through it.
c. After all of the piping is installed in a specific area, check the clearance and correct it, if
necessary, to within 1/2-inch (12 mm).
d. Pack the void full depth with packing material and seal at both ends, 1-inch (25 mm) deep.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Penetrations for Plumbing

Section 22 05 31
22 05 31 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_31.DOCX
3.3 OUTSIDE WALL OPENINGS
A. Pipes:
1. Pass through sleeves fabricated of Schedule 40 pipe cut 3/8-inch back from face of wall on each side.
2. Sealed 100% watertight.
3. Pipes below grade use cast iron sleeves.
3.4 FLOOR SLEEVES IN POTENTIALLY WET AREAS
A. All floors except slabs on grade.
B. Extend sleeves 3 inches above finished floor.
C. Provide poured concrete curb for duct openings as indicated in the Drawings.
3.5 ESCUTCHEONS AND CLOSURE COLLARS
A. Includes ceilings, partitions, floor and walls.
B. Provide Escutcheons for All Piping:
1. Sized to fit over coverings.
2. In All Potentially Wet Areas: Stainless steel in water and wastewater treatment areas, and elsewhere
as indicated.
3. In All Dry Finished Areas: Chrome plated.


END OF SECTION 22 05 31


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Testing and Cleaning of Plumbing Systems

Section 22 05 73
22 05 73 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_73.DOCX
SECTION 22 05 73 TESTING AND CLEANING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes providing testing and cleaning services and the major items listed below:
1. Provide all pumps, gages, valves and other equipment and material necessary to properly conduct
tests and perform cleaning.
2. Arrange and pay for all costs of utilities and chemicals required for the Work.
3. Repair and Restore All Work Damaged:
a. By tests.
b. By cutting required in connection with the tests.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Flushing and Cleaning:
1. Submit certificates for all code-required inspections.
2. Submit all water Sample analysis reports as required in Part 3 of these Specifications.
B. Pressure Test Reports:
1. Submit within 1 week after each system pressure test.
2. List time, date and persons present for the following for each system:
a. Initial tests.
b. Final test.
3. Include report indicating:
a. Test type and duration.
b. Initial pressure.
c. Final pressure.
4. Indicate that necessary repairs and final tests were satisfactorily completed.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with all applicable codes.
B. Secure State Health Department approval for potable water systems.
C. Testing and Cleaning Agency:
1. Minimum 10 years experience in providing cleaning chemicals for water systems use.
2. Provide regional laboratory support services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cleaning Agents:
1. Aqua-Chem.
2. Aquatrol.
3. Enerco.
4. Nalco.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Testing and Cleaning of Plumbing Systems

Section 22 05 73
22 05 73 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_05_73.DOCX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST
A. General:
1. Perform all tests before piping is painted, covered, concealed or backfilled.
2. Before testing, remove or otherwise protect from damage, control devices, air vents, fixtures, meters,
or other parts which are not designated to withstand test pressures.
B. Test Procedures:
1. Water Test:
a. Charge with water to the pressure specified.
b. Exterior Surface of Pipe and Fittings:
1) Show no cracks or other form of leaks.
2) Completely drip dry.
C. Pressure Test Criteria:
1. Test criteria below are minimum requirements. In addition, the requirements of State and Local Codes
having jurisdiction shall be met:


Piping System

Type Test

Pressure
Allowable
Pressure Drop
Minimum
Test Duration
Drainage System Water 5 psig 0 psi 30 Minutes
Vent System Water 5 psig 0 psi 30 Minutes
Water (Domestic) Water 100 psig 0 psi 4 Hours
3.2 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PROCEDURES
A. Domestic and Other Open Water Piping Systems: Flush with clean water until all foreign matter is removed.
B. Remove and clean all strainers after flushing is complete.
C. Drain completely and refill after flushing.
3.3 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM STERILIZATION PROCEDURES
A. General:
1. Sterilize with chlorine prior to acceptance for operation.
2. Arrange and pay for all required equipment, materials, utilities, tests and inspections.
B. Procedure:
1. Pump chlorine solution into distribution piping:
a. After piping system has been flushed and pressure tested.
b. At a constant rate while bleeding off water at extreme ends of piping system.
c. As required to achieve residual-free chlorine levels not less than 50 ppm.
2. Retain chlorinated condition for 16 hours minimum and ensure complete disinfection.
3. Flush system with clean water and submit water Sample to State Health Department for test and
approval.


END OF SECTION 22 05 73
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Plumbing Piping Insulation

Section 22 07 19
22 07 19 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_07_19.DOCX
SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of piping insulation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Specifications:
a. B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
b. C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
c. C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
d. C552 - Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
2. ASTM Standard Test Methods: E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) publications: NFPA 255 - Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials: 25, 50, 50 flame spread, fuel, smoke.
4. ASHRAE: 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design, current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: For piping insulation.
1. For Each Type Used:
a. Name of Manufacturer.
b. Details of construction and installation.
c. Manufacturer's data (density, K-factor).
2. For Each Application:
a. Thickness.
b. Total "R" value.
c. Jacket material.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable. Handle and
store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration and contamination with foreign matter.
B. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
removed materials at no additional cost to Owner.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Plumbing Piping Insulation

Section 22 07 19
22 07 19 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_07_19.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Insulation:
1. Pittsburgh-Corning.
2. Owens-Corning.
3. Certainteed.
4. Armacell.
5. Rubatex.
6. Knauf.
7. Johns Manville.
B. Jacketing:
1. Ceel-Co.
2. O'Brien.
3. Zeston.
4. Childers.
5. Pabco.
C. Adhesives:
1. Benjamin Foster.
2. Childers.
3. Vimasco.
4. B.E.H.
5. Or equal.
2.2 TYPES OF INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Rigid Molded Glass Fiber General (FG):
1. All-service jacket (ASJ) type factory applied jacketing.
2. 3 lbs/cu ft minimum density.
3. k factor of 0.23 at 75 degrees F mean.
4. 50 degree F service temperature.
5. Owens-Corning Type SSLII; or equal.
6. Typical for application on pipes 16 inches and up.
B. Rigid Molded Cellular Glass (CG):
1. 8 lbs/cu ft minimum density.
2. k factor of 0.33 maximum at 75 degrees F.
3. 0.00 water vapor permeability.
4. 900 degree F service temperature.
5. Laminated aluminum foil/vinyl/kraft paper jacketing except where aluminum laminated jacketing is
specified.
6. Provide 125 mil heat-sealable, tar based laminate for all direct buried installations:
a. Laminate jacket shall consist of 3 layers of polymer-modified bituminous separated by glass
reinforcement and aluminum foil.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Pittwrap; or equal.
7. Pittsburgh Corning Foamglas; or equal.
C. Rigid Phenolic Insulation (P):
1. Continuously molded pipe insulation made from a chemically neutral phenolic foam.
2. 1.5 to 2.5 lbs/cubic foot density.
3. k factor of 0.23 at 75 degrees F mean.
4. Laminated aluminum foil and white kraft paper vapor barrier jacket.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Plumbing Piping Insulation

Section 22 07 19
22 07 19 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_07_19.DOCX
D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Pipe Insulation (E):
1. Density of 5.0 lbs/cubic foot.
2. k factor of 0.27 at 75 degrees F mean.
3. Maximum water vapor transmission of 0.17 per inch.
4. Must be listed for 25/50 flame/smoke spread for thickness used.
5. Armacell Armaflex AP; or equal.
E. Polyurethane insulation (PU) shall conform to one of the following:
1. A continuously molded foam insulation having:
a. Nominal density of 1.0 lbs/cubic foot.
b. k factor of 0.16 at 75 degrees F mean.
c. Flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
d. Factory applied vapor barrier jacket.
2. A continuously molded foam insulation having:
a. 2 to 2.5 lbs/foot density.
b. k factor of 0.16 at 75 degrees F mean.
c. Factory-applied vapor barrier jacket.
2.3 PIPE AND FITTING COVERS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Covers:
1. Ultraviolet resistant.
2. 0.030-inch minimum thickness.
3. Preformed to match outer diameter of insulation.
4. Preformed fitting covers, minimum 10 mil.
5. Ceel-Tite 330; or equal, by Topline or Zeston.
B. Aluminum Covers (A):
1. ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 minimum.
2. 0.016-inch thickness.
3. Bright anodized or acrylic-coated smooth finish on exposed side.
4. 2-piece tee and ribless elbow covers in minimum 0.016-inch, preformed.
5. Provide moisture barrier backing and butt-joint with mastic seal for joining of adjacent sections.
6. Childers Products Company; or as approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install piping insulation:
a. In conformance with the Drawings. these Specifications, and the Manufacturer's
recommendations.
b. After piping system has been satisfactorily tested.
c. Over clean, dry piping system.
d. To the following thickness:
1) As specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings.
2) If not specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations for the specific application.
e. Continuous through walls, ceilings and sleeves except at fire stops.
2. Fill all cracks and voids with insulating cement carefully troweled to leave a smooth finish.
B. Joints and Fittings:
1. Block insulate valves and flanges with reusable insulation system.
2. Insulate elbows, tube turns, sweeps and bends with mitered sections or premolded fittings. Match
pipe covering material where used.
3. Fit joints tightly together.
4. Seal joints with sealing compound and preformed aluminum bands.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Plumbing Piping Insulation

Section 22 07 19
22 07 19 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_07_19.DOCX
3.2 JACKETS AND FINISH
A. General:
1. Provide moisture barrier between the insulation and the jacketing in a continuous, unbroken seal.
2. Hold jacketing in place by a continuous sealed joint, providing a positive weatherproof seal along the
entire length of the jacket.
3. Cap off ends with caps.
4. On cold lines, cut caps to the exact size of the pipe and seal with a recommended silicone calking.
5. Provide slip joints a minimum of every 25 feet or as needed for expansion.
6. Locate longitudinal jacket seams on indoor exposed piping out of view.
B. PVC:
1. Center a preformed strap (snap-strap) containing a permanently weatherproof plastic sealant over
each circumferential joint and secure by tightening on a clip, or by use of a separate stainless steel
banding.
2. Design snap-strap to take care of normal expansion.
3. Cover all pipe insulation and preformed insulation fittings.
4. Weld longitudinal seams together with welding adhesive as supplied by cover Manufacturer.
5. Overlap adjacent jacketing 3/4-inch and weld circumferential seams together with welding adhesive.
6. Overlap fitting covers to adjacent pipe insulation jacketing. Weld longitudinal and circumferential
seams together with adhesive.
C. Attachment:
1. For systems operating at 50 degrees F and above: May be stapled using outward clinch staples
spaced 3 inches apart at least 1/4-inch from the lap edge.
2. For systems operating below 50 degrees F: Vapor seal laps using self-sealing lap, lap seal tape gun
or adhesive such as Benjamin Foster 520.
D. Taper and seal insulation ends regardless of service.
E. Fitting and pipe jackets to have matching finishes ready for painting.
F. For Insulation Without Factory Applied Jacket:
1. Finish with 8-ounce glass mesh and mastic.
2. Use breather mastic on piping operating at temperatures greater than 50 degrees F.
3.3 PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Basis of Thickness Chart:
1. Thicknesses shown are based on products having a maximum "k" factor of 0.26 at a mean
temperature of 75 degrees F.
2. These Thicknesses:
a. Can be reduced for products having significantly lower "k" values.
b. Shall be increased for products having higher "k" values in order to produce equivalent or
greater thermal resistance.
B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Local requirements for flame and smoke ratings must be met and may exclude
some options listed herein.
C. Jackets and Finish Application: Provide PVC jacket on insulated exposed interior domestic and non-potable
cold water piping within 7 feet of the floor and on exterior process wastewater piping above the roof that is
heat traced.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Plumbing Piping Insulation

Section 22 07 19
22 07 19 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_07_19.DOCX
D. Thickness Chart (In Inches):
1. Key: Insulation Type (Refer to Paragraph 2.2 of this Section):
a. FG = Rigid Fiberglass.
b. HFG = High Density Rigid Fiberglass.
c. CG = Cellular Glass.
d. P = Phenolic.
e. E = Flexible Elastomeric.
f. PU = Polyurethane.

PIPE SIZE
Piping Systems Type
Temp (F)
Range
Less
Than 1
1 to
1-1/4
1-1/2
to 3 4 to 6 8 & Up
Type of
Insulation *
1.

Domestic Cold
Water/Non-Potable
Cold Water
40-80 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 FG, HFG, E
2. Heat Traced Process
Wastewater Above
Roof
FG, HFG, E

* See PART 2 PRODUCTS Article 2.2 TYPES for types of insulation. Type CG, where indicated, is for
buried applications.



END OF SECTION 22 07 19

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Plumbing Piping and Pumps

Section 22 10 00
SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all materials, labor, equipment, supervision, fees, and
services incidental to proper completion of all plumbing system work:
1. Domestic cold water system.
2. Interior waste and vent piping to 5'-0" outside building.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ANSI/ASME Standards:
a. A112.1.2 - Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems.
b. A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
c. A112.36.2M - Cleanouts.
2. ASSE (American Society of Sanitary Engineering) Standards:
a. 1001 - Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers.
b. 1003 - Water Pressure Reducing Valves.
c. 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
d. 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent.
e. 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principal Backflow Preventer.
f. 1044 - Trap Seal Primer Valves Drainage Type.
3. ASTM Standards:
a. A53 - Steel Pipe, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
b. A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
c. A181 - Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.
d. A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
e. A518 - Corrosion-Resistant High Silicon Iron Castings.
f. B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
g. B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
h. C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
i. D2136 - Test Method for Coated Fabrics - Low Temperature Bend Test.
4. AWWA Standards:
a. C500 - Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems.
b. M20 - Water Chlorination Principles and Practices.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: For all products required in Part 2 of this Section:
1. Required Information:
a. General:
1) Name of Manufacturer.
2) Model number.
3) Dimensions.
4) Details of construction and installation.
2. Not required for piping or hangers and supports.

/2 22 10 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_10_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Plumbing Piping and Pumps

Section 22 10 00
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. All state and local codes and ordinances shall have jurisdiction.
2. All related electrical devices shall be housed in suitable enclosures as defined by the National
Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 22 Sections Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing, and
Copper Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing.
B. Refer to schedules in Part 3 of this Specification for specific applications of pipe materials to plumbing
systems.
C. Refer to Division 22 Section Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment and the schedule
in Part 3 of this Section for Hanger and Support Requirements for Plumbing System Piping.
2.2 VALVES
A. Above Ground Valves: Refer to Division 22 Section General Duty Valves for Plumbing for valve
construction and material requirements.
2.3 SPECIALTIES
A. Shock Absorbers:
1. Furnish and install where indicated or wherever quick closing valves (including flush valves) are
utilized. Shock absorbers shall be located and sized in accordance with Standard PDI-WH-201.
2. Manufacturer: Josam, Wade, or Zurn.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Description:
1. Furnish and install cleanouts where indicated on drawings in accordance with the following table.
Cleanouts subject to vehicular traffic (hi-lo's, etc.) shall be heavy duty type. Wade model numbers
are for reference only.
2. Series floor cleanout with NH spigot outlet or ty-seal outlet connection, threaded adjustable housing,
flanged ferrule with tapered brass plug and round or square nickel brass or ductile iron vandal
resistant secured top for floor finishes as follows:
Location Wade Number
Unfinished Concrete (Scoriated XH Di Top) W-6000-Z
Other LT Duty Finishes (Textures NB Top) W-6000
Other XH Duty Finishes (Scoriated XH NB Top) W-6000-X
Exterior Areas (Scoriated XH Di Top) W-6000-Z
Vertical rough piping (exposed) W-8560-E
Concealed piping in walls W-8560-E with W-8480 - Round stainless steel cover.
B. Manufacturer: Wade, Zurn, Josam, Smith, MI-FAB.

/2 22 10 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_10_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Plumbing Piping and Pumps

Section 22 10 00
2.5 FLOOR DRAINS AND SINKS
A. Furnish and install floor drains at low point of sloped floor or at elevations indicated on the Drawings in
accordance with the following.
1. Provide 4-inch deep seal traps on floor drains.
2. Provide tapping for connection of trap seal primer line on floor drains.
B. Description:
1. Floor Drains:
a. FD-1: Wade W-1100 cast iron floor drain with seepage flange, 6-inch diameter nickel brass
adjustable strainer.
C. Manufacturer: Wade, Josam, Zurn, Smith, MI-FAB, Watts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DOMESTIC COLD WATER SYSTEMS
A. Description: Provide as indicated on the Drawings and as required to comply with all applicable codes and
regulations, complete system of piping, fittings, valves, auxiliaries and accessories as required to connect
cold water to all items requiring cold water.
B. Pipe and Fittings:
1. Above Grade: Galvanized steel in accordance with Type L and drawn copper in accordance with
ASTM B88.
2. Below Grade: Cast ductile iron in accordance with ANSI 16.9 A234 WPA Division 22 Section Cast
Iron Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing Type K soft temper copper in accordance with ASTM B88 and
Division 22 Section Copper Pipe and Fittings for Plumbing.
3. Provide unions at each screwed valve, unions, and at all points in the piping system where necessary
to facilitate dismantling.
C. Installation:
1. All interior piping shall be run square and straight with the building.
2. Piping in finished areas shall be concealed within walls, chases, enclosures, etc.
3. Piping in exposed areas shall be run as high as possible within joists and beam spaces, or below the
floor as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Piping shall follow approved paths as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Connect to existing lines
where required or to equipment in an approved manner. Locate pipes, valves and equipment
accessible for maintenance, minimum obstruction of passage and work spaces.
5. Install drain valves at all low points in piping system.
6. Install all required trap primer systems and piping.
3.2 BUILDING SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A. Description: Furnish and install the entire building sanitary drainage system as indicated on the Drawings.
System includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following items: Waste and vent piping for all
plumbing, fixtures requiring same, floor drains, cleanouts.
B. Material:
1. Above and below ground piping as defined in Part 2 of this Section.
2. Drains and cleanouts as defined in Part 2 of this Section.
C. Installation:
1. General runs of sanitary sewer are indicated on Drawings diagrammatically and every bend, offset,
etc., is not necessarily indicated, all of which must be installed to properly drain all stacks, fixtures,
vents, etc.
2. Connections between mains and laterals shall be made with wyes and 1/8 bends.

/2 22 10 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_10_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Plumbing Piping and Pumps

Section 22 10 00
3. Changes in direction shall be with long radius ells except in stacks where sanitary tees and short
radius 1/4 bends may be used in changes from horizontal to vertical.
4. Flash all vent stacks at the roof.
5. Cleanouts shall be installed where required by code and as indicated on the Drawings and specified
herein. They shall be accessibly located, set flush with finish surface or finish grade, and shall be
same nominal pipe size as line served, but no larger than 4 inches. Stainless steel cover plates
required for wall accessed cleanouts.
6. Cleanouts indicated for lines outside of building shall be installed with a Y connection and a 4 degree
elbow extending to grade with bell set in concrete collar not less than 12 inches square and 12 inches
thick.
7. Flash with 60 mil PVC membrane minimum 4-foot square.
8. Pitch vent lines to gravity drain to waste pipe.
3.3 CLEANING, TESTING, CHLORINATION
A. As piping material is erected, the inside of all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign material. Flush
and test piping before operation in accordance with Division 22 Section Testing and Cleaning of Plumbing
Systems.
B. On completion of the domestic water piping systems, chlorinate the system using methods acceptable to
and approved by Engineer. Furnish all chlorine and chlorinating equipment.
C. After system chlorination is complete, submit water Samples to the governing health department for testing.
Take Samples as directed by Engineer, and provide Engineer with a letter from the governing health
department indicating test results.
3.4 SCHEDULES

Storm and Sanitary
System Schedule Material Specifications Remarks

Underground
Sanitary: Minimum size 2 inches
S.V. C.I. ASTM A74 Bell & Spigot with Elastomeric Gasket or
Lead & Oakum
S.V. C.I. ASTM C564, A888 No Hub with Heavy Duty Couplings

Above Ground
Sanitary S.V. C.I. ASTM A74 Bell & Spigot with Elastomeric
Compressive Gasket. Lead & Oakum
S.V. C.I. ASTM C564, A888 No Hub
DWV Copper ASTM B306 ANSI B16.23 Soldered



/2 22 10 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_10_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Plumbing Piping and Pumps

Section 22 10 00

Domestic Water Above Ground
125 PSI Maximum Pressure
Pipe Size Schedule Material Spec Grade Remarks
1/4 - 1-1/2 40 Steel Galvanized ASTM A53 B Threaded & Coupled
2 6 40 Steel Galvanized ASTM A53 B Plain End
1/4 6 Type L Copper ASTM B88 -- Solder 95/5, Silvabrite

Fittings Size Description ASA ASTM
Ells 1/2 - 1-1/2
2 - 6
300 Lb. Ductile Iron Scrd. Galv.

B16.3 A395
Tees 1/2- 1-1/2
2 - 6
300 Lb. Ductile Iron Scrd. Galv.

B163 A395
Reducers 1/2 - 1-1/2
2 - 6
300 Lb. Ductile Iron Scrd. Galv.

B16.3 A395
Bushings 1/2 - 1-1/2 Outside Hex. Iron Galv. B16.3 A395
Couplings 1/2 - 1-1/2
2 - 6
300 Lb. Ductile Iron Scrd. Galv.

B16.3 A395
Unions 1/2 - 1-1/2

2 - 6
300 Lb. Ductile Iron Scrd. Galv.
Use Flanges
B16.3 A395
Plugs 1/2 - 1-1/2 Ductile Iron Sq. Hd. Solid
Caps 1/2 - 1-1/2
2 - 6
300 Lb. Ductile Iron Scrd. Galv.

B16.3 A395
Flanges 2 - 6 150 Lb. Screwed Galv. B16.3 A181-1
Gaskets Non-Asbestos Compressed Material B16.21
Bolts Regular Unfinished Sq. Hd. Machine A307 Gr.
Nuts American Std. Heavy Series
Semi-Finished Hex


Valves Size Description Ends
Shut-Off
1/2 - 2
1/2 - 2
2-1/2 - 6
150 Lb. Bronze Gate
150 Lb. Bronze Ball
125 Lb. IBBM OS&Y Gate
Scrd.
Solder/Scrd.
Flgd.
Throttling
1/2 - 1-1/2
1/2 - 1-1/2
2 - 6
150 Lb. Bronze Globe
125 Lb. Bronze Gate
125 Lb. IBBM OS&Y Globe
Scrd.
Scrd./Solder
Flgd.
Check
1/2 - 1-1/2
2 - 6
125 Lb. Bronze Swing Check
125 Lb. IBBM Swing Check
Solder/Scrd.
Flgd.
Note: Comparable couplings and fittings as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon may also be used.


Domestic Water Below Ground
Pipe Size Schedule Materials Spec Remarks
1/2 2 Type K Soft Copper ASTM B88 Flared Fittings
2-1/2 - 12 Class 52 Ductile Iron ANSI 16.9 A234 WPA ANSI A21.11 Mechanical Joint


END OF SECTION 22 10 00





/2 22 10 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\22_10_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Operation and Maintenance of HVAC Systems

Section 23 01 00
23 01 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_01_00.DOCX
SECTION 23 01 00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Refer to individual Division 23 sections for additional equipment specific Operations and Maintenance
Manual requirements.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preparing and furnishing an operating and maintenance manual for mechanical
equipment.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Compile an Operating and Maintenance Manual:
1. For all building mechanical systems and major equipment items.
2. Including, but not necessarily limited to:
a. Installing company's name, address, telephone number and name of job supervisor.
b. Maintenance and operating booklets (as supplied by the equipment Manufacturer) for each item
or representative type item installed.
c. A complete set of Shop Drawings.
d. Equipment information forms for each equipment piece.
3. Each equipment information form include all applicable items of the following:
a. Type of unit.
b. Manufacturer's name.
c. Equipment service area.
d. Filter Information:
1) Filter change period.
2) Type of filter.
3) Size of filter and number.
e. Motor and Drive Information:
1) Belt type and quantity.
2) Belt size.
3) HP.
4) Voltage.
5) Phase.
f. Lubrication Information:
1) Recommended service interval.
2) Lubricant application points.
3) Recommended lubricant type.
g. Recommended cleaning procedures and intervals.
B. Prepare Information Packets:
1. Attach to each major piece of equipment in a string tie envelope labeled with the equipment's
designation in large print.
2. Information Required:
a. A copy of the equipment information form as defined above.
b. A temperature control written operation sequence.
c. A maintenance checklist form with equipment identification information and listing all relevant
maintenance procedures in a column format to accommodate date entries.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Operation and Maintenance of HVAC Systems

Section 23 01 00
23 01 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_01_00.DOCX
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Three copies of Operating and Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.


END OF SECTION 23 01 00


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
General HVAC Provisions

Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_00.DOCX
SECTION 23 05 00 GENERAL HVAC PROVISIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes specifying the general requirements for execution of that portion of the Work defined in
Division 23 of these Specifications and as indicated on the Drawings:
B. Division of Work: In accordance with the General Conditions, Contractor is responsible for dividing the Work
among the Subcontractors and Suppliers and for delineating the Work to be performed by specific trades.
The following are suggestions as to how the Work may be divided. This is not a complete list of all the
Work:
1. General Contractor:
a. Install access doors.
b. Provide concrete isolation and housekeeping pads for mechanical equipment.
c. Provide access doors in walls and ceilings for access to mechanical equipment.
2. Mechanical Subcontractor:
a. Furnish location, size and quantity of openings to Contractor before construction of new walls,
ceilings, and floors.
b. Furnish size and location of access doors required for this work as indicated on the Drawings to
Contractor.
c. Provide miscellaneous structural steel required in connection with support of the Work of
Division 23.
d. Perform final cleaning of mechanical systems and equipment.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of Division 23 shall comply with the
following:
1. ANSI: A13.1 - Standard for the Identification of Piping Systems.
2. ASTM: A325 - Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
3. International:
a. Currently enforced edition of the Building Code, including state amendments.
b. Currently enforced edition of the Mechanical Code, including state amendments.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Construction details, components, accessories, sizes and model numbers indicated on the Drawings or in
these specifications are used to indicate minimum levels of quality and coordination requirements.
B. Equipment supplied, whether as scheduled or selected from list of acceptable Manufacturers, must meet
minimum requirements listed in specifications or on Drawings, be compatible with facility and intended use,
and meet requirements for a functional system.
C. Drawings:
1. Are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work included.
2. Do not necessarily indicate every required duct, mounting support and access panel.
3. Shall not be scaled for measurement or installation location.
4. Shall not serve as Shop Drawings.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
General HVAC Provisions

Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_00.DOCX
D. Schedules and model numbers shall not be used to:
1. Serve as final, definitive quantity requirements. Contractor shall make own count as indicated on
Drawings.
2. Determine proper type or model with arrangement, mounting and accessories applicable.
E. Coordinate installation work of Division 23 with work of other trades to provide a complete and functional
system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. System Start-up Schedules:
1. Submit 2 weeks prior to earliest proposed date.
2. List time and date for the following for each system:
a. Start-up.
b. Demonstration.
B. Completion Reports:
1. Submit within 1 week after each system demonstration.
2. List time, date and persons present for the following for each system:
a. Start-up.
b. Demonstration.
3. Include Manufacturer's representative's report indicating:
a. Approval of installation.
b. Satisfactory start-up.
c. Functioning correctly.
4. Indicate that demonstration and instructions were satisfactorily completed.
1.6 PRODUCT UNLOADING AND HANDLING
A. Unload equipment and materials required for completion of the Work.
B. Handle and store equipment and materials carefully to prevent damage. Method of rigging and handling
shall be subject to the approval of an authorized representative of the equipment Manufacturer whose
equipment is being handled.
1.7 TROUBLESHOOTING
A. By Contractor: If, during the start-up or warranty period, mechanical systems operational problems occur for
which the root cause is not readily apparent, Contractor shall promptly, through a Subcontractor or other
resource designated by Subcontractor, provide diagnostic and investigative services to determine the cause
or causes.
B. By Engineer:
1. At Contractor's request, Engineer will provide the services necessary to determine the cause or
causes of the operational problems.
2. Under the provisions of the General Conditions, Engineer will also provide these services if Contractor
fails to respond satisfactorily to operational problems within a reasonable time after written notice from
Engineer.
3. If while working at Contractor's request or under the provisions of the General Conditions, Engineer
determines that the problems are due to failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, Owner will compensate Engineer for additional services and deduct the amount
paid from payment or payments to Contractor.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Special Tools: Where special tools are required for operation, furnish these to Owner.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
General HVAC Provisions

Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_00.DOCX
B. Loose and Detachable Parts:
1. Retain loose and small detachable parts of the apparatus and equipment furnished until the
completion of the Work.
2. Turn over these parts to Owner.
C. Permanent Heating Equipment:
1. Notify Engineer when installed and proposed to be used to heat building interior.
2. Prior to using, provide adequate means to keep internal duct and acoustic liner surface clean and in a
like-new condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATIONS
A. Miscellaneous Structural Steel:
1. Comply with the requirements of Division 05 Section Metal Fabrications, where applicable.
2. Structural steel work shall be done in accordance with the AISC Specification for Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, except that allowable stresses shall be reduced 25%.
3. Where required, high strength structural steel bolting conforming to ASTM Specification A325 and
assembled to AISC "Specifications for Assembly of Structural Joints. Using High Strength Steel Bolts"
or welding shall be used in place of rivets.
4. Connections shall be properly designed for the type of connection and the loads to be carried, and
shall be subject to Engineer's or Owner's approval.
5. Welding shall be done by operators who have been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in the
American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure" to perform the type of work required.
6. Welding techniques shall conform to the American Welding Society "Code for Arc and Gas Welding in
Building Construction", Section 4, Workmanship.
7. Finished members shall be true to line and free from twist, bends and open joints.
B. Material installed in a ceiling plenum shall be either non combustible or have a maximum flame spread of 25
and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Character of Work: Installation shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat
mechanical appearance when completed.
B. Laying Out of Work:
1. Layout piping, ductwork, equipment and components in accordance with the Contract Documents and
the Manufacturers recommended practice, including provision of adequate space for maintenance.
Review layout with Engineer prior to installation.
2. Check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum
head room and space conditions at all points. Where head room or space conditions appear
inadequate, notify Engineer before proceeding with installation.
3. If directed by Engineer, Contractor shall make reasonable modifications in the layout as required to
permit proper execution of the Work and to prevent conflict with work of other trades.
4. Work shall be installed so as to be ready for operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from
Drawings may be made to accomplish this. Changes shall not be made without approval of Engineer.
3.2 CODING AND TAGGING
A. Equipment:
1. Provide for:
a. Each fan.
b. Labeled with its tag name/number as given on the Drawings.
c. Use 2-inch high stenciled painted lettering.
2. Similarly label control components associated with the above named equipment items.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
General HVAC Provisions

Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_00.DOCX
3.3 START-UP
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section Starting and Adjusting.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and align equipment for smooth operation:
1. Plumb true and with parts in proper position and alignment.
2. Rotating parts shall turn freely and in the correct direction.
3. Flexible couplings shall be checked for alignment subject to Owner's approval.
4. Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
B. The work of installation shall be executed in conformity with the best practice, so as to contribute to
efficiency of operation, minimum noise or vibration, minimum maintenance, accessibility and sightliness.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Provide when required by individual Section.
2. Provide the following services except where indicated otherwise in individual Sections:
a. Inspect, check and approve system installation.
b. Supervise system start-up.
c. Provide written report indicating that system:
1) Has been properly installed and lubricated.
2) Is in accurate alignment.
3) Is free from undue stress imposed by connecting lines or anchor bolts.
4) Has been satisfactorily operated under full load conditions.
d. Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.
e. Instruct Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
B. Performance Test:
1. Test the entire Work, including all of its individual systems for 2 weeks before final payment will be
made.
2. Every phase of heating and ventilating plant shall be operated separately, or in conjunction one with
the other to demonstrate to Engineer the ability of the plant to meet capacity and performance
requirements while maintaining design condition, in accordance with the true intent and purpose of
these Specifications.
3. Make final tests in the presence of Owner and Engineer.
4. If a part of the Work or equipment does not meet Specifications:
a. Correct the situation.
b. Obtain approval of Engineer before final payment is made.
5. Provide the personnel and bear costs for correcting malfunctions.
6. Owner will provide operating personnel and utilities.
C. Preparation:
1. Verify That System:
a. Has been inspected and put in service.
b. Is fully operational.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
a. Completed.
b. Sufficient copies available for use in demonstrations and instructions.
3. Air system balancing shall have been completed prior to these performance tests.
D. Demonstration and Instructions:
1. Demonstration Of and Instruction On Operation and Maintenance of System:
a. To Owner's personnel.
b. Two weeks prior to final inspection.
2. Equipment Requiring Seasonal Operation: Demonstration within 12 months.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
General HVAC Provisions

Section 23 05 00
23 05 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_00.DOCX
3. Instruction:
a. Operation and maintenance manual as basis.
b. Review contents of manual in detail.
c. Explain aspects of operation and maintenance.
4. Demonstrate:
a. Start-up.
b. Operation.
c. Control.
d. Adjustment.
e. Troubleshooting.
f. Servicing.
g. Maintenance.
h. Shutdown.
3.6 CLEANING AND FINISHING
A. Entire installation shall be free from surface oil and grease before work will be considered for final payment.
B. After tests have been made and the system pronounced tight:
1. Clean piping and equipment.
2. Lubricate bearings.
C. Final cleaning includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Equipment with Factory Finishes:
a. Wash factory-finished equipment with mild soap and water and leave in first-class condition,
entirely free of stains or streaks.
b. Do not use abrasive materials. Touch up scratches or other violations of the factory finish paint
with matching paint from the equipment Manufacturer prior to cleaning.


END OF SECTION 23 05 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment
Section 23 05 13
23 05 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_13.DOCX
SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all electric motors required for Division 23 specified
equipment.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association - Standards and publications governing the
following performance criteria:
a. Frame design.
b. Torque.
c. Enclosures.
d. Dimensions.
e. Power supply and voltages.
f. Locked rotor KVA per horsepower.
g. Service factor.
h. Sound power levels.
2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature:
1. All polyphase motors.
2. All motors 3 horsepower (name plate) and larger.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors and their accessories, with minimum
3 years documented product development, testing, and manufacturing experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect motors stored onsite from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable
weatherproof covering.
B. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately in a protected area.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide 2 year Manufacturer's warranty.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment
Section 23 05 13
23 05 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_13.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Reliance.
B. Magnetek.
C. Baldor.
D. Lincoln Electric.
E. Subject to compliance with specifications, motors drawing less than 250 watts and intended for intermittent
service may be supplied by an alternate Manufacturer commonly used by the equipment Manufacturer.
2.2 SPEED (EXCEPT WHERE NOTED OTHERWISE)
A. 1,800 rpm.
B. Constant speed.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. All copper windings with a minimum service factor of 1.15 for totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC) and
1.25 for open, drip-proof (ODP) motors.
B. NEMA frame, arrangement, and design as required for the specific application.
C. Permanently lubricated unless specifically noted otherwise.
D. Comply with all requirements for UL approval and labeling for specific hazard classification where explosion-
proof and severe duty motors are indicated.
E. Provide a visible stainless steel nameplate indicating:
1. Motor horsepower.
2. Voltage.
3. Phase.
4. Cycles.
5. RPM.
6. Full load amps.
7. Locked rotor amps.
8. Frame size.
9. Manufacturer's name and model number.
10. Service factor.
11. Power factor.
12. Efficiency: Nameplate motor efficiency shall be identified in accordance with NEMA MG-1-12.54.2.
F. Except as specifically noted, all motors shall be high efficiency as listed in NEMA Standard 12.6 for all
motors 1 horsepower and larger: All efficiency ratings are to be as tested in accordance with IEEE Spec.
112, Method B.
G. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors
where connection is made directly, provide screwed conduit connection in end frame.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment
Section 23 05 13
23 05 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_13.DOCX
2.4 VOLTAGE AND MOTOR TYPE
A. Special conditions and voltage are noted on the Drawings.
B. Single Phase Power - Split Phase Motors:
1. Starting Torque: Less than 150% of full load torque.
2. Starting Current: Up to 7 times full load current.
3. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200% of full load torque.
C. Single Phase Power - Permanent-Split Capacitor Motors:
1. Starting Torque: Exceeding 1/4 of full load torque.
2. Starting Current: Up to 6 times full load current.
3. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Single Phase Power - Capacitor Start Motors:
1. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
2. Starting Current: Less than 5 times full load current.
3. Pull-Up Torque: Up to 350% of full load torque.
4. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250% of full load torque.
5. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors shall have two
capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.
E. 3-Phase Power - Squirrel Cage Motors:
1. Starting Torque: One to one and one-half times full load torque.
2. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
3. Power output, locked rotor torque, breakdown or pullout torque: NEMA Design B characteristics.
4. Design, construction, testing, and performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors.
5. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
6. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast
iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
7. Bearings:
a. Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for
relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours.
b. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA
standard shaft extension.
c. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
8. Sound Power Levels: To ANSI/NEMA MG 1, 75 dBA SPL at 3 feet maximum.
9. Nominal Power Factor: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested
in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.
2.5 RATINGS
A. Motors shall meet NEMA standards and be capable of operating at rated load with a voltage variation of
10%, a variable of 5% in rated frequency, or a combined variation of 10% without damage to the motor.
B. Motors shall be selected for the type of service involved and shall be selected at a minimum of 15% above
the required rating of the equipment served. (Does not include service factor.)
2.6 BELT DRIVES
A. Belt drive motors shall be provided with adjustable sheaves with the selected equipment speed occurring at
the midpoint of the adjustable range. Install belt guards over drives in accordance with OSHA requirements.
2.7 THERMAL OVERLOADS
A. Provide built-in thermal overloads on all fractional horsepower motors.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment
Section 23 05 13
23 05 13 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_13.DOCX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommended installation
methods for obtaining conformance with the Contract Documents.
B. Alignment of all motors, factory coupled or mounted, and all motors field coupled and mounted, shall be
rechecked after all connections have been made and after 48 hours of operation in designed service.
C. Verify the voltage characteristics of each motor prior to ordering.
D. Verify the correct wire connections and rotation of equipment by "bumping" motor after wiring.
E. Confirm voltage imbalance on 3-phase motors is less than 2%.
3.2 APPLICATION: Except as specifically indicated, motors shall be selected as follows:
A. Shaded pole motors are not acceptable.
B. Phase, except where noted otherwise:
1. 1/2 HP and Less: Single-phase.
2. Larger than 1/2 HP: Three-phase.
C. Single Phase Starting:
1. 1/8 HP and Less: Split phase or permanent split capacitor.
2. Greater than 1/8 HP: Capacitor start.
D. Enclosure:
1. Totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) for all motors located outside, in wet areas, in mechanical rooms,
or elsewhere as indicated.
2. Open drip-proof (ODP) for motors located elsewhere, in a clean, dry environment.


END OF SECTION 23 05 13


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Penetrations for HVAC

Section 23 05 31
23 05 31 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_31.DOCX
SECTION 23 05 31 PENETRATIONS FOR HVAC


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of the major items listed below:
1. Duct sleeves.
2. Flashing and sealing of all mechanical openings through weather or waterproofed walls, roofs and
floors.
3. Sealing and finishing of all mechanical openings.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the Work of this Section shall comply with ASTM
D2202 - Test Method for Slump of Sealants.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Codes and Standards: "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" as published by SMACNA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Backer Rod: Industrial Thermo Polymers, Standard Backer Rod.
B. Expanding Resilient Foam: General Electric, RTF762.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Backer Rod:
1. Extruded round, closed cell, polyethylene foam.
2. Resilient, non-exuding.
3. Density: 2.0 pounds per cubic foot.
4. Tensile Strength: 50 psi.
5. Nonabsorbent to water and gasoline.
6. Suitable for use as a backing for acoustical sealant.
7. Compatible with sealant and approved by sealant Manufacturer.
B. Packing Material for Penetrations:
1. Glass Fiber or Mineral Fiber:
a. Noncombustible.
b. Resistant to water, mildew, and vermin.
2. Expanding Resilient Foams:
a. Acceptable alternative if manufactured for this purpose.
b. Minimum material density: 60 pounds per cubic foot.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Penetrations for HVAC

Section 23 05 31
23 05 31 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_31.DOCX
2.3 SLEEVES
A. Materials: 18-gage galvanized steel for ductwork openings.
B. Size all sleeves to allow for movement due to expansion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 OUTSIDE WALL OPENINGS
A. Ducts:
1. Pass through openings provided by Contractor.
2. Size opening to allow approximately 1-inch clearance at all duct or duct covering surfaces.
3. Provide sheet metal closures, insulation, calking, flashing and drip edges.
4. Install to ensure 100% weatherproof construction.
3.2 ESCUTCHEONS AND CLOSURE COLLARS
A. Includes ceilings, partitions, floor and walls.
B. Provide Sheet Metal Closure Collar for all Ductwork:
1. Fit snugly around duct or covering, and surface penetrated without contact.
2. Attach with approved fasteners 6-inch centers maximum spacing.
3. Fabricate with minimum 4-inch face.


END OF SECTION 23 05 31


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_93.DOCX
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes a description of the mechanical system testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) scope
of services. The following systems shall be included in the testing, adjusting, and balancing process:
1. Electric heating systems.
2. Exhaust systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's Association (SMACNA) publications:
a. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of environmental systems.
b. Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound of Vibration.
c. Testing, Adjusting, Balancing Manual for Technicians.
2. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards for Total System Balance, 2002 Edition.
3. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): Procedural standards for testing, adjusting, and
balancing of environmental systems.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Proper Performance Characteristics:
1. In accordance with design intent, acceptable energy efficiency and Manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Providing acceptable thermal and acoustical performance in all service areas.
3. As directed by Engineer.
B. TAB Engineer: An individual, firm or corporation whose primary work is testing, adjusting and balancing
environmental systems working under a direct contract to the Contractor.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Pre Test and Balance Checklist and mechanical systems TAB report in accordance with Division 01
Section Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit Pre Test and Balance Checklist at least 2 weeks prior to scheduled start of TAB work as scheduled
by Contractor and approved by Owner.
C. Preliminary TAB Submittal:
1. Prior to final inspection.
2. 1 copy to Engineer.
D. Final Submittal: 1 copy to Engineer.
E. The TAB report shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following general items:
1. Summary remarks regarding problems.
2. Initial, interim and final performance test data.
3. Description of test procedures and equipment used.
4. Systems' Drawings and/or schematics clearly marked to identify location of equipment tested, duct
traverse location(s), location of system static pressure sensor, etc.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_93.DOCX
5. Systems performance data sheets shall include design conditions, installed equipment information,
and field test data for:
a. Air Systems:
1) Design Conditions:
a) Air capacity.
b) System total static pressure drops and profiles of all air handling systems, including
filters, coils, etc.
c) Motor horsepowers and design brake horsepowers.
d) Fan speeds.
e) Fan curves or fan rating tables showing design conditions.
2) Installed Equipment:
a) Equipment Manufacturer.
b) Equipment model numbers, sizes, types, etc.
c) Motor types, sizes and characteristics.
d) Heater and starter types, sizes and characteristics.
e) Drive types, sizes and speed range.
f) Equipment ratings if different from design.
g) Identification of all terminal devices, including outlets.
h) Location of all smoke control devices.
3) Field Test Data - Initial and Final Test Readings For:
a) Air capacities.
b) Static pressures through units and unit components.
c) Equipment speeds.
d) Motor operating voltages and amperages.
e) Brake horsepower.
f) Operating performance plotted on fan curves or fan rating tables.
g) System schematic and notes including static pressure values, system static
pressure sensor valve, etc.
h) Airflow and static pressure data for all duct mains as balanced under typical total
system operation. Report will not be accepted without airflow and static pressure
profile (refer to Paragraph 3.3).
i) Identify each outlet or inlet as to location, area, size and fan system.
j) Required and field measured cfm for each outlet or inlet.
k) Identify each smoke control device and pressure differential and flow test data.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. TAB Field Technician Personnel:
a. Trained and experienced in the operation of the test and balance equipment.
b. Knowledgeable of the design of all systems scheduled for testing and balancing.
2. TAB Engineer: A certified member of either the following organizations:
a. AABC.
b. NEBB.
B. Report Forms:
1. The report forms included in the appendix of the AABC Standard are incorporated in the work of this
Section for the purpose of identifying the level of detail required for testing and reporting.
2. TAB engineer may use the AABC forms or other similar forms which present equivalent information in
a logical format.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Patching Materials:
1. Comply with requirements as specified in other Sections where applicable to provide materials
essentially and functionally identical to original installation before testing and balancing work.
2. Maintain the integrity of systems for air tightness, water tightness, and durability of finish.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_93.DOCX
2.2 INSTRUMENTS
A. Instruments used for TAB work shall be as indicated in the referenced standards.
B. Calibration:
1. Instruments to have been calibrated within one year of start of TAB work.
2. Appropriate documentation shall be made available to the Engineer on request.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROCEDURES
A. General:
1. Determine what actual performance characteristics are deemed proper during system tests.
2. If the design supply, return or exhaust air quantities for a space create a space pressure other than
neutral, or if a space is indicated to be a certain pressure, provide balancing to the extent required to
achieve this designed pressure.
3. During heating (and cooling) season of the first year of operation, at times when directed, make final
adjustments until all occupants are reasonably satisfied and all equipment is operating at peak
efficiency.
4. Confirmation of proper equipment operation must be through actual observation. Computer simulation
and sensor readouts are not acceptable proof.
B. Air Systems:
1. General:
a. Adjust and set all dampers, deflecting vanes, discharge vanes and accessory items to achieve
proper air distribution and patterns in all parts of the air supply, return and exhaust systems:
1) Determine air flow and static pressure in all branch ducts by velocity traverse and balance
out all branches by means of branch duct manual dampers.
2) Balance terminal outlets on each branch duct using volume dampers in run-out duct to the
outlet, not the terminal outlet dampers.
b. Mark final balance position for all dampers which are not left 100% open with an indelible pen.
c. Adjust and set all belted fan speeds as required to attain proper total air flow.
d. Measure supply fan total air flow at both the full return air and full outdoor air damper positions.
e. Make smoke gun tests, if necessary, to check for drafts and make final adjustments and settings
for optimum comfort conditions.
2. Methods: Acceptable procedures for obtaining performance measurements are listed below:
a. CFM Airflow for Duct Sections:
1) Duct traverse as specified in SMACNA Manual "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing," Chapter V, Section 4-B, using a pilot tube and inclined manometer.
2) Acceptable Methods:
a) Pitot tube array with reading by inclined manometer.
b) Electronic manometer.
c) Hot-wire anemometer.
b. CFM airflow, for room supply, return and exhaust, at diffusers, registers and grilles: Use airflow
hood.
c. Fan TSP: Use inclined manometer.
d. Equipment Pressure Drops: Use inclined manometer.
e. Air Temperatures: Use thermometer.
f. Smoke Testing: Use titanium tetrachloride.
g. CFM Differential Airflow Reading:
1) Block door entrance leaving 1 or 2 square foot measured opening.
2) Read opening with thermal anemometer.
h. Differential Pressure: In cases where sensors for differential pressure are permanently installed,
differential pressure may be read directly using an Electronic Digital Manometer.
3. TAB Procedures for Air Systems:
a. Check all motorized, balancing and gravity relief dampers for proper position.
b. Inspect coils, filters and fans for cleanliness.
c. "Bump" motor to check for proper fan rotation.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_93.DOCX
d. Check unit performance including:
1) Fan speed.
2) Amperage and voltage.
3) Suction, discharge and total static pressures at fan.
4) Supply air volume of fan by taking duct traverse in discharge duct or zone ducts.
e. Note: Check unit performance in both 100% outside air and 100% return air positions, including
static pressures across individual equipment components.
f. Set outside air motorized damper at proper minimum position.
g. See that necessary adjustments or changes are made to achieve design airflow capacities or
consult Engineer if change(s) required are beyond the scope of the TAB contract.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preliminary Review and Analysis:
1. If after standard balancing procedures have been carried out and readjustments attempted, the
system does not perform as specified, Engineer shall be notified at once.
2. All "as is" field data shall be submitted in a preliminary report for review and analysis.
3. Manipulation of system to achieve air flow and balance without meeting intended and specified total
system air flow will not be accepted in a balance report. Should this occur, rebalance shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
B. Final Inspection: Prior to final acceptance, all systems shall be operated to test performance as directed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer:
1. Steam and water shall circulate throughout entire system without noise, evidence of leaks and
trapping or air-binding.
2. Air in ducts shall circulate without excessive noise.
3. Motors, fans and other equipment shall operate without excessive noise or vibration.
4. Systems shall be balanced to operate within stated tolerances. If any heating unit, chilled water
cooling coil, or air outlet does not operate within the stated tolerances, then the entire system shall be
considered out of balance and shall be readjusted until all units are within the stated tolerances.
5. Heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems shall maintain uniform temperatures without drafts.
6. Burners shall be tested and set for high efficiency and smokeless combustion.
C. Testing:
1. TAB engineer shall coordinate with Engineer to schedule access to site to perform air system testing
to whatever extent they determine is necessary to verify accuracy of mechanical systems TAB report.
2. TAB engineer will repeat system testing, adjusting, and balancing until Engineer verifies accuracy of
data.
3.3 PRE TEST AND BALANCE CHECKLIST
A. Contractor shall copy the following Pre Test and Balance Checklist (Exhibit B, attached) and submit one
completed checklist for each AHU, pump, chiller, boiler, cooling tower, fan, cabinet heater, and unit heater.
B. TAB engineer may be entitled to be compensated for additional time required due to failure of other
Subcontractors to properly complete their work.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

Section 23 05 93
23 05 93 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_05_93.DOCX
EXHIBIT B
PRE TEST AND BALANCE CHECKLIST

Equipment Tag No. _______________ Date: ____________________

As an aid to properly interface work between trades and prevent unnecessary return visits for everyone concerned,
the TAB engineer requires that the following list of items be completed by the Mechanical Subcontractor prior to any
testing and balancing of air and hydronic systems.

Work required is as follows:

Item No. Description
1. Static pressure control sensors shall be installed in locations indicated on contract documents.

2. Variable frequency controllers installed on fan drives shall be properly set up for minimum to
maximum speed positions.
3. Fan rotation is correct.

4. Fan RPM is to be set after fan performance test by Test and Balance Contractor, however, initial
installed RPM shall be within 10 percent of what was intended per equipment submittal.
5. Verify that fan is running within motor nameplate amp draw at initial installed RPM.
6. Balancing dampers shall be installed in locations shown on Contract Documents.
7. Damper operators shall be installed with provisions for access and not covered with insulation.
8. All (normal operational) dampers shall be set and locked in the 100 percent open position.

9. All fire dampers shall be open with fuse links installed and any props removed. Any motor operated
fire and smoke dampers are operating correctly.
10. All filters shall be in place, including clean construction filters installed upstream.
11. Terminal units shall be functioning with thermostat.`

12. Terminal units shall be sequencing properly with radiation valve (i.e., normally closed T.U. with
normally open valve, etc.).

13. Reverse acting (R.A.) thermostat shall be with N.O. terminal boxes and direct acting (D.A.)
thermostat shall be with N.C. terminal boxes.
14. All air shall be bled from hot or chilled water system.
15. All (normal operational) valves shall be set in 100 percent open position
16. Memory devices shall be installed on all specified balancing valves
17. Installation of all temperature wells and gage cocks.

18. Pressure taps shall be installed across body of pump and inlet and outlet of coils. Location of
pressure taps shall be between isolation and check valves, etc., associated with coils.

19. Hydronic systems shall have been cleaned and flushed and construction strainers removed from
equipment.
20. Pump rotation shall be correct.
21. Verify that pump is running within motor nameplate amp draw at initial installed impeller size.
22. All exhaust fans shall be wired, operable and in correct rotation.
23. All multiple exhaust duct system balance dampers shall be installed and set 100 percent open.
24. All relief air or backdraft dampers shall be set for proper operation, i.e., just closing.


END OF SECTION 23 05 93

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Dampers

Section 23 33 13
23 33 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_33_13.DOCX
SECTION 23 33 13 DAMPERS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes, but is not limited to, the major items listed below:
1. Control dampers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the Work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. NFPA 90A - Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
2. SMACNA Publications: HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
3. ASTM: E84 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature:
1. Submit for control dampers.
2. Required Information:
a. General:
1) Dimensions.
2) Details of construction and installation.
3) Name of Manufacturer.
4) Model.
b. Control Damper:
1) Air pressure drop.
2) Leakage rate.
3) Performance data as tested in accordance with AMCA Standards.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For each type of damper.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and shutdown
and emergency conditions.
4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to troubleshooting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. Installation and materials shall be in accordance with:
a. All state and local codes and ordinances.
b. Owner's insurer.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Dampers

Section 23 33 13
23 33 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_33_13.DOCX
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Installation of control components at the Manufacturers factory or in the field is optional only to the extent
that schedule is not adversely affected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dampers:
a. Ruskin.
b. Greenheck.
c. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
d. Johnson.
e. Honeywell.
2. Operators - Electric:
a. Belimo.
b. Johnson.
c. Honeywell.
B. Low Leakage Construction - Insulating:
1. Construct damper frames of minimum 14 gage galvanized sheet metal, with flanges for duct mounting
with corner brackets to provide rigid frame.
2. Damper shall consist of a factory-assembled double row of blades to provide a minimum 4-inch
insulating air space between the blades with thermal break between frame sections.
3. Damper blades shall not exceed 4 inches in width.
4. Blades shall be airfoil shaped of extruded aluminum double wall with 1/2-inch minimum 16 gage plated
tube or solid axle keyed into 12-gage pivot arms.
5. The bearings shall be stainless steel ball bearings, bolted to frame with seals.
6. Blade Sealing:
a. Provide replaceable rubber or neoprene seals.
b. Install seals along the top, bottom and sides of the frame and along each blade edge.
c. Seal shall provide a tight closing low leakage damper.
d. Leakage shall not exceed 6 CFM/SF at 4-inch W.G. for a 24-inch x 24-inch damper.
e. Provide flexible stainless steel jamb seal.
f. Submittal performance data must be for complete assembly.
7. Damper blade interlock linkages shall drive the shaft of each blade, not the blade edge.
8. Ruskin Model CDTI-50 (insulated single blade) air foil; or equal.
C. Damper Operators:
1. General:
a. Sized for ample power to overcome friction of damper linkage and air pressure acting on the
blades.
b. Capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the dictates of the controllers
and variable load requirements.
c. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit normally open or normally closed
positions of the dampers as required.
2. Electronic Damper Actuators:
a. Direct coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full stroke cycles at rated torque.
b. Coupling: V-belt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
c. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry.
d. Fail Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear
release on non-spring return actuators.
e. Temperature Rating: -22 to +122 degrees F.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Dampers

Section 23 33 13
23 33 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_33_13.DOCX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install duct accessories in conformance with:
a. The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
b. These specifications where different from SMACNA.
c. Manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Dampers shall not rattle or generate airborne noise of any kind regardless of damper position.
3. Locate and orient duct accessories according to Manufacturer's instructions relative to nearby fittings,
elbows, and fans.
4. Verify that dampers move freely through their entire stroke without binding.
B. Access:
1. Concealed duct accessories requiring inspection, service or maintenance shall be accessible.
2. Provide acceptable means of access.
3. Ensure that damper operator handles are not covered by insulation.


END OF SECTION 23 33 13

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
HVAC Power Ventilators

Section 23 34 23
23 34 23 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_34_23.DOCX
SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all power ventilators.
B. Fans furnished as part of the air handling units are specified elsewhere.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. AMCA (Air Movement and Control Association) Standards:
a. 99 - Fabrication Standards.
b. 210 - Laboratory Method for Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
c. 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Use the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
d. 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
2. UL: 705 - Power Ventilators.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. All power ventilators shall be selected as indicated on the Drawings:
1. Airflow and static pressure indicated are minimums.
2. Fan speed, brake horsepower (BHP) and sound ratings are maximum.
B. Manufacturer name and model number information given in equipment schedules represent quality and
performance standards for that equipment.
C. Unless stated otherwise, all fans shall be provided with the following:
1. Compatible mounting hardware.
2. Bird screen.
3. OSHA approved beltguard.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For all exhaust fans.
1. Dimensions.
2. Details of construction and installation.
3. Name of Manufacturer.
4. Model.
5. Fan identity by equipment schedule Tag No.
6. Fan curve with selection point clearly indicated for CFM, total static pressure, BHP and RPM.
7. Electrical characteristics.
8. Fan sound power level in zones at rated capacity.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For all exhaust fans.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and shutdown
and emergency conditions.
4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
HVAC Power Ventilators

Section 23 34 23
23 34 23 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_34_23.DOCX
5. Guide to "troubleshooting."
6. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. All state and local codes and ordinances.
2. Owner's insurer.
C. Quality Assurance:
1. AMCA ratings program certified and bearing AMCA air and sound seals.
2. UL listed electrical components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. All power ventilators, except as indicated herein:
1. Greenheck.
2. Cook.
3. Bayley.
4. Aerovent.
5. Acme.
6. Penn Ventilator.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The equipment shall be factory built and factory tested.
B. The Manufacturer shall repair or replace any items which fail to obtain specified performance.
C. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested.
2.3 SIDEWALL PROPELLER FANS
A. General:
1. Belt driven axial type.
2. Statically and dynamically balanced.
3. 100,000 hour-rated ball bearings.
B. Fan Housing:
1. All galvanized steel construction.
2. Fan Panel:
a. Formed flanges with welded corners.
b. Deep formed inlet venturi.
3. Drive Frame:
a. Die formed structural grade steel.
b. Welded to fan panel.
C. Propeller - Stamped Steel:
1. Galvanized steel.
2. Die-formed.
3. Riveted or welded to hub.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
HVAC Power Ventilators

Section 23 34 23
23 34 23 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_34_23.DOCX
D. Drive:
1. Motor:
a. Heavy duty ball bearing type with built-in thermal protection and 1.35 service factor.
b. Matched to fan load.
c. Affixed to slotted mounting plate.
2. Sheaves:
a. Machined cast iron.
b. Adjustable for system balancing.
c. Attached to shafts with square keys and set screws.
3. Ground and polished fan shaft.
4. Rated for 150% of maximum motor load.
E. Accessories:
1. Motor side guard.
2. Wall collar and mounting kit.
3. Refer to Division 23 Section Dampers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Verify that openings and adjacent areas are free of obstructions, and ready to receive fans.
B. Begin installation of fans only when openings conform to Specification requirements.
C. Install fan(s) and accessories in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
D. Secure components to openings and to each other.
E. Adjust fan, belts and components as necessary for:
1. Smooth operation.
2. Proper running amperage.
3. Minimum vibration.
F. Replace components found out of alignment and balance.


END OF SECTION 23 34 23

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Air Outlets and Inlets

Section 23 37 00
23 37 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_37_00.DOCX
SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all air inlet and outlet devices.
B. Division of Work:
1. In accordance with the General Conditions, Contractor is responsible for dividing the Work among the
Subcontractors and Suppliers and for delineating the work to be performed by specific trades.
2. The following are suggestions as to how the Work may be divided. This is not a complete list of all the
work:
a. General Contractor: Install stationary and adjustable louvers specified herein.
b. Mechanical Subcontractor:
1) Furnish stationary and adjustable louvers specified herein.
2) Coordinate with General Contractor for proper louver installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with AMCA
Publications: Standard 500 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: For all items specified herein.
1. General:
a. Dimensions.
b. Details of construction and installation.
c. Name of Manufacturer.
d. Model.
2. Performance at Scheduled Airflow:
a. Maximum supply outlet throw value based on 50 fpm terminal velocity.
b. Maximum air pressure drop in inches water gage.
c. Maximum noise criteria (NC) level.
3. Louvers:
a. Performance Ratings:
1) AMCA Certified.
2) For Engineers approval prior to fabrication.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Air Outlets and Inlets

Section 23 37 00
23 37 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_37_00.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STATIONARY LOUVERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.
2. Dowco.
3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
4. Ruskin.
5. Greenheck.
B. General:
1. Aluminum construction.
2. AMCA certified for air performance and water penetration.
C. Components:
1. 0.081-inch extruded channel frame.
2. Blades:
a. 0.081-inch extruded with intermediate rain stop.
b. Provide front and back bar stiffeners on blades over 48 inches wide.
c. Designed with drip trough for side runoff.
3. Screen:
a. Provide bird screen on fan discharge louver, insect screen on intake louver.
b. Rear mounted.
c. Secured with removable "U" holding frame.
D. Size: As indicated on the Drawings.
E. Finish:
1. Painted finishes: Furnished and applied by Manufacturer.
2. Color: Standard as selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Follow Manufacturer's instructions, subject to Engineer's approval.
3.2 PAINTING
A. Louvers:
1. Where direct contact with steel occurs.
2. Alkali-resistant bituminous paint or synthetic resin zinc chromate primer.
3. Apply paint or primer to steel:
a. Prior to installing louvers.
b. As received from the Manufacturer without addition of thinner.


END OF SECTION 23 37 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Electric Convection Heating Units

Section 23 82 50
23 82 50 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_82_50.DOCX
SECTION 23 82 50 ELECTRIC CONVECTION HEATING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of electric resistance heating units.
1.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Basis of Design: As indicated on the Drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature: For all unit heaters.
1. Dimensions.
2. Details of construction and installation.
3. Name of Manufacturer.
4. Model.
5. Wiring diagrams for power and controls.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For all unit heaters.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and shutdown
and emergency conditions.
4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to "troubleshooting".
6. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Outline, cross-sections, assembly drawings, engineering data and wiring diagrams.
8. Test data and performance curves.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. Assembly to comply with requirements of:
a. National Electric Code.
b. OSHA.
2. Assembly to be UL labeled.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, brand marked containers.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Electric Convection Heating Units

Section 23 82 50
23 82 50 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\23_82_50.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. QMark.
B. Indeeco.
C. Trane.
D. Markel.
E. Modine.
2.2 UNIT HEATERS (UH)
A. General:
1. Completely assembled, prewired, and ready for mounting and power connections.
2. Capable of total airflow and throw as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Construction:
1. Heavy gage, die formed steel cabinet, with baked enamel finish.
2. Adjustable air deflectors.
3. Draw-thru fan configuration with completely enclosed fan motor.
C. Electrical Configuration:
1. Aluminum-finned, copper-clad steel sheath heating element, warranted for 5 years.
2. Built-in overload protection with automatic reset.
D. Accessories:
1. Provide universal wall/ceiling swivel mounting bracket.
2. Provide unit mounted integral thermostat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all heating units in conformance with:
1. The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
2. The Manufacturers recommendations.
B. Make all power and control wiring connections.
C. Verify proper operation before turning over to Owner.


END OF SECTION 23 82 50

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Common Work Results for Electrical

Section 26 05 00
SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3. Sleeve seals.
4. Grout.
5. Duct seal.
6. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with
1. NECA 1 - Standards Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
2. NEC National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign
matter, and damage by weather or elements, and according to Manufacturer's directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, weathertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are
indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.
3. To allow right-of-way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and
of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry
walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

/2 26 05 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Common Work Results for Electrical

Section 26 05 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than
16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more
sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and
raceway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and
number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
3. Pressure Plates: 316 stainless steel. Include 2 for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: 316 stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing
elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout,
noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working
time.
2.4 DUCT SEAL
A. Description: UL listed, pliable, non-hardening, non-corrosive, weather-proof putty material, designed as a
moisture barrier for weather-sealing service entries, electrical cables, and conduit ducts.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Arnco Corp. - Hydra-Seal
b. Ilsco Corp. DS Duct Seal
c. JM Clipper - Duxseal
d. OZ/Gedney Co. DUX
e. RectorSeal - Duct Seal Compound
f. Thomas & Betts Corp. - DX.
g. or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NEC.
B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install
components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

/2 26 05 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Common Work Results for Electrical

Section 26 05 00
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both
electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in a manner as to facilitate future disconnecting
with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
D. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete
slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are
used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless
openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. Promptly pack grout
solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while
curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway
or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Roof penetrations shall be made using RMC. Seal all penetrations of individual
raceways with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch
annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and
size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in
annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

/2 26 05 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Common Work Results for Electrical

Section 26 05 00
3.4 DUCT SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Where conduits penetrate into the building, seal duct openings at conduit termination points with duct seal
for all conduits entering the building to prevent migration of water and gases into the building and to prevent
the condensation of water vapor inside the enclosures where the conduits terminate.
B. Duct seal shall be applied after all cables have been installed.
C. Install sealing material in strict accordance with the sealant Manufacturers printed instructions.
D. Where conduit will be simultaneously exposed to different temperatures, such as where it passes through
the outside wall of a heated building or between two different rooms, the inside of the conduit shall be sealed
with duct seal. Silicone or similar calking shall not be used as a substitute for duct seal.


END OF SECTION 26 05 00


/2 26 05 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Conductors and Cables 600V and
Below

Section 26 05 20
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_20.DOCX
26 05 20 1
SECTION 26 05 20 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 600V AND BELOW


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all electrical conductors, cables, splices, and
connectors.
B. Major Systems Include:
1. 600V and below service entrance, feeders and electrical distribution.
2. Branch circuit wiring.
3. System wiring.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
standards of the following organizations as applicable to materials, construction and testing of wire cables:
1. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer Association Standards.
2. IEEE Standards.
3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association - Standards.
4. ASTM Standards.
5. NEC - National Electric Code.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical conductor and cable products of
the types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Conductors and Cables 600V and
Below

Section 26 05 20
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_20.DOCX
26 05 20 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide conductors, cables, and connectors of Manufacturer's
standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as
recommended by the Manufacturer and as required for the installation.
B. Power Wire:
1. All conductors and cables shall be new with a minimum wire size of No. 12 AWG. Manufacturer's
name, type, and size shall be permanently marked on the outer covering at regular intervals and
delivered in complete coils or reels.
2. Provide factory fabricated conductors of size, rating, material, and type as indicated for each service.
Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by installer to comply with installation
requirements and with NEC standards, from only following types and conductors:
a. Type THHN/THWN, 600 Volt, 75/90 Degrees C Rated with Nylon Jacket: Stranded copper for all
sizes.
b. Bare Conductors: Stranded copper for all sizes.
C. Control Cable: No. 14 AWG minimum, type THHN/THWN.
D. Instrumentation Signal Cable:
1. No. 16 AWG stranded, tinned copper conductors, 600V polyethylene insulation, twisted pair, 100%
coverage aluminum polyester shield, No. 18 AWG stranded, tinned copper drain wire with vinyl outer
jacket, UL listed.
2. 600V rated for outdoor or below grade installations.
3. 300V rated indoors, above grade or inside control panels.
4. Manufacturers: Belden; Alpha; West Penn, General Cable.
E. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cabling:
1. Paired, 4 pair, 24 AWG, solid bare copper conductors with polyethylene insulation, overall aluminum
foil-polyester tape shield with 24 AWG stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100% shield coverage, PVC
jacket. Outer jacket shall be blue.
2. UL verified to Category 6.
3. Provide plenum rated cable where installed exposed.
4. Manufacturer: Belden 7882A; or equal.
F. Power Wiring Cable Accessories: For Connectors:
1. Wing nuts by Ideal.
2. Stan-Kon by Thomas & Betts.
3. Scotchlox Spring by Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company.
4. Compression Type 53200 by Thomas & Betts.
5. Hydent by Burndy.
6. Insulated multi-cable mechanical connector blocks by Polaris, or Ilsco.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install electrical conductors, cables, and connectors as indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with
the Manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical
Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions.
2. Conductors and cables shall be sized in accordance with the Drawings or, in the absence thereof, in
accordance with NEC requirements. Except and indicated herein, conductor sizes greater than No. 12
AWG are indicated on the Drawings.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Conductors and Cables 600V and
Below

Section 26 05 20
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_20.DOCX
26 05 20 3
B. Voltage Drop Compensation:
1. Provide No. 10 AWG conductors in lieu of No. 12 AWG conductors to compensate for voltage drop as
follows:
a. For each 277V, 20 ampere branch circuit that exceeds 200 feet in length between the branch
circuit panelboard and the last outlet.
b. For each 120V, 20 ampere branch circuit that exceeds 100 feet in length between the branch
circuit panelboard and the last outlet.
2. When conductor size is increased to compensate for voltage drop, provide equipment grounding
conductor increased in size in accordance with NEC.
C. Installation Procedures:
1. Install interior conductors after building is enclosed and water tight.
2. Each conduit shall be free of moisture and debris before conductors are installed.
3. Remove moisture from conduits by swabbing.
4. Install conductors so insulation is not damaged. Replace all conductors that are damaged.
5. Install conductors and cables only in code conforming raceway.
6. Pull conductors together where more than 1 conductor is being installed in a raceway.
7. Use heat shrink tubing for all instrument signal cable terminations.
8. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary. Compound shall not
deteriorate conductor and insulation. Compounds shall be UL listed.
9. Use a pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage the raceway or the wire.
10. Keep conductor splices to a minimum.
11. Install splices and taps which have equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation as the
conductor.
12. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with the conductor material.
13. Make all joints, splices, and connections only at accessible junction or outlet boxes, never insi de
conduit or fitting. Make splices in No. 10 AWG and smaller wire with insulated spiral mechanical
connectors.
14. Make splices in No. 8 AWG and larger copper wire with compression type mechanical connectors.
15. All splices located in handholes and wet locations shall be rated for wet locations.
16. Low voltage and signal cable splices located in handholes and wet locations shall be sealed in 2-part
epoxy sealing pack, 3M Scotchcast connector sealing pack 3570G.
17. Insulate all joints at splices with "Scotch" brand electrical pressure sensitive tape to 150% of conductor
insulation value.
18. Make conductor length for parallel feeds identical.
19. Where exposed cables are installed, cables shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to exposed
structural members and building lines.
20. Do not lace, strap or tie feeder or branch circuit conductors together in panels, switchboards, variable
speed drives, motor control centers, automatic transfer switches, boxes, and wireways.
21. Feeders and service entrance conductors entering electrical equipment shall be adequately secured
with cable cleats.
22. Use color coded conductors as follows:
a. Phases: Black-red-blue (under 150V to ground).
b. Phases: Brown-orange-yellow (over 150V to ground).
c. Neutral: White identified (feeders); White (branch circuits).
d. Ground: Green identified (feeders); Green (branch circuits).
23. Support conductors in vertical raceways in accordance Division 26 Section Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems.
24. Outlets: Leave at least 6 inches of free conductor at all outlets except where conductors are intended
to loop without joints through outlets for fixtures or wiring device hook-ups.
25. Lights and outlets shall be grouped on circuits as indicated on the Drawings. Different types of circuits
such as feeders, branch circuits, control circuits, and signal circuits, shall not be mixed in common
conduit runs, but shall be run separately, although more than 1 circuit of the same system may be run
in common conduit runs.
26. UTP Cable Installation:
a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B-2.
b. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
c. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2-inch from the point of termination to maintain cable
geometry.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Conductors and Cables 600V and
Below

Section 26 05 20
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_20.DOCX
26 05 20 4
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Prior to energization, check conductors and cables for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits.
Correct malfunctions when detected.
2. Subsequent to conductor and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements.
3. UTP cabling shall be field tested as described in the latest edition of the Building Industry Consulting
Service International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), and in
accordance with applicable EIA/TIA standards. Test results shall be documented and serve as a
baseline for the installed system.
a. Cooper cabling testing shall include, but not be limited to:
1) Continuity.
2) Length.
3) Near end crosstalk (NEXT).
4) Attenuation.
5) Equal level far end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
6) Return loss.
7) Propagation delay and delay skew.
8) Power sum crosstalk.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Tests and Inspections:
a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test
feeder and branch circuit conductors for compliance with NETA requirements.
b. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect
cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling
connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
c. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and
patch cords, and labeling of all components.
d. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is
formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide.
e. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
2. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and facilitate retesting as specified.


END OF SECTION 26 05 20

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grounding and Bonding

Section 26 05 27
SECTION 26 05 27 GROUNDING AND BONDING


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of a complete and continuous grounding system.
1.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. All equipment, raceway systems, interior wiring systems with neutrals, receptacles, and power outlets,
motors and motorized equipment shall be grounded.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design.
B. Grounding system shall be in accordance with the current National Electrical Code.
C. Grounding system rods, connectors and clamps shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: A portion of the required materials for grounding systems are specified in the Division 26
Electrical Sections.
B. Grounding Electrodes:
1. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4-inch diameter by 10 feet in length.
2. Where ground grids are required they shall consist of copper clad steel driven rods with underground
ring bus, sized as indicated on Drawings, of bare stranded copper interconnecting cable.
3. Ground rods to be as manufactured by Copperweld; or equal.
C. Connectors:
1. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials
being joined and installation conditions as manufactured by Thomas and Betts; or equal.
2. Irreversible Compression Connectors: Compression connections shall be irreversible, cast copper,
high conductivity as manufactured by Thomas and Betts; or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Circuit Grounding: Install grounding bushings, grounding studs, and grounding jumpers at distribution
centers, pull boxes, motor control centers, and panelboards.

/1 26 05 27 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_27.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grounding and Bonding

Section 26 05 27
B. Bonding Jumpers:
1. Provide green insulation, size correlated with overcurrent device protecting the wire, attached to
grounding bushings on conduits, to lugs on boxes, and other enclosures.
2. Bond to neutral only at service neutral bar.
C. FMC and LTFMC: Install separate grounding conductor in FMC and LTFMC. Connect each end to a
grounding bushing.
D. Receptacles and Power Outlets: Ground receptacles and power outlets to the conduit system with a Type
THHN green grounding conductor sized in accordance with NEC Article 250 and connected between the
device grounding screw and outlet box.
E. Metallic Conduit: When grounding conductors are enclosed in metallic conduit, the conduit shall be bonded
to the grounding conductors at both ends.
F. Nonmetallic Conduit: Install separate ground conductor in conduit runs.
G. Ground motor bases and frames by pulling a separate conductor in with the motor feeder.
H. Expansion Joints: Install a bonding jumper around expansion fittings in metallic conduit to maintain ground
continuity.
I. Separately Derived Systems: Grounding of separately derived systems, i.e., secondary transformers, shall
be in accordance with NEC, Article 250. Use suitable ground lugs and clamps approved for this purpose.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Measured resistance of grounding electrode system to ground shall be 5 Ohms or less. Perform Earth
Ground Resistance (Fall of Potential) tests and provide additional grounding electrodes to grounding
electrode system until measured resistance to ground is 5 ohms or less.
2. Transmit test results to Engineer.


END OF SECTION 26 05 27



/1 26 05 27 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_27.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 29
SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and
systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Electrical Supports: Angles, channels, brackets, and mounting accessories for supporting all conduit,
luminaires, switches, and other electrical equipment which are hung or mounted above floor.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. This Section defines general criteria for the selection and installation of supporting devices, but does not
cover all types specifically required for the Project.
B. Choose or design supporting devices in accordance with these general criteria.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. Provide supporting devices listed by Underwriters' Laboratory for their application as installed.
2. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction, installation, and
requirements for supporting devices.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturers directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.

/2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_29.DOCX
26 05 29 1
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 29
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Conduit Supports:
1. Single Runs: Galvanized conduit straps or ring bolt type hangers with spring clips. Do not use
plumbers perforated straps.
2. Multiple Runs: Conduit rack with 25% spare capacity.
3. Vertical Runs: Channel support with conduit fittings.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries
b. ERICO International Corporation.
c. Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
f. National Pipe Hanger Corp.
g. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
h. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
i. Wesanco, Inc.
j. Or equal.
B. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened Portland
cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete,
steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Construction Products.
c. MKT Fastening, LLC.
d. Or equal.
C. Supports for Conductors in Vertical Conduit:
1. Install in compliance with NEC article 300.19.
2. Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-
armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size and shape of
conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be
malleable iron.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Layout to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance, and to support equipment loads.
2. Secure Engineer's approval before welding or bolting to steel framing or anchoring to concrete
structure.
3. Where equipment is to be suspended from cast-in-place concrete construction, set approved concrete
inserts in formwork to receive hanger rods. Where equipment is to be suspended from metal deck and
beam or joist construction, support equipment from beams or joists only.


END OF SECTION 26 05 29


/2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_29.DOCX
26 05 29 2
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Raceways for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 34
26 05 34 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_34.DOCX
SECTION 26 05 34 RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of conduits and fittings for electrical wiring.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design.
B. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. ACI American Concrete Institute Standards pertaining to conduits embedded in concrete (Section
6.3 in ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Section 6.3 in ACI 350R
Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.)
2. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards pertaining to raceways.
3. NEC National Electric Code As applicable to construction and installation of conduit system.
4. Provide conduit which is listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage (e.g., bending, end
damage, finish scoring), contamination with foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in
accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping. Provide color coded end cap thread protectors
on exposed threads of threaded metal conduit.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC): Galvanized steel, heavy wall conduit with threaded fittings, 3/4-inch trade size
minimum, insulated bushings.
B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNMC):
1. Schedule 80, rigid polyvinylchloride, rated for 90 degrees C conductors, 3/4-inch trade size minimum,
solvent cement connectors and couplings.
2. Nonmetallic strap hangers allowing thermal expansion movement.
3. Conduit to meet NEMA TC-2; fittings to meet NEMA TC-3.
4. Expansion Coupling: Nonmetallic to compensate for thermal expansion.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Raceways for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 34
26 05 34 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_34.DOCX
C. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LTFMC): 3/4-inch trade size minimum. galvanized steel flexible conduit
with flexible, moisture-proof PVC jacket and liquid tight connectors.
1. In Corrosive Locations, LTFMC fittings shall be PVC coated.
D. PVC Coated RSC:
1. Galvanized RSC with a minimum of 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane internal coating.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Robroy Industries: Plasti-Bond RED.
b. Perma-Cote Industries: Perma-Cote Standard.
c. OCAL, Inc.: OCAL-BLUE.
3. All fittings, conduit bodies, outlet boxes, and accessories shall be products of the same Manufacturer
and shall be coated with a minimum of 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane internal coating.
4. Finished conduit shall fully conform to the current NEMA Standard RN-1 and shall have a label affixed
indicating compliance with UL Standard No. 6.
E. Seal-off Fittings:
1. Malleable iron with zinc electroplated finish.
2. Threaded for connection of RSC or IMC.
3. UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Locations.
4. Provide sealing compound and fiber as required.
5. In Corrosive Locations, seal-off fittings shall be PVC coated RSC.
F. Joint Compound for RSC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to
lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.
G. Conduit Hubs for RSC:
1. Suitable for environment served.
2. Grounding screw.
3. O-ring gasket.
4. Material: Malleable Iron with zinc electroplate.
5. Manufacturer:
a. Cooper Myers Hubs.
b. Thomas & Betts.
c. Killark.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all conduit shall be exposed.
B. Install conduit products in accordance with:
1. The Drawings.
2. The Manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Applicable requirements of NEC and National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of
Installation."
4. Recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
C. Conduit Joints: Cut square, reamed smooth and drawn up tight.
D. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound
to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joint. Follow compound manufacturers written
instructions.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Raceways for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 34
26 05 34 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_34.DOCX
E. Bends:
1. Number per run for conduit that support feeder and branch circuits: Do not exceed the equivalent of 4
quarter bends (360 degrees) between pull points.
2. Number per run for conduit that supports data/communications cabling: Do not exceed the equivalent
of 2 quarter bends (180 degrees) between pull points.
3. Make bends and offsets so as not to reduce the inner diameter of the conduit.
4. To the extent possible, avoid using large junction boxes as 90 degree junctions.
F. Routing:
1. Concealed Conduits: Run in a direct line with long sweep bends and offsets.
2. Exposed Conduits: Run parallel to, and at right angles to, building lines.
3. Run continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, pull or junction boxes.
4. Secure to all boxes and cabinets with locknuts and bushings in such a manner that each system is
electrically continuous throughout.
G. Cap conduit ends to prevent entrance of foreign materials during construction.
H. Provide insulated bushings on all threaded conduit run terminations and where entering the bottom of open-
bottom switchboards, motor control centers, transformers, primary switches, and similar equipment.
I. Where entering the bottom of open-bottom equipment (i.e., switchboards, panelboards, motor control
centers, transformers, and similar equipment) conduit shall not be installed flush with the floor/equipment
pad and shall not rise more than 3 inches above the bottom of the enclosure.
J. Conduit entering control panels shall not obstruct internal components and shall allow for neat and
workmanlike wire management.
K. Completely install all conduit systems before installing conductors.
L. Provide listed sealant in underground and above grade conduit that is exposed to temperature differences to
prevent the passage of air and condensation.

M. Support:
1. Adequately support conduit from structural elements of the building.
2. Do not drill or tap structural building steel without approval from Engineer.
3. Do not rest conduit on, nor support it from, ceiling suspension systems, ceiling tiles or mechanical
equipment including, but not necessarily limited to ductwork and fans.
4. Conduit shall be supported in accordance with the NEC and Division 26 Section Hangers and
Supports for Electrical Systems.
N. Provide conduit expansion couplings where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.
O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than
200 pound (90 kg) tensile strength. Label and leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
P. LTFMC Installation:
1. Provide separate grounding conductor in accordance with Division 26 Section Grounding and
Bonding.
2. Connection to light fixtures shall not exceed 6 feet in length within an accessible ceiling and 3 feet in
length where exposed. Connection to solenoids, pressure switches, motors, fans, HVAC equipment,
and similar equipment shall not exceed 3 feet in length.
Q. PVC Coated RSC Installation:
1. Install in accordance with Manufacturers published installation guide, National Electrical Code, local
codes and standard trade practices.
2. Use Manufacturers recommended pipe wrenches, clamping devices, benders, and threading tools.
3. Provide PVC coated fittings at each termination point.
4. Field threads shall be degreased and coated with Manufacturers recommended compounds.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Raceways for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 34
26 05 34 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_34.DOCX
5. Provide separate grounding conductor in accordance with Division 26 Section Grounding and
Bonding.
6. Take care not to damage PVC coating during assembly, cutting, bending, clamping, and threading .
7. Use Manufacturer's approved touch-up compound to repair nicks and cuts to the outer PVC jacket, ,
and for use as a sealant. Where large abrasions are made in the outer PVC jacket the conduit shall be
replaced.
R. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Installation:
1. Provide separate grounding conductor in accordance with Division 26 Section Grounding and
Bonding.
2. Support conduit in accordance with the NEC.
3. Provide expansion couplings where length change due to temperature variation exceeds 1/4-inch.
4. When penetrating concrete surfaces or grade, make a transition to rigid steel conduit 6 inches
(minimum) below the surface. Provide corrosion protection by coating the RSC with a bituminous
coating from inside the encasing material to 4 inches of exposed conduit; vinyl corrosion protection
tape may be installed, but must be reviewed with the Engineer prior to installation.
5. Where underground or concrete encased conduit is 2 inch and larger provide rigid steel elbows.
6. In areas of assembly, where RNMC is installed, conduits shall be encased in a minimum of 2 inches of
concrete.
7. Where RNMC is embedded in concrete, conduit shall be securely fastened and supported in
accordance with the NEC to prevent damage during concrete pours.
S. Underground Installation:
1. As indicated on the Drawings, including all excavating, pumping, backfilling, shoring and removal of
surplus excavated material.
2. Underground Obstructions:
a. Locate all that may interfere with excavation.
b. Be responsible for all damage to existing underground systems and assume all cost of repairing
the same.
3. Backfilling:
a. Use only clean sand thoroughly compacted to prevent settling of trenched areas.
b. In the event that backfilled areas do settle, fill and compact to finish grade, and repair all
damage caused by settling.
4. Repair all disturbed surface to match existing.
5. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install top of conduit 30 inches below grade when located
outside the walls of the building
6. Provide warning ribbon 12 inches above conduits that contain service conductors.
3.2 CONDUIT SCHEDULE
A. Feeders, Branch Circuits and System Conduits:
1. Underground and In or Below Concrete: RSC or RNMC.
2. Above Slab or Grade:
a. Exposed Conduit Below 10'-0" AFF: RSC.
b. Hazardous Locations: RSC.
c. Corrosive Locations: PVC coated RSC.
d. Exposed Conduit Serving Roof Mounted Equipment: RSC.
e. Wet Locations: RSC.
B. Data/communications conduits in dry locations not subject to physical damage and not installed
underground nor in or below concrete: RSC.
1. Data/communication conduits shall be bonded.
2. Data/communication sleeves, provide plastic bushings.
3. Data/communication conduits shall be 3/4-inch minimum.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Raceways for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 34
26 05 34 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_34.DOCX
C. Lighting Fixture Support: RSC.
1. Light fixtures shall not be supported via standard locknuts at the fixture connection. Provide fittings
with set-screw or other means to prevent loosening.
2. Hands-free swivel type hangers shall be used in dry locations. Threaded condulet fittings shall be used
in Damp, Wet, Corrosive, and Hazardous Locations.
D. Connection To Equipment:
1. Lighting Fixtures and Control Devices (including, but not necessarily limited to solenoids, pressure
switches, and field instruments):
a. Dry Locations: LTFMC.
b. Wet or Damp Locations: LTFMC.
c. Corrosive Locations: LTFMC with PVC coated fittings.
d. Hazardous Locations:
1) Class I, Division 1: Bronze flexible couplings. Equal to Killark ECF/EKJ Series.
2) Class I, Division 2: LTFMC with listed fittings.
2. Vibrating Equipment (including, but not necessarily limited to motors and transformers):
a. Motors:
1) Dry Locations: LTFMC.
2) Wet or Damp Locations: LTFMC.
3) Corrosive Locations: LTFMC with PVC coated fittings.
4) Hazardous Locations:
a) Class I, Division 1: Bronze flexible couplings. Equal to Killark ECF/EKJ Series.
b) Class I, Division 2: LTFMC with listed fittings.
b. Equipment Mounted On Vibration Isolators::
1) Dry Locations: LTFMC.
2) Wet or Damp Locations: LTFMC.
c. Hazardous Locations:
1) Class I, Division 1: Bronze flexible couplings. Equal to Killark ECF/EKJ Series.
2) Class I, Division 2: LTFMC with listed fittings.
E. Provide separate raceway systems for:
1. Normal power wiring.
2. Emergency power wiring.
3. Data/communication wiring.
4. A.C. signal and control wiring.
5. Low voltage signal and control wiring.
6. Analog instrumentation wiring.
7. Special systems wiring.
F. Provide seal-off fittings in all conduit runs that enter/leave Hazardous Locations and where entering
enclosures in accordance with the NEC. Fill seal-off fittings with sealing compound prior to Substantial
Completion.
G. Provide cable seals on all cable terminations in Hazardous Locations in accordance with the NEC.
H. For conduits that enter NEMA Type 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures, provide conduit hubs with o-ring
gaskets. Hubs shall be suitable for the environment served and shall match the conduit type. Grounding
hubs shall be used with non-metallic enclosures.
I. In chemical containment areas, conduit shall be installed above/outside containment (coated) area. Do not
penetrate floors or walls of containment areas. Conduits shall not be embedded in walls or floors of
containment areas.


END OF SECTION 26 05 34

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Boxes for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 35
SECTION 26 05 35 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all electrical boxes and the major items listed below:
1. Outlet boxes.
2. Junction boxes.
3. Pull boxes.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association: Standards as applicable to nonmetallic fittings
for underground installation.
2. NECA - National Electrical Contractor's Association's: Applicable portions of "Standard of Installation".
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. Provide boxes which are listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories.
2. NEC - National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) - As applicable to construction and installation of electrical
boxes.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturers directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Interior Outlet Boxes:
1. Galvanized steel outlet boxes of the type, shape, and size, including depth of box, to suit each
respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with
threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices.

/1 26 05 35 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_35.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Boxes for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 35
2. In areas requiring exposed RNMC, provide nonmetallic outlet boxes of type, shape and size to suit
each location. Each box is to have conduit hubs with removable plugs and a non-metallic cover. Each
box shall be compatible with RNMC.
B. Interior Outlet Box Accessories:
1. As required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings,
fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes. Accessories shall be
compatible with outlet boxes being used and meet the requirements of individual wiring situations.
2. Choice of accessories is installer's option.
C. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes:
1. Corrosion-resistant cast metal, weatherproof outlet boxes, of the type, shape, and size, including
depth of box, suitable for each application, with threaded conduit ends.
2. In corrosive atmospheres that are not hazardous (NEMA 7) provide glass fiber reinforced plastic outlet
boxes.
D. For Ceilings: 4-inch octagonal boxes for receiving 3 or less 1/2-inch conduits.
E. For Flush Mounting In Walls:
1. 4-inch square boxes with matching plaster cover for single or 2 gang outlets.
2. For larger boxes use solid type or special units.
3. In masonry, use deep boxes.
F. Surface Mounted: 4-inch square.
G. Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of the type and shape and size to suit each
respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts,
screws, and washers. Dry interior location boxes shall have baked enamel finish. Damp location and
exterior boxes shall have galvanized finish.
2. Cast aluminum boxes in hazardous (NEMA 7) areas.
3. Glass fiber reinforced plastic junction and pull boxes in corrosive, nonhazardous areas.
4. If an area is both hazardous and corrosive, provide cast metal boxes suitable for use in hazardous
locations with a minimum 40 mil PVC coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install electrical boxes as indicated, in compliance with NEC requirements and in accordance with the
Manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that the boxes and
fittings serve the intended purposes.
2. Provide weatherproof outlet boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.
3. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.
4. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.
5. Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly embed boxes in
concrete or masonry.
6. Mount outlet boxes flush in areas other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and above
removable ceilings.
7. Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines.
8. Do not install boxes back-to-back in same wall. Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat
openings for boxes.
9. Do not use sectional or handy boxes.
10. For boxes mounted in exterior walls install insulation behind outlet boxes to prevent condensation in
boxes.
11. For outlets mounted above counters, benches, and splashbacks, coordinate location and mounting
heights with built-in units. Adjust outlet mounting height to agree with required location for equipment
served.

/1 26 05 35 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_35.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Boxes for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 35
12. Where 2 or more devices of any kind are set side by side, set them in gang boxes unless otherwise
noted on the Drawings.
13. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above removable ceilings or in electrical rooms, utility rooms, or
storage areas such that boxes will be accessible after completion of building.
14. All boxes shall have covers installed at completion of construction.


END OF SECTION 26 05 35


/1 26 05 35 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_35.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Identification for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 53
26 05 53 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_53.DOCX
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of proper identification for electrical system components.
B. Items requiring identification or labeling include:
1. Cables and conductors.
2. Conduit systems.
3. Controls:
a. Motor starters.
b. Variable frequency drives.
4. Distribution Equipment:
a. Disconnect switches.
b. Enclosed circuit breakers.
c. Switchboards.
d. Transformers.
e. Panelboards.
f. Motor control centers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Nameplate schedule identifying each device to be labeled and project specific label text.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL LABELS
A. Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplate to identify each piece of electrical equipment:
1. Nameplate shall have 3/8-inch minimum black letters on a white background.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
B. Provide printed labels by Brady or T&B to identify conductors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Attach nameplates directly to each piece of electrical equipment. In finished areas of building, install
nameplates behind enclosure door where possible.
2. Where several conductors pass through a pull box, junction box, or enclosure, provide wire labels.
Group wires before labeling.
B. Cables and Conductors: In accordance with Division 26 Section Conductors and Cables 600V and
Below.
C. Conduit Systems: Provide label inside each junction and pull box identifying circuit numbers for all
conductors contained inside the box. Labeling shall be printed neatly with permanent, waterproof, black ink
marker.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Identification for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 53
26 05 53 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_53.DOCX
D. Controls: For each of the following control devices, provide label attached to enclosure cover. Label shall
identify:
1. Motor Starters: Name of equipment served and load (example, EF-5, 5 HP).
2. Variable Frequency Drives: Name of equipment served and load (example, P-1, 25 HP.
E. Distribution Equipment: For each of the following pieces of distribution equipment, provide label attached to
enclosure cover. Label shall identify:
1. Disconnect Switches: Name of equipment served, number of poles, ampere rating/fuse size (where
applicable), and load (example, RTU-1, 3P30/25, 8 TON).
2. Enclosed Circuit Breakers: Name of device as indicated on one line diagram, number of poles, and
circuit breaker size (example, MCB, 3P200).
3. Switchboards:
a. Name of device as indicated on one line diagram and voltage-phase (example, MSWBD,
480Y/277V-3).
b. Provide label near each feeder/branch breaker identifying name of equipment served, number of
poles, and circuit breaker size (example, TRANSFORMER T-LPA, 3P80).
4. Transformers: Name of device as indicated on one line diagram, KVA rating, primary
voltage:secondary voltage, source transformer is fed from, and load transformer feeds (example,
T-LPA, 45 KVA, 480:208Y/120V, FED FROM MSWBD, FEEDS PANEL LPA).
5. Panelboards:
a. Name of device as indicated on one line diagram, voltage-phase, and area served (example,
LPA, 208Y/120V-3, First Floor Lighting).
b. Equip interior of enclosure door with a circuit directory frame, typewritten card, and clear plastic
cover. Directory shall identify load description for each circuit, including spares. Hand lettering
is not acceptable.
6. Motor Control Centers:
a. Name of device as indicated on one line diagram and voltage-phase (example, MCC-1, 480V-
3).
b. Provide label on each motor control center compartment identifying type of device, device rating,
load served, and load characteristics (examples, MOTOR STARTER, SIZE 1, P-1, 10 HP or
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 3P20, HOIST, 1 TON). Provide labels for spare devices and spaces.


END OF SECTION 26 05 53

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study

Section 26 05 73
SECTION 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for performing a short circuit and protective device evaluation,
coordination study, and arc flash hazard analysis.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
3. IEEE 1584 Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Short circuit and protective device evaluation, coordination study, and arc flash hazard analysis:
1. Submit 1 printed hard copy along with an electronic document file (Adobe .PDF) for review.
2. Include copies of arc flash hazard warning labels and sample label.
B. Record of Final Low Voltage Circuit Protective Device Settings:
1. Typewritten, bound in notebook form.
2. Submit 2 printed hard copies along with an electronic document file (Adobe .PDF).
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Short circuit and protective device evaluation, coordination study, and arc flash hazard analysis
Subcontractor:
1. Study to be performed by an independent Subcontractor that is currently involved in high- and low-
voltage power system evaluations.
2. The Subcontractor shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in power system evaluations.
3. The individual(s) performing the study shall be registered as a Professional Engineer in the state
where the Project is located.
1.6 DATA COLLECTION FOR SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION, COORDINATION
STUDY, AND ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Provide all required data for preparation of the short circuit and protective
device evaluation, coordination of study, and arc flash hazard analysis.
B. Subcontractor Responsibilities: Provide a listing of all required data necessary to perform the short circuit
and protective device evaluation, coordination study, and arc flash hazard analysis immediately after award
of the Contract.

/2 26 05 73 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_73.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study

Section 26 05 73
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION, COORDINATION STUDY, AND ARC
FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. The Study shall include:
1. All portions of the electrical distribution system from the normal and standby or emergency power
sources down to, and including, the smallest adjustable trip circuit breaker in the distribution system.
The following equipment shall be included:
a. Motor Control Center MCC-2.
b. Transformer T-Panel B.
c. Panel B.
d. Motor Control Center MCC-1.
2. Normal system connections and those which result in maximum fault conditions.
B. In The Short Circuit Study:
1. Provide calculation methods and assumptions, base per unit quantities selected, one-line diagrams,
source impedance data including power company system characteristics, typical calculations, and a
tabulation of calculation results, conclusions, and recommendations.
2. Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary duties (as applicable) for an assumed 3-phase
bolted fault at the service entrance disconnecting means, each switchboard, each motor control
center, each distribution panelboard, and other significant locations throughout the distribution system.
3. Include fault contributions of all motors, unless specified otherwise.
C. Protective Device Coordination Study:
1. Provide time-current curves graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the system, centered
on conventional, full-size, log-log forms.
2. Include with each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific
portion of the system covered by that particular curve sheet. Utilize different colors as necessary to
clearly distinguish devices.
3. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, Manufacturer, and
time current characteristics.
4. Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings.
5. Include on the curve sheet, as applicable, power company relay and fuse characteristics, medium-
voltage equipment relay and fuse characteristics, pertinent transformer characteristics, and pertinent
motor and generator characteristics.
6. The study shall include all devices down to the largest branch/feeder circuit in each motor control
center and distribution panelboard, and all adjustable settings for ground fault protective devices.
D. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis:
1. Determine flash hazard boundary, incident energy, required level of personal protective equipment
(PPE), limited approach distance, restricted approach distance, and prohibited approach distance for
electrical distribution equipment required to be field marked per Article 110.16 of the National Electrical
Code.
2. Calculations to be developed based on IEEE 1584.
3. Provide arc flash hazard warning labels for electrical distribution equipment required to be field
marked.
E. Circuit Protective Devices: Notify Engineer in writing of circuit protective devices not properly rated for the
available fault conditions.

/2 26 05 73 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_73.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study

Section 26 05 73
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install arc flash hazard warning labels on electrical distribution equipment required to be field marked.
B. Contractor shall perform field adjustments of protective devices as required to place the equipment in final
operating condition. Settings shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the reviewed coordination
study.


END OF SECTION 26 05 73


/2 26 05 73 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_05_73.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Lighting Control Devices

Section 26 09 23
26 09 23 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_09_23.DOCX
SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all lighting control devices listed below:
1. Occupancy sensors (ceiling mounted).
2. Photocells (outdoor).
3. Timer switches.
4. Ballast load transfer control relay devices (UL924).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide the following information for each type of lighting control device.
1. Name of Manufacturer.
2. Model number.
3. Details of construction and installation.
4. Assembly drawings, including elevations, plans, sections, and dimensions.
5. Color and finish.
6. Options and accessories.
B. Installation Instructions: For lighting control devices.
C. Manufacturers Certification: For lighting control devices:
1. Sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies with this Specification.
2. Written approval of installation.
D. Installation and Maintenance Manuals: For lighting control devices.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, shutdown,
and emergency conditions.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to troubleshooting.
6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Project specific outline and cross-sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring
diagrams. Wiring diagrams shall reflect final, as-installed conditions and include wire numbers.
8. Test data and performance curves.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Manufacturer:
1. At least 5 years experience with approved systems.
2. Provide Owner training on system operation.
C. Components: All equipment shall be UL listed.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Lighting Control Devices

Section 26 09 23
26 09 23 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_09_23.DOCX
1.5 WARRANTY
A. In accordance with the warranty provisions defined in the General Conditions and Supplementary
Conditions: Includes all lighting control systems.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected material with new material at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Occupancy Sensors:
1. Leviton.
2. Lutron.
3. Wattstopper.
4. Hubbell.
5. Sensor Switch.
6. All occupancy sensors shall be produced by the same Manufacturer.
B. Photocells (Outdoor):
1. Intermatic.
2. Paragon.
3. Tork.
4. All photocells shall be produced by the same Manufacturer.
C. Timer Switches:
1. Intermatic
2. Paragon.
3. Tork.

D. Ballast Load Transfer Control Relay Devices (UL924):
1. Nine 24, Inc.
2. The Bodine Company.
3. LVS, Inc.
4. Lithonia.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish and install lighting control devices as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Line Voltage Wiring: No. 12 AWG minimum.
C. Occupancy Sensors:
1. Provide occupancy sensors as indicated herein and on the Drawings.
2. System Components:
a. Passive infrared occupancy sensors.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Lighting Control Devices

Section 26 09 23
26 09 23 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_09_23.DOCX
b. All Occupancy Sensors Shall Include:
1) Self adjusting type based on algorithm for maximum performance, adjustable time delay
30 seconds to 30 minutes.
2) Adjustable unit sensitivity.
3) UL and CBA listed.
4) Five year warranty.
5) Mounting brackets or boxes as required for each space application.
c. Each Ceiling Mounted Sensor Shall Include:
1) Line voltage control or provided with power pack.
2) LED indicates motion detection.
d. Device quantities and locations as indicated on the Drawings.
e. Wiring: As indicated on the Drawings.
f. Provide Leviton ODC04-IDW; or equal.
D. Photocells (Outdoor):
1. Provide photocells to be used as an input to the lighting control system.
2. Photocells shall be compatible with lighting control system to be used.
E. Timer Switches:
1. Provide mechanical Auto-Off timer switch with the following features:
a. Replaces any standard wall switch, single or multi-gang.
b. Capable of controlling20A load at 125VAC.
c. Adjustable time cycle up to 30 minutes with hold feature.
2. Provide Intermatic FF30MH or equal.

F. Ballast Load Transfer Control Relay Device (UL924):
1. Ballast load transfer control relay device shall operate as follows:
a. Unit shall comply with NEC and UL924.
b. Unit operates automatically on a continuous standby mode.
c. Unit bypasses any electrical control device.
d. Unit switches load to back-up power when normal power fails with no possibility of current
crossover.
e. Failsafe operation.
f. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps ballast load.
g. Instantaneous operation.
h. Test switch.
i. LED indicators for normal/emergency mode.
j. Unit shall be capable to isolate catastrophic faults internally or external of unit.
k. Unit shall be equipped with surge protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install lighting control devices as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install all lighting control devices in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor Field Service: Provide qualified personnel to perform, schedule and coordinate the following
work:
1. Install all wiring and components as indicated on Drawings.
2. Terminate and label all wiring.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean all lighting control system devices at Substantial Completion.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Lighting Control Devices

Section 26 09 23
26 09 23 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_09_23.DOCX
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Set time delay and sensitivity for all occupancy sensors in accordance with Manufacturers written
instructions based on room type.
B. Install photocells (outdoor) for northern exposure where possible.
C. Adjust settings as required for all photo sensors (daylight harvesting) for system to function properly and to
maximize system performance.
D. For each room/area with a ballast load transfer control relay device, simulate a power outage and test each
device to ensure unit is functioning properly and appropriate loads are switched. Make adjustments as
required.


END OF SECTION 26 09 23

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Motor-Control Centers

Section 26 24 19
SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all motor control centers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. NECA Standards: 402 Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers.
2. NEMA Standards:
a. AB 1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
b. AB 3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application.
c. ICS 2 Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated
600 Volts.
d. ICS 2.3 Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor
Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts
e. ICS 18 Motor Control Centers.
3. NFPA Standards:
a. 70 - National Electric Code.
b. 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
4. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Standards:
a. 489 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
b. 508 Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
c. 508C Power Conversion Equipment.
d. 845 Motor Control Centers.
e. 1449 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. CPT: Control power transformer.
B. LED: Light emitting diode.
C. MCC: Motor control center.
D. MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker.
E. MCP: Motor circuit protector.
F. NC: Normally closed.
G. NO: Normally open.
H. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
I. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

/2 26 24 19 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_24_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Motor-Control Centers

Section 26 24 19
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For each motor control center, manufacturer's standard drawings as defined in UL 845. In
addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and
conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment.
1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Each installed unit's type and details.
b. Factory-installed devices.
c. Enclosure types and details.
d. Nameplate legends.
e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete motor control center, and for bus structure
and each unit.
f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller and feeder
device, and installed devices.
g. Specified optional features and accessories.
2. Project specific schematic and connection wiring diagrams:
a. Identify power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller.
b. Clearly identify all field wiring requirements.
c. Typical diagrams are acceptable for multiple motors controlled in the same manner.
3. Nameplate legends.
4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities.
5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit.
B. Installation Instructions: For motor control centers.
C. Manufacturers Certification of Motor Control Centers:
1. Sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies with this Specification.
2. Written approval of installation.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For motor control centers.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, shutdown,
and emergency conditions.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to "troubleshooting".
6. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Project specific outline and cross sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams.
Wiring diagrams shall reflect final, as-installed conditions and include wire numbers.
8. Test data and performance curves.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Equipment:
1. Tested in accordance with NEMA ICS-2 and UL 845.
2. Bear UL Label.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Arrange shipping splits as required for installation.
B. Individually wrap each section and mount on shipping skids.

/2 26 24 19 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_24_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Motor-Control Centers

Section 26 24 19
C. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
D. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
E. Store materials indoor and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
F. Lift equipment only via lifting lugs provided for that purpose.
G. Avoid mechanical shock of any kind which would damage enclosure or equipment.
H. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D.
B. Cutler Hammer.
C. General Electric.
D. Siemens Energy & Automation.
E. Allen-Bradley.
2.2 RATINGS
A. Service: 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
B. Short Circuit: Unless otherwise indicated, device interrupting rating and bus bracing is 42,000 amperes rms
symmetrical. Provide fully rated devices; series ratings are not acceptable.
C. Ampacity: Horizontal bus is as indicated on Drawings.
D. Wiring: NEMA, Class I, Type B.
2.3 ENCLOSURE
A. Equipment consists of the required number of vertical sections to accommodate all devices indicated and
specified herein, each nominally 90 inches high and 20 inches deep. Sections are bolted together to form a
rigid free standing, front accessible, dead-front assembly.
B. Provide each section with isolated horizontal wireways at the top and bottom and isolated vertical wireways
with hinged door and cable tie supports. Unused spaces are to have bussing for future units and blank door
covers.
C. Indoor enclosures are NEMA 1 gasketed painted in the Manufacturer's standard grey over a rust inhibitor
treatment.
D. Enclosure shall be so designed to permit the addition of future sections at either end of the lineup.

/2 26 24 19 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_24_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Motor-Control Centers

Section 26 24 19
2.4 INCOMING MAINS
A. Provide incoming main circuit breaker as indicated. Main breaker is thermal magnetic type meeting UL 489
and NEMA AB-1.
B. Arrange front accessible main breaker for bottom entry without required 90 degree bends in the incoming
conductors.
C. Where motor control centers serve as service entrance equipment, provide a UL service entrance label on
the incoming section.
2.5 MOTOR CONTROL UNITS
A. Starters: Circuit breaker combination type rated in accordance with NEMA size designations. Fractional
sizes and ratings in accordance with IEC recommendations are not acceptable.
B. Breakers: Adjustable magnetic trip only. Equip with current limiters as required for the interrupting rating
noted. Ampere rating to be selected per horsepower indicated on the Drawings.
C. Contactors: NEMA size 1 minimum, magnetically held, field replaceable coil and contacts, auxiliary contacts
field installable and removable. Terminal temperature rise is not to exceed 50 degrees C in accordance with
NEMA standards.
D. Overload Relays: Solid state type, self powered, with current trip range adjustability. Relay shall provide
phase loss and phase unbalance and include switch selectable Class 10 or Class 20 protection. Relay shall
be capable of indicating reason for tripping. Provide cover mounted "reset" pushbutton.
E. Units: Constructed to fully compartmentalize the starter and arranged to permit access to starter, control
power transformer, fuses, and other components without requiring disassembly. NEMA sizes 1 through 4
are plug in, size 5 and larger are bolt on. Equip unit door with a defeatable interlock to prevent opening
unless the disconnect is open.
F. Terminal Blocks: Pull apart type for power and control to allow unit withdrawal without disconnecting wiring.
Use screw type terminals suitable for ring and tongue lugs for control wiring and box lug type for power
wiring.
2.6 FEEDER UNITS
A. Breakers: Molded case type, thermal - magnetic trips meeting UL 489 and NEMA AB 1. Ampere rating and
interrupting ratings as noted.
B. Units: Individually compartmentalized with not more than 1 breaker per unit unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 BUS
A. Material: Copper, tin or silver plated.
B. Isolation: Locate main horizontal bus at the top or center, completely compartmentalized with sliding or
removable barriers for access to joints. Provide phase isolation for vertical bus by polyester barriers
enclosing each phase bar or by a labyrinth arrangement providing adequate creepage to restrict fault
propagation. Plug all holes not used to stab in units. Full size bus to extend length of MCC. Include
automatic shutters.
C. Vertical Bus: 300 amp minimum rating.

/2 26 24 19 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_24_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Motor-Control Centers

Section 26 24 19
D. Provide a tin plated copper ground bus rated 600 amps minimum extending the full length of the lineup.
Where 3 phase, 4 wire control centers are indicated, provide full length neutral bus rated a minimum of 50%
of the main bus. Where 3 phase 3 wire control centers are used as service entrance equipment, provide
neutral bus in the incoming main section only.
E. Bus ratings to be in accordance with UL and NEMA for temperature rise.
2.8 METERING, RELAYING AND CONTROL DEVICES
A. Metering: Solid state, microprocessor based digital metering including all required current transformers and
potential transformer. Metering to display:
1. Volts; line to line (all 3 phases).
2. Volts; line to neutral (all 3 phases).
3. Line amps (all 3 phases).
4. System KW demand.
5. System KWHr. energy consumption.
6. Power factor.
7. Harmonics information.
B. Elapsed Time Indicators: Six digit, nonreset, 3-1/2-inch square case; equal to GE Type 236.
C. Indicating Lights and Selectors: Heavy duty, oil tight, industrial grade with octagonal ring. Pilot lights shall
be LED, push to test type.
D. Control Relays: Heavy duty, 600 volt, machine tool type, 10 amp contact rating. Time delay forms are solid
state type.
E. Control Power Transformer: Provide control transformer with two primary and one secondary fuse.
Transformer to be sized to accommodate the contactor and all control circuit loads.
F. Refer to wiring diagrams for specific control requirements.
2.9 SPARE PARTS
A. Starter Contacts: One set for each NEMA size furnished.
B. Starter Coils: One for each NEMA size furnished.
C. Control Circuit Fuses: Three for each rating furnished. Provide 1 fuse puller.
D. LED lamps: Four LED lamps of each color for motor control center.
E. Touch-Up Paint: One can.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor each motor-control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with motor control center
mounting surface.
B. Install motor-control centers on concrete bases.
C. Metering shall be mounted at 5'-0" above finished floor to center of meter.

/2 26 24 19 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_24_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Motor-Control Centers

Section 26 24 19
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each motor-control center element, bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following inspections, checks, and
supervision of testing:
1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connections for compliance
with the MCC manufacturer's installation recommendations and requirements.
2. Set field-adjustable, protective device trip characteristics to the values tabulated in the coordination
study.
3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
components.
4. Supervise tests performed by testing firms. Witness initial energization and perform or supervise
startup services.
5. Prepare written report to record the following:
a. Inspections and checks carried out on Site.
b. Test procedures used.
c. Test results that comply with requirements.
d. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
e. Document settings for all protective and safety devices.
6. Warranty shall be extended to 24 months with certified start-up.
7. Minimum on site time: 2 days.
C. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of motor control
center connections.
1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations
from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of motor control centers, one at 4 months and the other at
11 months after Substantial Completion.
3. Prepare a certified report identifying motor control center checked and describing results of scanning.
Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after
remedial action.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Touch up paint scratches using paint furnished by Supplier.
B. Vacuum to remove construction debris and dirt.
C. Attach all doors, wire way covers and other components; and plug any unused device holes.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owners maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain components of motor control centers. Provide 4 hours minimum of training time.


END OF SECTION 26 24 19



/2 26 24 19 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_24_19.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


/1 26 27 26 - 1 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_27_26.DOCX
Wiring Devices

Section 26 27 26
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all wiring devices and the major items listed below:
1. Receptacles.
2. Switches.
3. Wall plates.
4. Box covers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association - Standards for general and specific purpose
wiring devices WD-1, WD-5.
2. Federal Specifications WC-596 and WS-896.
3. Underwriter Laboratories (UL) Standard 498.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For wiring devices.
1. Name of Manufacturer.
2. Model number.
3. Details of construction and installation.
4. Electrical specifications and ratings.
5. Dimensional data.
6. Color and finish.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. NEC - National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction and installation of electrical
wiring devices.
2. UL Labels. Provide wiring devices which have been tested and are listed and labeled by Underwriters'
Laboratories.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturers directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


/1 26 27 26 - 2 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_27_26.DOCX
Wiring Devices

Section 26 27 26
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRING DEVICES
A. General:
1. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices in type, color, and electrical rating as indicated below.
2. Where type and grade are not indicated, proper selection shall be determined by installer to fulfill the
wiring requirements and to comply with NEC and NEMA standards for wiring devices.
B. Manufacturers: Provide equal products by one of the following Manufacturers for switches and receptacles
specified:
1. Arrow Hart - Cooper Wiring Devices
2. Leviton.
3. Hubbell, Inc.
4. Pass and Seymour - Legrand
C. Switches:
1. Switch Rating: 20 amp, 120/277V, specification grade, quiet operating.
2. Switch Provisions: Back and side wiring.
3. Device Color: Ivory.
4. Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL1220 Series.
D. Convenience Receptacles:
1. Ratings: 20 amp, 125V, industrial, heavy duty.
2. Provisions: Back and side wiring, grounding screw.
3. Wraparound Mounting Strap: 260 brass, 0.05-inch thick.
4. Device Color: Ivory.
5. Manufacturer: Hubbell 5362 Series.
E. Corrosion Resistance Receptacles:
1. Ratings: 20 amp, 125V, industrial, heavy duty specification grade.
2. Provisions: Back and side wiring, grounding screw.
3. Wrap Around Mounting Strap: 260 brass, 0.05-inch thick.
4. Device Color: Yellow.
5. Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL5362 Series.
F. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles:
1. Ratings: 20 amp, 125V, specification grade.
2. Provisions: Feed through protection.
3. Device Color: Ivory.
4. Manufacturer: Hubbell GF-5362 Series.
G. Wall Plates:
1. Number: Provide a single (switch or duplex outlet) wall plate for wiring devices grouped at each
location.
2. Attachment: Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices, screw heads colored to match finish
of plate.
3. Construction:
a. Stainless Steel: 0.04-inch thick, Type 302 satin finished stainless steel, accurately die cut,
protected with release paper.
b. Plastic: High abuse nylon or polycarbonate, color to match device.
c. Cast Metal: Die cast profile, ribbed for strength, flash removed, painted with gray enamel,
furnished complete with 4 mounting screws with gaskets.
d. Steel: Hot dip galvanized, 1.25 ounce per square foot minimum.
4. Plate Application:
a. Surface Mounted Devices In Unfinished Process Spaces: Galvanized steel.
b. Weatherproof Outlet Covers and Face-Plates:
1) Impact resistant polycarbonate NEMA 3R, weatherproof while-in-use outlet cover with
faceplate, faceplate gasket and corrosion proof fasteners.
2) Manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton, Taymac.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


/1 26 27 26 - 3 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_27_26.DOCX
Wiring Devices

Section 26 27 26
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install wiring devices in accordance with:
a. The Drawings.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions.
c. Applicable requirements of NEC and National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of
Installation".
d. Recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
2. Delay installation of devices until wiring is completed.
3. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building
materials and debris.
B. Switches:
1. Install as indicated on the Drawings to control lights as indicated.
2. Where more than 1 wall switch is installed in same location, set under 1 cover plate.
C. Wall Box Dimmers:
1. Gang together multiple dimmer switches located at one location.
2. Derate ganged dimmers in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
3. Do not operate on common neutral circuits.
D. Receptacles:
1. Locate approximately as indicated on the Drawings, long dimension vertical, with grounding pole at
top.
2. Centerline generally at 18 inches above floor on a tile or block joint unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings. When mounting height exceeds 27 inches above floor, mount horizontally with grounding
pole at left.
3. Refer to architectural Drawings for specific location requirements for architectural details when located
above counters (long dimension horizontal), and for centering to meet architectural conditions.
4. Refer to mechanical Drawings for coordination with mechanical equipment, radiation, fin tube, grilles,
and diffusers.
5. Provide bonding jumper from outlet to box.
E. Corrosion Resistant Receptacles: In areas designated as corrosive areas, install corrosion resistant
receptacles, where indicated.
F. Multi-Outlet Assemblies:
1. Mount 2 inches above countertop backsplash. Where there is no cabinetry, mount 18 inches above
finished floor.
2. In multi-circuited outlet assemblies, configure so that adjacent outlets are not on the same circuit.
G. Wall Plates:
1. Install coverplates on all wiring devices.
2. Plate shall cover entire wall opening.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections, and test after
energizing circuitry, to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
3.3 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES
A. Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Subcontractors regarding proper and cautious use of
convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged,
including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices

Section 26 28 00
26 28 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_28_00.DOCX
SECTION 26 28 00 LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all low voltage circuit protective devices:
1. The types of low voltage circuit protective devices required for the Project and specified in this Section
include the following:
a. Fuses.
b. Circuit breakers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
2. NEMA AB1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
3. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
4. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers literature for each type of low voltage circuit protective device furnished to include:
1. Name of Manufacturer.
2. Model.
3. Time-current curves.
4. Interrupt ratings.
5. NEC class.
6. Details of construction and installation.
7. Options and accessories.
B. Installation Instructions: For low voltage circuit protective devices.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For low voltage circuit protective devices.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, shutdown,
and emergency conditions.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to troubleshooting.
6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Project specific outline and cross sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams.
8. Test data and performance curves.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Provide fuses and circuit breakers which have been tested, listed, and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices

Section 26 28 00
26 28 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_28_00.DOCX
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturers directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSES
A. General: Provide fuses manufactured by Bussmann, Inc. as required for all motor starters, fused disconnect
switches, and other equipment requiring fuse protection as indicated on the Drawings, or in absence thereof,
as selected by the installer to meet the specific electrical requirements of the equipment being served.
Select only from the following:
1. Dual element plug fuses, 0-30 ampere, 150 volt, 10,000 ampere interrupting rating: Buss "Fusetron".
2. Dual element fuse, 0-600 ampere, 250 or 600 volt, 200,000 ampere interrupting rating, Type R-K5:
Buss "Fusetron".
3. 601 amperes and above, 250 or 600 volt, 200,000 ampere interrupting rating: Buss "Hi-Cap".
B. All fuses shall be by one Manufacturer.
2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General:
1. Provide required circuit breakers for installation in panelboards, switchboards, individual enclosures, or
motor control centers. Circuit breaker Manufacturer shall be that of the equipment in which it is
installed or shall be supplied by that equipment Manufacturer.
2. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated on the Drawings.
3. All breakers shall be rated for the applied voltage and have a minimum 10,000-amp interrupt rating.
B. Mechanism: Molded case circuit breakers shall have over center toggle-type mechanisms, providing quick-
make, quick-break action. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40
degrees C. Each circuit breaker shall have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free. 2 and 3
pole breakers shall be common trip.
C. Thermal Magnetic Trip:
1. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip
elements in each pole.
2. Circuit breakers with frame sizes greater than 100 amperes shall have variable magnetic trip elements
which are set by a single adjustment (to ensure uniform tripping characteristics in each pole).
3. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere breakers shall be SWD rated.
D. Enclosures:
1. Provide a UL listed circuit breaker enclosure for each individually mounted circuit breaker.
2. Enclosure to have NEMA rating for its intended location (NEMA 12, 3R, 4).
3. Provide handle mechanism padlockable in OFF position.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices

Section 26 28 00
26 28 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_28_00.DOCX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in all combination motor starters, fused disconnects, and equipment as required. Install circuit
breakers in all panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers as required.
3.2 FIELD SETTINGS
A. Contractor shall perform field adjustments of protective devices as required to place the equipment in final
operating condition. Settings shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the reviewed coordination
study.


END OF SECTION 26 28 00






















Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Enclosed Switches

Section 26 28 20
SECTION 26 28 20 ENCLOSED SWITCHES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all switching devices or means of disconnecting
motors and other electrically powered equipment.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association: Standard KS1 for enclosed switches.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For disconnect switches.
1. Name of Manufacturer.
2. Model number.
3. Details of construction and installation.
4. Assembly drawings, including elevations, plans, sections, dimensions, weight, and conduit entry
locations.
5. Electrical Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Amperage.
c. Interrupt rating.
d. Enclosure type.
6. Color and finish.
7. Options and accessories.
B. Installation Instructions: For disconnect switches.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For disconnect switches.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, shutdown,
and emergency conditions.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to troubleshooting.
6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Project specific outline and cross sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams.
8. Test data and performance curves.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.

/1 26 28 20 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_28_20.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Enclosed Switches

Section 26 28 20
B. Regulatory Agencies Requirements:
1. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction and installation of
electrical disconnect switches.
2. Provide disconnect switches which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories.
3. Comply with OSHA lockout/tagout requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers, or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATED SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the following Manufacturers (for each type of switch):
1. Square D Company.
2. General Electric.
3. Siemens Energy & Automation.
4. Cutler Hammer.
B. Provide heavy duty disconnect switches for all motors and equipment as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Switch Enclosures: Provide disconnect switches with NEMA enclosures 1, 3R, 4X, 7, or 12 as indicated on
the Drawings, or in absence thereof, as determined by installer to fulfill the requirements of the environment.
D. Heavy Duty Safety Switches:
1. Provide heavy duty type, sheet steel enclosed safety switches, of the type and size and electrical
characteristics indicated, surface mounted, fusible or nonfusible, rated at 250 or 600 volts, 60 hertz, 3
blades, incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches, constructed so switch blades are visible
in "off" position with door open; equipped with operating handle which is an integral part of the
enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable and is padlockable in the "off" position; with
current carrying parts constructed of high-conductivity copper, and silver-tungsten type switch contact;
with positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips.
2. Fuse clips shall accept only Class R type fuses.
3. All disconnect switches shall be horsepower rated.
E. Switch Interlock:
1. Provide switches with dual cover interlock to prevent opening door with switch in "on" position or
closing switch with door open.
2. Interlocks shall be defeatable with the use of a screwdriver to intentionally gain access to an energized
switch in the "on" position.

/1 26 28 20 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_28_20.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Enclosed Switches

Section 26 28 20
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. General:
1. Examine the areas and conditions under which disconnect switches are to be installed and notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
2. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install disconnect switches where indicated, in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, the
applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of
Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the
intended function.
2. Provide fused disconnect switches serving rooftop units and all other heating, air conditioning, and
refrigeration equipment comprising of multimotor or combination loads.
B. Coordination: Coordinate disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work, as
necessary for proper interface.
C. Location:
1. Install disconnect switches used with motorized equipment within sight of the controller position unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Mount on wall whenever possible, otherwise provide supporting device adjacent to equipment being
served.
D. Fuses: Provide fuses for disconnect switches in accordance with Division 26 Section Low Voltage Circuit
Protective Devices.


END OF SECTION 26 28 20


/1 26 28 20 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_28_20.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Enclosed Controllers

Section 26 29 13
26 29 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_13.DOCX
SECTION 26 29 13 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all motor controllers and contactors.
B. The types of motor controllers and contactors required for the Project include the following:
1. Manual motor starters.
2. Magnetic motor starters.
3. Combination magnetic starter/fusible disconnect switches.
C. Provide NEMA rated enclosures and starter sizes for all motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For motor starters.
1. Name of Manufacturer.
2. Model number.
3. Details of construction and installation.
4. Assembly drawings, including elevations, plans, sections, dimensions, weight, and conduit entry
locations.
5. Project Specific Wiring Diagrams:
a. Diagrams shall clearly identify all field wiring requirements.
b. Typical diagrams are acceptable for multiple motors controlled in the same manner.
6. Electrical Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Horsepower, NEMA size.
c. Interrupt rating.
d. Enclosure type.
7. Color and finish.
8. Options and accessories.
B. Installation Instructions: For motor starters.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For motor starters.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, shutdown,
and emergency conditions.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to troubleshooting.
6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Project specific outline and cross sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams.
Wiring diagrams shall reflect final, as-installed conditions, and include wire numbers.
8. Test data and performance curves.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Enclosed Controllers

Section 26 29 13
26 29 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_13.DOCX
B. All equipment shall bear the UL label and be listed for the application specified.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturers directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide products manufactured by one of the following:
1. Square D Company.
2. Cutler Hammer.
3. General Electric.
4. Siemens Energy & Automation.
5. Allen Bradley.
B. All motor starters to be of the same Manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Manual Motor Starters for Fractional HP Motors:
1. Operating mechanism shall be of the toggle switch type and shall be mechanically trip-free requiring a
reset operation before the starter can be reset. Contacts shall be silver alloy. Noncurrent carrying parts
shall be mounted on molded porcelain, bakelite, or composition base.
2. Overload protection shall be provided with 1 thermal overload heater block for each pole. All overload
relays shall be of the melting alloy type.
3. All FHP manual starters shall be equipped with thermal overload relay and handle guard/lock-off
mechanism.
B. Full Voltage Magnetic Motor Starters: Provide individual, full voltage, nonreversing magnetic motor starters
with the following accessories and characteristics:
1. Contactor with 3 manually resettable, melting alloy overload relays.
2. 120 volt holding coil.
3. Cover mounted "green," transformer type, "push-to-test" pilot light energized by auxiliary contact. To
indicate motor running.
4. Cover mounted overload relay "reset" button.
5. Provide 2 sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts
supplied with each contactor. Provide additional N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contacts required for interlock
functions.
6. Provide 120 volt secondary control power transformer (CPT) in each magnetic starter, of sufficient
capacity to handle operating coil and associated controls. Provide CPT secondary fusing and
grounding.
C. Combination Starter/Motor Protector Disconnect:
1. Provide combination, full voltage, nonreversing magnetic starters and fusible disconnect switches in a
common enclosure.
2. Provide fused 3-pole load break disconnect switches with time delay, dual element fuses, external
operating handle, and lock-off facility.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Enclosed Controllers

Section 26 29 13
26 29 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_13.DOCX
3. Restrict opening of switch enclosure by use of a latch unless the switch is in the "off" position. Latch
shall be defeatable with a screwdriver.
4. Accessories are the same as for magnetic motor starters indicated above.
D. Enclosures:
1. Provide manual or magnetic motor starters with NEMA enclosures 1, 3R, 4X, 7 or 12 as indicated on
the Drawings or schedules, or in absence thereof, as determined by installer to fulfill the requirements
of the environment.
2. Cover mounted devices shall be provided for all starters: Hand-off-auto selector switch.
E. Refer to wiring diagrams for specific control requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install motor controllers and contactors at locations indicated on the Drawings.
2. Overload elements and settings shall be selected based on motor nameplate ratings.
3. Label each motor starter with load served.


END OF SECTION 26 29 13

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers

Section 26 29 23
26 29 23 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_23.DOCX
SECTION 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of variable frequency drives (VFDs).
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. UL 508C.
2. NEMA 519.
3. NEMA ICS 3.1.
4. NFPA 70.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For VFDs.
1. Name of Manufacturer.
2. Model number.
3. Details of construction and installation.
4. Assembly drawings, including elevations, plans, sections, dimensions, weight, and conduit entry
locations.
5. Project Specific Wiring Diagrams:
a. Diagrams shall clearly identify all field wiring requirements.
b. Typical diagrams are acceptable for multiple motors controlled in the same manner.
6. Electrical Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Horsepower.
c. Interrupt rating.
d. Enclosure type.
7. Color and finish.
8. Options and accessories.
B. Installation Instructions: For VFDs.
C. Manufacturers Certification of VFDs:
1. Sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies with this Specification.
2. Written approval of installation.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For VFDs.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, shutdown,
and emergency conditions.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to "troubleshooting".
6. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Project specific outline and cross sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams.
Wiring diagrams shall reflect final, as-installed conditions, and include wire numbers.
8. Test data and performance curves.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers

Section 26 29 23
26 29 23 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_23.DOCX
9. Electronic copies of all equipment documentation (i.e., installation instructions, maintenance
instruction, project specific wiring diagrams, etc.) shall be submitted on compact disk (CD). Electronic
files shall be Acrobat Reader (.PDF) files or AutoCAD (.DWG) files.
10. Configuration Parameters: Provide list of all configurable parameters. Indicate which parameters
were changed from default value.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. VFD Supplier: Provide factory authorized service center within 100 miles of the installation Site.
C. Manufacturer's Services:
1. Submit Manufacturer's sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies with this Specification.
2. Provide Manufacturer's field start-up service.
D. All VFD assemblies shall be listed and labeled by UL or ETL for compliance with UL 508.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivered materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs)
A. Manufacturers: All VFDs shall be by the same manufacturer.
1. Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 753 (to match existing).
B. General:
1. The VFDs shall be rated for 480V AC operation and variable torque applications except as listed
below.
a. VFDs for the following loads shall be rated for constant torque applications:
1) B-7-1-1, B-7-1-2.
2. VFDs shall be rated for 480 VAC operation and shall provide microprocessor based control of 3-phase
motors. VFDs shall be rated for variable torque applications. VFDs shall be capable of operating any
NEMA Design B squirrel cage induction motor, regardless of manufacturer.
3. VFDs shall utilize pulse width modulation (PWM) technology, converting input voltage and frequency
to a variable voltage and frequency output via a 2-step operation. Insulated gate bipolar transistors
(IGBTs) shall be used in the inverter section.
4. VFD output, actuation, and braking shall be sequenced and coordinated to provide smooth starting
and stopping.
5. Each VFD shall be able to start into a spinning motor by being able to determine motor speed, in any
direction, and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the
VFD shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and
accelerate the motor to the required speed.
6. Separate terminal blocks shall be provided for power and control wiring connections.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers

Section 26 29 23
26 29 23 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_23.DOCX
C. Environmental Conditions:
1. The VFDs shall be designed to operate in an ambient temperature from 0 to 40 degrees C.
2. The storage temperature range shall be -20 to +70 degrees C.
3. The maximum relative humidity shall be 95% at 40 degrees C, non-condensing.
4. The VFDs shall be rated to operate at altitudes less than or equal to 3,000 feet (1,000 meters) without
derating the drive's output power capability.
5. To ensure adequate heat dissipation, fan assisted cooling may be provided such that it does not
degrade the enclosure rating.
D. VFD Ratings:
1. Full load output current rating shall be based on 40 degrees C ambient and 10 kHz switching
frequency below 40 HP and 3.6 kHz, 40 HP and above. Upon sensing an over-temperature, VFD shall
foldback switching frequency to reduce operating temperature. VFD shall return to the rated switching
frequency after the over-temperature condition has passed.
2. Each VFD shall have an efficiency that exceeds 95% for loads below 15 HP, and exceeds 97% for
loads 15 HP and above. Efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50% speed and load.
3. Each VFD shall maintain a line side displacement power factor at no less than 0.95, regardless of
speed and load.
4. VFD shall have a 1 minute overload current rating at 110% for variable torque applications; 150% for
constant torque applications.
5. Each VFD and its components shall be housed in a NEMA rated enclosure or motor control center as
indicated on the Drawings.
6. Output frequency of each drive shall be adjustable from 0-400 Hz.
7. Each VFD shall include automatic slip compensation.
8. Each VFD shall be rated for 42K AIC (minimum).
E. Protection:
1. The VFDs shall include internal diagnostics for valid operation of memory, option module, loss of
analog input, communications loss, dynamic brake failure, power supply failure, and loss of control
power. VFD run status and fault types shall be recorded in each drive's memory for the past 8 faults.
On a fault, the VFD shall shut down without damage to itself or other nonfaulted equipment.
2. Each VFD shall include protection against short circuits between output phases, between output
phases and ground, on the output, on the internal supplies, and on the logic and analog outputs.
3. The VFDs shall have a minimum power loss ride-through of 5 cycles.
4. Each VFD shall have an auto restart function which will provide up to 5 restart attempts on a fault
condition other than a ground fault, short circuit, or internal fault. A programmable time delay before
restart attempt from 1 to 600 seconds shall be included.
5. Deceleration shall be programmable for normal and fault conditions.
6. A synchronized restart shall be provided that will restart a spinning motor by sensing the motor
frequency and rotational direction and synchronizing the VFD output prior to restart.
7. Upon loss of analog input, the VFD shall indicate a fault and be capable of being programmed to
operate at a user defined speed.
8. Solid state I2t protection shall be included that is adjustable from 45 to 105% of the current output of
the drive. The protection shall be UL listed and meet UL 508C as Class 10 overload protection.
9. Each VFD shall have a thermal switch with an adjustable prealarm that will provide a minimum of a 60
second delay before an over temperature fault.
10. The VFDs shall include a programmable fold-back function that will anticipate controller over
temperature and/or overload conditions and fold back the output frequency to avoid fault conditions.
11. The internal power supply shall include protection from incorrect connection and shorting. Logic
outputs shall be current limited and shall not be damaged from shorting or excess current draw.
12. Provide VFD and its components shall be housed in a NEMA rated enclosure to fulfill the requirements
of the environment.
F. Enclosures:
1. Provide VFDs with NEMA enclosures 1, 3R, 4X, 7, or 12 as indicated on the Drawings or schedules,
or in absence thereof, as determined by installer to fulfill the requirements of the environment.
2. Outdoor VFD Enclosures:
a. VFDs shall be housed in NEMA enclosure as indicated on the Drawings and shall incorporate
thermostat controlled heating and cooling; heating and cooling shall be selected as necessary to
maintain VFD operating temperature range as specified by VFD manufacturer.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers

Section 26 29 23
26 29 23 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_23.DOCX
G. Operating Conditions:
1. Incoming Power: 480 VAC, 3-phase, 10%; 60 Hz, 5 Hz.
2. Frequency Stability: 0.05% with voltage regulation of 1% of maximum rated output voltage.
3. Speed Regulation: 0.5% of base speed.
4. Load inertia dependent carryover (ride-through) during utility loss.
5. Insensitive to input phase rotation.
6. Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing and non-corrosive.
7. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet above sea level.
8. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C.
9. Storage Temperature: -40 to 60 degrees C.
H. Protection:
1. Each VFD shall include the following protective features:
a. Phase rotation insensitive.
b. lnput phase loss.
c. lnput overvoltage.
d. Line surge.
e. Output short circuit.
f. Output ground fault.
g. Output phase loss.
h. Overtemperature.
i. DC overvoltage.
j. Drive overload.
k. Motor overload.
l. Selectable automatic restart after power loss or on resettable trip.
m. Stall protection (0% to 200%, 2 to 120 seconds).
2. Each VFD shall provide ground fault protection during power-up, starting, and running.
3. Each VFD shall include diagnostic features that store up to 9 faults.
4. Each drive shall provide Class 10 overload protection.
I. Control:
1. A door mounted operator interface panel shall be included with each VFD. The panel shall be an
alphanumeric, LCD display panel with a terminal keypad and status indicators. From the panel, an
operator shall be able to view and/or adjust all configuration, programming, diagnostic, and operating
parameters. Access to configuration parameters shall be protected to prevent unauthorized
adjustments. Operator interface panel shall be accessible without having to open the enclosure.
2. Control power shall be supplied from an internal power supply. Power supply shall be sized to supply
power to auxiliary devices as required. Interposing relays shall be provided as required to be
compatible with signal wiring.
3. Acceleration and deceleration rates shall be adjustable from 0.1 to 3,000 seconds. A minimum of
2 types of acceleration/deceleration ramps shall be able to be programmed into the VFD: Linear and
S-curve. VFDs shall include two part ramps for starting (acceleration) and stopping (deceleration).
For starting, VFD shall be able to ramp quickly from 0 to an operator adjustable speed or percentage,
then ramp from that speed to the desired operating speed in an operator adjustable time period. For
stopping, VFD shall ramp from operating speed to an operator adjustable speed or percentage in an
operator adjustable time period, then ramp quickly from that speed to 0.
4. VFDs shall be able to be programmed for open loop sensorless vector or V/Hz frequency control
mode.
5. Each VFD shall be able to be programmed for critical frequency avoidance. A minimum of 3 skip
frequencies/bands shall be available.
6. Refer to wiring diagrams for specific control device requirements.
7. The following door mounted devices shall be provided:
a. Elapsed time indicator: Six digit, tool-resettable type with digital readout in hours.
b. Push-to-Test, 30mm, LED type, green RUNNING indicating light.
c. Push-to-Test, 30mm, LED type, amber VFD FAULT indicating light.
d. Reset pushbutton to clear all faults.
8. Heavy duty, industrial control relays with tubular pin terminal, pure silver contacts, and IP20 sockets,
quantity as required.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers

Section 26 29 23
26 29 23 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_23.DOCX
J. Harmonic Distortion: VFDs shall limit harmonic distortion reflected onto the power distribution system to the
voltage and current levels as defined by IEEE 519. At a minimum, VFDs shall utilize an integral 5% line
reactor.
K. Accessories:
1. Circuit breaker disconnect to disconnect all incoming AC power. Handle position shall indicate ON,
OFF, and TRIPPED conditions. Disconnect shall be interlocked to prevent unauthorized
opening/closing of the VFD door with the handle in the ON position. Interlock shall be defeatable.
Disconnect shall be lockable.
2. Ethernet Network Communication Modules. Coordinate network requirements with Systems
Integrator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide adequate support for conductors within the VFD enclosure. Insulating supports shall be provided to
protect conductors.
B. Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings according to Manufacturers torque-tightening
values.
C. Locate VFD as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Ensure unrestricted access to ventilation for VFD.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each variable frequency drive element, bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following inspections, checks, and
supervision of testing:
1. Variable frequency drive start-up, including setup, direction-of-rotation test, and speed command
response, shall be carried out with the motor output shaft disconnected from the driven mechanical
equipment.
2. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connections for compliance
with the VFD Manufacturer's installation recommendations and requirements.
3. Set field-adjustable parameters to the values recommended by Manufacturer based on nameplate
data for controlled equipment. Proposed settings shall be submitted to Engineer for review.
4. Networking:
a. Configure network addressing and communications as directed by Control System Supplier.
b. Demonstrate proper communications between devices.
5. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
components.
6. Supervise tests performed by testing firms. Witness initial energization and perform or supervise
start-up services.
7. Prepare written report to record the following:
a. Inspections and checks carried out on Site.
b. Test procedures used.
c. Test results that comply with requirements.
d. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
e. Document all settings, including protective and safety devices.
8. Warranty shall be extended to 24 months with certified start-up.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Variable Frequency Motor Controllers

Section 26 29 23
26 29 23 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_29_23.DOCX
9. After satisfactory operation of the drive (controller and motor) has been demonstrated, the mechanical
equipment shall be connected to the motor shaft for mechanical equipment startup and commissioning
tests.
10. The variable frequency drive Manufacturer's designated representative shall supervise a running field
test in the presence of the Owner for a minimum of four hours for each VFD installed. If process
conditions permit, several VFDs may be field tested simultaneously.
11. The Manufacturer's representative shall ensure the proper operation of each unit in manual and
automatic modes over the full operating range. Test shall verify all manual and automatic controls
function properly and all electrical protection devices, safeties, and trips work properly.
12. Minimum On Site Time: 1 day.


END OF SECTION 26 29 23


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Surge Protective Devices

Section 26 43 05
SECTION 26 43 05 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of surge protective devices (SPD).
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ANSI/IEEE:
a. C84.1 - American National Standard for Electric Power Systems and Equipment - Voltage
Ratings (60 Hertz).
b. C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
c. C62.45 - IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected To Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
2. Underwriters Laboratories ( UL):
a. UL 1449 (3rd Edition) - Standard for Surge Protective Devices, Revised edition September 29,
2009.
b. UL 1283 - Standard for Safety - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For Surge Protective Devices.
1. Name of Manufacturer.
2. Model number.
3. Details of construction and installation.
4. Test data:
a. Provide UL 1449 (3rd Edition) data card showing the Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) and
Engineering Considerations for the specific catalog number submitted.
b. In accordance with NEC Article 285.6, the devices shall be marked with the short circuit current
rating. This rating shall meet or exceed the available fault current. Provide test data to
demonstrate the short circuit current rating has been tested on a complete device.
c. Submit test report data, which clearly demonstrates that the maximum surge current rating has
been tested on a complete SPD unit including all necessary fusing/overcurrent protection,
thermal disconnects, integral disconnects and monitoring systems.
d. Submit data, which demonstrates that the SPD unit is capable of surviving the specified
minimum repetitive surge current rating. The rating is based on surviving a specified number of
ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10kA) impulses without failure or degradation in performance
characteristics of more than 10%.
5. Provide detailed written comments for each paragraph of the specification indicating that the proposed
product meets or exceeds this specification. Where products do not meet the specific requirements,
provide a written explanation.
6. Dimensional data.
B. Installation Instructions: For surge protective devices.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For surge protective devices.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.

/2 26 43 05 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_43_05.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Surge Protective Devices

Section 26 43 05
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, shutdown,
and emergency conditions.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to "troubleshooting".
6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Project specific outline and cross sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams.
8. Test data and performance curves.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
3. Firms that have regularly engaged in the development, design, testing, listing and manufacture of
surge protective devices for 10 years or more.
B. Regulatory Requirements: All surge protective devices shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL 1449
(3rd Edition), and be listed accordingly.
C. Manufacturer's Services:
1. Submit Manufacturer's sworn statement that the furnished equipment complies with this Specification.
2. Provide Manufacturer's field service.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturers directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated materials and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Liebert.
B. Current Technology.
C. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).
D. Eaton Electrical Inc.
E. General Electric Company.
F. LEA International.
G. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
H. Square D.

/2 26 43 05 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_43_05.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Surge Protective Devices

Section 26 43 05
2.2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. The units shall be engineered, solid-state, high-performance, surge protective devices.
B. Protection Modes: All modes shall be protected:
1. Normal: Line-Line (L-L), Line-Neutral (L-N).
2. Common: Neutral-Ground (N-G), Line-Ground (L-G).
C. The Manufacturer shall provide surge protective devices that are classified by UL 1449 (3rd Edition) as
Type 1 devices. All protective elements shall be included within the SPD enclosure.
D. The ANSI/UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current Rating shall be a minimum of 20kA.
E. Unit shall include solid-state, long-life, externally mounted LED visual status indicators that indicate the on-
line status and operational integrity of each phase of the unit.
F. Unit shall have a Form C summary alarm output contact rated for at least 1 ampere at 120 VAC for remote
annunciation of SPD status.
2.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE SPD
A. Maximum UL 1449 (3rd Edition), Voltage Protection Rating (VPR):
1. 208Y/120V and 120/240V Systems:
a. L-N: 700V.
b. L-G: 700V.
c. N-G: 700V.
d. L-L: 1000V.
2. 480Y/277 Volt Systems:
a. L-N: 1000V.
b. L-G: 1200V.
c. N-G: 1000V.
d. L-L: 1800V.
3. 240V Systems:
a. L-G: 1200V.
b. L-L: 1000V.
4. 480V Systems:
a. L-G: 1800V.
b. L-L: 1800V.
B. The service entrance SPD shall be capable of surviving 15,000 ANSI/IEEE, Category C3 (10kA) impulses
without failure or degradation of original performance characteristics of more than 10%.
C. Maximum surge current rating shall be as indicated on the Drawings, based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41 standard
8x20ms current waveform.
D. Unit shall be of the hybrid type utilizing Silicone Avalanche Diodes and MOVs. Each MOV unit shall be
individually fused.
E. Unit shall include a built-in, push-to-test feature that tests the integrity of all modules, MOVs and fuses in the
system.
F. Options:
1. Unit shall have an audible alarm with an alarm on/off switch to silence the alarm and a push-to-test
switch to test the alarm function.
2. A resettable counter shall be provided to totalize transient voltage surges in both the normal and
common mode. The readout shall be at least a 6-digit LCD located on the unit front cover and
equipped with a 10-year battery back-up to maintain counts in the event of a power loss.

/2 26 43 05 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_43_05.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Surge Protective Devices

Section 26 43 05
G. Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for period of not less than 10 years from date of
installation. Warranty shall cover unlimited replacement of system protection modules during warranty
period. The first 5 years of this warranty will include field labor required to perform repair or replacement
work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install surge protective devices in conformance with:
1. The submittals reviewed by Engineer.
2. The Manufacturers recommendations.
B. For new construction, TVSS devices may be installed internal to the electrical distribution equipment. Phase,
neutral, and ground connection leads shall be as short as possible and not greater than 14 inches in length.
Where devices are not internal to distribution equipment, provide wiring as recommended by manufacturer
between surge protective device and connected distribution equipment. Wiring shall be installed in conduit.
Phase, neutral, and ground connection leads shall be kept as short as possible.
C. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the installation of the
TVSS system components as specified herein.
D. Verify system voltages, phases, etc. to ensure the proper application of the surge protective device and
coordinate with upstream and downstream transient suppression devices. Assure that all neutral conductors
are bonded to the system ground at the service entrance or the serving isolation transformer prior to
installation of the associated surge protective devices.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Ensure that the installed length of conductor leads is not greater than the length at which the TVSS device
was tested. Lead length is defined as the length of the lead between the TVSS device enclosure exterior to
the connection point.


END OF SECTION 26 43 05


/2 26 43 05 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_43_05.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Lighting

Section 26 50 00
SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all lighting and the major items listed below:
1. Interior luminaires.
2. Exterior luminaires.
3. Ballasts.
4. Lamps installed in luminaires.
5. Emergency lighting.
6. Luminaire supporting systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ANSI-UL Standards:
a. 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
b. 935 Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts.
c. 1029 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts.
d. 1598 Luminaires.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For luminaries.
1. Luminaire designation.
2. Name of Manufacturer.
3. Model number.
4. Details of construction and installation.
5. Dimensions and rough-in requirements.
6. Voltage.
7. Ballast Data:
a. Name of Manufacturer.
b. Model number.
c. Operating characteristics
8. Wiring diagrams.
9. Color and finish.
10. Options and accessories.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For luminaires.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, shutdown,
and emergency conditions.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to troubleshooting.
6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Project specific outline and cross sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams.
8. Test and performance curves.

/2 26 50 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_50_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Lighting

Section 26 50 00
C. Submit 2 copies of Record Drawings to Owner identifying maintenance and lamp replacement requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. All equipment shall be UL listed.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. In accordance with the warranty provisions defined in the General Conditions and Supplementary
Conditions:
1. Includes all ballasts.
2. Does not include lamps.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturers directions.
C. Store materials indoors and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate materials
above grade and enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated, or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Furnish and install all luminaires with lamps as indicated on the Drawings and as listed on the
Luminaire Schedule.
2. Furnish luminaires with all trims and accessories required for the various types of ceiling and wall
construction.
3. All ballasts used in fluorescent luminaires shall be Class "P" rated, high power factor, CBM certified
and UL listed.
4. All ballasts shall have an "A" sound rating, where available.
5. Provide "damp" or "wet" location labels on all luminaires installed outdoors and in damp or wet interior
locations.
6. All recessed luminaires shall be thermally protected.
7. Provide low temperature ballasts for all luminaires installed outdoors or in unheated interior spaces.
B. Linear Fluorescent Ballasts:
1. Electronic:
a. Type: High frequency electronic programmed-start or electronic instant-start as indicated in the
Luminaire Schedule.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Universal Lighting Technologies.
2) Advance.
3) Osram Sylvania.
4) General Electric.
c. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 20%.
d. Ballast shall meet complete switching requirements for 2, 3 or 4 lamp luminaires.

/2 26 50 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_50_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Lighting

Section 26 50 00
e. Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
f. Ballast Factor: 0.85 or higher.
C. Lamps:
1. As indicated on Drawings and as listed in the Luminaire Schedule.
2. Manufacturers: Osram Sylvania, G.E. Lighting, Philips.
D. Emergency Lighting:
1. Provide emergency lighting units as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.
2. Provide emergency fluorescent power units in linear fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires
as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine all pertinent details (architectural and otherwise) in the Contract Documents that are relevant to the
installation of luminaires.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install surface mounted, recessed, or semi-recessed luminaires to maintain the alignment, spacing,
layout, and general arrangement indicated on the Drawings.
2. Obtain approval of Engineer for all proposed changes that may be required due to field conditions
and/or to avoid conflicts with Work by other trades.
3. Install all luminaires in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Equip all luminaires with the specified quantity of functional lamps prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Install all wiring for emergency lighting and exit signs that are not local battery powered in a raceway
system independent from other building wiring.
6. In the installation of exterior luminaires, take care to maintain symmetry with existing installation, while
conforming to the Drawings.
B. Coordination:
1. Coordinate locations of recessed and surface mounted luminaires in ceiling systems with Division 09.
2. Locate luminaires according to the reflected ceiling Drawings, if furnished.
3. Coordinate location of luminaires in Mechanical HVAC and Plumbing and Process areas with other
trades.
4. Notify Engineer of field conditions that contradict plans or specifications prior to beginning work.
5. Coordinate space conditions that contradict or conflict with Work by other trades before installing
luminaires.
C. Surface Mounted Fluorescent:
1. Securely mount luminaires and electrical boxes to elements of the building structure such that
luminaires will be square, plumb, and rigid; and will not fall or sag, and will not cause the ceiling
system to fall or sag.
2. Provide all additional means (metal plates, plywood backing, expansion bolts, toggle bolts, etc.)
necessary to support luminaires that would put excessive stress on the ceiling system.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test all luminaires, lighting controls, and emergency lighting systems for proper operation.
B. All luminaires, exit signs, and emergency lighting systems shall operate properly.

/2 26 50 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_50_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Lighting

Section 26 50 00
C. Adjusting and Aiming:
1. All final adjusting and aiming of luminaires (such as focusing all adjustable luminaires) shall be done
during the night hours.
2. Replace all defective lamps and ballasts immediately prior to Substantial Completion.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean all luminaire trims, exposed housings, doors, lenses, and reflectors immediately prior to Substantial
Completion.


END OF SECTION 26 50 00


/2 26 50 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\26_50_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Site Preparation

Section 31 10 13
SECTION 31 10 13 SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the major items listed below:
1. Clearing Site of above-grade trees, shrubs, grass and plant life.
2. Removal of the following man-made items:
a. Walls.
b. Fences.
c. Sheds.
d. Similar improvements as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Removal of roots and stumps.
4. Removal of exposed rocks, boulders and debris.
5. Stripping and removal of sod.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the Work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. MDOT:
a. Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms: Surface Improvements: Pavement, walks, drives, curbs, curb and gutter, improved lawns,
monuments, property irons, reference points and similar improvements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Permit to Store or Dump Removed Materials:
1. On property owned, leased or occupied by someone other than Owner.
2. Submit prior to storing or dumping.
3. Permit shall absolve Owner from responsibility for storing or dumping.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Trimming: Trimming of limbs and branches and the painting of tree wounds shall be actively supervised by
a member of one of the following:
1. ASCA - American Society of Consulting Arborists.
2. ISA - International Society of Arboriculture.
3. NAA - National Arborist Associations.
B. Interference:
1. Ensure that Site preparation work does not unduly interfere with pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
2. Obtain Engineer's and governing authority's approvals prior to closing a public street.

/2 31 10 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_10_13.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Site Preparation

Section 31 10 13
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Burning: Not permitted.
B. Burial: Not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Soil Erosion Control: Provide soil erosion control in accordance with Division 31 Section Erosion and
Sedimentation Controls prior to starting Site preparation work.
B. Protection of Trees and Shrubs:
1. Protect trees and shrubs which are to remain from permanent damage by construction operations.
2. Prevent vehicles from driving within area under dripline of trees which are to remain.
C. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours for vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Clearing:
1. Remove items requiring removal under this Section from building area.
2. Remove roots, rocks and boulders to a depth of 2 feet below finish grade in the following areas:
a. Proposed buildings or structures.
b. Proposed pavements and walks.
c. Other areas where compaction of the subgrade is required.
B. Removal of Sod: Cut to a straight line at the expected excavation limits with sod cutter.
C. Prevent Construction Operations from Damaging or Disturbing:
1. Trees or roots of trees which are to remain.
2. Surface improvements which are to remain.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL
A. General:
1. Remove and properly dispose of all material not needed to complete Project.
2. Dispose of excess material at a location off the Site.
3. Dispose of excess topsoil at a location off the Site.
4. Disposal of materials shall not violate laws, rules, regulations and the like regarding the filling of flood
plains, wetlands and other environmentally sensitive areas.
5. Provide adequate controls to maintain disposal sites in a neat and safe conditions by periodic leveling
of material, the control of erosion and such other practices as are necessary.


END OF SECTION 31 10 13


/2 31 10 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_10_13.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grading

Section 31 22 00
SECTION 31 22 00 GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of the major items listed below:
1. Excavation.
2. Cutting and filling.
3. Rough and finish grading.
4. Disposal of excavated materials.
5. Topsoil.
6. Excess water control.
7. Pavement subgrade.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. AOAC - Association of Official Agricultural Chemists: Methods of Testing.
2. ASTM Standards:
a. D422 - Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
b. D698 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort.
c. D1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.
d. D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
3. MDOT:
a. 2012 Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms:
1. Driving Surface: A pavement, curb, or sidewalk.
2. Excavation:
a. Removing the following materials from their present location:
1) Native below-grade material such as soil, rocks, boulders less than 1/2 cubic yard in
volume, and buried trees.
2) Man-made items such as, but not necessarily limited to:
a) Bituminous and concrete paving.
b) Curbs.
c) Riprap.
d) Head walls.
e) Underground utilities.
f) Manholes and catch basins.
g) Foundations.
h) Sidewalks.
3. Fill: Soil, native material, imported material or other material which is placed over the subgrade, or
excavated areas; under roadways, parking areas, walks, buildings, or structures; and anywhere else
on the Site.
4. Grading: The act of moving soil from one location on the Site to another to achieve the contours and
elevations as indicated on the Drawings and as herein specified.
5. Hardpan:
a. Cemented soil layers.
b. Is not hard clay layers that are not cemented.

/1 31 22 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_22_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grading

Section 31 22 00
6. Imported Material: Soil material which is purchased by Contractor and hauled onto the Site.
7. Native Material: Soil and other natural earth materials, except rock, which are existing on the Site
prior to the start of Work.
8. Pavement: Any combination of subbase, base course and concrete, bituminous or aggregate surface
course, including shoulders, placed on a subgrade. Includes roadways, parking areas, driveways, and
bituminous seal coat.
9. Rock Excavation:
a. Excavation of igneous, metamorphic or sedimentary rock or hardpan which cannot be excavated
without continuous drilling or blasting or continuous use of a ripper or other special equipment.
b. Excavation of boulders of 1/2 cubic yard or more in volume.
10. Structure: A building, retaining wall, tank, footing, slab, or other similar construction.
11. Subbase: The layer of material placed on the subgrade as part of the pavement structure.
12. Subgrade:
a. Below structures and below fill on the Site: The top elevation of the undisturbed native material
after all topsoil is stripped off and excavation is completed.
b. Below driving surfaces: The bottom elevation of the subbase.
13. Surface Improvement: All improvements beyond what might be encountered in an open unimproved
field.
14. Undercut: Excavation of native material from below the bottom of footings, floors, structures, and
subbases.
15. Utility Structure: Manhole, catch basin, valve chamber, junction chamber, water main valve, or other
similar utility appurtenance.
16. Other Definitions: Other earthwork terms not defined in the Contract Documents shall be as defined in
MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction.
1.5 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Quantities: Determine the required quantities of all earthwork materials and operations and use as the basis
for the lump sum Bid.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing will be performed in accordance with Division 01 Section Testing Services for Buried Utilities,
Roadways, and Site Projects.
B. Compaction:
1. Predominately Granular Soils:
a. Density shall be determined by using the modified Proctor method, ASTM D1557.
b. Compact fill to at least 95% maximum density.
c. The first 12 inches of subgrade below all driving surfaces, structures, utility structures, and fill on
the Site:
1) Shall be tested for density.
2) Compact to at least 95% maximum density if the existing density is below 95%.
2. Predominately Cohesive Soils:
a. Density shall be determined by using the standard Proctor method, ASTM D698.
b. Compact fill to at least 98% maximum density.
c. The first 12 inches of subgrade below all driving surfaces, structures, utility structures, and fill on
the Site:
1) Shall be tested for density.
2) Compact to at least 98% maximum density if the existing density is below 98%.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Dust Control:
1. Use all legal means necessary to control dust on and near the Work and on and near all off-site
borrow areas if such dust is caused by Contractor's operations during performance of the Work or if
resulting from the condition of the Site when earthwork operations are suspended.

/1 31 22 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_22_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grading

Section 31 22 00
2. Treat haul roads, delivery roads, temporary site access roads and other surfaces as required to
prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other
work on the Site.
3. Scrape, broom, or vacuum adjacent streets to remove tracked dirt every Friday afternoon, or more
often as necessary if directed by Engineer. Utilize vacuum if dust from brooming is excessive in
opinion of Engineer.
B. Existing Structures, Utility Structures, and Utilities:
1. Call MISS DIG to locate all existing underground utilities prior to starting excavation.
2. Where utilities, utility structures, or structures are encountered which are in active use:
a. Provide adequate protection for them.
b. Be responsible for damages to them.
3. Provide stand-by utility service if temporary removal is necessary for a period exceeding 2 hours.
4. Where utility service connections to occupied buildings must be temporarily disconnected, give 48
hours notice to the affected occupants of the time and duration of the anticipated shut off.
5. Notify Fire Department 48 hours in advance if water main or fire supply line shutoff is required.
6. Raise, lower, or move underground utilities, utility structures, or structures which interfere with the
utility, utility structure, or structure being constructed as part of this Work.
C. Special Filling Requirements:
1. Comply with the regulations of the MDOT, county road, and railroad company engineering
departments with regard to placing fill and compaction in their respective rights-of-way.
2. Obtain necessary permits for filling activities off Site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Approval Required: All material shall be subject to the approval of independent testing laboratory.
2. Notification: For approval of imported material, notify independent testing laboratory at least 1 week in
advance of intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow area, and permit independent
testing laboratory to sample as necessary from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance
tests to prove the quality of the material.
B. Material Sources and Uses:
1. Imported Material:
a. Fill below structures, utility structures, or driving surfaces.
b. Fill not below structures, utility structures, or driving surfaces.
2. Native material, unless quantity is not sufficient; then shall be imported material.
a. Fill in undercut.
b. Fill below structures, utility structures, or driving surfaces.
c. Topsoil.
C. Fill In Undercut: MDOT 902, Granular Material Class II.
D. Fill below structures, utility structures, or driving surfaces: MDOT 902, Granular Material Class II.
E. Fill Not Below Structures, Utility Structures, or Driving Surfaces:
1. Native material.
2. Exclusive of gray or blue clay, peat, organic matter, or frozen lumps.
3. Containing no rocks or lumps over 3 inches in greatest dimension.
4. Obtain approval for using native material as fill from independent testing laboratory.

/1 31 22 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_22_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grading

Section 31 22 00
F. Topsoil:
1. Fertile, friable soil, containing a minimum of 2.5% and maximum 12% of organic matter as determined
by the Loss on Ignition Test, AOAC, with not more than 50% clay and not more than 55% sand as
determined in accordance with ASTM D422.
2. At least 90% of the material shall pass the No. 10 sieve and shall be free of refuse or all material toxic
to plant growth, free of subsoil and stumps, roots, brush, stones or similar objects larger than 1-inch
diameter.
3. Ordinary sods and herbaceous growth, like grass, need not be removed, but shall be thoroughly
broken up and intermixed with soil during handling operations.
4. Topsoil, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall have, according to Methods of Testing by the
AOAC, acidity range of approximately 5.5 pH to 7.6 pH or as approved by Engineer prior to delivery.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section,
shall be as selected by Contractor subject to the approval of independent testing laboratory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Topsoil:
1. Remove all topsoil to depth at which subsoil is encountered, from all areas under buildings, driving
surfaces, and from all areas which are to be cut to lower grades or filled.
2. With Engineer's approval, topsoil to be used for finish grading may be stored on the Site.
3. Other topsoil may be used for fill in noncritical areas with approval of Engineer.
B. Obstructions:
1. Remove and dispose of buried trees, rocks, boulders, driving surfaces, pipes and the like, as required
for the performance of the Work.
2. Exercise care in excavating around catch basins, inlets, and manholes.
3. Avoid removing or loosening castings or pushing dirt into utility structures.
4. Repair or replace damaged or displaced castings; remove dirt entering utility structures during the
performance of the Work at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Cutting Paved Surfaces and Similar Improvements:
1. All cuts shall be a minimum of 1-foot wider than trench on each side. When the remaining width of
paved surface is less than 4 feet, remove the entire paved surface.
2. Before removing pavement, mark the pavement neatly, paralleling pipe lines and existing street lines.
Space the marks the width of the trench.
3. Concrete:
a. Pavements: Saw cut if over 3 feet from expansion or construction joint, otherwise remove to
joint.
b. Sidewalks: Remove to joints.
c. Curb and gutter: Remove to joints.
4. Final surface Course Bituminous: Saw cut joints unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
5. Do not disturb or damage the adjacent pavement. If the adjacent pavement is disturbed or damaged,
remove and replace the damaged pavement.
6. Contractor may tunnel under curbs that are encountered. Replace curb disturbed by construction.
7. Dispose of materials removed.
D. Utilities To Be Abandoned:
1. When pipes, conduits, sewers, or other utilities or utility structures are removed from the excavation
leaving dead ends in the ground, fully plug such ends with brick and mortar.
2. Entirely remove abandoned utility structures unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
3. Remove from the excavation all materials which can be readily salvaged and store on the Site.
4. All salvageable materials will remain the property of Owner unless otherwise indicated by Owner.

/1 31 22 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_22_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grading

Section 31 22 00
E. Undercut:
1. If soft material, which in the opinion of independent testing laboratory is not suitable, is encountered
below a structure, utility structure, or driving surface, Engineer may order the removal of this soft
material and its replacement with specified material in order to make a suitable foundation for the
construction of the structure, utility structure, or driving surface.
2. All undercutting made at the order of Engineer will be paid for on the basis of the actual quantity of
material excavated. Do not proceed further until instructions are received and necessary
measurements made for purposes of establishing additional volume of excavation.
3. No extra payment will be made if removal is required as a result of poor dewatering techniques.
4. Undercutting which is specifically indicated on the Drawings or herein specified, shall be included in
the base Bid.
5. Soil removed may be used as fill in areas not below driving surfaces, structures, or utility structures.
6. Compact subgrade at bottom of undercut prior to placing fill.
7. Place and compact specified fill in undercut.
8. Lateral extent of undercut shall be a horizontal distance equal to the depth of undercut below
structure, utility structure, or driving surface.
F. Excavating:
1. All excavation shall be by open cut from the surface except as herein specified or as indicated on the
Drawings.
2. If required because of excess water conditions, place stone stabilization course prior to proceeding
with construction. Place filter fabric over stone stabilization course.
G. Rock Excavation:
1. Notify Engineer prior to removal if rock is encountered.
2. Where rock is encountered within the excavation, expose the surface of the rock sufficient to permit
adequate measurements to be taken before the rock excavation is started.
3.2 FILL
A. General:
1. Do not place fill until the subgrade been examined by independent testing laboratory.
2. Place fill in even layers not exceeding 10 inches in depth and thoroughly compact as herein specified.
3. Do not place additional fill until compaction on a lift complies with specification requirements.
4. If an analysis of the soil being placed shows a marked difference from 1 location to another, the fill
being placed shall not be made up of a mixture of these materials.
5. Handle each different type of material continuously so that field control of moisture and density may be
based upon a known type of material.
6. Do not place fill following a heavy rain without first making certain on isolated test areas that
compaction can be obtained without damage to the already compacted fill.
7. Do not place fill on frozen subgrade.
B. Compaction:
1. Select compaction equipment to achieve the required compaction without damaging adjacent
structures, utility structures, or driving surfaces.
2. Suggested Equipment Selections:
a. If soil is predominantly granular, use pneumatic tired or vibratory drum rollers loaded to not less
than 325 pounds in accordance with rated inch of tire width.
b. For clay fills, compact each layer with sheepsfoot rollers. Rollers shall have staggered rows of
feet projecting not less than 7 inches from drum and shall be loaded to produce at least 200
pounds per square inch of tamping area in contact with the ground.
c. Compact around structures and utility structures with hand operated vibrating compactors for
granular soils and Barco rammer type compactors for clay soils.
C. Moisture:
1. Compact all fill with the moisture content as specified.
2. If fill material is too wet, provide and operate approved means to assist the drying of the fill until
suitable for compaction.
3. If fill material is too dry, provide and operate approved means to add moisture to the fill layers.

/1 31 22 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_22_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grading

Section 31 22 00
3.3 GRADING
A. General:
1. Perform all rough and finish grading required to attain the elevations indicated on the Drawings.
2. Perform rough grading to an accuracy of 0.10 feet.
3. Perform finish grading to an accuracy of 0.05 feet.
4. Comply with all excavating and fill requirements specified herein during grading operations.
B. Grading Around Buildings: Control the grading around buildings so the ground is pitched to prevent water
from running into the excavated areas of a building or damaging other Site features.
C. Treatment After Completion of Grading:
1. After grading is completed, permit no further excavation, filling, or grading, except with the approval of
Engineer.
2. Use all means necessary to prevent the erosion of freshly graded areas during construction and until
such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed.
D. Topsoil: All graded areas, outside of buildings and driving surfaces, shall receive 4 inches of topsoil.
3.4 EXCESS WATER CONTROL
A. Regulations and Permits: Comply with soil erosion control permits in accordance with Mich. P.A. 451, Part
91 of 1994, the Natural Resource and Environmental Protection Act, and all pertinent rules, laws, and
regulations.
B. Unfavorable Weather:
1. Do not place, spread, or roll any fill material during unfavorable weather conditions.
2. Do not resume operations until moisture content and fill density are satisfactory to independent testing
laboratory.
C. Pumping and Drainage:
1. Provide, maintain, and use at all times during construction adequate means and devices to promptly
remove and dispose of all water from every source entering the excavations or other parts of the
Work.
2. Dewater by means which will ensure dry excavations, preserve final lines and grades, and do not
disturb or displace adjacent soil. Use wells, portable pumps, temporary underdrains or other methods
as is necessary.
3. Perform Pumping and Drainage:
a. In such a manner to cause no damage to property or structures and without interference to the
rights of the public, owners of private property, pedestrians, vehicular traffic, or the work of other
contractors.
b. In accordance with all pertinent laws, rules, ordinances and regulations.
4. Do not overload or obstruct existing drainage facilities.
5. Provide berms or channels to prevent flooding of subgrade. Promptly remove all water collected in
depressions.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. General:
1. Remove and properly dispose of all excavated material not needed to complete filling and grading.
2. Dispose of excess excavated material at a location off the Site.
3. Dispose of excess topsoil at a location off the Site.
4. Disposal of all materials shall not violate laws, rules, regulations and the like regarding the filling of
flood plains, wetlands and other environmentally sensitive areas.
5. Provide adequate controls to maintain disposal sites in a neat and safe conditions by periodic leveling
of material and such other practices as are necessary.
6. Provide all soil erosion control measures necessary to prevent soil erosion and sedimentation of
wetlands, rivers, ditches, or similar low lying areas.

/1 31 22 00 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_22_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Grading

Section 31 22 00
3.6 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all excess excavated material, trash, and debris
resulting from construction operations. Remove equipment and tools. Leave the Site in a neat and orderly
condition acceptable to Engineer, and in accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste
Management.


END OF SECTION 31 22 00


/1 31 22 00 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_22_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Excavation and Fill for Utilities

Section 31 23 03
SECTION 31 23 03 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR UTILITIES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of the major items listed below:
1. Excavation and trenching in earth and in rock.
2. Disposal of items from clearing and unsuitable or excess excavated materials.
3. Complete drainage of excavations.
4. Temporary or permanent sheeting, bracing and shoring of excavations.
5. Installation of normal and special foundations, bedding and backfill materials.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Standard Specifications:
a. D1556 - Density and Unit Weight of Soil In Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
b. D1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.
c. D2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and
Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
d. D2922 - Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods.
2. MDOT Publications:
a. 2012 Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms:
1. Bedding: The material placed around a utility between 4 inches below to 12 inches above the utility
the full width of the trench.
2. Driving Surface: A pavement, curb, or sidewalk.
3. Excavation:
a. Removing the following materials from their present location:
1) Native below-grade material such as soil, rocks, boulders less than 1/2 cubic yard in
volume, and buried trees.
2) Man-made items such as, but not necessarily limited to:
a) Bituminous and concrete paving.
b) Curbs.
c) Riprap.
d) Head walls.
e) Underground utilities.
f) Manholes and catch basins.
g) Foundations.
h) Sidewalks.
4. Extra Earth Excavation: Excavation of native material from below the normal trench bottom.
5. Foundation Material: The material placed in a trench undercut to replace extra earth excavation.
6. Hardpan:
a. Cemented soil layers.
b. Is not hard clay layers that are not cemented.
7. Imported Material: Soil material which is purchased by Contractor and hauled onto the Site.

/2 31 23 03 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_03.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Excavation and Fill for Utilities

Section 31 23 03
8. Native Material: Soil and other natural earth materials, except rock, which are existing on the Site
prior to the start of Work.
9. Normal Trench Bottom: The surface of the undisturbed native material at an elevation 4 inches below
the bottom of the utility.
10. Pavement: Any combination of subbase, base course and concrete, bituminous or aggregate surface
course, including shoulders, placed on a subgrade. Includes roadways, parking areas, driveways, and
bituminous seal coat.
11. Rock Excavation:
a. Excavation of igneous, metamorphic or sedimentary rock or hardpan which cannot be excavated
without continuous drilling and blasting or continuous use of a ripper or other special equipment.
b. Excavation of boulders of 1/2 cubic yard or more in volume.
12. Special Foundations:
a. Specially constructed systems for support of underground utilities such as timber piling, concrete
foundations and surcharge techniques.
b. Extra earth excavation and placing imported or native materials are not special foundations.
13. Structure: A building, retaining wall, tank, footing, slab, or other similar construction.
14. Suitable Material:
a. Native material excavated from the trench and approved as backfill by independent testing
laboratory.
b. Not used under or within 1 on 1 slope of driving surfaces or structures.
c. Placed between the top of the bedding or trench backfill as indicated on the Drawings and the
bottom of the surface restoration.
15. Trench Backfill:
a. The material placed between the top of bedding and the bottom of suitable material, the surface
restoration or driving surface, as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Used under and within 1 on 1 slope of driving surfaces or structures.
16. Utility Structure: Manhole, catch basin, valve chamber, junction chamber, water main valve, or other
similar utility appurtenance.
17. Other Definitions: Other earthwork terms not defined herein or in the Contract Documents shall be as
defined in MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction.
1.5 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Trench Bottom Suitability:
1. Be responsible for the suitability of the normal trench bottom in supporting the utility, bedding and
backfill.
2. Notify Engineer and await Engineer's decision if a possible unsuitable condition exists.
3. Poor dewatering techniques or lack of excess water control shall not be a reason for additional
payment for remedial measures.
B. Trench Wall Stability:
1. Be responsible for the trench configuration, including sheeting, shoring and bracing necessary to
support trench side walls from collapsing.
2. Be responsible for the structural design and stability of a pipe-laying box if utilized on the Project to
prevent trench walls from collapsing.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing: Testing will be performed in accordance with Division 01 Section "Testing Services for Buried
Utilities, Roadways, and Site Projects.
B. Compaction:
1. Determine density by the modified Proctor method, ASTM D1557.
2. Compact trench backfill and bedding to at least 95% maximum density.
3. Compact suitable material to at least 90% maximum density.
4. The first 12 inches of native material at the bottom of utility trenches:
a. Test for density.
b. Compact to at least 95% maximum density if the existing density is below 95%.

/2 31 23 03 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_03.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Excavation and Fill for Utilities

Section 31 23 03
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: For imported materials:
1. Source.
2. MDOT classification.
3. Sieve Analysis.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Dust Control:
1. Use all legal means necessary to control dust on and near the Work and on and near off-site borrow
areas if such dust is caused by Contractor's operations during performance of the Work or if resulting
from the condition of the Site when earthwork operations are suspended.
2. Moisten or otherwise treat haul roads, delivery roads, temporary site access roads and other surfaces
as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent
performance of other work on the Site.
3. Scrape, broom, or vacuum adjacent streets to remove tracked dirt every Friday afternoon, or more as
necessary if directed by Engineer. Utilize vacuum if dust from brooming is excessive in opinion of
Engineer.
B. Existing Structures, Utility Structures, and Utilities:
1. Call MISS DIG to locate existing underground utilities prior to starting excavation.
2. Where utilities, utility structures or structures are encountered which are in active use:
a. Provide adequate protection for them.
b. Be responsible for damage to them.
3. Provide stand-by utility service if temporary removal is necessary for a period exceeding 2 hours.
4. Where utility service connections to occupied buildings must be temporarily disconnected, give 48
hours notice to the affected occupants of the time and duration of the anticipated shutoff.
5. Notify Fire Department 48 hours in advance if water main or fire supply line shutoff is required.
6. Raise, lower, or move underground utilities, utility structures or structures which interfere with the utility
or utility structure being constructed as part of this Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Approval Required: Material shall be subject to the approval of independent testing laboratory.
2. Notification: For approval of imported material, notify independent testing laboratory at least 1 week in
advance of intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow area, and permit independent
testing laboratory to sample as necessary from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance
tests to prove the quality of the material.
B. Material Sources and Uses:
1. Imported Material:
a. Foundation material.
b. Bedding.
c. Pea stone.
d. Trench backfill.
2. Native material unless quantity is not sufficient; then shall be imported material: Suitable material.
C. Foundation Material for Crushed Stone: 1-1/2-inch maximum size.
D. Bedding:
1. For Pipes Less Than 36 Inches:
a. MDOT 902 Granular Material Class II modified to 100% passing a 1/2-inch sieve, or
b. MDOT 902 Coarse Aggregate 17A.

/2 31 23 03 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_03.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Excavation and Fill for Utilities

Section 31 23 03
2. For Pipes 36 Inches and Larger:
a. Pea stone bedding to spring line.
b. Geotextile filter fabric over pea stone.
c. MDOT Granular Material Class II to 1-foot above pipe.
3. For Utility Structures:
a. Sand gravel fill of such gradation that 100% will pass a 1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10% by
weight is lost by washing.
b. MDOT 902 Granular Material Class II modified to 100% passing a 1/2-inch sieve.
E. Pea Stone: Clean stone with 100% passing a 3/8-inch sieve and 100% being retained on a No. 8 sieve.
F. Trench Backfill: MDOT 902 Granular Material Class II.
G. Suitable Material:
1. Native Material Which is Used as Backfill:
a. Exclusive of gray or blue clay, peat, organic matter, or frozen lumps.
b. Containing no rocks or lumps over 3 inches in greatest dimension.
c. Having a moisture content such that material is capable of being compacted to 90% maximum
density.
2. MDOT 902 Granular Material Class II if native material is not adequate in opinion of Engineer.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section,
shall be as selected by Contractor subject to the approval of independent testing laboratory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting For Utility Structures: In accordance with this Section.
B. Obstructions:
1. Remove and dispose of buried trees, rocks, boulders, driving surfaces, pipes and the like, as required
for the performance of the Work.
2. Exercise care in excavating around catch basins, inlets and manholes.
3. Avoid removing or loosening castings.
4. Repair and replace damaged or displaced castings; remove dirt entering utility structures during the
performance of the Work at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Cutting Paved Surfaces and Similar Improvements:
1. Cut pavement prior to excavating.
2. Cuts shall be a minimum of 1-foot wider than trench on each side. When the remaining width of paved
surface is less than 4 feet, remove the entire paved surface.
3. Before removing pavement, mark the pavement neatly, paralleling pipe lines and existing street lines.
Space the marks the width of the trench.
4. Concrete:
a. Pavements: Saw cut if over 3 feet from expansion or construction joint, otherwise remove to
joint.
b. Sidewalks: Remove to joints.
c. Curb and Gutter: Remove to joints.
5. Final Surface Course Bituminous: Saw cut joints unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
6. Do not disturb or damage the adjacent pavement. If the adjacent pavement is disturbed or damaged,
remove and replace the damaged pavement.
7. Contractor may tunnel under curbs that are encountered. Replace curb disturbed by construction.
8. Dispose of materials removed.

/2 31 23 03 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_03.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Excavation and Fill for Utilities

Section 31 23 03
D. Utilities to be Abandoned:
1. When pipes, conduits, sewers or utility structures are removed from the trench leaving dead ends in
the ground, fully plug such ends with brick and mortar.
2. Entirely remove abandoned utility structures unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
3. Remove from the excavation materials which can be readily salvaged and store on the Site.
4. Salvageable materials will remain the property of Owner unless otherwise indicated by Owner.
E. Extra Earth Excavation:
1. If soft material, which in the opinion of independent testing laboratory is not suitable, is encountered
below the normal trench bottom or below a utility structure Engineer may order the removal of this soft
material and its replacement with specified material in order to make a suitable foundation for the
construction of the utility or utility structure.
2. Extra earth excavation made at the order of Engineer will be paid for on the basis of the actual quantity
of material excavated. Do not proceed further until instructions are received and necessary
measurements made for purposes of establishing additional volume of excavation.
3. No extra payment will be made if removal is required as a result of poor dewatering techniques.
4. Special foundations shall be determined on an individual basis by Engineer in cooperation with
Contractor, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
A. General:
1. By open cut from surface unless designated otherwise.
2. Slope sides of trench adequately for protection of the Work and safety of workers.
B. Maximum Length of Open Trench: 200 feet.
C. Width:
1. Minimum Clearance on Each Side of Utility:
a. To 16 Inches Diameter: 8 inches.
b. Greater Than 16 Inches Diameter: Pipe outside diameter times 1.25 plus 12 inches.
2. Maximum Width of Trench at Top of Bedding:
a. Up Through 30-Inch Diameter Utility: 16 inches plus utility diameter.
b. Greater Than 30-Inch Diameter Utility: 24 inches plus utility diameter.
3. Maximum Width of Trench at Ground Surface:
a. Not outside of the property line or easement.
b. As required for protection of the Work and safety of workers.
c. Use sheeting, bracing and shoring if required.
4. Provide sufficient space in the trench to permit the joint to be properly made.
D. Depth:
1. Excavate to provide the elevations, grades, and depths of cover indicated on the Drawings and herein
specified.
2. The 4 inches of required bedding material below the utility may be omitted if:
a. Approved by Engineer.
b. Contractor arranges and pays for testing of the native material.
c. The native material complies with MDOT 902 Granular Material Class II material, modified so
that 100% passes a 1/2-inch sieve.
d. The material is compacted as specified herein.
3. Excavate to the normal trench bottom elevation with an accuracy of 0.10 feet.
E. Rock Excavation:
1. Where rock excavation is encountered within the excavation, expose the surface of the rock sufficient
to permit adequate measurements to be taken before the rock excavation is started.
2. Notify Engineer prior to removal if rock is encountered.
3. No utility shall be within 6 inches of rock.
4. Blasting:
a. Only with permission of Engineer and in accordance with laws and regulations applying thereto.
b. Secure permit if required.

/2 31 23 03 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_03.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Excavation and Fill for Utilities

Section 31 23 03
c. Notify utility and public agencies.
d. Explosives shall be used with extreme care by experienced workers only.
e. Hours shall be fixed by Engineer.
f. Contractor solely responsible for safety, damage and control of blasting operations.
F. Bedding:
1. Place the bedding material up to 1/8 the height of the utility. Compact as herein specified.
2. Accurately shape the bedding material to fit the pipe shape. Recess the bedding to relieve the
pressure on the bell or other projecting utility joint.
3. After laying out the utility, tamp additional bedding in place up to the midpoint of the utility. Use hand-
operated compactors to achieve the required compaction.
4. Place additional bedding up to 12 inches above the top of the utility. Use hand operated compactors
to achieve required compaction.
5. Place bedding in maximum lifts of 10 inches.
6. No payment shall be made for aggregate or stone bedding when used for Contractor convenience.
G. Trench Backfill:
1. Use backfill material as each Drawing detail indicates and as the material is defined herein.
2. Place backfill in 12-inch lifts and compact as herein specified. Engineer will consider greater lifts if
testing indicates that the required compaction is being achieved.
H. Utility Structures:
1. Place and compact specified bedding below utility structures.
2. Backfill around utility structures shall be of the same type backfill as that required for the trench in
accordance with these Contract Documents.
3. Place backfill in 12-inch lifts and compact as herein specified.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. General: Contractor responsibility and expense.
B. Disposal Sites:
1. Material desired by Owner shall be disposed of by Contractor in the following priority order:
a. At locations designated by the Contract Documents.
b. At locations on or within 1 mile of the Project Site designated by Owner after construction starts.
c. At locations on the Project Site by written arrangement with individual property owners.
d. Owner may choose not to accept certain materials, including but not necessarily limited to, items
from clearing, muck, peat, marl and whole or broken man-made items removed by construction.
2. Material not desired by Owner shall be disposed of in a location determined by Contractor.
3. Disposal of materials shall not violate laws, rules, regulations and the like regarding the filling of flood
plains, wetlands and other environmentally sensitive areas.
4. Provide adequate controls to maintain disposal sites in a neat and safe condition by periodic leveling
of material, and such other practices as are necessary.
5. Provide soil erosion control measures necessary to prevent soil erosion and sedimentation of
wetlands, rivers, ditches, or similar low lying areas.
3.4 EXCESS WATER CONTROL
A. Regulations and Permits: Comply with soil erosion control permit in accordance with Mich. P.A. 451, Part 91
of 1994, the Natural Resource and Environmental Protection Act, and all pertinent rules, laws, and
regulations.
B. Unfavorable Weather:
1. Do not place, spread or roll fill material during unfavorable weather conditions.
2. Do not resume operations until moisture content and fill density are satisfactory to independent testing
laboratory.

/2 31 23 03 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_03.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Excavation and Fill for Utilities

Section 31 23 03
C. Pumping and Drainage:
1. Provide, maintain and use at all times during construction adequate means and devices to promptly
remove and dispose of water from every source entering the excavations or other parts of the Work.
2. Dewater by means which will ensure dry excavations, preserve final lines and grades, and do not
disturb or displace adjacent soil. Use wells, portable pumps, temporary underdrains, or other methods
as necessary.
3. Perform Pumping and Drainage:
a. In such a manner to cause no damage to property or structures and without interference to the
rights of the public, owners of private property, pedestrians, vehicular traffic, or the work of other
contractors.
b. In accordance with pertinent laws, rules, ordinances, and regulations.
4. Do not overload or obstruct existing drainage facilities.
D. General:
1. Keep excavations dry during construction.
2. Remove water by use of wells, well points, portable pumps, bailing, drains, underdrains or other
acceptable methods.
3. Provide crushed stone or gravel as required to aid dewatering operations.
4. Divert or temporarily reroute existing sewers and drainage of discharge lines to adequate and
acceptable outlets during construction. Contractor responsible to ascertain availability of outlets.
5. Divert surface water from entering excavations by construction and maintenance of channels or
berms.
6. Sediment traps and other soil erosion control measures shall prevent soil particles from entering any
sewer, watercourse or similar conveyance.
7. Protect utilities, utility structures, and structures, existing and new, from hydrostatic uplift.
3.5 SHEETING, SHORING AND BRACING EXCAVATIONS
A. General:
1. Furnish, put in place and maintain sheeting, bracing and shoring as may be required to properly
support the sides of excavations and to prevent movement of earth which could in any way injure the
Work or adjacent property.
2. Exercise care in the removal of sheeting, shoring, bracing and timbering to prevent collapse or caving
of the excavation faces being supported and damage to the Work and adjacent property.
3. A pipe-laying box may be used in lieu of sheeting.
B. Sheeting:
1. Do not install by jetting.
2. Remove as backfilling proceeds, unless ordered left in place by Engineer. Use care to fill and compact
voids created by removal, especially below mid-height of utility.
3. Sheeting Left in Place:
a. Requires written approval of Engineer.
b. Cut off minimum of 2 feet below finished grade.
3.6 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all excess excavated material, trash, and debris
resulting from construction operations. Remove equipment and tools. Leave the Site in a neat and orderly
condition acceptable to Engineer, and in accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste
Management.


END OF SECTION 31 23 03


/2 31 23 03 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_03.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Excavation and Fill for Structures

Section 31 23 06
31 23 06 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_06.DOCX
SECTION 31 23 06 EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of the major items listed below:
1. Excavation.
2. Backfilling.
3. Sheeting.
4. Bracing.
5. Shoring.
6. Disposal of excavated materials.
7. Excess water control.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Standards:
a. D698 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort.
b. D1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.
2. MDOT:
a. 2003 Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Terms:
1. Driving Surface: A pavement, curb, or sidewalk.
2. Excavation:
a. Removing the following materials from their present location:
1) Native below-grade material such as soil, rocks, boulders less than 1/2 cubic yard in
volume, and buried trees.
2) Man-made items such as, but not necessarily limited to:
a) Bituminous and concrete paving.
b) Curbs.
c) Riprap.
d) Head walls.
e) Underground utilities.
f) Manholes and catch basins.
g) Foundations.
h) Sidewalks.
3. Fill: Imported material which is placed in structure undercut.
4. Hardpan:
a. Cemented soil layers.
b. Is not hard clay layers that are not cemented.
5. Imported Material: Soil material which is purchased by Contractor and hauled onto the Site.
6. Native Material: Soil and other natural earth materials, except rock, which are existing on the Site
prior to the start of Work.
7. Pavement: Any combination of subbase, base course and concrete, bituminous or aggregate surface
course, including shoulders, placed on a subgrade. Includes roadways, parking areas, driveways, and
bituminous seal coat.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Excavation and Fill for Structures

Section 31 23 06
31 23 06 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_06.DOCX
8. Rock Excavation:
a. Excavation of igneous, metamorphic or sedimentary rock or hardpan which cannot be excavated
without continuous drilling or blasting or continuous use of a ripper or other special equipment.
b. Excavation of boulders of 1/2 cubic yard or more in volume.
9. Structure: A building, retaining wall, tank, footing, slab, or other similar construction.
10. Structure Backfill: Soil or other material which is placed against walls or sides of structures.
11. Subbase: The layer of material placed on the subgrade as part of the pavement structure.
12. Subgrade:
a. Below structures and below fill on the Site: The top elevation of the undisturbed native material
after all top soil is stripped off and excavation is completed.
b. Below driving surfaces: The bottom elevation of the subbase.
13. Undercut: Excavation of native material from below the bottom of footings, floors, structures and
subbases.
14. Utility Structures: Manhole, catch basin, valve chamber, junction chamber, water main valve, or other
similar utility appurtenance.
15. Other Definitions: Other earthwork terms not defined in the Contract Documents shall be as defined in
MDOT Standard Specifications for Construction.
1.5 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Excavation Side Stability: Be responsible for the structural design of all sheet piling, underpinning, shoring
and bracing to prevent sides of excavation from collapsing and causing damage to adjacent structures,
pavements, and materials.
B. Quantities: Determine the required quantities of all earthwork materials and operations and use as the basis
for the lump sum Bid.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing will be performed in accordance with Division 01 Section Testing Services.
B. Compaction:
1. Predominately Granular Soils:
a. Density shall be determined by using the modified Proctor method, ASTM D1557.
b. Compact fill and backfill to at least 95% maximum density.
c. The first 12-inches of subgrade below all structures, fill and backfill on the Site:
1) Shall be tested for density.
2) Compact to at least 95% maximum density if the existing density is below 95%.
2. Predominately Cohesive Soils:
a. Density shall be determined by using the standard Proctor method, ASTM D698.
b. Compact fill and backfill to at least 95% maximum density.
c. The first 12-inches of subgrade below all structures, fill, and backfill on the Site:
1) Shall be tested for density.
2) Compact to at least 95% maximum density if the existing density is below 95%.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: For imported materials:
1. Source.
2. MDOT classification.
3. Gradation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Dust Control:
1. Use all legal means necessary to control dust on and near the Work and on and near all off-site
borrow areas if such dust is caused by Contractor's operations during performance of the Work or if
resulting from the condition of the Site when earthwork operations are suspended.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Excavation and Fill for Structures

Section 31 23 06
31 23 06 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_06.DOCX
2. Moisten or otherwise treat haul roads, delivery roads, temporary site access roads and other surfaces
as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent
performance of other work on the Site.
3. Scrape, broom, or vacuum adjacent streets to remove tracked dirt every Friday afternoon, or more
often as necessary if directed by Engineer.
4. Utilize vacuum if dust from brooming is excessive in opinion of Engineer.
B. Existing Structures, Utility Structures, and Utilities:
1. Call MISS DIG to locate all existing underground utilities prior to starting excavation.
2. Where utilities, utility structures, or structures are encountered which are in active use:
a. Provide adequate protection for them.
b. Be responsible for damages to them.
3. Provide stand-by utility service if temporary removal is necessary for a period exceeding 2 hours.
4. Where utility service connections to occupied buildings must be temporarily disconnected, give 48
hours notice to the affected occupants of the time and duration of the anticipated shutoff.
5. Notify Fire Department 48 hours in advance if water main or fire supply line shutoff is required.
6. Raise, lower, or move underground utilities, utility structures, or structures which interfere with the
structure being constructed as part of this Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. All material shall be subject to the approval of independent testing laboratory.
2. For approval of imported material, notify independent testing laboratory at least 1 week in advance of
intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow area, and permit independent testing
laboratory to sample as necessary from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance tests to
prove the quality of the material.
B. Material Sources and Uses:
1. Native material unless quantity is not sufficient; then shall be imported material:
a. Sand layers below floor slabs.
b. Fill in structure undercut.
c. Stone stabilization course below structures.
d. Structure backfill below driving surfaces.
e. Structure backfill not below driving surfaces.
C. Granular Layer Below Floor Slabs:
1. Choose Either of the Following:
a. Sand-gravel fill of such gradation that 100% will pass a 1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10%
by weight is lost by washing.
b. MDOT 902, Granular Material Class II modified to 100% passing a 1/2-inch sieve.
D. Fill In Structure Undercut: MDOT 902, Granular Material Class II.
E. Structure Backfill Below Driving Surfaces: MDOT 902, Granular Material Class II.
F. Structure Backfill Not Below Driving Surfaces:
1. Native material.
2. Exclusive of gray or blue clay, peat, organic matter, or frozen lumps.
3. Containing no rocks or lumps over 3 inches in greatest dimension.
4. Obtain approval for using native material as backfill from independent testing laboratory.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section,
shall be as selected by Contractor subject to the approval of independent testing laboratory.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Excavation and Fill for Structures

Section 31 23 06
31 23 06 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_06.DOCX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting:
1. For Structures: In accordance with this Section.
2. For Utility Structures: In accordance with Division 31 Section Excavation and Fill for Utilities.
B. Bracing and Sheeting:
1. Do not install by jetting.
2. Furnish, put in place, and maintain all sheeting, bracing, and shoring as may be required to properly
support the sides of all excavations and to prevent all movement of earth which could in any way injure
the Work or adjacent property.
3. Exercise care in the removal of sheeting, shoring, bracing, and timbering to prevent collapse or caving
of the excavation faces being supported and damage to the Work and adjacent property.
4. Do not leave any sheeting or bracing in the excavation after completion of the Work, unless approved
by Engineer.
C. Obstructions: Remove and dispose of buried trees, rocks, boulders, driving surfaces, pipes, and the like, as
required for the performance of the Work.
D. Cutting Paved Surfaces and Similar Improvements:
1. All cuts shall be a minimum of 1-foot wider than excavation on each side. When the remaining width of
paved surface is less than 4 feet, remove the entire paved surface.
2. Before removing pavement, mark the pavement neatly.
3. Concrete: Saw cut if over 3 feet from expansion or construction joint, otherwise remove to joint.
a. Pavements: Saw cut if over 3 feet from expansion or construction joint, otherwise remove to
joint.
b. Sidewalks: Remove to joints.
c. Curb and Gutter: Remove to joints.
4. Final Surface Course Bituminous: Saw cut joints unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
5. Do not disturb or damage the adjacent pavement. If the adjacent pavement is disturbed or damaged,
remove and replace the damaged pavement.
6. Contractor may tunnel under curbs that are encountered. Replace curb disturbed by construction.
7. Dispose of materials removed.
E. Undercut:
1. If suitable bearing for foundations is not encountered at the elevations indicated on the Drawings
immediately notify Engineer.
2. If soft material, which in the opinion of independent testing laboratory is not suitable, is encountered
below a structure, Engineer may order the removal of this soft material and its replacement with
specified material in order to make a suitable foundation for the construction of the structure.
3. All undercutting made at the order of Engineer will be paid for on the basis of the actual quantity of
material excavated. Do not proceed further until instructions are received and necessary
measurements made for purposes of establishing additional volume of excavation.
4. No extra payment will be made if removal is required as a result of poor dewatering techniques.
5. Undercutting which is specifically indicated on the Drawings or herein specified, shall be included in
the base Bid.
6. Soil removed may be used as fill in areas not below driving surfaces, structures, or utility structures.
7. Compact subgrade at bottom of undercut prior to placing fill.
8. Place and compact specified fill in undercut.
9. Lateral extent of undercut shall be a horizontal distance equal to the depth of undercut below
structure.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Excavation and Fill for Structures

Section 31 23 06
31 23 06 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_06.DOCX
F. Excavating:
1. All excavation shall be by open cut from the surface except as herein specified or as indicated on the
Drawings.
2. All excavations for structures shall be made in such manner and to such depth and width as will give
ample room for building the structures and for bracing, sheeting, and supporting the sides of the
excavation, for pumping and draining groundwater and wastewater which may be encountered, and
for the removal of all materials excavated.
3. Excavate to the required cross section and elevation indicated in the Drawings. Subgrade shall not
vary more than 0.1 feet above or below the established elevations.
4. All depressions caused by excess excavation, traffic or rolling shall be filled with MDOT 902 Granular
Material Class II or approved fill and rerolled and compacted in place as specified herein.
5. If required because of excess water conditions, place stone stabilization course prior to proceeding
with construction. Place filter fabric over stone stabilization course.
G. Rock Excavation:
1. Notify Engineer prior to removal if rock is encountered.
2. Where rock is encountered within the excavation, expose the surface of the rock sufficient to permit
adequate measurements to be taken before the rock excavation is started.
H. Frost Protection: Protect bottoms of excavations from frost.
3.2 STRUCTURE BACKFILL
A. General:
1. Remove debris from excavations before backfilling.
2. Do not backfill against foundation walls until:
a. Approved by Engineer.
b. All indicated perimeter insulation is in place.
3. Protect insulation during filling operations.
4. Wherever possible, backfilling shall be simultaneous on both sides of walls to equalize lateral
pressures.
5. Place all backfill in layers not exceeding 12 inches in depth.
6. Do not place backfill on frozen subgrade.
3.3 EXCESS WATER CONTROL
A. Regulations and Permits: Comply with soil erosion control permit in accordance with Mich. P.A. 451, Part 91
of 1994, the Natural Resource and Environmental Protection Act, and all pertinent rules, laws, and
regulations.
B. Unfavorable Weather:
1. Do not place, spread, or roll any fill material during unfavorable weather conditions.
2. Do not resume operations until moisture content and fill density are satisfactory to independent testing
laboratory.
C. Pumping and Drainage:
1. Provide, maintain, and use at all times during construction adequate means and devices to promptly
remove and dispose of all water from every source entering the excavations or other parts of the
Work.
2. Dewater by means which will ensure dry excavations, preserve final lines and grades, and do not
disturb or displace adjacent soil. Use wells, portable pumps, temporary underdrains or other methods
as is necessary.
3. Perform Pumping and Drainage:
a. In such a manner to cause no damage to property or structures and without interference with the
rights of the public, owners of private property, pedestrians, vehicular traffic, or the work of other
contractors.
b. In accordance with all pertinent laws, rules, ordinances and regulations.
4. Do not overload or obstruct existing drainage facilities.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Excavation and Fill for Structures

Section 31 23 06
31 23 06 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_23_06.DOCX
5. Provide berms or channels to prevent flooding of subgrade. Promptly remove all water collected in
depressions.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. General:
1. Remove and properly dispose of all excavated material not needed to complete filling and backfilling.
2. Dispose of excess excavated material at a location on the Site as directed by Owner.
3. Disposal of all materials shall not violate laws, rules, regulations and the like regarding the filling of
flood plains, wetlands and other environmentally sensitive areas.
4. Provide adequate controls to maintain disposal sites in a neat and safe condition by periodic leveling
of material and such other practices as are necessary.
5. Provide all soil erosion control measures necessary to prevent soil erosion and sedimentation of
wetlands, rivers, ditches, or similar low lying areas.
3.5 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all excess excavated material, trash, and debris
resulting from construction operations. Remove equipment and tools. Leave the Site in a neat and orderly
condition acceptable to Engineer, and in conformance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste
Management.


END OF SECTION 31 23 06


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

Section 31 25 00
SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROLS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing, installation and maintenance of soil erosion and sedimentation control
measures.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. Soil erosion and sedimentation control rules and guidelines of:
a. Michigan Department of Environment Quality (MDEQ).
b. Grand Traverse County Drain Commissioner.
2. MDOT:
a. 2012 Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
c. 2000 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Manual.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Mulch blankets.
2. Geotextile fabric.
3. Seed mixtures.
4. Fertilizer.
5. Turbidity curtain.
B. Informational Submittals: Name and certification of registered storm water operator.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Stop Work Order:
1. Owner reserves the right to issue a Stop Work Order if soil erosion and sedimentation controls are not
properly installed or maintained.
2. Work performed under a Stop Work Order will not be considered for payment.
3. Costs resulting from delay due to issuance of a Stop Work Order shall be the responsibility of
Contractor.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign
matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.

/2 31 25 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_25_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

Section 31 25 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Vegetation:
1. Temporary Vegetative Cover: Perennial ryegrass.
2. Permanent Vegetative Cover: Seed, fertilizer, mulch and sod as specified in Division 32 Section
Turf and Grasses.
3. Plantings: As specified in Division 32 Section Turf and Grasses.
B. Mulch Blanket:
1. Biodegradable:
a. Straw: North American Green S-75; or equal.
b. Coconut: North American Green C-125; or equal.
c. Straw and Coconut: North American Green SC-150; or equal.
2. Non-Degradable: Polyester: North American Green P-300; or equal.
3. Anchoring Staples or Pins:
a. Hardwood stakes at least 6 inches long; or
b. North American Green Bio-Stake blanket pins at least 6 inches long; or
c. Steel wire staples at least 6 inches long.
C. Silt Guard:
1. Above Ground Filters:
a. The Silt Saver by Silt Saver, Inc.; or equal.
b. Nonwoven polypropylene filter with needle punched holes.
c. High density polyethylene frame.
2. Below Ground Filters:
a. Siltsak by ACF Environmental.
b. Geotextile fabric silt sump.
c. 200 gallons per minute per square foot (GPM/SF) permeability.
d. Manufactured to meet size of inlet.
D. Dewatering Filter Bags: Made From Geotextile Blanket:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Ultratech International, Inc.: Ultra Dewatering Bag.
b. Pactec: Geopac.
c. Or equal.
E. Geotextile Silt Fence:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Synthetic Industries, Terra Tex SC.
b. Exxon, GTF-180.
c. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Standards:
1. Achieve Effective Erosion Control:
a. Provide all materials.
b. Promptly take actions necessary to prevent off Site sedimentation.
2. Maintain erosion controls.
3. Remove temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control measures once permanent measures are
established and accepted by the Engineer.

/2 31 25 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_25_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

Section 31 25 00
B. Site Evaluation:
1. Conduct a field evaluation of the Site:
a. Prior to start of the Work.
b. With representatives of:
1) Engineer.
2) Grand Traverse County Drain Commissioner.
3.2 TEMPORARY VEGETATIVE COVER
A. General:
1. Provide temporary seed if permanent measures will not be placed within 15 days of initial disturbance
and area will not undergo further earth change within 15 days of initial disturbance:
2. Within 15 days from the time final grade has been established, provide permanent soil erosion and
sedimentation control measures.
B. Seed: Apply uniformly at a minimum rate of 70 pounds per acre.
C. Mulch: As needed to effectively control soil erosion.
3.3 MULCH BLANKET
A. Direction of installation, staple patterns and other requirements in accordance with Manufacturer's
directions.
B. Location: Where indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.4 GEOTEXTILE SILT FENCE
A. Install silt fence in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Location: Where indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.5 BUILDING PROJECT CONSTRUCTION
A. During construction conform to the following general rules:
1. Minimize the amount of earth disturbed at any one time.
2. Establish a construction sequence which includes adequate erosion control.
3. As much as practicable, direct storm water away from the construction area. Direct diverted storm
water to a stable on-Site area.
4. Collect runoff from the Site in sediment basins, traps or through filters.
5. Establish an inspection and maintenance schedule, paying special attention to the beginning of the
various stages of construction.
6. Keep in mind that the primary objective is to keep the soil on Site.
3.6 AIRBORNE SEDIMENT
A. Dust Control:
1. Use legal means necessary to control dust on and near the Work and on and near off Site borrow
areas if such dust is caused by Contractors operations during performance of the Work or if resulting
from the condition of the Site when earthwork operations are suspended.
2. Treat haul roads, delivery roads, temporary Site access roads and other surfaces as required to
prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other
work on the Site, and as directed by Engineer.
3. Periodically scrape and broom adjacent streets and paved areas to remove tracked dirt.

/2 31 25 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_25_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

Section 31 25 00
B. Wind Erosion:
1. Erect and maintain barriers to prevent migration of windblown sediment off Site.
2. Conduct operations in such a manner as to minimize the amount of Site area exposed to wind erosion.
3. Be responsible for removal of windblown sediments deposited off Site, including costs for repairs
required due to sediment deposition and removal.


END OF SECTION 31 25 00


/2 31 25 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\31_25_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Concrete Walks

Section 32 13 14
SECTION 32 13 14 CONCRETE WALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of concrete walks.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Publications:
a. A820 - Steel Fibers for Fiber Reinforced Concrete.
b. C33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
c. C39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
d. C94 - Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
e. C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
f. C150 - Specification for Portland Cement.
g. C260 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
h. C309 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
i. C330 - Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.
j. C494 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
k. C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in
Portland Cement Concrete.
2. ACI American Concrete Institute:
a. 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
b. 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass
Concrete.
c. 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
d. 303R - Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice.
e. 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
f. 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
g. 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.
h. 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete.
3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Provide mix design for concrete to be supplied.
2. Provide Manufacturers cut sheets for joint filler, sealant, and truncated domes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement:
1. Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I.
2. Do not use different types of cement, different manufacturers of cement, or different degrees of
fineness.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F.

/2 32 13 14 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_13_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Concrete Walks

Section 32 13 14
C. Aggregates:
1. Grade aggregates according to procedures of ASTM C136, Class M, Exposure 4.
2. Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33-5S, Number 57 (1-inch), crushed limestone.
3. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33.
D. Water: Clean, fresh and potable.
E. Admixtures:
1. General:
a. No admixture shall contain more than 0.1% water soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious
material.
b. No admixture shall contain calcium chloride.
2. Air-Entraining:
a. Comply with ASTM C260.
b. Daravair series or Darex series, by W.R. Grace & Company; Micro Air, by BASF Admixtures,
Inc.; or equal.
F. Curing Agents:
1. Curing agents shall comply with ASTM C309.
2. Provide approved products by Symons Corporation, W.R. Meadows, L & M Chemical, Master Builders
or Dayton-Superior which are compatible with floor coatings or toppings specified.
3. Compounds:
a. Curing:
1) 1100 Clear by W.R. Meadows.
2) Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W) by Dayton Superior.
3) Resi-Chem Clear Cure by Symons.
4) Confilm by Master Builders.
5) L & M Cure by L & M Chemical.
G. Concrete Reinforcement:
1. In accordance with ASTM A185.
2. Welded wire fabric 6-inch x 6-inch x W1.4 x W1.4.
2.2 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Design mix to project normal-weight concrete consisting of Portland cement aggregate, air-entrained add
mixture and water producing the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi (min) at 28 days.
2. Air Content: 6.5% 1.5%.
3. Slump: 1 to 3 inches.
4. Water Cement Ratio: 0.5 maximum.
B. Sand Cushions and Sand Fill: 4 inches of granular material.
2.3 FORM WORK
A. Provide necessary form work to provide concrete dimensions indicated on the Drawings 1/2-inch.
1. Forms to be straight and true, minimum 1-5/8-inch thick wood, full depth of concrete or steel forms.
2. All curved radius pours to be smooth deflectable steel.
2.4 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Joint fiber shall be preformed, composed of either blended, bonded flexible and waterproof fiber meeting the
requirements of AASHTO M213 or polyvinyl chloride with fabric strand.
B. Reinforcement: Proflex by Oscoda Plastics;

or approved equal.
C. Full depth of concrete.

/2 32 13 14 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_13_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Concrete Walks

Section 32 13 14
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint sealant to be gray elastomeric silicone or polyurethane sealant conforming to ASTM 920: Sonoborn
SL-2; or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GRADING
A. Provide smooth base of granular material compacted to 95% of its maximum density in accordance with
ASTM D1557.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Weather and Temperature Limitations:
1. Do not place concrete when the temperature of the air is at or expected to drop below 40 degrees F
for at least 7 days after placing.
2. Do not place concrete if portions of the base, subbase, or subgrade layer are frozen, or if the grade
exhibits poor stability from excessive moisture levels.
3. Do not place concrete when the temperature of the air is above or expected to exceed 85 degrees F
for at least 7 days after placing.
B. Cold Weather Concrete Operations:
1. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R.
2. Recommended Protective Measures:
a. Heating materials.
b. Providing insulating blankets and windbreaks.
c. Heated enclosures.
3. Advise Engineer of planned protective measures.
4. Straw or similar materials shall not be allowed.
5. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
6. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade.
C. Hot Weather Concrete Operations:
1. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 305R.
2. Recommended Protective Measures:
a. Cooling materials.
b. Concrete placement during cooler hours of the day.
c. Providing shading and windbreaks.
3. Advise Engineer of planned protective measures.
D. Slope:
1. All walks should have a cross slope of a minimum 1% and maximum 2% sloped toward a curb or
lower elevation.
2. No walks should exceed 5% longitudinal slope.
E. Preparation of Base:
1. Excavate to the required depth and to a width that will permit forming.
2. Remove unsuitable material below the required depth and replace with sound earth.
3. Shape and compact the base to conform to the section indicated on the Drawings.
F. Forms:
1. Use fixed forms.
2. Apply form releasing agent to prevent concrete from bonding to forms.
3. Provide straight, full depth forms free of warp and strong enough to resist springing during concrete
placement.
4. Firmly stake fixed forms to prohibit movement.

/2 32 13 14 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_13_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Concrete Walks

Section 32 13 14
G. Placing and Finishing Concrete:
1. Place all concrete in accordance with ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R.
2. Moisten base before placing concrete.
3. Place concrete and consolidate, including along the faces of the forms, before finishing.
4. Place and finish in a continuous operation.
5. When replacing gutters along with concrete walk ramps, construct the gutter to the same dimensions
and profile and use the same reinforcement pattern as the existing gutter.
6. Float the surface just enough to produce a smooth surface free from irregularities.
7. Round edges and joints with an approved finishing tool.
8. Broom finish concrete walks and ramps by drawing a fine-hair broom across the concrete surface,
perpendicular to the line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture
acceptable to the Engineer.
H. Joints:
1. General: Comply with ACI 318-6.3, 6.4, and ACI 301, Section 6. Construct expansion, weakened-
plane (contraction), and construction joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete.
Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction) joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated on the Drawings. Contraction joints for curbs shall be provided at
10-foot intervals and 20-foot spacing for slabs, unless shown otherwise. Construct weakened plane
joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows:
a. Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a
recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
b. Sawed Joints: Form weakened-plane joints using powered saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will
not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action.
3. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement
operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at
expansion joints.
4. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated. Locate
expansion joints at 100 feet on center along linear lengths of curb and walks, and at points of radii of
curbs unless otherwise indicated.
5. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 1-inch below
finished surface for joint sealant.
6. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more
than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.
I. Thickness: Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide a minimum thickness of
4 inches.
J. Where walkways cross driveways, provide a minimum thickness of 6 inches.
K. Backfilling:
1. After the concrete has gained sufficient strength, remove fixed forms and backfill with sound earth.
2. Compact and level the backfill 1-inch below the surface of the concrete.
3.3 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screening and floating. Use hand method
only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform
texture.
B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to
remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish.
C. Work edges of slabs, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2-inch radius, unless otherwise
indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface.

/2 32 13 14 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_13_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Concrete Walks

Section 32 13 14
D. After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared,
complete surface finishing, as follows:
1. Exterior slabs, sidewalks, flow channels, flumes, curbs, and other similar concrete pavement types
shall have a non-slip finish by scoring the surface with a fine-hair broom, perpendicular to the line of
traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Engineer.
2. Retaining walls, wing walls, light pole bases, and other surfaces exposed to view upon completion of
work shall be given a rubbed finish as specified below:
a. Immediately upon removal of the forms, the surfaces to be rubbed shall be pointed up,
thoroughly wetted and then rubbed with a No. 20 carborundum brick and water so as to produce
a true, even, and smooth surface. When necessary to fill pinholes, and upon areas which have
been reconstructed, rubbing shall be done by carborundum brick and a thin cement grout
composed of 1 part of cement and 2 parts of fine washed silicone sand, all of which shall pass a
No. 20 sieve. The surfaces finished with grout shall be carefully scraped with a steel edge so as
to remove all surplus grout, after which it shall be given a final rub with a wood float until all skin
and form marks shall be removed. No "wash" composed of cement and water, or cement, sand
and water shall be used in this process.
E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints
and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as
directed by Engineer.
3.4 CURING
A. General:
1. After texturing operations have been completed and after the free water has left the surface, coat the
concrete walk surface and sides of slip-formed concrete walks with a uniform layer of membrane
curing compound.
2. Apply 1 coat of curing compound on non-grooved surfaces and 2 coats on grooved surfaces.
3. Apply not less than 1 gallon per 25 square yards of concrete for each application.
4. Apply the second coat after the first has dried sufficiently but do not exceed 2 hours between coats.
5. Keep the compound thoroughly mixed according to the Manufacturers recommendations.
6. Do not thin curing compound.
7. Reapply curing compound immediately to surfaces damaged by rain, joint sawing, foot traffic or other
activities.
8. If fixed forms are removed during the curing period, coat the entire area of the sides of the concrete
walk with curing compound immediately after removal of forms.
B. These requirements are minimum requirements only. Repair or replacement of concrete showing damage
due to inadequate curing is required. All costs associated with this corrective work will be borne by the
Contractor.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect the walks from damage until acceptance of the Work.
B. Protect the concrete from freezing until the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least
1000 psi.
C. Maintain walks as clean as practical by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Sweep concrete walks and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to
final inspection.
3.6 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. The following list of deficiencies shall be considered defective work and shall be replaced by the Contractor
at no cost to the Owner:
1. Difference in elevation between panels of 1/2-inch or greater.
2. Cracks of any length that are 1/8-inch wide or wider.

/2 32 13 14 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_13_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Concrete Walks

Section 32 13 14
3. Surface spalling covering in excess of 20% of the area of any 1 panel.
4. A hole that is 1/2-inch or greater in depth and 2 inches or greater in diameter.
5. Residual splatter that is 1/2-inch or higher and attached to a panel.
6. Elevation difference of 3/4-inch in 10 feet caused by settling, that has not caused an elevation
difference between panels.
7. Multiple hairline cracking.
8. Footprints, bike tire tracks, animal tracks, or the like, created while concrete was not cured.
3.7 CLEAN-UP
A. For duration of work, Contractor is to maintain work area free of waste material, debris, and the like.
1. Contractor shall provide on-site containers as necessary for work of this Section. Locate as directed
by Construction Manager.
B. Upon completion and when directed by Construction Manager, Contractor shall remove all excess material,
debris, and equipment occasioned by the work.


END OF SECTION 32 13 14


/2 32 13 14 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_13_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Aggregate Surfacing

Section 32 15 00
SECTION 32 15 00 AGGREGATE SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of aggregate top course.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Standard Test Methods: 1557 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10-lb. Rammer and 18-inch Drop.
2. MDOT:
a. 2012 Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Aggregate:
a. Source.
b. MDOT classification.
2. Sieve analysis.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design.
B. Testing of Aggregate Materials: In accordance with Division 01 Section Testing Services.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Subbase:
1. MDOT 902 Granular Material Class II.
2. Native material.
3. Thickness Compacted In Place: 12 inches.

/1 32 15 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_15_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



Aggregate Surfacing

Section 32 15 00
B. Aggregate Base Course:
1. MDOT 902 Dense Graded Aggregate: 21AA Modified.
2. Thickness Compacted In Place: 4 inches.
C. Aggregate Top Course:
1. MDOT 902 Dense Graded Aggregate: 21AA Modified.
2. Thickness Compacted In Place: 4 inches.
D. The material for aggregate base compacted in place (CIP) shall be 21AA aggregate conforming to Table
902-1 and Table 902-2 of the 2012 Michigan Department of Transportation (MDOT) Standard Construction
Specifications, except for the following modifications.

Sieve Analysis, Total Percent Passing

21AA-Mod.

1 1/2"

1"

1/2"

No. 8

No. 30

LBW *
100 85 - 100 50 - 70 20 - 35 8 - 22 0 - 7
* Footnote e in Table 902-1 shall not apply to assure the base is permeable.

Physical Requirements
Crushed material, Min. 95%
Loss, % Max., Los Angeles Abrasion (MTM 102) 40%
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATING, FILLING, AND GRADING
A. Subgrade in accordance with Division 31 Section Grading.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation of Subgrade:
1. Smooth and trim subgrade to the required grade, line, and cross section to receive aggregate.
2. Compact the subgrade to 95% maximum density as defined in ASTM D1557.
3. The subgrade shall be smooth and free from irregularities in grade.
B. Placing Surface Courses:
1. Do not begin paving until subbase and base course have been reviewed by Engineer.
2. Place each layer uniformly, and shape with grader or other approved equipment until free from waves
and irregularities.
3. The thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6 inches.
4. Shape and compact until each layer achieves a compaction of not less than 95% maximum density as
defined in ASTM D1557.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, clean the pavement and related areas in accordance with
Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste Management.


END OF SECTION 32 15 00


/1 32 15 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_15_00.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Turf and Grasses

Section 32 92 00
32 92 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_92_00.DOCX
SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of the major items listed below:
1. Seed.
2. Fertilizer.
3. Mulch.
4. Sod.
5. Dune grass.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. MDOT:
a. 2012 Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Follow-up Maintenance: Maintenance required when seeding, sodding, or other vegetative practices do not
achieve the desired degree of stabilization.
B. Periodic Maintenance: Maintenance performed after the vegetation has been established.
1.5 LOCATION
A. Sodded Areas: As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Seeded Areas: All disturbed areas within the project limits not covered by other surface improvements or
features.
C. Mulch Blankets: As indicated on the Drawings.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Product Data for mulch blanket.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Samples: For netting and mulch blanket.
2. Supplier's certified analysis for each seed and fertilizer mixture required.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Submittals.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Turf and Grasses

Section 32 92 00
32 92 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_92_00.DOCX
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign
matter, and damage by weather or elements, and according to Manufacturer's directions.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: In accordance with Division 31 Section Grading.
B. Fertilizer:
1. Comply with MDOT 917.10, Class A except as herein specified.
2. Liquid Fertilizer for Hydroseed: 16-32-4 containing no chlorine.
C. Seed:
1. Mixture composed of certified seed of the following purity, germination, and proportions by Weight:
a. Lawns: Kentucky Blue Grass, 98% purity, 85% germination, TDS.
b. Roadside: Kentucky Blue Grass, 98% purity, 85% germination, TDS.
2. Furnish seed in durable bags, each marked by the supplier of the blended mix with a tag gi ving name,
lot number, net weight of contents, purity, and germination.
D. Mulch:
1. Small Grain:
a. Straw.
b. Hay.
2. Anchoring Material for Small Grain Mulch:
a. Netting:
1) Biodegradable.
2) Openings not to exceed 1-1/2 inches x 2 inches.
3) Minimum Roll Width: 35 inches.
4) Anchoring Staples or Pins: Wood pegs at least 6 inches long.
3. Hydromulch:
a. Slurry: Minimum 60% wood fiber mulch with remaining being recycled cellulose fibers.
b. Tackifier:
1) Manufacturers: Finn Fiber Plus; Finn Fiber Gum; or equal.
2) Synthetic fiber or gum.
4. Mulch Blankets:
a. Biodegradable:
1) Straw: North American Green S-75; or equal.
2) Coconut: North American Green C-125; or equal.
3) Straw and Coconut: North American Green SC-150; or equal.
b. Non Degradable Polyester: North American Green P-300; or equal.
c. Anchoring Staples or Pins: Hardwood stakes at least 6 inches long.
E. Sod: Comply with MDOT Section 917.13 except as herein specified.
F. Dune Grass:
1. The plants (Ammophila) shall be mature specimens native to this region of Michigan with good root
structure.
2. Each plant or culm (a single stem with roots attached) shall have one live rhizome minimum.
3. Culms with seed heads shall not be used.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Turf and Grasses

Section 32 92 00
32 92 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_92_00.DOCX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TOPSOIL
A. In accordance with Division 31 Section Grading.
3.2 SEEDBED PREPARATION
A. General:
1. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to the required grade and properly trimmed, bring soil
to a friable condition by disking, harrowing, or otherwise loosening and mixing to a depth of 3 inches to
4 inches. Thoroughly break all lumps and clods.
2. If the prepared seedbed is not fertilized, satisfactorily seeded, and mulched before the friable condition
is lost through compaction or crusting, repeat the seedbed preparation prior to seeding or reseeding.
B. Raking: Rake prepared seedbed before seeding.
3.3 FERTILIZING
A. Dry Fertilizer:
1. Broadcast on surface as first step in seeding process.
2. Apply with seeding if drilled.
3. Work fertilizer into the soil to a depth of 1-inch to 2 inches.
4. Apply uniformly.
5. Application Rate: Equivalent to 240 pounds per acre of 12-12-12.
B. Hydroseeding:
1. Apply fertilizer with seed.
2. Application Rate: Equivalent to 6.25 pounds per 1,000 square feet of 16-32-4.
3.4 SEEDING
A. Scheduling:
1. Within 30 days from the time the area was first disturbed.
2. Channel Banks: Within 24 hours from the time the area was first disturbed.
3. Seasonal Limitations:
a. May 1 through October 1.
b. Dormant seeding after November 1 but not on frozen ground.
B. Sowing:
1. Sow the seed following or in conjunction with the fertilizer and while the seed bed is in a friable
condition.
2. Do not sow seeds through mulch.
3. Application Rate:
a. Lawn Areas: Sow seed at a minimum rate of 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet.
b. Other Areas: Sow seed at a minimum rate of 35 lbs per acre.
C. Finishing: Float and lightly compact areas sown by hydro-seeder or the broadcast method to incorporate the
seed into the uppermost 1/2-inch of the soil.
D. Method:
1. Broadcast: Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per hour.
2. Mechanical drills.
3. Hydroseeder:
a. Use only equipment specifically designed for hydraulic seeding application.
b. Mix seed, fertilizer and pulverized mulch in water until uniformly blended into homogeneous
slurry.
c. Continue mixing during application.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Turf and Grasses

Section 32 92 00
32 92 00 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_92_00.DOCX
E. Inspection: Areas which are sown by hydro-seeder or the broadcast method shall be visually inspected for
uniformity of application; areas in which visual inspection fails to reveal an average of 2 seeds per square
inch shall be resown at no additional cost to Owner.
F. Seed on Slopes: Protect seeded slopes against erosion with mulch blanket.
3.5 MULCHING
A. Small Grain Mulch:
1. Application:
a. Immediately after seeding.
b. Uniform distribution.
c. Allow sunlight to penetrate mulch.
2. Application Rate: Two tons per acre (2-1/2 bales per 1000 square feet).
3. Anchoring:
a. Mulch anchoring tool.
b. Netting.
B. Hydromulch:
1. Apply with hydroseed or following seeding by other method.
2. Application Rate: 2,000 pounds per acre.
3. Do not apply if rain is anticipated within 24 hours. Reapplication is required after rain damage at
Contractors expense.
C. Mulch Blankets:
1. Netting on top.
2. Fibers in direct contact with soil.
3. Staple in accordance with Manufacturer's guidelines for slope conditions.
4. Direction of Installation:
a. Direction of flow of water in intermittent and ephemeral drains.
b. Perpendicular to side slopes above normal water level in perennial drains.
3.6 LAYING SOD
A. General:
1. Moisten sod and place on a moist earth bed.
2. Lay sod within 24 hours after cutting and properly protect it until placed.
3. Carefully place the sod by hand in rows at right angles to the slopes, commencing at the base of the
area to be sodded and working upward.
4. Do not use pitch forks to handle sod. Dumping from vehicles will not be permitted.
5. Extend bottom edge of sodded areas at least 2 inches into the ground or ditch bottom.
6. Break transverse joints of sod strips and carefully lay sod to produce tight joints.
7. When the sod may be displaced during sodding operations, work from ladders or treaded planks.
8. Firmly compact the sod by tamping immediately after it is placed.
9. After tamping, the sod shall present a smooth, even surface free from bumps and depressions.
B. Sod on Slopes:
1. On slopes steeper than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal, peg the sod with wooden pegs.
2. Space pegs not over 2 feet apart in any direction.
3. Drive pegs flush with the surface of the sod.
C. Frozen Materials:
1. Do not place frozen sod.
2. Do not place sod on frozen soil.
D. Watering: After placing sod, water with an initial application of 15 gallons per 100 square feet.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/2
Turf and Grasses

Section 32 92 00
32 92 00 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\32_92_00.DOCX
3.7 MAINTENANCE
A. General:
1. Contractor: Responsible for follow-up maintenance.
2. Contractor is responsible for periodic maintenance for 60 days after completion of areas of seeding or
sodding.
B. Follow-up Maintenance:
1. Inspect materials planted in the spring during the summer or early fall, and take corrective action
during the fall planting season.
2. Inspect materials planted in the fall during the spring and take corrective action during this spring
planting season.
3. Reseed, sod, plant, fertilize, mulch, topsoil, grade and roll as necessary to achieve a uniform lawn free
from eroded or bare areas.
4. Water sodded and seeded areas as required to maintain the viability of the Product.
C. Periodic Maintenance:
1. Mow grass at 3-inch to 3-1/2-inch height and subsequent mowings as required to maintain 1-1/2-inch
to 2-inch height.
2. Spot seed areas damaged by traffic or other means.


END OF SECTION 32 92 00

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Site Process Piping Systems

Section 33 90 10
33 90 10 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\33_90_10.DOCX
SECTION 33 90 10 SITE PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of site process piping systems.
B. Work Included: All buried site process piping and accessories as indicated on the Drawings and herein
specified.
C. Work Not Included:
1. The work not covered under this Section includes non-buried process piping.
2. The work does not include natural gas piping, building waste, vent and drainage systems, and piping
systems to support HVAC systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ASTM Standards:
a. C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
b. C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.
c. C478 - Precast Concrete Manhole Sections.
d. C923 - Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes.
2. AWWA Standards:
a. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In. through 48 In., for Water and Other
Liquids.
b. C115 - Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges.
c. C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds,
for Water or Other Liquids.
d. C504 - Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems.
e. C509 - Standard for Resilient Seated Gate Valves.
3. MDOT:
a. 2012 Standard Specifications for Construction.
b. Standard Plans.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For site process piping systems.
1. Outline, cross-sections, assembly drawings, dimensions and engineering data.
2. Inside lining and outside coating.
3. Name of Manufacturer and model.
4. Materials of construction.
B. Manufacturers Literature: Submit complete Manufacturer's installation instructions for all Products.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. For valves and operators.
2. Outline, cross-sections, assembly drawings, and engineering data.
D. Submit Manufacturer's certification that products and materials comply with these Specifications.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Site Process Piping Systems

Section 33 90 10
33 90 10 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\33_90_10.DOCX
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign
matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP):
1. Pipe: AWWA C151.
2. Joints:
a. Mechanical Joint: AWWA C111 with ductile iron retainer glands.
b. Push-On Joint: AWWA C111.
c. Restrained Mechanical Joint:
1) U.S. Pipe: MJ Gripper Gland.
2) American: Lok-Fast.
3) Ebaa Iron Sales, Inc.: Megalug retainer gland.
d. Restrained Push-On Joint:
1) U.S. Pipe: TR FLEX, TR FLEX GRIPPER ring.
2) American: Flex-Ring, Lok-Ring.
3) Clow: Super-Lock.
3. Fittings:
a. Ductile iron.
b. Fittings:
1) AWWA C110 or C153.
2) Fittings not covered by AWWA C110 or C153:
a) Laying Dimensions: ANSI B16.1 Class 125; Manufacturer's standard for fittings not
covered by ANSI B16.1.
b) Thickness Design and Pressure Rating: AWWA C110 or C153.
4. Lining: Ceramic Epoxy Protecto 401; or equal.
5. Outside Coating: Asphaltic coating, pipe and fittings.
6. Pressure Class:
a. 12-Inch and Smaller: Pressure class 350.
7. Gaskets: EPDM.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Systems:
1. Materials:
a. Manufacture pipe, valves, and fittings from material which meets the requirements of Type 1,
Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride as outlined in ASTM D1784.
b. PVC shall have a design stress rating of 2,000 psi at 73 degrees F and 440 psi at 140 degrees F
for water service.
c. Test and approve materials from which pipe, valves and fittings are manufactured for conveying
potable water.
d. Joint Primer:
1) ASTM F656.
2) IPS P-70 Purple Primer; or equal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Site Process Piping Systems

Section 33 90 10
33 90 10 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\33_90_10.DOCX
e. Solvent Cement:
1) ASTM D2564.
2) IPS Weld-on 724 chemical-resistant cement; or equal.
f. Pipe and Fittings: NSF listed for potable water service and labeled as such.
2. Pipe: Schedule 80 PVC conforming to ASTM D1785.
3. Fittings:
a. Schedule 80.
b. Socket Type Fittings: Conform to ASTM D2467.
2.2 VALVES
A. Gate Valves: 3-Inch to 12-Inch Diameter:
1. Resilient-Seated Ductile Iron Gate Valves: AWWA C509 or AWWA C515.
2. Nonrising stem (NRS).
3. Wrench Nut: 2 inches square.
4. Open left (counter clockwise).
5. Mechanical joint end connections.
6. Stem Seal: Buna-N O-rings.
7. Stem and Stem Nut: Bronze.
8. Body and Operating Nut: Ductile iron.
9. Wedge: Urethane rubber coated cast iron in accordance with ASTM D429.
10. Fusion-bonded epoxy coating.
11. Stainless steel bolts and nuts.
12. Manufacturer:
a. Clow.
b. American Flow Control.
c. U.S. Pipe Metroseal.
d. East Jordan Iron Works.
e. Or equal.
2.3 VALVE BOXES
A. Valves 16-Inch Diameter and Smaller:
1. Style: Buffalo style, 5-1/4-inch shaft, 3-section, designed to cover valve completely.
2. Materials of Construction: Cast iron.
3. Height Adjustment: Screw type.
4. Cover: Nonlocking.
5. Base Section:
a. No. 4 Round Base: Valves 4 inches and smaller.
b. No. 6 Round Base: Valves 8 inches and smaller.
c. No. 8 Round Base: Valves 12 inches and smaller.
d. No. 160 Oval Base: Valves 16 inches and smaller.
B. Lid Marking for Wastewater Lines: "SEWER."
C. Coat inside and outside with bituminous varnish.
D. Manufacturers and Models:
1. Opelika Foundry.
2. Or equal.
2.4 T-HANDLE VALVE WRENCHES
A. 2-Inch AWWA Nut Operator Wrenches: Not less than 2 operating wrenches shall be provided for each
length required for valve operation with the tee-handle located approximately 4 3/4 feet above the ground
surface.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Site Process Piping Systems

Section 33 90 10
33 90 10 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\33_90_10.DOCX
B. Manufacturers:
1. American-Darling Valve.
2. Clow Valve Company.
3. Mueller Co.
4. Opelika Foundry Co.
5. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. In accordance with Division 31 Section Excavation and Fill for Utilities.
3.2 LINE AND GRADE
A. Lay pipe to grades and elevations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Where no grades are indicated:
1. Lay pipe with a minimum of 5 feet of cover below final grade.
2. Avoid high points except at air release and vacuum valves.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install items to be embedded before concrete is placed.
2. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement when concrete is placed.
3. Protect all materials before, during and after installation.
4. Prevent entrance of foreign materials.
5. Install pipe, fittings and appurtenances in strict accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and
as specified herein.
B. Placement of Pipe:
1. Bearing: Support entire length of pipe barrel evenly with extra excavation as needed at joints.
2. Bell and Spigot: Clean and lubricate immediately prior to assembly.
3. Push-On Joints: Pipe end shall be tapered by grinding or filing back at least 1/8-inch on a 30 degree
bevel.
C. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C600 except as otherwise provided herein.
2. Fittings, in addition to those indicated on the Drawings, shall be provided in crossing utilities which
may be encountered upon opening the trench.
3. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth cut at right
angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut end for push-on joint shall be beveled 30 degrees by grinding or
filing back at least 1/8-inch.
4. Push-On Joint Assembly:
a. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends looking ahead.
b. A gasket shall be inserted in the groove of the bell end of the pipe, and the joint surfaces
cleaned and lubricated.
c. The plain end of the pipe to be entered shall then be inserted in alignment with the bell of the
pipe to which it is to be joined, and pushed home with a jack or by other means.
d. After joining the pipe, a metal feeler shall be used to make certain that the gasket is correctly
located.
5. Mechanical Joint Assembly:
a. Install in accordance with AWWA C111, Appendix A and the instructions of the manufacturer.
b. Under no condition shall extension wrenches or pipe over handle or ordinary ratchet wrench be
used to secure great leverage.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Site Process Piping Systems

Section 33 90 10
33 90 10 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\33_90_10.DOCX
D. Valves and Valve Boxes:
1. Set plumb on 4 inches of compacted MDOT 902, Granular Material, Class II, or MDOT 902 Open
Graded Aggregates 34R.
2. Valve Boxes:
a. Shall not transmit shock to valve.
b. Plumb over operating nut.
c. Set cover to finished grade.
d. Witness.
3.4 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Take care in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or coatings. Pipe and fittings
shall not be dropped.
B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and hammer test just prior to being laid or
installed. No piece shall be installed which is found to be defective.
C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe
in a satisfactory manner at no additional expense to Owner.
D. Repair damage to coatings as directed by Engineer or Owner.
3.5 THRUST CONTROL
A. General:
1. Allowable Methods:
a. Restrained joints.
B. Restrained Joints: Restrain all pipe joints within given distance from each fitting and valve (all directions):

Table 1
Length of Restrained Pipe Required
Pipe Diameter
22-1/2 Degree
Bends and Less
45 Degree
Bends
90 Degree Bends
Plugs and Valves
Tee Run Tee Branch
6-inch 5-foot 10-foot 15-foot 10-foot 5-foot
8-inch 5-foot 10-foot 20-foot 10-foot 5-foot
10-inch 5-foot 15-foot 25-foot 10-foot 10-foot
12-inch 10-foot 15-foot 30-foot 10-foot 15-foot
16-inch 10-foot 20-foot 40-foot 10-foot 25-foot
3.6 PRESSURE TESTING
A. General:
1. Observation: By Engineer.
2. Notification: Arrange with Engineer following successful pretesting.
3. Visible leaks in all process piping systems shall be repaired.
B. Provide all equipment (pumps, plugs, hoses, gages, etc.) and water necessary to perform tests.
C. Ductile Iron Pressure Testing:
1. AWWA C 600, Section 4.
2. Duration: 2 hours.
3. Test Pressure: 150 psi.
4. Make-up Water: From measurable source.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Site Process Piping Systems

Section 33 90 10
33 90 10 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\33_90_10.DOCX
5. Maximum Allowable Leakage:

L =
SD P
.5
133,200

Where:
L = Leakage in gallons per hour.
S = Length of pipe tested in feet.
D = Pipe diameter in inches.
P = Test pressure in psi.

plus 0.0078 gallons per hour per inch of diameter for each closed metal seated valve tested
against.
6. Maximum length of pipe to be tested 2,000 feet, or nearest 2 valves if water on opposite side of valve
is not in service.
7. Perform test against tapped cap or plug with a standpipe and not against existing valve if water on
opposite side of valve is in service.
8. Repair leaks and repeat tests until acceptable results are achieved.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials and products and
related areas in accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste Management.


END OF SECTION 33 90 10
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
SECTION 40 05 13 PROCESS PIPING SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of process piping.
B. Work included under this Section:
1. Non-buried process piping indicated on the Process Drawings and piping schedule.
2. Buried process piping to a distance of 5 feet from a tank or building penetration.
C. Work not included under this Section:
1. Buried process piping greater than a distance of 5 feet from a tank or building penetration.
2. Piping indicated on plumbing and mechanical Drawings, including natural gas piping, building waste,
plumbing vent and drainage systems, and piping systems to support HVAC systems.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 09 Section Painting.
2. Division 22 Section Plumbing Piping Insulation.
3. Division 33 Section Site Process Piping Systems.
4. Division 40 Section Process Valves.
5. Division 40 Section Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. ANSI B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flange Fittings.
2. ASTM Standards:
a. A36 - Structural Steel.
b. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
c. A193 - Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.
d. A194 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service.
e. A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
f. A283 - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
g. A312 - Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
h. A403 - Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings.
i. D1784 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds.
j. D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
k. D2464 - Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
l. D2467 - Socket Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
m. D2992 - Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe and
Fittings.
n. D2996 - Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
o. E8 - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
p. E23 - Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
3. AWWA Standards:
a. C 104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fitting for Water.
b. C 110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In. through 48 In., for Water and Other Liquids.
c. C 115 - Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
d. C 151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or
Other Liquids.
e. C 200 - Steel Water Pipe 6 In. and Larger.
f. C 207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In. through 144 In.
g. C 208 - Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings.
h. C 210 - Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines.
i. C 220 - Stainless Steel Pipe, 4-Inch and Larger.
j. C 600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances.
k. C 606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
l. C 651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
m. Design Manual M-11 - Steel Pipe A Guide for Design and Installation.
4. NSF Standards:
a. 14 - Plastic Piping Components and Related Materials.
b. 61 - Drinking Water System Components.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pipe:
1. Design, fabricate and install according to the references and standards specified herein.
2. The Drawings indicate general pipe layout only. Details of joints, couplings, tie rods, supports and
make-up pieces are not necessarily indicated. Submit proposed details for these components for
Engineers review.
3. Provide makeup pipe spools, supports and suitable couplings so that piping may be easily separated
for removing valves and inline flanged device.
B. Supports and Hangers:
1. The detailed design, layout and spacing of process pipe supports shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. However, required locations of some supports may be indicated on the Drawings.
2. Design to prevent pipe sway and movement.
3. Adequate to prevent sagging of plastic pipe.
4. Utilize supporting members as indicated on the structural Drawings for the design, layout and spacing
of the process piping supports systems.
5. Design process piping support systems to allow process valves and meters to be removed from the
piping system without adding temporary pipe supports to the pipe upstream or downstream of the
valve or meter.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Itemized Listings:
1. Equipment to be provided.
2. Deviations from the requirements of this Section.
B. Shop Drawings: For equipment assemblies in this Section to include:
1. Details of construction and installation, including taps, weld-on outlets, water collars, specials, and
similar features.
2. Pipe diameter, wall thickness, length, centerline elevations, and locations and dimensions of valves
fittings, taps, and in-line equipment and instruments, and similar features.
3. Location and centerline elevation of wall sleeves and wall pipes.
4. Type and location of pipe supports on 8-inch pipe and larger.
5. Details for concrete pipe supports including dimensions, reinforcement, pipe straps and locations
proposed for use.
6. Type and location of pipe couplings.
7. Schedule of wall sleeves and pipes indicating proposed sizes, lengths, and connection details.
8. Plan indicating preliminary testing schedule showing pipe sections to be tested, bulkheads, drains, and
chlorine injection locations.
9. Schedule of coatings.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
C. Product/Catalogue Data: For all products in this Section to include:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Manufacturers engineering and specification data.
3. Dimensions, thicknesses, cross-sections, materials of construction.
4. Coatings.
D. Installation Instructions:
1. Submit complete Manufacturers installation instructions for all products.
2. Submit pipe Manufacturer's recommended span lengths between hangers or supports for each pipe
size and type.
E. Certifications: Submit Manufacturer's certification that products and materials conform to these
Specifications.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign
matter, and damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General:
1. In-Plant Process Piping 3-Inch and Larger: Materials or systems as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide taps at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Ductile Iron Pipe Systems:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Conform to AWWA C 151, Class 53.
2. Minimum Tests and Test Results of the Physical Characteristics of the Pipe:
a. Tensile Test:
1) ASTM E8.
2) Minimum Tensile Strength: 60,000 psi.
3) Minimum Yield Strength: 42,000 psi.
4) Minimum Elongation: 10%.
b. Notched Charpy Impact Test:
1) ASTM E23 with 0.500-inch specimen.
2) Minimum 7 ft-lbs at 70 degree F 10.
c. Hydrostatic Pressure Test: Test pipe at 500 psi for at least a 10-second duration..
3. Pipe Coatings:
a. Ceramic Epoxy Lining: Protecto 401.
4. Pipe Joints: Pressure rated at least as great as the pipe or fittings of which it is a part.
5. Flanges:
a. Conform to AWWA C 115.
b. Flange bolts and Hardware: Galvanized or zinc-plated.
6. Flange Gaskets:
a. For ceramic epoxy and epoxy lined pipe: Viton gaskets.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
7. Fittings:
a. Lining with same material as piping system, in accordance with Drawings.
b. Protecto 401 epoxy for lined pipe systems.
8. Grooved Pipe Joints and Couplings:
a. For Pump Connections and Flexible Joints: Victaulic Style 31.
b. Ductile iron body, galvanized or zinc-plated hardware.
c. Gasket NSF listed for potable water service.
d. Conform to AWWA C 606.
9. Provide factory fabricated weld-on outlets meeting AWWA C111 and C115 where indicated on
Drawings. Coat and line piping after welding.
10. Paint outside of pipe, fittings, flanges and couplings in accordance with Division 09 Section Painting.
C. Carbon Steel Pipe Systems:
1. Steel Pipe 6-Inch Diameter and Larger:
a. In accordance with AWWA C 200.
b. Spirally welded steel pipe will not be allowed.
2. Steel Pipe 4-inch Diameter and Smaller: Schedule 80, ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade A.
3. Fabricate and hydrostatically test steel pipe in accordance with AWWA C 200.
4. Fabricate steel pipe fittings in accordance with AWWA C 208.
5. Forged Fittings: Conform to ASTM A234.
6. Drawings indicate flanges at fittings and forged fittings. Welded connections and forged or fabricated
fittings are acceptable subject to the proper placement of pipe couplings (flanged, grooved type, or
mechanical type) necessary for a proper installation:
a. Mechanical Couplings: Dresser Style 38; or equal. Provide coupling middle ring at least
7 inches long, with a thickness at least as great as the pipeline of which it is a part. Harness
joints in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and AWWA Design Manual M-11 for a
150 psi maximum working pressure.
b. Grooved end pipe couplings shall be Victaulic Style 77 or Style 07; or equal for steel pipe.
30-inch diameter steel pipe and larger may use Victaulic Style 41 with Type C ends; or equal.
Gaskets shall be EPDM and meet service conditions.
c. Steel Pipe Flanges:
1) In accordance with AWWA C 207.
2) Flange Gaskets: Full face, rubber.
7. Minimum Steel Pipe Wall Thicknesses:
a. Other Lines: 0.25 inches.
8. Paint outside of pipe, fittings and flanges in accordance with Division 09 Section Painting.
D. Galvanized Steel Pipe Systems:
1. ASTM A53.
2. Schedule 40.
3. Grade B.
4. Joints and fittings: Threaded.
E. Stainless Steel Pipe Systems:
1. Use: Process piping as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Materials shall be in accordance with AWWA C 220.
3. Piping: Schedule 40S seamless Type 316L, bevel ends, in accordance with ASTM A312.
4. Finish: 180 grit polish.
5. Taps: Welded Type 316L stainless steel thredolets.
6. Fittings:
a. Schedule 40S, butt-weld.
b. Factory made tees and long radius elbows in accordance with ASTM A403, mitered elbows in
accordance with ANSI B16.9 dimensions where space allows.
c. Reinforce fabricated fittings/headers for design pressure of 150 psig.
7. Wall Thicknesses: In accordance with ANSI B36.19.
8. Flanges: Butt-weld, full face.
9. Flange Hardware: 315L stainless steel.
10. Gasket Material: Full face, compatible with service
11. Grooved Couplings: Victaulic epoxy-coated, 316L stainless steel hardware, Viton gasket, roll-grooved
pipe.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
12. Stainless steel piping for liquid service, including welds, shall be pickled and passivated by the
Manufacturer. Field welds, if required, shall be pickled and passivated in the field by a Manufacturer
recommended method, subject to Engineers approval.
F. Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe Systems:
1. Use: Chemical feed piping as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Materials: Manufacture pipe and fittings from virgin rigid CPVC vinyl compounds with a Cell Class of
23447-B as identified in ASTM D1784.
3. Pipe: Schedule 80 Iron Pipe Size (IPS) conforming to ASTM F441.
4. Primer and Solvent Cement: Conforming to ASTM F656 and ASTM F493.
5. Fittings: Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM F439.
6. Use factory made tees and elbows.
7. Gaskets: Viton.
8. Flange Hardware: 316L stainless steel.
G. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Systems:
1. Materials:
a. Manufacture pipe, valves, and fittings from material which meets the requirements of Type 1,
Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride as outlined in ASTM D1784.
b. PVC shall have a design stress rating of 2,000 psi at 73 degrees F and 440 psi at 140 degrees F
for water service.
c. Test and approve materials from which pipe, valves and fittings are manufactured for conveying
potable water.
d. Joint Primer:
1) ASTM F656.
2) IPS P-70 Purple Primer; or equal.
e. Solvent Cement:
1) ASTM D2564.
2) IPS Weld-on 724 chemical-resistant cement; or equal.
f. Pipe and Fittings: NSF listed for potable water service and labeled as such.
2. Pipe: Schedule 80 PVC conforming to ASTM D1785.
3. Fittings:
a. Schedule 80.
b. Socket Type Fittings: Conform to ASTM D2467.
c. Threaded Type Fittings: Conform to ASTM D2464. Used only where necessary to connect to
threaded appurtenances. Use MIL Spec P-27730A Teflon tape when threaded connections are
required.
4. Flange Gaskets: Viton.
5. Flange Hardware: 316L stainless steel.
H. Copper Pipe Systems:
1. Material:
a. 1/2-inch and Larger:
1) Seamless copper tubing.
2) ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.
b. 3/8-inch O.D. and Smaller:
1) Seamless copper tubing.
2) ASTM B88, Type K, soft temper.
2. Factory coded and marked. Piping 2 feet and longer shall have a permanent marking in accordance
with ASTM or ANSI specifications.
3. Soft temper tubing shall have long radius bends preventing kinks.
4. Solder: 95% tin and 5% silver.
5. Fittings:
a. Sweat type, wrought copper.
b. Elbows shall be long radius type.
c. Cast fittings will only be allowed by written approval from Engineer.
6. Provide threaded connections to valves and equipment.
7. Provide threaded unions between isolation valves and equipment for removal of equipment.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
2.2 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
A. General:
1. Design Layout and Spacing of the Pipe Supports: Responsibility of Contractor.
2. Furnish factory fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, clamps, bolts, nuts,
washers, and accessories.
3. On pipes 12-inch diameter and larger, generally use pipe stand type supports extending to the floor
below. Coordinate proposed use of hangers from floors above the pipe with Engineer to ensure that
the floors are capable of supporting pipe weight.
B. Manufacturers and Types:
1. Pipe Hangers: Clevis or split ring type with adjustable threaded hanger rods.
2. Hangers and Supports: Grinnell, Unistrut, Crane; or equal.
C. Materials (Supports and Hardware);
1. Chemical Feed Rooms and In and Above Process Tanks: Type 316L stainless steel.
2. General Process Service: Hot-dip galvanized or zinc-plated.
3. Isolate dissimilar pipe and support materials with 1/8-inch thick EPDM rubber sheet stock.
2.3 WALL PENETRATIONS
A. Sleeves:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe with continuously-welded water ring of suitable size for installation of casing
seal.
2. White-metal sandblast and hot-dip galvanize sleeves after fabrication.
3. Paint inside surface of wall sleeve in accordance with Division 09 Section Painting.
B. Seals:
1. Modular mechanical type consisting of chemical resistant interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to
continuously fill the annular space between pipe and wall opening.
2. Expanded by tightening stainless steel bolts, with a pressure plate under each bolt head.
3. Providing a water-tight seal between passing pipe and sleeve.
4. Provide mechanical retaining assemblies for the modular mechanical seals at the locations indicated
on the Drawings.
5. Seal materials shall be NSF listed for potable water service.
6. Manufacturers and Types:
a. Link Seal by Thunderline Corporation.
b. Or equal.
2.4 WALL PIPE
A. Ductile iron wall pipe of the size and with the end connections as indicated on the Drawings:
1. With an integrally cast anchor/water ring, 3/4-inch minimum ring thickness.
2. With a wall thickness equal to or greater than the pipeline of which it is a part.
3. Conform to ductile iron pipe specifications in this Section.
4. Provide flanges tapped for studs where required.
2.5 PIPE JOINT HARNESSES
A. Tie Rod Bolt: Conform to ASTM A193, Grade B7.
B. Tie Rod Lugs: Conform to ASTM A283, Grade C or ASTM A36.
C. Tie Rod Nuts: Conform to ASTM A194, Grade 2H.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
2.6 PRESSURE GAGES AND SEALS
A. Pressure Gages:
1. Provide pressure gages as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Gages shall be liquid filled and 4-1/2-inch diameter.
3. Pressure Range:
a. Raw Waste Pumps: 0-50 psi.
b. Motive Pumps: 0- 30 psi.
4. Manufacturer: Ashcroft, Model 1279; or equal.
B. Diaphragm Seals (Metal):
1. 316L stainless steel diaphragm and housing.
2. PTFE Diaphragm.
3. Process Connection: 1/2-inch FNPT.
4. Gage Connection: 1/4-inch FNPT
5. Flushing Connection: 1/4-inch NPT with cap.
6. Manufacturer: Ashcroft Type 101; or equal.
C. Diaphragm Seals (Thermoplastic):
1. Chemical Service.
2. PVC or polypropylene body.
3. PTFE Diaphragm.
4. Process Connection: 1/2-inch FNPT.
5. Gage connection: 1/4-inch FNPT
6. Manufacturer: Plastomatic Gage Guard; or equal.
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Required on connections to chemical tote.
B. Lined stainless steel braided hose, compatible with chemical service.
C. Rated Pressure: 150 psig minimum.
2.8 SCREENING
A. Material: Polypropylene.
B. Color: White.
C. Mesh per Lineal Inch: 10.2 x 10.2.
D. Thread Diameter: 0.0315-inch.
E. Supplier: McMaster-Carr No. 9275T22; or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install process piping and accessories in conformance with:
a. The Manufacturer's recommendations.
b. The Shop Drawings as reviewed by Engineer.
2. Install items to be embedded before concrete is placed.
3. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement when concrete is placed.
4. Install items plumb, square, true to lines, grades, elevations, and locations as indicated on the
Drawings and herein specified.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 8
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
5. Do not install chemical piping within finished rooms, regardless of size.
6. Valves, regardless of size and contents, shall be readily accessible. Chemical feed piping valves shall
be accessible from operating floor.
7. Do not install chemical feed piping over equipment.
B. Hangers and Supports:
1. Install hangers and supports at less than maximum spacing as recommended by pipe Manufacturer.
2. Adjust hangers and supports to bring pipe lines to proper elevations.
3. Install inserts in concrete flush with the surface and capable of developing the full strength of the bolt.
C. Wall Sleeves:
1. Embed in concrete.
2. After pipes have been placed through wall sleeves, clean the space between the pipe and the wall
sleeve.
D. Insulate the following piping (see Division 22 Section Plumbing Piping Insulation): Exterior decant piping
and valves outside of tanks.
E. PVC Piping: Installation procedures, including support spacing, solvent welding and allowance for expansion
and contraction shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Stainless Steel Piping: Tools used for cleaning welds on stainless steel pipe shall be designated for and be
suitable for use with stainless steel, and shall not leave carbon residue in the welds.
3.2 PAINTING
A. Paint pipe, fittings, supports, hangers, sleeves and accessories in accordance with Division 09 Section
Painting.
3.3 TESTING
A. General:
1. Hydrostatically test all process pressure piping lines:
2. Tests shall be witnessed by Engineer.
3. Provide necessary equipment to perform tests including, but not necessarily limited to pumps, plugs,
hoses and gages.
B. Procedure:
1. Pressure test procedure shall be in conformance with AWWA C 600, Section 4.
2. Duration: 2 hours.
3. Pressure: Maintain 150 pounds per square inch.
4. No visible leaks.
C. Repairs: In case of leakage under test, locate and repair leaks in an approved manner and test section
again until a satisfactory test is secured.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean installed materials and Products and related areas:
1. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section.
2. In accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste Management.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/3
Process Piping Systems

Section 40 05 13
40 05 13 9
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_13.DOCX
3.5 PROCESS PIPING SCHEDULE

Description Size Material Lining Joint Style Notes
Raw Waste 3 Ductile Iron Ceramic Epoxy Flanged In wet well
Raw Waste 3 - 4 Stainless Steel Flanged In plant
Process Feed Piping 3 - 4 Stainless Steel Flanged In plant
Caustic Return 3 PVC Flanged,
Socket
In Aeration Equipment
Building
Motive Pump Suction
and Discharge
8 - 12 Ductile Iron Ceramic Epoxy Flanged In Aeration Equipment
Building
Blower Piping 4 Carbon Steel Grooved Interior air piping
Air Piping 4 Stainless Steel Flanged Exterior air piping
Miscellaneous
Copper
As Noted Threaded,
soldered
Plant seal water
Miscellaneous
Stainless Steel
As Noted Sample taps, Inst.
piping
Miscellaneous 1/2 - 1 Copper Threaded,
soldered



END OF SECTION 40 05 13

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
SECTION 40 05 23 PROCESS VALVES


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of all valves and operators in the process piping system
as indicated on the process drawings and defined in Division 40 Section Process Piping Systems.
B. This Section does not include the valves and operators for the piping systems indicated on the plumbing and
mechanical Drawings.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section Plumbing Piping and Pumps.
2. Division 40 Section Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
3. Division 40 Section Process Piping Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the valves and operators of this Section shall
comply with the following as applicable:
1. ASTM Specification:
a. A48 - Gray Iron Castings.
b. A126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
c. A148 - Aluminum Bronze Castings.
d. A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
e. A240 - Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
for Pressure Vessels.
f. A351 - Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High Temperature.
g. A436 - Austenitic Gray Iron Castings.
h. A536 - Ductile Iron Castings.
i. B21 - Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes.
2. AWWA Standards:
a. C 111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron.
b. C 500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
c. C 504 - Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
d. C 512 - Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service.
e. C 509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
f. C 511 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly.
g. C 540 - Power Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates.
h. C 550 - Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
i. C 507 - Ball Valves 6-inch through 48-inch.
3. ANSI/NSF Standards: Standard 61 Drinking Water System Components.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Itemized Listings:
1. Equipment to be provided.
2. Deviations from the requirements of this Section.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
B. Shop drawings for all equipment assemblies in this Section to include:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Model.
3. Details of construction.
4. Dimensions, including actuator dimensions and clearances.
5. Materials of construction.
6. Listing of components.
7. Project specific wiring diagrams.
8. Coatings.
9. Weight of assemblies.
C. Product/catalog data for all equipment in this Section to include:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Model.
3. Materials of construction.
4. Manufacturers engineering and specification data.
5. Electrical specifications and requirements.
6. Torque specifications for actuators.
D. Torque calculations for actuators.
E. Installation instructions for equipment in this Section.
F. Operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment in this Section to include:
1. Copy of reviewed shop drawings and product/catalog data.
2. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
3. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.
4. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and shutdown
and emergency conditions.
5. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
6. Guide to troubleshooting.
7. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
8. Outline, cross-sections, assembly drawings, engineering data, and wiring diagrams.
G. Certifications/Affidavits:
1. Submit Manufacturers certification that products and materials conform to these specifications.
2. Submit an affidavit from the valve manufacturer which certifies that actuators used were furnished and
installed by the valve manufacturer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Submittals.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, and damage by weather or elements and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Ship and handle valves in conformance with Section 18 of AWWA C 504.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND TYPES
A. Provide valves of the size and type as indicated on the Drawings and these Specifications.
B. All valves of each type shall be the Product of one Manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Butterfly Valves:
1. For air service.
2. Tight closing, rubber-seat type complying fully with the latest edition of AWWA C 504, Class 150B.
3. Bubble tight at rated pressures in either direction for applications involving throttling service or valve
operation after long periods of inactivity.
4. Valve Body:
a. Cast iron or ductile iron with flanged short body design of body thickness in accordance with
AWWA C 504.
b. Flange drilling in accordance with AWWA C 504.
5. Valve Disc:
a. Rotate 90 degrees from the fully open position to the tight shut position.
b. Constructed of cast iron or ductile iron with stainless steel, nickel-copper or nickel chrome
seating edge.
c. Disc and shaft connection made with stainless steel pins.
d. Disc design and thickness in accordance with AWWA C 504.
6. Valve Shaft:
a. Turned, ground and polished; constructed of stainless steel.
b. Shaft diameter and connections in accordance with AWWA C 504.
7. Valve Seat:
a. Natural or synthetic rubber compound suitable for air service, applied to either the valve body or
disk.
b. Full 360 degrees.
8. Coating:
a. Interior surfaces: Fusion bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C550.
b. Exterior surfaces (non-immersed): Shop prime coat in accordance with Division 09 Section
Painting for interior ferrous metals non-immersed (epoxy system).
c. Flange faces: In accordance with AWWA C504.
9. Testing: Conduct hydrostatic and leakage tests in accordance with AWWA C504 Sections 12.2 and
12.3.
10. Manufacturers:
a. Dezurik.
b. Pratt.
11. Valve Actuators:
a. The type as indicated in the Valve Schedule.
b. Designed to hold the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed
without creeping or fluttering.
c. In accordance with AWWA C 504.
d. Installed, adjusted, tested, and certified by the valve manufacturer prior to shipping.
e. Handwheel:
1) Position indicators.
2) Factory-installed actuator to valve.
3) Traveling nut type, sized for at least 150% of maximum operating torque requirement.
4) Self locking.
5) Minimum handwheel diameter: 12 inches
6) Turn wheel counterclockwise to open valve.
7) Direction to open valve indicated on handwheel.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
B. Plug Valves (Stainless Steel):
1. Use: Raw Waste and Process Feed piping.
2. Eccentric Plug: Stem axis slightly offset from valve centerline.
3. Non-lubricated type.
4. Pressure Rating: 150 psi or greater.
5. Port Area: Minimum 80% of the full pipe area.
6. End Connections:
a. Flanged: ANSI B16.1 Class 125, including facing drilling and thickness.
b. Grooved: AWWA C606.
7. Resilient seat seal.
8. Materials of Construction:
a. Body: 316L Stainless Steel.
b. Seat: 90% nickel alloy.
c. Plug: 316L Stainless Steel.
d. Elastomer: Viton.
e. Exterior Fasteners: Zinc plated.
9. Manufacturers:
a. DeZurik.
b. Pratt.
10. Actuator:
a. See valve schedule.
b. Factory assembled to valve.
c. Provide lever actuator for 3-inch and smaller or geared hand wheel with position indicator for
4-inch and larger.
d. Lever operator shall have brake or locking device except where chainwheels are indicated on
the Drawings or in the Schedule.
e. Handwheel:
1) Geared Operators: Worm and gear type, totally enclosed in oil, with seals provided on all
shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator.
2) Shaft bearings: permanently lubricated bronze bushings.
3) Include position indicator.
4) Indicate direction to open valve.
5) Adjustable stop to set closing torque.
6) Exposed nuts, bolts, and washers zinc plated in accordance with ASTM A153.
7) In accordance with AWWA C504, Section 11.
f. Chainwheel:
1) For valves 6 feet or more above the operator floor.
2) Position indicators.
3) Factory-installed actuator to valve.
4) Traveling nut type.
5) Self locking.
6) Minimum wheel diameter: 9 inches.
7) Chain guard to prevent chain from slipping off of wheel.
8) Provide galvanized chain, extending to 2 feet above finished floor.
9) Provide hardware to tie hanging chains to walls or other structures when hanging in traffic
areas.
g. Electric (quarter turn):
1) For 90 degree quarter turn open-close operation.
2) 460 VAC, 3-phase, 60 Hz.
3) NEMA 4 enclosure.
4) Manual handwheel override, declutchable and able to be padlocked.
5) Position Indicator.
6) Open and closed limit switch function.
7) Valve speed: 60 seconds
8) Actuator torque: sized for 150% of actual expected torque.
9) Manufacturer: Rotork; or equal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
C. Plug Valves (Cast Iron):
1. Use: Motive Pump piping.
2. Eccentric Plug: Stem axis slightly offset from valve centerline.
3. Non-lubricated type.
4. Pressure Rating: 150 psi or greater.
5. Port Area: Minimum 80% of the full pipe area.
6. End Connections:
a. Flanged: ANSI B16.1 Class 125, including facing drilling and thickness.
b. Grooved: AWWA C606.
7. Resilient seat seal.
8. Materials of Construction:
a. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B.
b. Seat: 90% nickel alloy.
c. Plug: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B, or ductile iron, rubber lined.
d. Elastomer: Viton.
e. Exterior Fasteners: Zinc plated.
9. Coating:
a. Interior Surfaces: Fusion bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C550.
b. Exterior Surfaces (Non-immersed): Shop prime coat in accordance with Division 09 Section
Painting for interior ferrous metals non-immersed (epoxy system).
c. Flange Faces: In accordance with AWWA C504.
10. Manufacturers:
a. DeZurik.
b. Pratt.
11. Actuator:
a. See valve schedule.
b. Factory assembled to valve.
c. Provide lever actuator for 3-inch and smaller or geared hand wheel with position indicator for
4-inch and larger.
d. Lever operator shall have brake or locking device except where chainwheels are indicated on
the Drawings or in the Schedule.
e. Handwheel:
1) Geared Operators: Worm and gear type, totally enclosed in oil, with seals provided on all
shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator.
2) Shaft bearings: permanently lubricated bronze bushings.
3) Include position indicator.
4) Indicate direction to open valve.
5) Adjustable stop to set closing torque.
6) Exposed nuts, bolts, and washers zinc plated in accordance with ASTM A153.
7) In accordance with AWWA C504, Section 11.
f. Chainwheel:
1) For valves 6 feet or more above the operator floor.
2) Position indicators.
3) Factory-installed actuator to valve.
4) Traveling nut type.
5) Self locking.
6) Minimum wheel diameter: 9 inches.
7) Chain guard to prevent chain from slipping off of wheel.
8) Provide galvanized chain, extending to 2 feet above finished floor.
9) Provide hardware to tie hanging chains to walls or other structures when hanging in traffic
areas.
D. Gate Valves (GV), 3 Inches in Diameter and Larger:
1. Valves: AWWA C509 Resilient-seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
2. Opening direction: Counterclockwise as viewed from the top.
3. Stem seal: V-type packing, O-ring seals or pull-down packing.
4. Manually Operated Geared Actuators: Nonrising stem.
5. All components within process tanks suitable for submerged service in chlorinated water.
6. Test Pressure: 250 psig minimum.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
7. Coating:
a. Interior surfaces: Fusion bonded epoxy lined in accordance with AWWA C550.
b. Exterior Surfaces (Non-immersed): Shop prime coat in accordance with Division 09 Section
Painting for exterior ferrous metals - nonimmersed (epoxy system).
8. Manufacturers:
a. Clow Valve Company.
b. Kennedy Valve.
c. M & H Valve Company.
d. Mueller Company.
9. Actuator:
a. See valve schedule.
b. Factory assembled to valve.
c. Handwheel:
1) Geared Operators: Worm and gear type, totally enclosed in oil, with seals provided on all
shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator.
2) Shaft bearings: permanently lubricated bronze bushings.
3) Include position indicator.
4) Indicate direction to open valve.
5) Adjustable stop to set closing torque.
6) Exposed nuts, bolts, and washers zinc plated in accordance with ASTM A153.
7) In accordance with AWWA C504, Section 11.
d. Chainwheel:
1) For valves 6 feet or more above the operator floor.
2) Position indicators.
3) Factory-installed actuator to valve.
4) Traveling nut type.
5) Self locking.
6) Minimum wheel diameter: 9 inches.
7) Chain guard to prevent chain from slipping off of wheel.
8) Provide galvanized chain, extending to 2 feet above finished floor.
9) Provide hardware to tie hanging chains to walls or other structures when hanging in traffic
areas.
E. Gate Valves (GV), 2-1/2 Inches in Diameter and Smaller:
1. Bronze, heavy-duty, rising stem, rated for 125 pound WSP.
2. Conform to Federal Specification WW-V-54, Class A, Type II.
3. Manufacturer and Model:
a. Crane 1334 (sweat) or Crane 428 (screwed).
b. Or equal.
F. Flapper Check Valve:
1. Materials of Construction:
a. Body and cover: Cast Iron.
b. Flapper: EPDM steel reinforced with O-ring sealing edge. Removable without removing valve
from line.
c. Seat: on 45 degree angle. Unrestricted flow area.
2. Class 125 pound flanges, flat faced.
3. Pressure rating: 175 psi minimum.
4. Interior Coating: Fusion bonded epoxy.
5. Manufacturer: APCO, Valmatic; or equal.
G. Ball Check Valve:
1. Materials:
a. Cast Iron body.
b. Hollow metal ball with nitrile rubber cover.
2. End connections: 125 pound flat faced.
3. Fusion bonded epoxy lined.
4. Suitable for vertical mounting.
5. Manufacturer: Flygt HDL, Golden-Anderson; or equal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
H. Ball Valve (metal);
1. Size: 1/2-inch to 3-inch.
2. Materials: 316 stainless steel.
3. Seats and Seals: PTFE
4. End connections: NPT
5. Pressure Rating: 600 psi.
6. Manufacturer: Apollo; or equal.
I. Globe Valves:
1. Size: 1/2-inch to 1-inch NPT.
2. Materials: 316 stainless steel.
3. 200 pound W.O.G. service.
4. Manufacturer: Powell; or equal.
J. PVC Ball Valves, Check Valves, Angle Globe Valves:
1. Furnish PVC true union valves fabricated of the same material as the fittings for chemical feed piping
systems.
2. Permanently lubricated teflon ball seats.
3. Viton stem and body seals, vented ball cavity to prevent gas buildup.
4. True union type with socket or flange connections and a pressure rating of 150 psi C.W.P. at
73 degrees F.
5. Manufacturer: Hayward, Nibco; GSR; Asahi, or equal.
K. Solenoid Valves:
1. General:
a. 2-way solenoid valves.
b. Normally closed, designed to open when energized.
c. Complete with mounting brackets and conduit hubs as required.
d. Manual override.
2. Material and Fabrication:
a. Manufacturer: ASCO; or equal.
b. Valve Bodies: Stainless steel.
c. Seals and Discs: Buna N.
d. Wetted Parts: Stainless steel.
e. Power: 120 volt, 60 Hz.
L. Anti-siphon Valve:
1. Size: 1-inch NPT.
2. Materials: Stainless steel.
3. Manufacturer: Durabla Type BSSV; or equal.
M. Air Release Valve (Sewage Type):
1. For use on motive pump piping and other high solids applications.
2. Designed to release small quantities of air at normal pipeline pressures of 5 to 50 psig and to close
water tight when liquid enters. Suitable for pressures up to 150 psig.
3. Materials of Construction:
a. Body and Cover: Cast iron.
b. Float and lever: Stainless steel.
c. Needle: Buna -N.
d. Seat: Stainless Steel.
e. Fusion bonded epoxy lined.
4. Inlet Connection: 2-inch.
5. Outlet Connection: 1/2-inch.
6. Manufacturer: APCO Series 400; or equal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 8
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in conformance with:
1. The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
2. The Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Check and adjust valves, operators and accessories for smooth operation.
C. Paint all valves and accessories in accordance with Division 09 Section Painting.
D. Provide valve actuator Manufacturers field service as required to start-up, adjust, participate in control loop
tuning, and calibrate all valve equipment.
E. Pipe air and hydraulic actuated valve discharges to drain with an air gap.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean all installed materials and products and related areas:
1. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section.
2. In accordance with Division 01.
3.3 PROCESS VALVE SCHEDULE
A. This schedule is provided as an aid to the contractor and includes only valves 3 inches and larger unless
indentified on the schedule. Some contractor specialty valves are listed but not all. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to verify all required valves, coordinate the supply of valves with those furnished by other
equipment suppliers and furnish all other valves for a finished project. Buried valves are listed only for
reference and tagging and are specified elsewhere.

Valve
Tag
Size Type Operator Notes
1 4 Butterfly Handwheel Air Service
2 4 Check Air Service
3 4 Butterfly Handwheel Air Service
4 3 Check Air Service
5 3 Ball Lever True Union
6 12 Plug Handwheel
7 2 Air Release
8 12 Plug Handwheel
9 12 Flapper Check Handwheel
10 12 Plug Handwheel
11 12 Plug Handwheel
12 12 Flapper Check Handwheel
13 12 Plug Handwheel
14 8 Plug Handwheel
15 12 Resilient Wedge Nut See Site Process Piping Specification
16 12 Resilient Wedge Nut See Site Process Piping Specification
17 4 Resilient Wedge Nut See Site Process Piping Specification
18 6 Resilient Wedge Nut See Site Process Piping Specification
19 3 Resilient Wedge Nut See Site Process Piping Specification
20 8 Resilient Wedge Nut See Site Process Piping Specification
21 3 Plug Lever
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Process Valves

Section 40 05 23
40 05 23 9
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_23.DOCX
Valve
Tag
Size Type Operator Notes
22 3 Ball Check
23 3 Plug Lever
24 3 Plug
25 3 Plug Lever
26 3 Ball Check
27 3 Plug Lever
28 3 Plug Lever
29 3 Plug Lever
30 3 Plug Lever
31 3 Plug Handwheel Control-Modulating Service
32 3 Plug Handwheel Control On/Off
33 3 Plug Handwheel Control On/Off
34 4 Plug Chainwheel
35 4 Plug Chainwheel
36 4 Plug Chainwheel


END OF SECTION 40 05 23
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Heat Tracing Systems

Section 40 05 33
40 05 33 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_33.DOC
SECTION 40 05 33 HEAT TRACING SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of freeze protection heating cables and related
equipment.
B. Work included under this Section:
1. Heat tracing of all exterior process piping systems.
C. Work not included under this Section:
1. Exterior air piping or tanks.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section Plumbing Piping Insulation.
2. Division 26 Section Grounding and Bonding.
3. Division 26 Section Identification for Electrical Systems.
4. Division 40 Section Process Piping Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
2. NEC - National Electric Code - As applicable to heat tracing systems.
3. Listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories where required.
1.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Layout:
1. Design, fabricate and install according to the references and standards specified herein.
2. The Drawings indicate general layout only.
B. Circuiting: 30FLA maximum at 208V per circuit.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Itemized Listings:
1. Equipment to be provided.
2. Deviations from the requirements of this Section.
B. Shop Drawings: For equipment assemblies in this Section to include:
1. Details of construction and installation.
2. Project Specific Wiring Diagrams:
a. Per piping system or per controller.
b. Shall clearly indicate all field wiring requirements.
c. Shall include:
1) System drawing showing the layout and connection of all components.
2) Plan view drawing.
3) Accessory list.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Heat Tracing Systems

Section 40 05 33
40 05 33 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_33.DOC
d. Shall indicate terminals for connection to SCADA/monitoring system where applicable.
Terminals shall be labeled to match contract document names and panels.
e. Where multiple or configurable output contacts are provided the function and connection shall
be identified and labeled. Unused output contacts shall be labeled as Unused or Spare.
C. Product/Catalogue Data: For all products in this Section to include:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Manufacturers engineering and specification data.
3. Dimensions, thicknesses, cross-sections, materials of construction.
D. Installation Instructions: Submit complete Manufacturers installation instructions for all products.
E. Certifications: Submit Manufacturer's certification that products and materials conform to these
Specifications.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration, damage, contamination with foreign
matter, and damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
C. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM
A. General:
1. All heating cable components shall be UL listed, CSA certified, or FM approved.
2. Provide a complete system including power connections, end seal kits, and microprocessor based
control system where indicated.
3. All system components shall be by one manufacturer.
4. Coordinate field installed heating cable with factory mounted tank heating cable.
5. Piping lengths indicated below should not solely be used to determine cable lengths. System supplier
shall determine cable length accounting for valves, and hanger supports, etc.
B. Freeze Protection System:
1. Components:
a. Rated NEMA 4X, 208 VAC.
b. Self-regulating Pipe and Tank Freeze Protection Heating Cable:
1) 2- 16 AWG nickel copper bus wires embed in a parallel self regulating polymer core.
2) Varies its power output along the length responding to temperature, allowing the cable to
be cut to length.
3) Covered by a modified polyolefin dielectric jacket.
c. Line Sensing Temperature Sensor:
1) Remote mounted.
2) RTD or thermocouple as required to match controller input; Chromalox, Model RBF; or
equal.
3) Designed for installation between pipe and pipe insulation.
4) Waterproof connections for outdoor installations.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Heat Tracing Systems

Section 40 05 33
40 05 33 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_33.DOC
5) Corrosion resistant.
d. Schedule:
1) Pipe Data:
a) 3-Inch Pipe for Anti-Siphon Valve (3-Inch Ductile Iron Pipe): 6 feet.
2) Nominal Output:
a) 3-Inch Pipe: Single run of 5 watts per foot cable.
3) Ambient Operating Temperature: -20 to 40 degrees F.
4) Pipe Size and Insulation Thickness: See Division 22 Section Piping Insulation.
e. Manufacturer: Chromalox DTS; or equal by Tyco/Raychem.
C. System Controls:
1. Functional Control Description:
a. Heat trace system shall operate heat trace control circuit based on operator adjustable pipe
temperature with adjustable deadband.
b. Heat trace system shall initialize a low pipe temperature alarm (one alarm condition sensor for
each pipe) and dry contact to connect to the SCADA/monitoring system.
c. Alarm set points shall be operator adjustable.
2. Components:
a. Single Zone Control Panel (One for each pipe section):
1) 30 amp switching, with operating voltage of 208 VAC, single phase.
2) Line sensing temperature sensor input.
3) Low temperature alarm output.
4) Digital indication of temperature sensor input.
5) Sensor to have independent, field selectable set points.
6) Sensor input to have independent dry contact relay output rated up to 5A at 120VAC.
7) Dry contact relay alarm output rated up to 5A at 120VAC.
8) Single phase enclosure heater for outdoor use.
9) Soft start mechanism to eliminate self regulating cable in-rush current.
10) NEMA 4X, FRP enclosure.
3. Manufacturers: Chromalox DTS; or equal by Tyco/Raychem.
D. Accessories:
1. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end seals
and splice kits, power connections, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Warning Labels as required by NEC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING
A. General: Before and after installing the insulation, subject the heating cable to a 2500-Vdc megger.
Minimum insulation resistance shall be 20 megaohms or greater.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in conformance with:
1. The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
2. The Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply heating cable linearly on the pipe after piping has been successfully pressure tested.
C. Apply heating cable to tank on lower one half or one third as recommended by supplier.
D. Apply Electric Traced labels to the outside of the thermal insulation.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Heat Tracing Systems

Section 40 05 33
40 05 33 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_05_33.DOC
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Arrange and pay for Manufacturer's engineer to provide the services indicated
below for a minimum onsite time of 4 hours per trip, 2 trips to Site. Schedule the following as soon as
practicable after installation and at times approved by Engineer and Owner.
1. Installation: Advise, coordinate and direct proper equipment installation. Check work and installation
completed.
2. Demonstration: Check work and installation, assist in start-up, demonstrate operation to Owner's
personnel and to Engineer.
3. Training: Check work or re-work, assist in start-up, demonstrate operation and signals to
SCADA/monitoring system to Engineer. Train Owner's personnel in the proper operation and
maintenance of each piece of equipment installed under this Section.
B. Promptly make all changes and additions required by Manufacturer's engineer.
C. Submit written report of installation verification and acceptance to Engineer.


END OF SECTION 40 05 33


Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 1 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
SECTION 40 90 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing and installation of the pretreatment
plant process control and instrumentation system comprised of the major items listed below, as indicated on
the Drawings, as specified herein, and as necessary for the proper and complete performance of the Work:
1. Control panels.
2. Field instruments.
3. Software.
4. Computer equipment.
5. Spare parts.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Electrical.
2. Division 40 Section Process Valves.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. System Overview:
1. A new control system shall be installed to control and monitor the wastewater treatment process.
Existing Opto22 programmable logic controller (PLC) equipment shall be replaced with Allen Bradley
CompactLogix PLC equipment. Unless indicated otherwise, existing field devices, instrumentation,
and wiring shall be reused. Existing software, computers, and peripherals shall be replaced. The new
control system shall be programmed to monitor and control existing equipment matching existing
programming and functionality. New equipment shall be monitored and controlled as described
herein.
2. New control system shall utilize Wonderware software to replace Opto22 software; providing upgraded
graphics with similar functionality, alarming, and reporting.
3. A new control panel (CP-MCP) shall be provided to replace existing I/O Panel 1.
4. The enclosures for existing I/O Panels 2 and 3 shall be reused; new subpanels shall be provided to
replace existing.
5. Existing I/O Panel 4 shall be disconnected, removed, and replaced.
6. The control system shall be fully expandable to allow for future expansion.
7. Contractor shall conduct field investigations as required to determine existing conditions, existing
programming, all wiring details, additional I/O requirements, signal ranges, units and calibration
requirements.
B. Provide all components and labor necessary, as indicated on Drawings, to achieve functional intent as
described in this Section. Some components (i.e., power supplies, terminal strips, etc.) may not be
specifically itemized.
C. Provide components which are compatible with process equipment.
D. Functionally similar components shall be products of a single Manufacturer.
E. Migrate all existing I/O to new platform.
F. Provide new Wonderware graphics screens with the same functionality as existing Opto22 graphics screens.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 2 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
G. Contractor shall assemble new components on a back plane for ease of installation into existing I/O panels
and to minimize downtime.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Itemized Listings:
1. Description of deviations from the requirements of this Section.
2. Re-submittals shall contain response(s) to each comment made by Engineer. Re-submittals that do
not contain response(s) will be returned and will be subject to re-review compensation.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawing submittal schedule listing Shop Drawings to be submitted with estimated time frame of
submittal relative to other project milestones (e.g. programming development, factory test,
performance test, project closeout).
2. For all process control and instrumentation equipment, to include:
a. Manufacturers name and model number.
b. Equipment descriptions.
c. Product data sheet.
d. Standard drawings and illustrations.
e. Dimensions.
f. Materials of construction.
g. Details of construction and installation.
h. Detailed system schematic.
i. Project specific wiring diagrams, clearly indicating all field wiring requirements.
3. For all systems with control panels, to include:
a. Control panel layout drawing(s).
b. Control panel conduit entrance locations and limitations.
c. Control panel elevation drawing(s).
d. Control panel wiring diagrams:
1) Shall clearly differentiate between internal and field wiring.
2) Shall indicate loop wiring numbers for all devices.
3) Analog loop diagrams shall indicate instrument range in engineering units.
e. Ambient temperature range design considerations, design assumptions and specifications.
f. Ladder logic diagrams with documentation for all PLCs (new and existing).
g. Where modifications are required to existing control panels, existing control panel wiring shall be
field verified and existing wiring shall be depicted in Shop Drawings to the extent required to fully
indicate the extent of the modifications and to indicate the integration of the existing and new
equipment. Where existing control panel drawings exist, they shall be scanned in to create an
electronic version of the drawing. The electronic version of the existing panel drawing shall be
used to indicate panel modifications for submittal and as-built purposes.
4. For all systems with PLC equipment, to include:
a. The following shall be submitted before factory testing is scheduled to begin:
1) Existing PLC program documented from field investigation.
2) List of all analog input and output signals (new and existing) with verified ranges in
engineering units.
3) List of all derived signals (new and existing) with ranges in engineering units.
4) List of all alarms (new and existing) with proposed initial setpoints.
5) List of all equipment being controlled based on an analog signal where an over-range or
under-range may cause unintended operation and a description of logic which will cause
the control system to safely shut down or control equipment in safest way possible.
b. The following shall be submitted before Field Performance Demonstration is scheduled to begin:
1) Ladder logic diagrams with documentation for all PLCs.
5. For all systems with operator interface equipment, to include:
a. Computer hardware and software.
b. Operating screens (color copies) and reports with descriptions.
c. Data logging description including data points to be logged, logging intervals, calculated storage
period before data overwriting, data retrieval procedure, and data format in Microsoft Excel.
d. Network overview diagram(s) with IP/rack addresses. Listing of all software to be provided for
each node.
e. List of all alarms with proposed initial setpoints.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 3 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. General:
a. Table of contents.
b. Subdivided (tabbed) into separate sections that cover separate equipment or grouping of
equipment.
c. Provide 1 electronic copy (CD-ROM) per hard copy, of the overall O&M Manual that includes
information for all sites. Owner shall be permitted to make copies of CD-ROM without
restriction.
2. For all process control equipment, to include:
a. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
b. Assembly, installation adjustment and checking instructions.
c. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and
shutdown and emergency conditions.
d. Maintenance instructions.
e. Guide to troubleshooting.
f. Parts lists and predicated life of parts subject to maintenance replacement.
g. Outline, cross-sections, assembly drawings, engineering data and wiring diagrams.
h. Test data and performance curves.
3. For all control systems, to include:
a. Overall system operation, interdependence, redundancy/fail-over capability, as well as failure
and recover scenarios.
b. Alarm List with descriptions as seen in control system and with differentiation related to alarm
indication method (e.g. annunciator, dialer, etc).
c. Software installation media, including runtime and development software.
d. Copy of software registration form in Owners name.
e. Support program agreement registration form in Owners name.
f. Database schema diagram including primary/foreign key relationships.
g. List of firmware versions for all equipment that is firmware upgradeable.
h. List of IP or node addresses for all addressable equipment.
i. Written functional description and color print-outs of all operating screen and reports.
D. File Backup:
1. General: System Integrator agrees to grant to the Owner an exclusive, perpetual, irrevocable, world-
wide and royalty free license to use and modify the Software and related intellectual property provided
to fulfill these specifications.
2. Submit the following to be used by the Owner:
a. Backup (on CD or other electronic media) and hard copies of all program (PLC, HMI, etc.),
configuration and firmware files, including drawings and documentation.
b. License files.
c. Any configuration that does not reside in a file shall be electronically documented, with screen
shots included in the submittal or listed in a spreadsheet style document.
d. Electronic copies of submittal drawings in .dwg format.
1) Control panel drawings shall show final As-Built construction, including existing
components and wiring that have been re-used.
2) Include all supporting files.
e. Provide table of contents file on each CD listing contents of directories and subdirectories with
description for each file or group of files. Filenames and directory structure shall match
files/filenames/directories listed in the Disaster Recovery and Business Continuity Plan
document. Reinstallation instructions shall reference File Backup CD.
E. Disaster Recovery and Business Continuity Plan:
1. Disaster Recovery Plan shall describe procedures for recovering from a disaster that renders the
control system unavailable for an unacceptable period of time.
a. List of system/component suppliers with contact information.
b. List of system/component suppliers with service agreement or warranty dates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in fabrication and installation of materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and reviewed Shop Drawings.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 4 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
B. Manufacturers Services:
1. Submit Manufacturers sworn statement that equipment furnished complies with this Specification and
Manufacturers engineers written approval of installation.
2. Provide Manufacturers field service as specified herein.
C. All materials, installation and testing shall be in accordance with ISA Standards and Recommended
Practice.
D. Contractor shall conduct field investigations as required to verify existing conditions, I/O, programming,
wiring requirements, instrument ranges/calibration and signal types.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers or wrapping as applicable.
B. Handle and store materials in a manner which will prevent deterioration or damage, contamination with
foreign matter, damage by weather or elements, and in accordance with Manufacturers directions.
C. Store materials indoors in a controlled environment with low moisture content. Do not store outdoors.
D. Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated materials and immediately remove from Site. Replace
rejected materials with new materials at no additional cost to Owner.
1.7 FUNCTIONAL INTENT
A. General:
1. All systems shall be controlled in accordance with the following description, as indicated on the
Drawings and herein specified.
2. Contractor shall provide all devices, controls, panels, wiring and miscellaneous items required to
achieve the specified functional intent whether specifically itemized on the Drawings or not.
3. Coordinate with applicable related trades to incorporate equipment specific parameters in
programming as necessary to meet specified performance.
4. Coordinate calibration and tuning of all equipment (including pumps, valves and existing equipment
being incorporated into the control system), control components, programming and control loops to
provide a complete system and achieve specified system performance.
5. Interlock conditions shall be indicated via pop-up messages when an attempt is made to start
respective equipment, e.g., Pump locked out due to high tank level, etc. Messages shall remain
active on screen until condition clears or is acknowledged by an operator.
6. Inputs for referenced settings, i.e., alarm settings, pump control settings, timers, time delays, etc., shall
be operator adjustable without reprogramming.
7. Failure alarms shall be provided for all equipment controlled via control system. Failure shall include:
a. Equipment not running when called to run after a suitable time period.
b. Equipment running when not called to run after a suitable time period.
c. Valves not opening or closing when commanded, after a suitable time period.
8. Equipment that is not in REMOTE mode shall not be called to operate.
9. Equipment that is not in REMOTE mode shall not be allowed to be selected for a LEAD/LAG1/LAG2
sequence position.
10. Power, UPS and TVSS status shall be continuously monitored by control system.
11. Variable frequency drive control via the control system shall include low and high speed limit setpoints
for each unit, for each mode.
12. Provide adjustable time delays to avoid:
a. Nuisance alarms.
b. Unintended equipment operation.
c. Simultaneous start/restart of equipment.
13. Where equipment is being controlled based on an analog signal, an over-range or under-range
condition shall:
a. Generate an equipment failure alarm.
b. Initiate logic which will cause control system to safely shut down or control equipment in the
safest way possible.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 5 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
14. Entire system shall restart and resume programmed sequential operations without rebooting or
resetting any subsystems upon resuming of power after power failure or after generator automatically
starts.
15. User adjustable parameters and settings shall be maintained upon resuming of power after power
failure or after generator automatically starts.
16. Upon sensing a power failure, the control system shall turn off all active start call outputs. The control
system shall not restart equipment until thirty seconds after power is restored. Thirty seconds after
sensing a power failure an alarm shall be generated.
17. All sites and panels/racks which communicate with each other shall be programmed to provide
communication status, and indication and alarm of communication failure.
18. Inputs and outputs from similar equipment shall be distributed across multiple I/O modules in the same
control panel to minimize the effect of a single point of failure of an I/O module. I/O modules shall be
distributed across multiple chassis, where applicable. Therefore in most cases two modules of each
type are required.
19. Where possible, inputs (Outputs) from(to) a piece of equipment shall not straddle I/O modules. I/O
shall be arranged so that the failure of a single I/O module shall not cause unexpected or incomplete
equipment operation.
20. Provide alarm horn with silence/acknowledge and test pushbuttons, and disable selector switch
mounted inside control panel.
21. PLC programming shall be in Relay Ladder Logic and latch and unlatch instructions shall not be
used in equipment control logic.
B. Typical Equipment Control: Minimum functionality for equipment.
1. New Fixed Speed Motor Starter Equipment Control:
a. Each motor starter shall have:
1) LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (LOR) selector switch for control mode selection.
2) RUNNING pilot light for local indication.
b. The following signals shall be sent to the control system:
1) IN REMOTE; for indication and alarm.
2) RUNNING; for indication, alarm, event logging and runtime totalization.
c. Operation of equipment shall be as follows:
1) Local Mode (LOCAL):
a) The equipment shall be controlled manually from its respective starter when the
LOR switch is placed in the LOCAL and OFF positions. Refer to the equipment
starter wiring diagram for operation in LOCAL mode.
b) When equipment is not in REMOTE, LOCAL shall be displayed adjacent to the
appropriate equipment symbol on the computer screen.
2) Remote Mode (REMOTE):
a) The equipment shall be controlled by the control system when the LOR switch is
placed in the REMOTE position.
b) When equipment is in REMOTE, REMOTE shall be displayed adjacent to the
appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
c) Operation in REMOTE mode shall be as follows:
(1) In REMOTE MANUAL mode under control system control, it shall be possible
to initiate equipment startup or shutdown from a control system screen.
(a) A START-STOP control faceplate shall be available on the computer
screen only when the selected equipment is in REMOTE MANUAL.
(b) When equipment is in REMOTE MANUAL, MANUAL shall be
displayed adjacent to the appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
(2) In REMOTE AUTO mode under control system control, equipment shall be
started and stopped automatically by the control system.
(a) AUTO control shall be based on Functional Intent description.
(b) When equipment is in REMOTE AUTO, AUTO shall be displayed
adjacent to the appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
2. New Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Equipment Control:
a. In addition to the features listed above for Fixed Speed Motor Starter Equipment Control:
b. Each VFD shall have:
1) Keypad with adjustable speed control, adjustable ramp time, adjustable minimum and
maximum speeds.
2) FAULT pilot light for local indication.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 6 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
c. The following signals shall be sent to the control system:
1) FAULT; for indication and alarm.
2) SPEED; for indication and logging/trending.
d. Operation of equipment shall be as follows:
1) Local Mode (LOCAL):
a) Speed shall be controlled locally via VFD keypad.
2) Remote Mode (REMOTE):
a) The equipment speed shall be controlled by the control system when the LOR
switch is placed in the REMOTE position.
b) Operation in REMOTE mode shall be as follows:
(1) In REMOTE MANUAL mode under control system control, the speed of the
equipment shall be able to be manually set as a percentage of full speed. The
rate of change of speed shall be coordinated with the VFDs settings so as not
to produce unwanted effects like pipeline surges.
(a) A SPEED control faceplate with manual speed control shall be available
on the computer screen only when the selected equipment is in
REMOTE MANUAL. MANUAL speed adjustment and indication shall be
available on the faceplate.
(2) In REMOTE AUTO mode under control system control, the speed of the
equipment shall be adjusted automatically by the control system.
(a) AUTO SPEED control shall be based on Functional Intent description.
3. New OPEN/CLOSE Valve Control:
a. Each valve shall have:
1) LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (LOR) selector switch for local control mode selection.
2) OPEN and CLOSE selection for local control.
3) OPENED and CLOSED pilot light for local indication.
b. The following signals shall be sent to the control system:
1) IN REMOTE; for indication and alarm.
2) OPENED and CLOSED; for indication, alarm, and event logging.
c. Operation of equipment shall be as follows:
1) Local Mode (LOCAL):
a) The equipment shall be controlled manually from its respective valve actuator when
the LOR switch is placed in the LOCAL and OFF positions. Refer to the actuator
wiring diagram for operation in LOCAL mode.
b) When equipment is not in REMOTE, LOCAL shall be displayed adjacent to the
appropriate equipment symbol on the computer screen.
2) Remote Mode (REMOTE):
a) The valve shall be controlled by the control system when the LOR switch is placed
in the REMOTE position.
b) When valve is in REMOTE, REMOTE shall be displayed adjacent to the
appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
c) Operation in REMOTE mode shall be as follows:
(1) In REMOTE MANUAL mode under control system control, it shall be possible
to open and close the valve from a control system screen.
(a) An OPEN-CLOSE control faceplate shall be available on the computer
screen only when the selected valve is in REMOTE MANUAL.
(b) When equipment is in REMOTE MANUAL, MANUAL shall be
displayed adjacent to the appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
(2) In REMOTE AUTO mode under control system control, valve shall be opened
and closed automatically by the control system.
(a) AUTO control shall be based on Functional Intent description.
(b) When equipment is in REMOTE AUTO, AUTO shall be displayed
adjacent to the appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
4. New MODULATING Valve Control:
a. Each valve shall have:
1) LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE (LOR) selector switch for local control mode selection.
2) OPEN and CLOSE selection for local control.
3) OPENED and CLOSED pilot light for local indication.
b. The following signals shall be sent to the control system:
1) IN REMOTE; for indication and alarm.
2) OPENED and CLOSED; for indication, alarm, and event logging.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 7 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
c. Operation of equipment shall be as follows:
1) Local Mode (LOCAL):
a) The equipment shall be controlled manually from its respective valve actuator when
the LOR switch is placed in the LOCAL and OFF positions. Refer to the actuator
wiring diagram for operation in LOCAL mode.
b) When equipment is not in REMOTE, LOCAL shall be displayed adjacent to the
appropriate equipment symbol on the computer screen.
2) Remote Mode (REMOTE):
a) The valve shall be controlled by the control system when the LOR switch is placed
in the REMOTE position.
b) When valve is in REMOTE, REMOTE shall be displayed adjacent to the
appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
c) Operation in REMOTE mode shall be as follows:
(1) In REMOTE MANUAL mode under control system control, it shall be possible
to open and close the valve from a control system screen.
(a) An OPEN-CLOSE control faceplate shall be available on the computer
screen only when the selected valve is in REMOTE MANUAL.
(b) When equipment is in REMOTE MANUAL, MANUAL shall be
displayed adjacent to the appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
(2) In REMOTE AUTO mode under control system control, the valve shall be
modulated automatically by the control system.
(a) AUTO control shall be based on Functional Intent description.
(b) When equipment is in REMOTE AUTO, AUTO shall be displayed
adjacent to the appropriate symbol on the computer screen.
5. Interlocks, permissive and delays:
a. The operator shall select a delay period for individual systems such that selected unit processes
will shut down after the automatic call to stop.
b. System shall indicate when equipment has been called to run, Call Pending, but has been
temporarily disabled by interlock, permissive or delay. The source and duration remaining of
interlock, permissive or delay shall be indicated where applicable.
C. Raw Waste Pumps:
1. General: Two screw-type centrifugal submersible pumps, deliver raw waste from the raw waste wet
well (T-1) to the Influent EQ Tank (T-2).
2. Each pump (P-1-2-1 and P-1-2-2) shall be controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) and shall
have typical VFD control.
3. Control shall include LOCAL, REMOTE MANUAL START/STOP and REMOTE MANUAL SPEED
control, and REMOTE AUTO START/STOP control.
4. In REMOTE AUTO under control system control:
a. Either pump shall be selectable as LEAD or STANDBY. Pumps can be alternated on
successive starts by selecting ALTERNATE LEAD. Selection shall be indicated at the control
system screen.
b. The selected LEAD pump shall operate as follows:
1) Based on NORMAL ON /OFF setpoint levels and a NORMAL speed setting corresponding
to 150 gpm.
2) Two Speed Mode: If level continues to rise to a MAXIMUM setpoint level, the pump speed
shall increase from the NORMAL setting to a MAXIMUM speed setting corresponding to
300 gpm. The LEAD pump shall pump down to the designated PUMP OFF level and the
pumps shall revert back to the NORMAL speed setting.
3) PID Mode: If level continues to rise beyond the pump ON setpoint level, the pump flow
shall vary to maintain an adjustable level setpoint.
4) Pumps P-1-2-1, P-1-2-2 shall shut down based on the following:
a) Pump fault or VFD fault.
b) Low Raw Waste Wet Well level.
5) The following shall be selectable from the control system Screen (in addition to above):
a) Maximum speed.
b) Normal speed.
5. An existing bubbler system shall transmit level signals to the control system.
6. An existing high level float switch shall activate on a high level in the wet well and transmit a signal to
the control system for alarm and logging.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 8 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
D. Flow Monitoring:
1. Existing flowmeter (FE/FIT-1-2-1) shall monitor the raw waste pumped to the Influent EQ storage tank
(T-700).
2. Existing flowmeter (FE/FIT-2-3-1) shall monitor the process feed flow pumped to the splitter box.
3. New flowmeter (FE/FIT-2-4-1) shall monitor the process feed flow through the modulating bypass
valve.
4. A 4-20 mA signal proportional to each flow signal shall be transmitted to the control system for
indication, logging and alarm.
5. The control system shall sum the totalized flow from FE/FIT 2-3-1 and FE/FIT- 2-4-1 to determine the
total plant flow.
E. Influent Equalization Storage Tank (T-700):
1. Level transmitter (LE/LIT-7-1-1) shall monitor the liquid level in the tank. A 4-20mAdc signal
proportional to level shall be transmitted to the control system for indication, alarm, and logging.
2. High level float switch (LSH-7-1-1) shall activate on high level in the tank and a signal shall be
transmitted to the control system for indication and redundant alarm.
3. A flow switch (FS-7-1-1) shall sense flow in the 6 inch tank overflow line. A signal shall be sent to the
control system for alarm and logging.
4. Operator adjustable level setpoints:
a. High tank level Alarm (initially set at 22 feet).
b. Motive Pump/Blower On level (Initially set at 6 feet).
c. Motive Pump/Blower Off level (Initially set at 5 feet).
d. Low tank level Alarm (initially set at 4 feet).
F. Jet Aeration Treatment:
1. General: A jet aeration system consisting of blowers, motive pumps, and an in-basin aeration header
deliver air to and mix the contents of the Influent EQ tank.
2. Blowers:
a. Each blower (B-7-1-1 and B-7-1-2) shall be controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) and
shall have typical VFD control.
b. Control shall include LOCAL, REMOTE MANUAL START/STOP and REMOTE MANUAL
SPEED control, and REMOTE AUTO START/STOP control.
1) In REMOTE AUTO under control system control:
a) Each blower shall be selectable as LEAD or STANDBY. Blowers can be alternated
on successive starts by selecting ALTERNATE LEAD. Selection shall be indicated
on overview screen.
b) The selected blower shall start and stop as follows:
(1) The blower shall run in either a continuous mode or in a repeat cycle mode.
(2) The blower shall run at either a constant speed or variable speed.
(3) In variable speed mode the Blower shall automatically vary in speed based on
high and low setpoints in proportion to setpoint levels for maximum and
minimum water level.
(4) The blower shall shut down as follows:
(a) High pressure.
(b) Low pressure.
(c) High temperature.
(d) Low tank level (Initially set at 5 feet).
(5) The blower shall restart as follows:
(a) Based on an Intermediate setpoint level (initially set at 6 feet).
(6) The following shall be selectable from the control system (in addition to
above) :
(a) Cycle on-time selection (0-360 minutes).
(b) Cycle off-time selection (0-360 minutes).
(c) Time delay on shutdown (0-30 minutes).
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 9 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
3. Motive Pumps:
a. Each motive pump (P-7-1-1 and P-7-1-2) shall be controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD)
and shall have typical VFD control.
b. Control shall include LOCAL, REMOTE MANUAL START/STOP and REMOTE MANUAL
SPEED control, and REMOTE AUTO START/STOP control.
1) In REMOTE AUTO under control system control:
a) Each pump shall be selectable as LEAD or STANDBY. Selection shall be indicated
on overview screen.
b) The selected pump shall start and stop as appropriate based on the mode selected
and as follows:
(1) The pump shall run in either a continuous mode or in a repeat cycle mode.
(2) The pump shall shut down as follows:
(a) Low Tank level (Initially set at 5 feet).
(3) The Motive Pump shall restart as follows:
(a) When the tank level reaches the Intermediate tank level (Initially set at
6 feet).
(4) The following setpoints shall be selectable from the control system (in addition
to above):
(a) Time delay shutdown (0-30 minutes).
(b) Cycle on-time selection (0-360 minutes).
(c) Cycle off-time selection (0-360 minutes).
G. Control Valves:
1. FCV-2-4-1 and FCV-2-4-3 shall have typical OPEN/CLOSE valve control.
2. FCV-2-4-2 shall have typical MODULATING valve control.
3. Control shall include LOCAL, REMOTE MANUAL OPEN/CLOSE and REMOTE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE
control.
4. In REMOTE MANUAL under control system control:
a. FCV-2-4-1 and FCV-2-4-3 can be opened/closed remotely from the control system.
b. The modulating valve, FCV-2-4-2 can be positioned.
5. In REMOTE AUTO under control system control:
a. The mode shall be selected as described above.
b. The valves shall operate automatically as follows:
1) Low Tank Mode:
a) FCV-2-4-2 and FCV-2-4-1 shall close based on T-700 setpoint levels. FCV-2-4-3
shall open and process feed pumps shall be enabled.
2) High Tank Mode: FCV-2-4-1 shall open and FCV-2-4-3 shall close based on T-700 level
setpoints. FCV-2-4-2 shall modulate based on a flow signal setpoint.
H. Process Feed Pumps:
1. Pumps:
a. General: Two end suction centrifugal solids handling pumps, deliver raw waste from Tank
T-700 to the splitter box or to the pipe loop.
b. Each pump (P-2-3-1 and P-2-3-2) shall be controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) and
shall have typical VFD control.
c. Control shall include LOCAL, REMOTE MANUAL START/STOP and REMOTE MANUAL
SPEED control, and REMOTE AUTO START/STOP control.
d. In REMOTE MANUAL Mode under control system control:
1) ON/OFF control.
2) Speed control.
e. In REMOTE AUTO under control system control:
1) Either pump shall be selectable as LEAD or STANDBY. ALTERNATE LEAD can also be
selected. Selection shall be indicated at the control system screen.
2) The selected LEAD pump shall operate as follows:
a) Pump speed shall increase incrementally based on tank level in T-700 as follows.
(1) 0-5 feet-OFF.
(2) 5-7 feet- 40 gpm (initial flow setpoint )
(3) 7-9 feet-60 gpm (initial flow setpoint )
(4) 9-11 feet- 80 gpm (initial flow setpoint )
(5) 11-13 feet-100 gpm (initial flow setpoint)
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 10 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
(6) On rising level, and at 13 feet (initial setpoint) and above, the process pumps
shall be disabled and FCV-2-4-2 shall modulate to maintain setpoint flow.
FCV-2-4-1 shall close and FCV-2-4-3 shall open to bypass the pipe loop.
(See control valve discussion above).
(7) On decreasing level, and at 11 feet (initial setpoint) and below, the process
pumps shall be enabled and both FCV-2-4-1 and FVC-2-4-2 shall be closed,
FCV-2-4-3 shall be open.
b) Pumps P-2-3-1, P-2-3-2 shall shut down based on the following:
(1) Pump fault or VFD fault.
(2) Low T-700 tank level.
c) The following shall be selectable from the control system Screen (in addition to
above):
(1) Maximum speed.
(2) Minimum speed.
I. Dissolved Oxygen Monitoring:
1. The dissolved oxygen (DO) concentration in each existing reactor tank shall be continuously
measured by DO sensors, AE/AIT-2-4-1, AE/AIT-2-4-2, AE/AIT-2-4-3 and AE/AIT-2-4-4.
2. The DO sensor shall be placed in the mid-level of the reactor. The DO transmitter shall send a 4-20
mAdc signal proportional to the D.O. concentration for blower control.
3. DO values shall be transmitted to the control system for indication, logging and alarm.
J. Alarms:
1. The Contractor shall verify all alarm conditions from existing software program documentation.
2. All alarm settings shall be operator adjustable.
3. All existing alarm conditions shall be maintained.
4. At a minimum, the following new alarm signals shall be sent to the control system for alarm and
logging:
a. High EQ Tank level
b. Low EQ tank level
c. Pump faults
d. VFD faults
e. Blower faults
5. Coordinate with the Owner and program the selected alarm conditions.
6. Coordinate alarms with remote alarm notification software. Existing Win911 software to be reused.
K. Control System Software:
1. Graphic Screens:
a. General: The following requirements and standards shall apply unless in direct conflict with
Owners standard, in which case the Owners standards shall be followed. New programming
and development for new and modified process equipment shall meet these requirements.
1) Automated Valves Shall Display:
a) Green when fully opened (opened limit switch only).
b) Red when fully closed (closed limit switch only).
c) Yellow when in an intermediate position or in transition (neither limit switch).
d) Blue when in faulted (both limit switches).
e) Valves with continuous position transmitters shall have a digital indicator displaying
percent opened.
2) Equipment/Motors Shall Display:
a) Green when running,
b) Red when stopped,
c) Blinking when failed.
3) Tank liquid levels shall be dynamically indicated on the graphic in addition to a digital
readout.
4) Storage tanks shall display level and gallons.
5) Analog signals shall be displayed on the operator interface and shall indicate a decimal
readout to the tenths position.
6) Operating equipment from an operator interface shall be a 2 step process in order to
minimize unintended equipment operation.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 11 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
7) In addition to a display for the analog value, totalizing counter indicators shall be provided
for all flow meters. Previous days totals shall also be displayed. Totalizers shall
automatically reset at the end of each day and the daily totals shall be logged to a
database for later retrieval or use in reports.
8) Use synchronized military time for computers, PLCs and software. Synchronized Daylight
Savings Time change shall be programmed into equipment and software. Internal clock
values shall be displayed for equipment. Provide means to quickly and easily synchronize
internal clock values. Provide deviation alarm to indicate deviation from PC/server time.
9) Provide indicating counters for equipment run times displaying in hours and tenths of
hours. Previous days total shall also be displayed. Run time counters shall automatically
reset at the end of each day and the daily totals shall be logged to a database for later
retrieval or use in reports.
10) Provide communication status screen to monitor communication status between
components. Provide IO/DA server communication status, PLC communication status
and heartbeat status. Provide heartbeat status display to indicate successful
communication as well as failure status. Provide communication status information for all
racks.
11) Provide capability to make any alarm audible at operators discretion. Train Plant
personnel in procedures.
12) Whenever a control function is locked out, a pop-up shall appear on the computer
indicating reason for lockout.
13) Process control shall be executed in PLCs and shall not rely on operator interface(s).
14) Equipment control and operation screens shall be separate from system configuration
screens.
b. Modifications and additions shall be made as determined by Shop Drawing review, pre-
installation programming meetings, Owner coordination, and start-up and testing activities.
c. Computer Screens:
1) New Screens to be Developed:
a) Plant Subsystem Screens (Reference Sheets I-2 through I-4): Coordinate
requirements with Owner.
(1) Provide screens to display all process information.
(2) Screens shall display all I/O signals and derived parameters for areas listed
above and shown on P&ID sheets.
(3) Provide pop-up screens to allow operational process changes.
(4) Provide pop-up screens to allow control system configuration changes.
(5) Coordinate with Owner/Engineer.
b) New utility/screens to be developed: Status information that indicates system or
component health shall have associated alarms.
(1) Legend.
(2) Plant Data Overview Screen:
(a) Real-time and summary data.
(b) Tabular format.
(c) Coordinate data requirements with Owner.
(d) Modify during system start-up and testing as requested by Owner.
(3) PLC Monitoring Utility Screen:
(a) Run/Prog/Stop Status.
(b) Battery status.
(c) Communication status.
(d) Heartbeat status.
(e) IP address.
(f) System time with ability to sync to computer.
(4) Security Access Utility Screen:
(a) Current user name.
(b) Current user access level.
(5) User name and password configuration.
(6) PID Loop Monitoring Pop-up Screens:
(a) Control Inputs: Setpoints (SP) and process variables (PV).
(b) Control Outputs: Control variables (CV).
(c) Real-time trend of variables.
(d) Ability to manually adjust setpoint and control variables.
(e) Ability to adjust P/I/D parameters.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 12 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
(f) Proportional band.
(g) Bar graph and numerical display of variables scaled in engineering
units.
(7) Screens required for operator input of chemical concentrations, pump
capacities, etc to be used for process control calculations or reporting.
(8) Lean Managed Switch Web browser screen
d. Historical Trending:
1) All analog values.
2) Provide predefined trends which have pens available for operator selection.
e. Run Times for Motors: Provide a table of the following running totals on a separate screen(s).
Send totals to a data storage daily.
1) Todays total.
2) Yesterdays total.
3) This months total.
4) Last months total.
f. Totalized Values for Flow Meters: Provide a table of the following flow totals on a separate
screen(s). Send totals to a data storage daily.
1) Todays total.
2) Yesterdays total.
3) This months total.
4) Last months total.
g. Events to be logged to database as they occur:
1) Equipment started.
2) Equipment stopped.
3) Valve opened.
4) Valve closed.
5) Adjustable process parameter change.
6) User login.
7) Coordinate additional events with Owner/Engineer.
h. Summary and Current Alarms:
1) General:
a) Alarm conditions shall be determined in the PLC.
b) Shall be stored in a non-volatile storage.
c) Alarm inputs shall have time delay. Discrete alarms shall have 5 second delay
unless noted otherwise. Analog alarms shall have user adjustable delay with an
initial setting of 20 seconds.
d) Analog alarms shall have user adjustable setpoint limits.
e) Shall be displayed and alarm messages shall remain active on a screen until
acknowledged by operator.
f) Alarm messages shall describe alarm condition and include date and time stamp.
Coordinate additional alarm display requirements with Owner.
g) Provide capability to make any alarm audible at users discretion. Alarms shall be
able to be made audible per control panel equipped with horn.
h) Provide capability to make any alarm activate the dialer at users discretion. Alarms
shall be able to be assigned to any dialer input. Multiple alarms shall be able to be
directed to the same dialer input.
i) Provide capability to disable any alarm at operators discretion.
j) Provide separate screens for current and summary (historical) alarms.
2) Analog Alarms (Minimum) (i.e., high alarm, low alarm, etc.):
a) Tank/wetwell/chamber level.
b) Instrument over/under range.
c) Control system node monitoring.
3) Discrete Alarms (Minimum):
a) Power failure.
b) TVSS failure.
c) UPS failure.
d) Tank/wetwell high/low level.
e) Equipment failure (all equipment controlled in REMOTE from the control system).
f) Equipment not in remote (all equipment controlled in REMOTE from the control
system).
g) Equipment fault.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 13 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
h) Eyewash/shower activated.
i) Combustible/hazardous gas high.
j) Communication failure.
k) Control system node monitoring.
i. Historical Data Collection:
1) Collect all analog values (minimum).
2) Minimum Online Storage Period: 3 years.
2. Reports:
a. Maintain existing reporting system.
b. Add new equipment to existing reports as applicable. Create new reports where necessary.
3. Control System Security:
a. General: Coordinate system component security so that components work together to maximize
control system security.
b. HMI:
1) Coordinate levels of security with Owner.
2) Provide secure screen to add, remove, edit and verify security settings.
3) Train Owners designated security administrator.
c. Network:
1) Configure all network components to:
a) Maximize network security.
b) Minimize unnecessary network traffic.
c) Minimize data packets received at each PLC.
d) Provide Data Storm protection.
d. Computer Hardware and OS Software:
1) Coordinate User accounts and groups with Owner:
2) Remove unused software.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts:
1. Control System Equipment:
a. 1 CompactLogix PLC processor, with Project specific version of firmware loaded.
b. 1 PLC power supply of each type provided.
c. 1 communication module of each type provided.
d. 1 digital input modules of each type provided.
e. 1 digital output modules of each type provided.
f. 1 analog input module of each type provided.
g. 1 analog output module of each type provided.
h. 3 fuses of each type and/or size provided.
i. 4 UTP patch cables of each type provided.
j. 1 control panel surge protection devices for each type provided.
1.9 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. General:
1. Assist other contractors installing new equipment during construction and verification after installation.
At a minimum, includes:
a. Providing the installation Contractor sufficient copies of all the necessary reviewed Shop
Drawings.
b. Coordinating all deliveries with the installation Contractor.
c. Providing the necessary on-site supervision during installation.
2. Provide the services of a representative of the Manufacturer to start-up and train Owner personnel in
the proper operation and maintenance of the aeration equipment and control system furnished under
this Section.
3. Coordinate the Work to achieve a functioning control system to provide overall plant monitoring and
control.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 14 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
B. Start-up Assistance:
1. Includes:
a. Calibration of field instrumentation devices.
b. Start-up to include at a minimum:
1) Start-up and testing of equipment.
2) Verification of all pumps, blowers, and instrumentation and control systems.
3) Line-by-line logic verification with Engineer.
c. Submit written report of installation verification and acceptance to Engineer.
d. Submit written notice to Construction Manager and Engineer of all deficiencies, changes or
additions.
2. Does not include:
a. Installation assistance and supervision time.
b. Training time.
3. Schedule:
a. Coordinate with the Construction Manager, Engineer, Owner, and any Subcontractors to
complete the start-up procedure.
b. Submit to the Construction Manager and Engineer written schedule at least 10-days prior
systems to be started, listing:
1) Tasks to be accomplished.
2) Dates and times.
3) Subcontractors and Manufacturer representatives that will be present.
C. Guarantee and Warranty:
1. The Supplier shall guarantee the entire system for a period of one year. This guarantee shall cover all
parts, labor, troubleshooting, telephone consulting, travel and equipment recalibration.
2. The 1 year guarantee period shall begin when the entire instrumentation and process control system is
installed and operating properly. This starting date shall be subject to the acceptance of Engineer in
writing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Acceptable Manufacturers for major system components are specified herein.
B. Not all components are specified. It is the system Suppliers responsibility to furnish and install components
necessary to achieve the functional intent and to meet or exceed the governing local, state or national
standards and/or codes.
C. Coordination of all field mounted instrumentation device installation shall be system Suppliers responsibility:
1. Mounting of each device shall be designed with consideration to:
a. Manufacturers installation recommendations.
b. Ease of removal for maintenance.
c. Safety.
2. Provide all mounting hardware required.
3. All mounting hardware shall be of the following corrosion resistant material. Coordinate mounting
material with surrounding environment:
a. PVC.
b. Stainless steel.
c. FRP.
4. Provide sufficient length of sensor to transmitter cable for each field device.
5. Provide unions, bulkhead fittings, isolation valves, etc.
D. Pre-Approved Acceptable System Suppliers:
1. Perceptive Controls.
2. No substitutions.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 15 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
E. System Suppliers Qualifications and Services:
1. Staffed with factory-trained and certified technicians fully capable of providing instructions and routine
and emergency maintenance services on all components.
2. Supplier shall have at least 5 years experience in programming and installation of systems similar in
performance to that specified herein and shall be prepared to show evidence of such history.
3. Before Substantial Completion, demonstrate to the satisfaction of Engineer the ability of the system to
meet performance requirements in accordance with these Specifications.
4. Provide as much on-site time as necessary to coordinate start-up. Once start-up has commenced,
Supplier shall be on call for emergency situations and respond in a timely manner.
5. Provide Owner contact names and telephone numbers for a minimum of 2 local technicians who can
be called for service on the PLC and related equipment after the 1 year warranty has expired.
6. HMI programmer(s) shall be factory trained on the Wonderware product(s) prior to beginning HMI
programming. Training shall be no more than 1 year prior to beginning of project programming.
2.2 CONTROL PANELS
A. General:
1. Install all wiring in a workmanlike manner. Group, bundle, label, support, and route horizontally and
vertically to provide a neat and organized appearance.
2. Provide circuit breakers and transient voltage surge protection on all panel power sources.
3. Provide surge protection on all telephone wiring.
4. All field 4-20mAdc signals shall be powered from panels, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
5. All field contact closures shall be powered from panels.
6. All wiring shall be sized, labeled and color coded in accordance with Division 26 Section Conductors
and Cables 600V and Below. All panel wiring shall be type MTW unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings.
7. When required, shunt resistors shall be 250 Ohm 0.01%.
8. Provide labeled terminal strips for all wiring entering and leaving panels.
9. Provide patch panels for all network wiring entering and leaving panels.
10. Contractor is responsible for verifying panel size requirements. Control panels shall be assembled by
a UL listed fabrication facility. Panels shall be UL approved and meet the requirements of NEC and
UL508/698. Assume available fault current is 10,000 amps. Each panel shall have a serialized UL
label.
11. Control panel field modifications shall be performed by UL listed fabrication facility personnel to UL
standards and meet the requirements of NEC and UL508/698.
12. Provide Sub-plate Identification Tags:
a. Tags shall be made from engraved plastic, white with 3/8-inch minimum black letters, for all
internal enclosure components.
b. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
c. Stainless steel machine screw fasteners.
13. Label addressable devices with IP or node addresses.
14. Coordinate and provide all necessary mounting hardware.
15. Provide ground bar (Ilsco D-167; or equal) for each control panel. Ground lugs shall not be used.
Remove (scrape) paint from sub-panel prior to ground bar installation to provide an effective electrical
connection.
16. Conduit shall not enter into panels from top. Side, rear and bottom entry permitted only. Cast metal,
O-ring type sealing conduit hubs shall be used on NEMA rated enclosures.
17. Factory assemble, test, and simulate (normal and alarming conditions) before shipment to project site.
Notify Engineer of completion for inspection and verification of panel and controls before shipment.
Panel shall be hardwired to relays and signal generators for simulation.
18. A minimum of 25% spare points of each type (digital inputs, digital outputs, analog inputs, and analog
outputs) shall be provided within each panel and I/O rack, wired to terminal blocks.
19. Provide minimum 25% spare terminals, unwired.
20. Fuse all outputs which control highly inductive loads. Provide 10 spare fuses of every size and type
used.
21. Cabling, connectors and accessories shall be provided for all equipment as required.
22. Provide all mounting hardware, shelves, support brackets, patch panels, etc., as required to install
equipment.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 16 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
B. Enclosures:
1. General:
a. Size Enclosures:
1) To adequately space necessary components in accordance with NEC.
2) Such that UPS does not block access to terminal strips or other internal components.
b. Data pocket.
c. Fluorescent light fixture with lens or shatterproof coated lamp, and door activated switch.
Fixture mounting shall not invalidate NEMA rating.
d. Convenience receptacle, refer to Division 16 Section Wiring Devices for all receptacles located
in control panels.
e. Provide shelf so that UPS does not set on bottom of enclosure.
f. NEMA rated for environment.
g. Coordinate and provide necessary mounting hardware. Locate top of wall mounted enclosures
approximately 60 inches above floor at a masonry joint if applicable.
h. UL listed.
i. White painted steel back panel, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
j. Provide all necessary interior supports to insure panel structural integrity and prevent "oil
canning" of side walls.
2. Metallic:
a. General:
1) Seams continuously welded and ground smooth: no holes or knockouts.
2) Painted enclosures shall be ANSI 61 Grey exterior finish.
3) White interior finish.
4) Bonding provisions on door.
5) Two-door if over 36 inches wide, with removable center post.
6) Collar studs for mounting sub-panels.
7) Body flange trough collar with oil resistant door gasket.
8) Front hinged access door with heavy duty 3-point latching mechanism with latch rod
rollers, 316 stainless steel pad-lockable handle all keyed alike.
9) Heavy duty continuous door hinges.
10) Enclosures which house PLCs shall incorporate a folding shelf for programming device.
b. Freestanding:
1) Material: 12 gage sheet metal, minimum.
2) Heavy duty lifting eyes.
3) 84-inch (minimum) height.
c. Wall Mounted:
1) Material: 14 gage sheet metal, minimum.
2) External mounting brackets.
d. Manufacturer:
1) Hoffman.
2) Copper B-Line.
3) Or equal.
C. Panel Devices:
1. General:
a. Pilot lights, selector switches and push buttons shall be from same Manufacturer. NEMA ratings
shall match that of control panel.
b. Indicators and totalizers shall be from same Manufacturer.
2. Pilot Lights:
a. Heavy duty, oil tight, LED-type, 30.5 mm with full voltage, push-to-test feature, nameplate and
replaceable color lens.
b. Match existing color conventions.
c. Spare Parts (per panel):
1) 2 LEDs of each color.
2) 2 of each color lens.
d. Manufacturer:
1) Allen-Bradley, 800T/H.
2) Square D, Type K/SK.
3) Eaton\Cutler-Hammer 10250T, E34.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 17 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
3. Selector Switches and Push Buttons:
a. Heavy duty, oil tight, 30 mm, with nameplate.
b. Selector Switches: Maintained position, unless specified/indicated otherwise.
c. Push Buttons: Momentary.
d. Manufacturer:
1) Allen-Bradley, 800T/H.
2) Square D, Type K/SK.
3) Eaton\Cutler-Hammer 10250T, E34.
4. Control Relays:
a. Heavy duty, 15 amp minimum, 3-pole double throw (minimum).
b. Pin terminals.
c. DIN mount sockets IP20, finger safe.
d. Indicating light and check button.
e. UL listed.
f. Provide hold down clips for all relays.
g. Provide 2 spare of each type provided, per panel. Install in panel un-wired.
h. Provide interposing relay for all solenoids and motor loads.
i. Manufacturer:
1) Allen-Bradley.
2) Square D.
3) Magnecraft.
4) Potter & Brumfield.
5. DIN Rail Mounted Miniature Circuit Breakers and Supplementary Protection:
a. Rated for 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 65 Vdc.
b. Rated cross section for wire sizes #22 to #10 AWG.
c. Operating life of 6,000 cycles at rated current.
d. UL listed.
e. Short-Circuit Current Rating: 10 kA at 125 VAC (minimum).
f. Provide bus bar where more than 4 circuit breakers are provided in the same panel. Cap
unused connectors.
g. Provide supplementary protection for each solenoid or motor load. Provide trip indicating
auxiliary contacts. Wire to PLC inputs for failure monitoring where there is no other means of
detecting tripped condition.
h. Finger safe terminals.
i. Amperage ratings of 0.2A to 15.0A, system Supplier shall calculate required ratings, unless
otherwise noted.
j. Manufacturer:
1) Allen-Bradley.
2) Square D/Merlin-Gerin.
3) Moeller Electric.
6. Terminal Blocks:
a. General: 6mm (nominal), screw type, single tier terminal blocks.
b. Mounting: Standard TS 35 DIN rail.
c. Wire Range: 22-2 AWG.
d. Terminal blocks shall be raised off the component mounting plate to the height of the
wireway/wire duct cover.
e. Removable/replaceable marking system (labels).
f. Manufacturer:
1) Wieland, WKI series.
2) Phoenix Contact, UT series.
3) Weidmuller.
g. Spare Parts: 25% spare terminal blocks, mounted and unwired.
7. Surge Protective Device (SPD):
a. General: Device shall not interfere with normal operation of circuit being protected.
b. 120 VAC 1-Phase:
1) General: High speed, high current, solid state device designed to protect electronic
equipment and systems from transient over-voltages.
2) Mounting: DIN-rail, 2-piece design with removable suppressor module/relay.
3) Operational/Non-operational visual indication.
4) Remote indicator contact.
5) Protection Method/Type: Silicon Avalanche Suppressor diodes.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 18 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
6) Automatic Reset: After each suppression function with no degradation to protection
capabilities.
7) Rating:
a) UL 1449 Edition 3.
b) 1.5 kA 8x20s (minimum) surge current capacity.
8) Provide overcurrent protection.
9) Manufacturer:
a) Bussmann.
b) Phoenix Contact.
c) Transtector.
d) DEHN\Pepperl + Fuchs.
c. Ethernet Communication:
1) General: Suitable for 10BaseTX and 100BaseTx Ethernet data networks.
2) Mounting: Din-rail.
3) Connector: RJ45.
4) Automatic Reset: After each suppression function with no degradation to protection
capabilities.
5) Manufacturer:
a) Phoenix Contact.
b) Transtector.
c) Weidmuller.
d) DEHN\Pepperl + Fuchs.
8. Ethernet Programming Port:
a. Industrial type, Cat-5e, RJ-45/RJ-45 bulkhead coupler with:
1) Single 20 amp, 120 VAC, GFCI receptacle.
2) 3 amp circuit breaker.
3) 2 USB programming ports.
b. NEMA 12/4.
c. Manufacturer:
1) Grace Engineered Products, Graceport.
2) Hubbell, Panel-Safe.
3) Or Equal.
9. I/I or V/I Signal Transmitter/Converter:
a. Manufacturer: Acromag IntelliPack 811T Series with Humiseal, or equal; model as applicable to
Project.
b. Accessories: Configuration software and USB-to-RS232 adapter and cable.
10. Programmable Logic Controller (Allen-Bradley CompactLogix):
a. Power Supplies: Power supplies shall operate on 120 VAC and shall supply 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc
to the I/O chassis backplane as required. Power supply quantity and size shall provide power
for required modules, as well as 25% spare modules. Provide space for future modules on back
plate. Power supplies shall be Allen-Bradley Model 1769-PA4.
b. Processor:
1) Processor shall have built-in communication ports:
a) Dual EtherNet/IP ports for ring topologies.
b) USB port for firmware download and programming.
2) Processor unit shall have 1 MB of available user memory (minimum).
3) Provide 1GB memory card for each processor 1784-SD1.
4) Coordinate module expansion capacity required.
5) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley Model 1769-L30ER-NSE, latest series available.
c. Discrete Input Modules (120 V):
1) 120 VAC discrete input modules shall operate on voltage provided through the backplane.
Modules shall include LED status indicators. Modules shall contain 8 isolated inputs.
2) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 1769-IA8I.
d. Discrete Input Modules (24 V):
1) 24 VAC, sinking or sourcing, discrete input modules shall operate on voltage provided
through the backplane. Modules shall include LED status indicators. Modules shall
contain 16 inputs.
2) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 1769-IQ16.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 19 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
e. Discrete Output Modules:
1) General: Isolated outputs may be used for signals that power devices inside the control
panel.
2) Discrete output modules shall operate on voltage provided through the backplane.
Modules shall include LED status indicators. Modules shall contain 16 outputs.
3) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 1769-OA16.
f. Discrete (Relay) Output Modules:
1) General: Relay outputs shall be used for all signals that leave the control panel.
2) Discrete output modules shall operate on voltage provided through the backplane.
Modules shall contain 8 normally open, isolated, relay contact outputs. Modules shall
include LED status indicators.
3) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 1769-OW8I.
g. Analog Input Modules:
1) Analog input modules shall be 16-bit resolution and shall operate on voltage provided
through the backplane. Modules shall be capable to 8 differential or single-ended voltage
or current inputs. Modules shall be user configurable to either accept a voltage input of
10 Vdc (typically 1-5 Vdc) or 0-20 mAdc (typically 4-20 mAdc). Modules shall be capable
of scaling to engineering units through the software.
2) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 1769-IF8.
h. HART Enabled Analog Input Modules:
1) Analog input modules shall be 16-bit resolution and shall operate on voltage provided
through the backplane. Modules shall be capable to 4 differential voltage or current
inputs. Modules shall be user configurable to either accept a voltage input of 10 Vdc
(typically 1-5 Vdc) or 0-20 mAdc (typically 4-20 mAdc). Modules shall be capable of
scaling to engineering units through the software.
2) Manufacturer: Spectrum Controls 1769sc-IF4IH.
i. Analog Output Modules (Current):
1) Analog output modules shall be 16-bit resolution and shall operate on voltage provided
through the backplane. Modules shall have 4 differential, individually isolated outputs of
0-20 mAdc (typically 4-20 mAdc). Modules shall be capable of scaling to engineering
units through the software.
2) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 1769-OF4CI
j. Analog Output Modules (Voltage):
1) Analog out6put modules shall be 16-bit resolution and shall operate on voltage provided
through the backplane. Modules shall have 4 differential, individually isolated outputs of
10 Vdc (typically 1-5 Vdc). Modules shall be capable of scaling to engineering units
through the software.
2) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 1769-OF4VI.
k. End Cap/Terminator:
1) Provide left and right end caps for each chassis assembly.
2) Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 1769-ECL, 1769-ECR.
D. Shelf Mounted or Free Standing Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS):
1. Online Double Conversion UPS (0.7-3 kVA):
a. Power: 120 VAC input, 45-65 Hz, 120 VAC output, input power factor greater than 0.95.
b. Connection: Input line shall include a NEMA 5-15P plug. A minimum of 4 NEMA 5-15R output
receptacles shall be included.
c. Output Voltage Regulation: On utility 2% nominal, on battery 3% nominal.
d. Topology: True online double conversion with automatic bypass.
e. Output: Pure sine wave with less than 5% total harmonic distortion (THD), and efficiency
greater than 86%.
f. User Interface:
1) Power usage.
2) On battery.
3) Overload.
4) UPS fault.
g. Battery Management: Deep discharge protection.
h. Extended runtime capability with external battery modules.
i. Batteries: Sealed, maintenance free, lead acid, hot-swappable batteries with start on battery
capability to allow UPS to start up in the absence of utility power.
j. Transfer Time to Battery: 0 ms.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 20 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
k. Automatic bypass on overload of 130% for 10 seconds.
l. UPS Sizing: Size UPS to provide a minimum 15 minutes of runtime for control panel and
equipment served.
m. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate enclosures for UPSs which will not physically fit
into control panel.
n. Manufacturer:
1) PowerWare: Series 9130.
2) Sola/Hevi-Duty, S4K Series.
3) Liebert, GXT2.
o. Accessories:
1) Mounting bracket or shelf. UPS shall not block other devices or terminals located in the
control panel. UPS display and user interface shall be easily viewable without moving
UPS.
2) Receptacles to allow for removal of UPS without tools.
3) Relay to monitor UPS power and automatically switch to line power on loss of power from
UPS.
4) Relay interface card for UPS alarm to provide PLC input.
5) Provide interposing relays as required.
6) Provide cabling to match UPS relay card connector.
7) Red and white labels on exterior of all enclosures which contain UPS units. Signs to read:
DANGER: BATTERY AND EXTERNAL VOLTAGE PRESENT. Labels shall be
10-inch x 7-inch minimum.
p. Provide new UPSs to replace existing UPSs that serve main control panel (I/O Panel #1) and
office computer equipment. Coordinate mounting requirements.
E. Patch Panels and Patch Cables:
1. General:
a. Network cables that enter or leave an enclosure shall be terminated at a patch panel.
b. Patch panels shall have 100% spare capacity.
c. Standalone patch panels shall have hinged mounting brackets.
d. Provide patch cables for all patch panel points, including spare.
2. UTP (CAT 6) Patch Panels:
a. Mini-Patch Panel:
1) DIN rail mounted.
2) Available with RJ-45 style connectors.
3) Shall be available with 3 connectors each.
4) Manufacturer:
a) Phoenix Contact, VS-PP-F-RJ45-CAT6.
b) Black Box, JPM183A.
c) Hirschmann, MIPP.
3. UTP Patch Cables:
a. Available with RJ-45 style connectors, coordinate lengths with installation requirements.
b. Connectors shall be factory installed, with snagless molded strain relief.
c. Minimum rating Category 6 in accordance with TIA/EIA-568.
d. Stranded construction, factory product. Field assembled terminations will not be acceptable.
e. Provide STP cables in panels where electrical interference may be generated within the panel
(e.g. by VFDs or SCR drives).
f. Patch cables shall be colored green, unless otherwise noted.
g. Manufacturers: Leviton, Panduit; or equal.
F. Computers and Accessories:
1. Computer (minimum requirements):
a. General: Computers shall be sized to perform functions as listed. Hardware specification shall
be verified with software supplier and adjusted to increase computer performance as required to
ensure proper software performance. Computer shall be sized for incorporation into plant-wide
control system. Operating system shall be compatible with software provided.
b. Server/Workstation (Tower Style, Desktop Computer):
1) Processors: Quad core Intel Xeon 2.40 GHz processors, 1066 MHz FSB, 10 MB cache.
2) Main Memory: 16GB.
3) Hard Drive:
a) Formatted Capacity: 250 GB or greater, 10,000 rpm.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 21 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
b) RAID Setting: RAID 1 drive set with controller(s).
c) Two hot pluggable.
4) DVD Drives:
a) 16x DVD-ROM drive.
b) 16X DVD+/-RW drive.
5) Video Monitor:
a) 21-inch, digital flat panel, SVGA/DVI-D color.
b) Contrast ratio: 1,000:1.
c) Manufacturer: ViewSonic; or equal.
6) Video Card: 512 MB.
7) Network Card: (2) 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet network card.
8) Power Supplies: Redundant power supplies.
9) Warranty: 5 year, 4H, 5x9, onsite.
10) Mouse: Optical USB type.
11) Desktop tower case.
12) Keyboard: USB, 101 key style.
13) Operating System and Software:
a) Windows 2008 Server latest compatible version.
b) MS SQL Server 2008 Standard.
c) Microsoft Office Small Business plus Access database.
d) Current versions unless otherwise required by control system software.
14) Spare Media Storage:
a) CD Media: 25.
b) DVD Media: 5.
15) Manufacturers:
a) IBM.
b) HP.
c) Or equal.
2. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Device:
a. General: Backup storage device.
b. Total Storage Capacity; 1 TB (minimum).
c. Connectivity: Integrated Gigabit Ethernet.
d. RAID Setting: RAID 1 drive set with controller(s).
e. Hard Drives: Two pluggable/hot swap 1 TB SATA.
f. Manufacturer:
1) Netgear.
2) Seagate.
3) Iomega.
3. Color Laser Printer:
a. Parallel or USB connectivity.
b. 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface card.
c. Manufacturer: Hewlett-Packard; or equal.
G. Ethernet Networking Equipment:
1. General:
a. Ethernet Networking Equipment shall be products of a single Manufacturer.
b. Provide dedicated power supply for each Ethernet converter/switch not powered at 120VAC.
c. Managed switches shall be LNX-1802GN-T as manufactured by Antaira, or equal.
d. Unmanaged switches shall be LNX-501AG-SFP-T as manufactured by Antaira, or equal.
2. Power Supply:
a. Output Power: 3 A (minimum) at 24 Vdc.
b. Input Voltage: 120 VAC nominal.
c. Mounting: DIN rail.
d. Manufacturer: Ethernet networking equipment manufacturer.
2.3 FIELD INSTRUMENTS
A. General:
1. Provide instruments rated for environment.
2. Field verify Manufacturers cable lengths prior to Shop Drawing submittal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 22 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
3. Tagging: Equip all instruments with a permanently attached identification tag. The tags shall include
the device name, Engineer's tag identification, and manufacturer's tag identification if different from
Engineer's.
4. Finish: Finish on the instruments and accessories shall provide protection against corrosion by the
elements in the environment in which they are to be installed.
5. Temperature Rating: Instruments shall be suitable for the temperature in which they are to be
exposed. Therefore, instruments located outdoors or in unheated spaces shall be suitable for -
20 degrees F to 120 degrees F. Instruments exposed to direct sunlight (without sunshield) shall be
suitable for temperatures up to 140 degrees F.
B. Sun Shield:
1. General: 4-sided non-metallic shade to protect field instruments from sunlight, dirt accumulation, rain
and snow, and mechanical damage.
2. Provide for each instrument installed outdoors.
3. Material: UV-resistant.
4. Mounting hardware as required.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Intertec, Diashade SD 67.
b. OBrien, E1B Sunshade.
c. Or equal.
C. Instrument Pipe Stand:
1. General: Modular support system for mounting of instrumentation components.
2. Provide for each instrument that cannot be wall mounted.
3. Material of construction: Galvanized carbon steel, aluminum or stainless steel as required by
environment to prevent corrosion.
4. Floor stands shall have gussets for strength and stability.
5. Size as required to mount instrument at 4-6 above operating level, unless otherwise noted.
6. Manufacturers:
a. OBrien, Saddlepak.
b. Techline Mfg.
c. Or equal.
D. Continuous Level Measurement:
1. Ultrasonic:
a. Equipment shall be suitable for installation outdoors.
b. Level Sensor:
1) Hazardous Location: Level sensor and sensor circuit shall be intrinsically safe and suitable
for sensor mounting in Class 1, Division 1, Group C and D hazardous location.
2) Range: 1 to 30 feet.
3) Accuracy: 0.25% of range.
4) Beam Angle: 10 degrees (maximum).
5) Integral temperature sensor and automatic temperature compensation.
6) Coordinate transducer with required range.
7) Provide 6-inch ANSI PVC mounting flange.
8) Integral 6-inch ANSI PVC mounting flange for use in chemical tank applications.
c. Level Transmitter:
1) Features:
a) Level, flow, volume measurement.
b) Flow totalization.
c) Automatically suppress echoes from fixed obstructions.
d) Alternating pump control.
e) Characterization of common flumes and weirs.
2) Power: 120 VAC.
3) Display: Multi-field back lit LCD.
4) Configuration: Front of panel keyboard or handheld programming (1 programmer per 10
transmitters).
5) Output: 4-20 mAdc, 5 SPDT 4A rated relays, minimum.
6) Enclosure: Wall mounted, NEMA 4X rated.
7) Intrinsically safe barriers shall be provided as required.
d. Provide Manufacturers cabling for connecting sensor to transmitter in lengths as required.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 23 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
e. Schedule: See Instrument Range Schedule following Part 3.
1) LE/LIT-7-1-1.
f. Manufacturers:
1) Milltronics, HydroRanger 200.
2) Endress + Hauser, Prosonic S.
3) Pulsar, Ultra 5.
4) Magnetrol, Echotel 344/345.
5) Drexelbrook, Usonic-R; with custom mounting assembly as required.
6) Or equal.
E. Continuous Flow Measurement:
1. Magnetic Flow Meters:
a. Accuracy: Within 0.25% of meter scale for a velocity of 1 to 33 fps and the repeatability shall
be within 0.1% of full scale.
b. Complete with grounding rings. Grounding probes are not acceptable.
c. Provide required lengths of Manufacturers cable between meter tube and wall mounted
transmitter.
d. Provide a standard 3-point calibration report traceable to a recognized standard.
e. All flow meters shall be of the same model/series.
f. Meter Tube:
1) 304 stainless steel flow tube.
2) Meter shall maintain ISO 13359 standard lay lengths.
3) Liner:
a) Teflon, PFA, or Tefzel for 10-inch or smaller.
b) Polyurethane for 12-inch or greater.
c) It is the Suppliers responsibility to provide liner that is chemically compatible with
the process fluid being measured.
4) Electrodes:
a) Bullet nose type.
b) Hasteloy C.
c) It is the Suppliers responsibility to provide electrodes that are chemically compatible
with the process fluid being measured.
5) Grounding Rings:
a) 316 Stainless Steel for 12-inch or smaller.
b) 304 Stainless Steel for 14-inch or greater.
c) It is the Suppliers responsibility to provide grounding rings that are chemically
compatible with the process fluid being measured.
6) Flanges:
a) ANSI 150-pound, raised or flat for 1-inch to 24-inch.
b) Wafer style to be mounted between 2 ANSI 150-pound flanges for smaller than
1-inch
c) Meter shall be fully rated to withstand the same design pressure as the flanges.
7) Epoxy or Powder Coated: 2 coats for a minimum of 7 mils.
8) Meters above grade and smaller than 12 inches shall be capable of accidental
submergence. Meters 14 inches and larger or meters installed in a meter vault shall be
capable of continuous submergence or direct burial (IP68/NEMA 6P).
9) Meters located in hazardous areas shall be FM approved for Class 1, Division 2 locations.
g. Transmitter:
1) One for each flow tube.
2) Solid state type.
3) Housing: Die-cast aluminum.
4) Remote mounted from meter tube when indicated on Drawings.
5) Integral units shall have rotatable display to accommodate mounting position. Supplier
shall advise Engineer of mounting/display incompatibility.
6) Display: Flow rate and totalized flow displayed on a backlit display.
7) Transmitter shall include nonvolatile memory so that flow totalization is not lost during
power interruptions. Provide totalizers for forward, reverse, and net flow.
8) Output: 4-20 mAdc into 0 to 800 ohms, proportional and calibrated to stated flow range.
9) Provide empty pipe detection as standard.
10) Power: 120Vac, 60 HZ.
11) Enclosure: NEMA 4X.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 24 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
12) Provide required lengths of Manufacturers cable for remote mounted indicators.
h. Schedule: See Instrument Range Schedule following Part 3.
1) FE/FIT-2-4-1.
i. Manufacturer:
1) ABB.
2) Rosemount.
3) Yokogawa.
4) Endress + Hauser.
5) Toshiba.
6) Or equal.
F. Discrete Flow Switch:
1. Thermal Dispersion type.
a. General: Shall use thermal dispersion to detect flow/no flow condition.
b. Probe.
1) Length: 8 inches, minimum. Coordinate length to achieve 1/8 pipe diameter insertion.
2) Material: Hastelloy C sensor.
3) Sensor Configuration: Dual RTD elements with spherical tip.
4) Temperature compensated.
5) Operating Pressure: 0 to 600psi.
6) Operating Temperature: -100 to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
7) Process Connection: 3/4 inch NPT.
8) Mount in lower half of pipe, follow manufacturers recommendation.
c. Electronics:
1) Housing: Epoxy coated, NEMA 4X, cast aluminum.
2) Display: Window.
3) Output:
a) 6 amp (minimum) DPDT relay at 120VAC.
b) Time delayed 1-100 seconds.
c) Adjustable setpoint.
4) Power:
a) 120 VAC.
5) Operating Temperature: -40 to 158 degrees F.
d. Schedule:
1) FSH-7-1-1.
e. Manufacturer:
1) Magnetrol.
2) Kurz Instruments.
3) Or equal.
f. Accessories: Provide low pressure, hot tap assembly, including ball valve.
G. Dissolved Oxygen Monitoring System:
1. General: Existing DO probes and transmitters at Aeration Tank Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall be replaced.
2. Each DO monitor shall consist of the following:
a. Hach LDO luminescent dissolved oxygen probe.
b. Hach SC100 controller.
3. Accessories:
a. Replacement sensor cap, one per sensor provided.
b. Stainless steel mounting hardware.
c. Sun shield.
d. Intrinsically safe barrier.
2.4 SOFTWARE
A. General:
1. All software and drivers required for equipment programming or configuration shall be provided. Some
software may not be specifically itemized. Owner shall be the licensee of all software. Owner shall be
entitled to all upgrades and technical support for a period of 1 year after substantial completion.
Technical reference manuals and users guides shall be provided for all equipment and software.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 25 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
2. Installation media (CDs) and licenses shall be provided to Owner for all software provided including
applied upgrades, patches and service packs. Provide CD storage case with storage capacity for
software provided. Footlocker Hard Case, 200 Discs/68 Slim Cases/34 Jewel Cases, Black; or equal.
Provide optional dividers and sleeves as required to organize storage case.
B. Automation/Control Software:
1. Full function control system HMI software packages shall be furnished and configured to achieve the
intent as described in Article 1.7 Functional Intent and as specified herein. Packages shall be
installed as recommended by software Manufacturer. Extended service and support shall be provided
with software.
2. Control software shall include the following features:
a. Development Environment:
1) General: Shall provide for the creation or editing of runtime application.
b. Security:
1) Security system shall support a hierarchical model.
2) Shall allow for creation of Security Groups.
3) Shall allow for creation of Operator Roles that can be assigned to Security Groups.
4) Coordinate security requirements with Owner.
5) Security shall be configured as a minimum to view only (Guest level), allow operational
process changes (Operator level), allow control system configuration changes
(Maintenance level), and full access (Administrator level).
c. Run-Time Environment:
1) General: Shall include real time process monitoring, supervisory control and data
acquisition.
2) Alarm Management:
a) Alarms shall be detected and reported by an alarm manager service.
b) Alarms shall be logged to a Microsoft SQL Server database.
3) Communications Architecture:
a) Run-time environment shall be based on distributed, peer-to-peer system
architecture.
b) Communication:
(1) Control system shall include broad range of communications servers for
establishing the I/O interface between field devices such as RTUs, PLCs,
DCS systems.
(2) Provide the necessary drivers to communicate with PLCs, I/O and all devices
shown in Control System Configuration Diagram.
3. Automation/control software shall be as manufactured by Wonderware:
a. InTouch, Runtime and Development Editions, 3,000 tags, latest edition.
b. Device Integration, I/O server.
c. Customer Support Program: Contractor shall pay to place all site licenses on Wonderware
Support Program. Contractor shall pay for Support Program to extend for a period of 1 year
after substantial completion date.
4. Provide and install the following additional software:
a. PLC Programming Software: Allen-Bradley:
1) 1 RSLogix 5000 Professional Edition, 9324-RLD700NXENE, latest English version.
2.5 COMPUTER EQUIPMENT
A. General: Computers and computer equipment shall be sized to perform functions as listed. Hardware
specification shall be verified with software supplier and adjusted to increase computer performance as
required to ensure proper software performance.
2.6 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide the following spare parts:
1. 1 PLC power supply of each type provided.
2. 1 programmable logic controller processor, with project specific version of firmware loaded.
3. 1 discrete input modules for each type provided.
4. 1 discrete output modules for each type provided.
5. 1 analog input modules for each type provided.
6. 1 analog output modules for each type provided.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 26 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
7. 2 signal isolators/converters with limit alarm, Humiseal coating and software interface package,
Acromag IntelliPack 811T Series; or equal. Model as applicable to Project.
8. 4 UTP patch cables of each type provided.
9. 2 transient voltage surge protection for each type provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FACTORY TESTING
A. A simulated factory test of the control system shall be performed to demonstrate that the system performs
control and communication functions as specified in the functional intent and as indicated on the Drawings.
The following equipment shall be included in the testing:
1. New panels and subpanels.
2. Computer equipment.
3. Network equipment.
B. Factory testing shall demonstrate the following, as a minimum:
1. Process control capabilities.
2. Communication system functionality.
3. Transmission of data (i.e., flows, levels, etc.).
C. All interconnecting cables and accessories necessary to perform factory testing shall be provided by system
Supplier.
D. Factory testing will be held at system Suppliers facility.
E. Factory testing shall be witnessed by representatives of Engineer and Owner. Schedule testing after testing
procedures have been satisfactorily reviewed by Engineer and a minimum of 2 weeks in advance.
3.2 INSTALLATION COORDINATION
A. Provide the services of a representative of the Systems Integrator to assist the Construction Manager and
Installing Contractor during construction and verification after installation. At a minimum, include:
1. Providing the Construction Manager sufficient copies of all the necessary reviewed Shop Drawings
and installation manuals.
2. Coordinating all deliveries with the Construction Manager.
3. Providing the necessary on-site supervision during installation.
4. Providing the necessary system coordination, before and after installation, to fully integrate the control
system.
5. Coordinate installation work with Electrical Contractor.
B. Coordinate installation of process control equipment and instrumentation in conformance with:
1. Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
2. Manufacturers recommendation.
C. Electrical:
1. Install wiring in conformance with applicable Sections of Division 26 Electrical.
2. Run all 4-20 mAdc process control wiring in separate conduit from power and control wiring.
3. Communication cabling shall be in separate conduits from power control and analog signal wiring.
D. Mount Control Panels:
1. Securely with framing and fasteners capable of handling additional future loads.
2. In a way that does not restrict access to internal components.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. System Suppliers Field Service:
1. Arrange and pay for process control and instrumentation system Suppliers engineer to:
a. Provide field services indicated below:
1) Assist with start-up and conduct performance testing.
2) Demonstrate operation and maintenance to the system operators.
3) Review operations and maintenance manual with system operators.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 27 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
2. Schedule field services as soon as practical and at times approved by Engineer.
3. Promptly make all changes and additions required by system Suppliers engineer and as necessary for
proper operation of the system.
4. System Suppliers engineer shall submit written approval of installation.
B. Field Performance Demonstration:
1. General: Demonstrate system functionality to Engineer.
a. Procedures shall be developed by system Supplier and submitted to Engineer for review prior to
scheduling demonstration.
b. Schedule a minimum of 2 weeks in advance.
c. Schedule and coordinate with Owner and Owners operation staff to minimize disruptions to
plant operation.
2. Equipment:
a. Demonstrate proper operation.
b. Demonstrate that system performs control functions as specified and indicated on the Drawings.
3. Instruments:
a. Demonstrate proper calibration and maximum accuracy.
b. Demonstrate that system performs monitoring functions as specified and indicated on the
Drawings.
4. System:
a. Demonstrate proper operation in failure modes.
b. Demonstrate backup and recovery modes.
5. Other Systems: Participate in Field Performance Demonstration of systems provided by other
suppliers where those systems communicate with control system.
6. Demonstration shall be repeated as required until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.4 SYSTEM TRAINING
A. System Suppliers engineer shall provide training for system operators. These services are in addition to
those previously identified.
1. Provide training session(s) (exact quantity to be determined by system Supplier) to demonstrate and
explain operation of all process control and instrumentation equipment and systems. Demonstrations
and explanations shall utilize installed equipment and be hands-on. Each training session shall be
repeated so training is available during day/morning and afternoon/evening shifts to accommodate
schedules of Owners personnel. Training times shall be mutually agreed upon with Owner. Training
sessions shall be held at project site.
2. Provide handouts and notes to facilitate training as necessary. Operations and maintenance manuals
shall be reviewed as applicable during training session.
3. Owner/Engineer reserves the right to video tape any or all training sessions. Videotaping will be done
by others.
B. System Supplier shall submit a detailed outline for each training session for approval, prior to scheduling
training.

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/3
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems

Section 40 90 00
40 90 00 28 Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\40_90_00.DOCX
3.5 INSTRUMENT RANGE SCHEDULE
A. See following Instrument Range Schedule.

TAG Description Range Size Mounting Height/Elevation
LE/LIT-7-1-1 Influent EQ Tank 0-30 ft. -- 6 flanged connection at tank
FSH-7-1-1 Influent EQ Overflow --- -- Mount in 8 tank overflow pipe.
FE/FIT-2-3-1 Raw Waste Influent Flow 0-500 GPM 3" Existing-remounted as necessary
FE/FIT-2-3-3 Process Feed Flow 0-200 GPM 2 Existing-remounted as necessary
FE/FIT-2-4-1 Bypass Control Valve 0-200 GPM 2 Mount transmitter at eye level or lower
AE/AIT-100 Aeration Tank No. 1-D.O. 0-10 mg/L -- Mount transmitter at eye level or lower
AE/AIT-200 Aeration Tank No. 2-D.O. 0-10 mg/L -- Mount transmitter at eye level or lower
AE/AIT-200 Aeration Tank No. 3-D.O. 0-10 mg/L -- Mount transmitter at eye level or lower
AE/AIT-200 Aeration Tank No. 4-D.O. 0-10 mg/L -- Mount transmitter at eye level or lower


END OF SECTION 40 90 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Horizontal Non-Clog Centrifugal Pumps

Section 43 21 00
43 21 00 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\43_21_00.DOCX
SECTION 43 21 00 HORIZONTAL NON-CLOG CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of horizontal, self priming centrifugal pumping
equipment.
1.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design:
1. Pumps shall be horizontal, non-clog, centrifugal type.
2. Pump materials shall be compatible with food processing wastewater with pH range of 4-11.
3. Design the pumps to handle 2-inch diameter spherical solids.
B. Performance:
1. Design capacity of 100 gpm at 20 feet T.D.H. at maximum rpm.
2. Flow Range: 20-100 gpm.
3. Minimum efficiency of 55 percent at design capacity.
4. Pump and motor shall be compatible with variable speed application.
5. Pumps shall have no smaller than 2-inch suction and 2-inch discharge.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For wastewater pumps, motors, and supports.
1. Dimensions.
2. Details of construction and installation.
3. Name of Manufacturer.
4. Model.
B. Manufacturer's Literature: For all pumps.
1. Performance curves.
2. Power requirements.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For pumping equipment.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and shutdown
and emergency conditions.
4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to "troubleshooting".
6. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Outline, cross-sections, assembly drawings, engineering data and wiring diagrams.
8. Test data and performance curves.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Horizontal Non-Clog Centrifugal Pumps

Section 43 21 00
43 21 00 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\43_21_00.DOCX
B. Manufacturer's Services:
1. Submit Manufacturer's sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies with this Specification.
2. Provide Manufacturer's field service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Goulds.
B. Aurora.
C. Fairbanks Morse.
D. Deming.
E. Or equal.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General:
1. Process Feed Pumping equipment shall include pumps, motors, base, and supports.
2. Pumps and motors shall be designed for a compatible system.
3. Construct the pumps in the Manufacturer's standard materials of construction which include cast iron
conforming to ASTM A48, class 30 for pump casing, all flanges, cover plate, and seal plate.
4. All pipe flanges shall be faced, drilled, and to the thickness required for compliance with 125 pound
American Standard.
B. Pump:
1. Impeller:
a. Dynamically balanced prior to shipment.
b. Material: ASTM A48 Class 30B cast iron.
c. Trimmed to match design points.
2. Volute/Casing:
a. Material: ASTM A48 Class 30B cast iron.
b. Equipped with taps for drain, suction gage, discharge gage and vent.
c. Suction and discharge connections: 150 pound ANSI flat-faced flanges.
d. Design to allow removal of the rotating assembly without disturbing the suction and discharge
piping.
3. Seal Assembly:
a. Flushed mechanical seal.
b. Material: Double carbon and ceramic construction, held in a mating position by a stainless
steel spring.
c. Pressurized and lubricated by plant service water.
d. Seal water flush fitting.
4. Bearing Frame:
a. Material: ASTM A48 Class 30B cast iron.
b. Space between upper and lower bearings shall be enclosed.
c. Provide jacking bolts for external impeller adjustment.
d. Bearing lubrication: grease.
5. Shaft Assembly:
a. Shaft and impeller screw: 316 stainless steel.
b. Shaft sleeve: renewable, 316 stainless steel with Brinell hardness of 300 to 350, through
packing box.
c. Bearings: designed for AFBMA L10 life of 100,000 hours at the best efficiency point.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD



/2
Horizontal Non-Clog Centrifugal Pumps

Section 43 21 00
43 21 00 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\43_21_00.DOCX
6. Baseplate:
a. Base: Fabricated steel.
b. Suitably constructed to support the full weight of the pump and motor under normal operation.
Vibration free under normal operation.
c. Pump and motor aligned and bolted in place prior to shipment.
7. Anchor Bolts:
a. Provide anchor bolts for baseplate.
b. Materials: stainless steel.
c. Adequately sized for all anticipated forces and vibration that may occur during normal
operation.
8. Motor:
a. Power: 460 VAC, 60 Hz, 3 phase, inverter duty rated.
b. Horsepower:
1) Adequately sized so as not to exceed the motor nameplate horsepower over the entire
pump curve.
2) Process Feed Pumps: 2 hp minimum.
c. Speed: 1200-1,800 RPM.
d. NEMA design B.
e. Bearings: grease lubricated.
f. Lifting lugs: capable of lifting the weight of the pump and motor.
g. Enclosure: TEFC.
h. Efficiency: premium.
i. Insulation: NEMA Class F.
j. Service Factor: 1.15.
k. Manufacturers:
1) U.S. Motors.
2) Reliance.
3) Baldor.
4) General Electric.
5) Lincoln.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in conformance with:
1. The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
2. The Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Paint materials and equipment in accordance with Division 09 Section Painting.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Arrange and pay for Manufacturer's engineer to provide the services indicated
below for a minimum onsite time of 1 day. Schedule the following as soon as practicable after installation
and at times approved by Engineer and Owner.
1. Manufacturer's Engineer: Check work, assist in start-up, demonstrate operation and maintenance to
Owners personnel and review operation and maintenance manual with Owners personnel.
B. Promptly make all changes and additions required by Manufacturer's engineer.
C. Submit manufacturer's engineer's written approval of installation.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Prior to acceptance of the Work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials, equipment, and
related areas in accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste Management.

END OF SECTION 43 21 00
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Screw Centrifugal Pumps (Installation of
Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
Section 43 21 14
SECTION 43 21 14 SCREW CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (Installation of Construction Manager Procured Equipment)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the installation of aeration equipment procured by the Construction Manager as
required for a complete and functioning system. The procured pumps and accessories will be installed into
an existing raw waste wet well at an existing wastewater treatment facility.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 02 Section Selective Demolition.
2. Division 09 Section Painting.
3. Division 40 Section Process Piping Systems.
4. Division 40 Section Process Valves.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Specifications: A36 - Structural Steel.
2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
3. American Welding Society (AWS).
4. American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards.
5. Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC).
6. Michigan Building Code - 2009.
1.4 SCOPE OF INSTALLATION
A. The Construction Manager will preorder and pay for the raw waste pumps and accessories. Equipment will
include:
1. Two Screw Centrifugal Pumps.
2. Lift system.
3. Mounting assembly.
4. Rails.
B. The raw waste pump contract, including specifications and vendor proposal, is attached to these
specifications in the Appendix.
C. Contractors Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Provide a complete, tested system.
2. Consult equipment Manufacturer for all details and requirements of installation, including detailed
scope of supply and services by equipment Manufacturer.
3. Schedule, arrange for, unload, and store delivered equipment and material.
4. Install all systems, equipment, controls, and all other nonattached equipment and material to treatment
units. Follow Manufacturers installation guidelines.
5. All process piping connections.
6. Miscellaneous components, fasteners, grout, etc. not furnished by Manufacturer but necessary for a
complete installation.
7. Touch up painting coatings in accordance with:
a. Division 09 Section Painting.
b. Manufacturers recommendations.
c. Engineers review.
8. Start-up procedures to place system in operation.

/1 43 21 14 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\43_21_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Screw Centrifugal Pumps (Installation of
Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
Section 43 21 14
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data:
1. Contractor shall receive 2 copies of the Engineer's reviewed Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data
of the sedimentation equipment, controls and accessories.
2. Contractor shall have 15 days to review for dimensions, installation coordination, construction
requirements and other related items necessary for a complete and operations installation.
3. Within the 15 day Contractor review period, Contractor shall respond in writing to Construction
Manager with all questions and comments as they relate to the installation of all the procured items.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Regulatory Requirements for Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970: All equipment installations shall
C. Comply with Act and regulations.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Receiving and Storage: Coordinate receiving of equipment with Manufacturer, Construction Manager and
Engineer. Do not receive equipment without Construction Manager consent.
B. Rejected Material and Replacement:
1. Representatives of Contractor, Construction Manager and Engineer shall be present during the
delivery of the equipment and material to inspect the delivered goods.
2. All damage resulting from unloading shall be the responsibility of Contractor.
3. All material damage, deterioration or contamination which occurs after delivery shall be the
responsibility of Contractor. Damaged, deteriorated or contaminated materials shall be immediately
removed from the Site and replaced with new materials at no additional cost to Construction Manager.
4. All damage resulting from theft or vandalism shall be replaced or repaired with all associated costs
covered by Contractor.
5. Spare parts and miscellaneous items shall be received, inventoried and stored by Contractor until
Substantial Completion, at which time the materials shall be given to Owner with an itemized
transmittal signed by both parties. Missing parts shall be replaced by Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install in full conformance with approved Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Any required field welding shall be in accordance with AWS and shall be completed by qualified
personnel with a method suitable for the materials to be welded. All welds shall be uniform in
appearance and free of cracks, porosity and flux. Remove all burrs and weld splatter.
3. Install equipment plumb, to lines and elevations on Drawings and approved Shop Drawings.
4. Touch up paint as required to correct damaged painted surfaces. Surface preparation and paint
system shall be the exact same as that used for the shop application and shall conform to the paint
Manufacturer's requirements and Division 09 Section Painting.

/1 43 21 14 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\43_21_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Screw Centrifugal Pumps (Installation of
Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
Section 43 21 14
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Schedule equipment Manufacturer's field service representative for required inspection, start-up and
follow-up visits. Coordinate all Manufacturer site visits with Owner, Construction Manager and Engineer.
B. Promptly make all changes and additions required by Manufacturer.
C. Submit Manufacturer's written approval of installation.
D. Coordinate and attend all inspections, and start-up and training activities related to the equipment as
required.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Prior to completion of the work of this Section, clean all affected areas in accordance with Division 01
Section Cleaning and Waste Management.


END OF SECTION 43 21 14


/1 43 21 14 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\43_21_14.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Aeration Equipment (Installation of
Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
Section 46 51 17.01
SECTION 46 51 17.01 AERATION EQUIPMENT (Installation of Construction Manager Procured Equipment)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Agreement and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the installation of aeration equipment procured by the Construction Manager as
required for a complete and functioning system. The procured in-basin equipment will be installed into an
existing Influent Equalization tank at an existing wastewater treatment facility. The pumps and blowers will
be installed in an existing aeration equipment building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 02 Section Selective Demolition.
2. Division 09 Section Painting.
3. Division 40 Section Process Piping Systems.
4. Division 40 Section Process Valves.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Except as herein specified or as indicated on the Drawings, the work of this Section shall comply with the
following:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Specifications: A36 - Structural Steel.
2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
3. American Welding Society (AWS).
4. American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards.
5. Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC).
6. Michigan Building Code - 2009.
1.4 SCOPE OF INSTALLATION
A. The Construction Manager will preorder and pay for the Aeration Equipment package and accessories.
Equipment will include:
1. Two Motive Pumps.
2. Two aeration blowers and related equipment.
3. In basin FRP headers, supports and ancillary equipment.
B. The Aeration Equipment contract, including specifications and vendor proposal, is attached to these
specifications in the Appendix.
C. Contractors Work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Provide a complete, tested system.
2. Consult equipment Manufacturer for all details and requirements of installation, including detailed
scope of supply and services by equipment Manufacturer.
3. Schedule, arrange for, unload, and store delivered equipment and material.
4. Install all systems, equipment, controls, and all other nonattached equipment and material to treatment
units. Follow Manufacturers installation guidelines.
5. All process piping connections.
6. Miscellaneous components, fasteners, grout, etc. not furnished by Manufacturer but necessary for a
complete installation.
7. Touch up painting coatings in accordance with:
a. Division 09 Section Painting.
b. Manufacturers recommendations.
c. Engineers review.
8. Start-up procedures to place system in operation.

/1 46 51 17.01 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\46_51_17_01.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Aeration Equipment (Installation of
Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
Section 46 51 17.01
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data:
1. Contractor shall receive 2 copies of the Engineer's reviewed Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data
of the sedimentation equipment, controls and accessories.
2. Contractor shall have 15 days to review for dimensions, installation coordination, construction
requirements and other related items necessary for a complete and operations installation.
3. Within the 15 day Contractor review period, Contractor shall respond in writing to Construction
Manager with all questions and comments as they relate to the installation of all the procured items.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed submittals.
B. Regulatory Requirements for Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970: All equipment installations shall
C. comply with Act and regulations.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Receiving and Storage: Coordinate receiving of equipment with Manufacturer, Construction Manager and
Engineer. Do not receive equipment without Construction Manager consent.
B. Rejected Material and Replacement:
1. Representatives of Contractor, Construction Manager and Engineer shall be present during the
delivery of the equipment and material to inspect the delivered goods.
2. All damage resulting from unloading shall be the responsibility of Contractor.
3. All material damage, deterioration or contamination which occurs after delivery shall be the
responsibility of Contractor. Damaged, deteriorated or contaminated materials shall be immediately
removed from the Site and replaced with new materials at no additional cost to Construction Manager.
4. All damage resulting from theft or vandalism shall be replaced or repaired with all associated costs
covered by Contractor.
5. Spare parts and miscellaneous items shall be received, inventoried and stored by Contractor until
Substantial Completion, at which time the materials shall be given to Owner with an itemized
transmittal signed by both parties. Missing parts shall be replaced by Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install in full conformance with approved Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Any required field welding shall be in accordance with AWS and shall be completed by qualified
personnel with a method suitable for the materials to be welded. All welds shall be uniform in
appearance and free of cracks, porosity and flux. Remove all burrs and weld splatter.
3. Install equipment plumb, to lines and elevations on Drawings and approved Shop Drawings.
4. Level weirs and effluent troughs to within 1/8 of an inch.
5. Touch up paint as required to correct damaged painted surfaces. Surface preparation and paint
system shall be the exact same as that used for the shop application and shall conform to the paint
Manufacturer's requirements and Division 09 Section Painting.

/1 46 51 17.01 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\46_51_17_01.DOCX
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Bid Package 2 - Process Modifications
Project Number G130547CD


Aeration Equipment (Installation of
Construction Manager Procured Equipment)
Section 46 51 17.01
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Schedule equipment Manufacturer's field service representative for required inspection, start-up and
follow-up visits. Coordinate all Manufacturer site visits with Owner, Construction Manager and Engineer.
B. Promptly make all changes and additions required by Manufacturer.
C. Submit Manufacturer's written approval of installation.
D. Coordinate and attend all inspections, and start-up and training activities related to the equipment as
required.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Prior to completion of the work of this Section, clean all affected areas in accordance with Division 01
Section Cleaning and Waste Management.


END OF SECTION 46 51 17.01


/1 46 51 17.01 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\46_51_17_01.DOCX

Appendix




Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 1 - Raw Waste Pumps
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Screw Centrifugal Pumps

Section 43 21 13.85
43 21 13.85 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_43_21_13_85.DOCX
SECTION 43 21 13.85 SCREW CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of immersible pumps and accessories.
1.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design:
1. Pumps shall be nonclog immersible sewage pumps complete with motor, lift system, mounting
assembly.
2. The design shall be such that the pump shall be automatically connected to the discharge piping when
lowered into place on the discharge connection.
3. The pump shall be easily removable for inspection or service, requiring no bolts, nuts or other
fastenings to be removed for this purpose, and no need for personnel to enter pump well.
B. Performance:
1. Minimum Pumping Requirement:
a. Flow Rate: 150 gpm at 44 feet TDH.
2. Maximum Pumping Requirement:
a. Flow Rate: 300 gpm at 65 feet TDH.
3. The pumps shall freely pass a 1-1/2-inch diameter sphere.
4. The pump and accessories shall fit into an existing prerotation basin and match the existing pump
centerline.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For immersible pump and accessories.
1. General:
a. Dimensions.
b. Details of construction and installation.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For the immersible pump.
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and shutdown
and emergency conditions.
4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to "troubleshooting".
6. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Outline, cross-sections, assembly drawings, engineering data and wiring diagrams.
8. Test data and performance curves.
C. Performance Data:
1. Provide certified performance curves and power requirement data for the pump.
2. The complete manufacturers performance curve shall be a composite including system head curves,
pump head and capacity curves, NPSH, efficiency and brake horsepower curves.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 1 - Raw Waste Pumps
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Screw Centrifugal Pumps

Section 43 21 13.85
43 21 13.85 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_43_21_13_85.DOCX
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Installation Personnel:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication and installation of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
B. Manufacturer's Services:
1. Submit Manufacturer's sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies with this Specification.
2. Provide Manufacturer's field service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The immersible pump and accessories shall be Wemco Model D3K-L Hidrostal Prerotational pump.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide 2 complete systems. Each prerotation system shall consist of a clog-free screw
centrifugal pump; an immersible motor; a suction bell; fast-out system and accessories.
B. Pumps:
1. The basic design shall be a single-port, nonclog pump, utilizing a screw-centrifugal impeller,
incorporating an immersible motor as an integral part of the pumping unit.
2. The hydraulic design of the impeller shall combine the action of a positive-displacement screw with the
action of a single-vane centrifugal impeller to provide a single, nonbifurcated flow stream with only
gradual changes in flow direction. The leading edge of the impeller vane shall blend into the impeller
body in such a way that any rag or other fibrous material caught on the leading edge and folded over
both sides of the vane will be unfolded and released as the textile follows the flow stream through the
pump.
C. Suction Bell: A 304 stainless steel suction bell shall be provided to prevent premature vortexing of the liquid
column, thereby extending the prerotation range.
D. Materials of Construction:
1. The pump volute, backplate, suction piece and suction liner shall be of closed-grained cast iron, ASTM
Specification A 48CL30. The impeller shall be of 450 Brinell Hi-Chrome Iron, ASTM Specification
A 532-II-A1, and shall be both statically and dynamically balanced. The suction piece or impeller shall
be externally adjustable to compensate for wear.
2. All mating surfaces in pump casing and in motor housing shall be machine registered and fitted with
nitrile O-rings, for watertight seal.
3. All wetted fasteners shall be 300-series stainless steel.
4. The suction shall have an independently replaceable suction liner of 450 Brinell Hi-Chrome Iron,
ASTM Specification A 532-II-A1.
5. Provide Manufacturers coating system. Coating system shall be compatible with the wastewater.
E. Motor:
1. The design of the motor shall permit full-load, continuous operation either completely dry, or fully
submerged in the pumped liquid of up to 65 feet depths. Motor shall be of the "air-filled" type, with
stator and rotor housed in a watertight chamber containing only air.
2. Motors shall incorporate a separate heat-exchanger circuit, with a shaft-mounted cooling pump
circulating oil from a jacket surrounding the stator housing to a heat-exchanger surface cast into the
pump backplate. The circulating oil shall transfer excess motor heat directly to the pumped media
inside the pump volute, without the need of submergence for adequate motor cooling at any
continuous power output up to and including rated powers.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 1 - Raw Waste Pumps
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Screw Centrifugal Pumps

Section 43 21 13.85
43 21 13.85 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_43_21_13_85.DOCX
3. Motor:
a. Type: Immersible.
b. Power: 460 volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
c. Speed: 3480 rpm.
d. Horsepower: 12.9 hp.
e. Explosion proof design, approved by Factory Mutual for uses in Class I, Groups C and D,
hazardous locations.
f. Inverter duty rated.
4. Motors shall have the stator varnish applied by the "vacuum-pressure impregnation" methods to
ensure thorough and complete varnish penetration. The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the
stator housing.
5. The motor shall be provided with the following protection devices:
a. Redundant thermal sensors embedded in the stator windings.
b. One conductively probe shall monitor the moisture content of the oil in the chamber between the
outer and the inner mechanical seals. A conductivity-sensitive relay shall be provided for each
pump for mounting by others in the control panel.
F. Shaft Sealing:
1. Shall be by independently-mounted, tandem mechanical seals contained in an oil chamber that is
formed as an intrinsic part of the motor frame and allows the seals to be completely submerged in and
lubricated by the oil bath.
2. The mechanical seal nearest the bearing shall utilize carbon/ceramic faces, and shall isolate the seal
cooling oil from the motor frame.
3. The mechanical seal nearest the impeller shall be a rubber bellows-type construction firmly attached to
the rotating face and clamped to the shaft, to prevent contaminants from contacting the stainless-steel
spring which loads the steel face. The seal faces shall be a solid tungsten-carbide rotating face
running against a solid silicon-carbide stationary face. Seals with both faces of similar materials, or
seals with bonded, soldered, or converted face surfaces are not equal or acceptable.
4. Both inner and outer seals shall be dimensionally interchangeable with standard off-the-shelf, inch-
size, John Crane mechanical seals, or equal, to allow second-source availability of seals from local
distributors for emergency repairs.
G. Mounting:
1. The Manufacturer shall provide cast iron fast-out fixtures which shall be permanently mounted in the
wet well as indicated on the Drawings. The fixtures shall cantilever the entire pump volute and motor
from the volute discharge flange, providing an unobstructed sump floor under the pump. The fixtures
shall include 90 degree cast iron piping elbows with 150 pound, 3-inch diameter discharge flange to
connect to 3-inch vertical piping. The fast-out device shall allow for centering of the pump in the
existing prerotation basin.
2. Provide mounts for two 304 stainless steel rails which will guide the pump into position.
3. The pump shall be supported by a positive metal-to-metal interlocking flange, which is additionally
sealed by a leakproof nitrile rubber ring pressed against the fixture flange by the weight of the pump.
4. Provide a 316L stainless steel chain and retaining hook for lifting of the pump from the wet well.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in conformance with:
1. The Shop Drawings reviewed by Engineer.
2. The Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. An existing Fast-Out system will be demolished and the existing grout and concrete prepared for the new
Fast-Out fixture. The Manufacturers representative shall approve the preparation and installation of the
new Fast-Out fixture.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 1 - Raw Waste Pumps
Project Number G130547CD




/1
Screw Centrifugal Pumps

Section 43 21 13.85
43 21 13.85 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_43_21_13_85.DOCX
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Arrange and pay for Manufacturer's engineer to provide the services indicated
below for a minimum onsite time of 1 day. Schedule the following as soon as practicable after installation
and at times approved by Engineer and Owner.
1. Manufacturer's Engineer: Check work, assist in start-up, demonstrate operation and maintenance to
Owners personnel and review operation and maintenance manual with Owners personnel.
B. Promptly make all changes and additions required by Manufacturer's engineer.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Prior to acceptance of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all installed materials, equipment, and
related areas in accordance with Division 01 Section Cleaning and Waste Management.


END OF SECTION 43 21 13.85

Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 1
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
SECTION 46 51 17 JET AERATION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the furnishing and delivery of jet aeration equipment and accessories for installation in
a wastewater equalization tank.
B. Major Components:
1. Fixed jet header aerators.
2. Jet motive pumps.
3. Aeration blowers.
1.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design:
1. The jet aeration equipment shall be designed for odor control for equalized wastewater flow from a
food processing operation. Final effluent from the tank will be discharged to municipal sewer.
Wastewater is coarse screened with a basket screen of 1-inch mesh.
2. Furnish a single basin system which utilizes fixed jet aeration.
3. One circular, covered, bolted steel tank (by others) 45 feet diameter x 24 feet high (21-foot normal
maximum water level, 23-foot overflow level) will be utilized as the equalization tank.
4. Air flow of 1.5 scfm per 1,000 gallons at maximum tank depth.
5. Mixing energy of 60 brake horsepower per 1,000,000 gallons.
6. A fixed jet aerator header located in the equalization tank shall be designed for mixing and aeration of
the wastewater. The motive pumps and aeration blowers shall be sized to provide complete mixing of
the tank contents. The motive pumps shall deliver a minimum of 2,200 gpm and the blower shall
deliver a minimum of 375 scfm at high water depth. The header shall be designed with a liquid duct
and air duct.
B. Performance:
1. Raw Water Flow:
a. Annual Average: 86,400 Gallons per Day (GPD).
b. Maximum Day: 144,000 GPD.
2. Raw Water Concentrations and Mass Loading:

Parameter
Annual Average
Pounds/Day
Maximum Day
Pounds/Day
BOD5 1,815 3,773
Total Suspended Solids (prior to screening) 964 1,880
Oil and Grease 80 125
3. Water Temperature Range: 70 to 110 degrees F.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For all jet aeration equipment and accessories.
1. General:
a. Dimensions.
b. Details of construction and installation.
c. Detailed system schematic.
d. Manufacturer's name and model number.
e. Bill of Materials.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 2
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
2. Motive Pumps:
a. Name of Manufacturer.
b. Model.
c. Design rotative speed.
d. Complete Performance Curves:
1) Resulting from a certified, nonwitnessed test using a calibrated motor.
2) Showing capacity, head, design point, NPSH required, efficiency, brake horsepower,
impeller diameter and shutoff head and power requirements.
e. Weight of pump.
f. Anchor bolts and anchor bolt assemblies.
g. Paint coatings.
3. Blowers:
a. Name of Manufacturer.
b. Model.
c. Design rotative speed.
d. Complete performance curves including: Inlet volume discharge head discharge volume,
temperature rise, brake horsepower, rpm.
e. Weight of compete packaged unit.
f. Anchor bolts and anchor bolt assemblies.
g. Paint coatings.
h. All accessories and protective devices.
4. Motors:
a. Name of Manufacturer.
b. Model.
c. Rated horsepower.
d. Type of bearings, enclosure and insulation.
e. Weight.
f. Motor efficiency.
5. Design Calculations: Provide design calculations to demonstrate that the aeration equipment achieves
the performance criteria specified at field conditions.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Submit for all pumping equipment, aeration equipment, valves, instrumentation, controls and
accessories provided.
2. Required Information:
a. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
b. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.
c. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operating, regulation and control, and
shutdown and emergency conditions.
d. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
e. Guide to "troubleshooting".
f. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
g. Outline, cross-sections, assembly drawings, engineering data and wiring diagrams.
h. Test data and performance curves.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication Personnel Qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in the fabrication of the materials and equipment.
2. Knowledgeable of the design and the approved Shop Drawings.
B. Manufacturer's Services:
1. Submit Manufacturer's sworn statement that the equipment furnished complies with this Specification.
2. Provide Manufacturer's field service.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970: All equipment shall comply with Act
and regulations.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 3
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unbroken, brand marked containers.
B. Remove and replace damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material delivered to the site at no cost to the
Owner.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts for Blower Equipment:
1. 1 set of belts for each blower.
2. 1 inlet filter element for each blower.
3. 5 gallons of oil, total.
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. General:
1. Provide the services of a representative of the Manufacturer to assist the installation Contractor of the
jet aeration equipment during construction and verification after installation. At a minimum, includes:
a. Providing the installation Contractor sufficient copies of all the necessary reviewed Shop
Drawings.
b. Coordinating all deliveries with the installation Contractor.
c. Providing the necessary on-site supervision during installation.
2. Provide the services of a representative of the Manufacturer to start-up and train Owner personnel in
the proper operation and maintenance of the aeration equipment and control system furnished under
this Section.
B. Start-up Assistance:
1. Includes:
a. Dry installation inspection.
b. Verify Pumps and Blowers:
1) Lubrication.
2) RPM.
3) Amp draws.
4) Vibration.
5) Any other tests recommended by equipment Manufacturers.
c. Configuration and calibration of field instrumentation devices.
d. Submit written report of installation verification and acceptance to Engineer.
e. Submit written notice to General Contractor and Engineer of all deficiencies, changes or
additions.
2. Does not include:
a. Installation assistance and supervision time.
b. Training time.
3. Duration:
a. Minimum: One 8-hour working day.
b. Or more as necessary to complete start-up.
4. Schedule:
a. Coordinate with the General Contractor, Engineer, Owner and any Subcontractors to complete
the start-up procedure.
b. Submit to the General Contractor and Engineer written schedule at least 10-days prior systems
to be started, listing:
1) Tasks to be accomplished.
2) Dates and times.
3) Subcontractors and Manufacturer representatives that will be present.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 4
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
C. Training:
1. Includes:
a. Operation and maintenance training on all equipment specified under this Section.
b. Trouble shooting methodology.
2. Equipment Training:
a. Provide all the necessary equipment to instruct Owner designated personnel.
b. Include O&M manuals and training manuals.
3. Duration:
a. Minimum: One 8-hour working day.
b. Or more as necessary to complete training.
4. Schedule:
a. Coordinate with Construction Manager, Engineer and Owner in accordance with schedule
approved by Owner.
b. Submit written itinerary for each training subject to Engineer for review.
D. Guarantee and Warranty: The Supplier shall guarantee the entire system for a period of 1 year. This
guarantee shall cover all parts, labor, troubleshooting, telephone consulting, travel and equipment
recalibration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. General:
1. A single Manufacturer shall furnish all the products necessary for a completely operational system.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Jet Tech, Incorporated.
b. Mass Transfer Systems.
c. KLA.
d. Approved equal.
2.2 JET HEADER
A. General:
1. Contains a liquid duct and air duct. Adequately sized for the liquid flow and air flow specified.
2. Equally spaced liquid and air orifices over the entire area of the basin.
3. Liquid and air orifices shall be aligned on a common horizontal plane.
4. Minimum pressure rating: 75 psig.
5. Jet nozzles shall have a non-clog design capable of passing 1.5-inch solids.
6. The inter-jet (liquid orifice) and outer-jet (liquid/air orifice) shall be aligned on a common centerline.
7. The jet assembly shall be designed to provide specified Standard Oxygen Requirements at the
specified air flow rate.
8. Separate liquid and air flanged inlets.
9. Provide all required supports, anchor bolts, and ancillary hardware.
10. Include all in-tank air and liquid piping.
B. Material:
1. Liquid and air ducts: machine filament wound fiberglass reinforced thermosetting resin pipe, in
accordance with ASTM D-2996-88.
2. Nozzles: Isophthalic, corrosion resistant laminating resin, reinforced with glass fibers and a surfacing
material of a commercial grade chemical-resistant glass having a coupling agent, in accordance with
NBS PS-15-69.
3. Supports and mounting hardware shall be non-magnetic stainless steel.
4. The air drop pipe from the tank outside limit to the jet header can be either 304/316 stainless steel or
filament wound fiberglass reinforced thermosetting resin pipe.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 5
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
2.3 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT BLOWERS
A. The following positive displacement blowers shall be provided:
1. Equalization Tank Aeration Blower:
a. Quantity: 2.
b. Design Capacity:
1) 375 scfm at 9.6 psig.
2) The Supplier shall verify that the design static pressure includes header and nozzle
pressure drop as well as all piping losses from the blower inlet and outlet.
2. All blower equipment valves and fittings listed under this Section can be either flanged or threaded
connections.
B. Blower assemblies shall be complete with blower, motor, v-belt drive, inlet filter (remotely mounted), inlet
silencer, discharge silencer, inlet and discharge flexible connectors, discharge isolation valve, discharge
check valve, pressure relief valve, base frame, vibration isolators, pressure gage, high/low pressure
switches, and high temperature switch.
C. Blowers:
1. Rotary positive displacement type.
2. Impellers:
a. Constructed of high-strength cast iron.
b. Straight, 2-lobe involute type.
c. Rubbing, liquid seals or lubrication is not allowed.
d. Dynamically balanced and center-timed to permit rotation in either direction.
3. Casing:
a. Cast iron with cooling vanes.
b. ANSI 125 flange connections.
4. Shaft:
a. Alloy steel.
b. Press fitted into the impeller body and pinned.
5. Bearings:
a. Designed for V-belt drive stresses.
b. Positive lip-type oil seal.
c. Drive end bearings shall be grease lubricated.
d. Timing gears and gear end bearings shall be splash lubricated.
e. Minimum estimated bearing life: 200,000 hours.
6. Manufacturer:
a. Roots.
b. Sutorbilt.
c. Gardner-Denver.
d. Aerzen Delta Series.
e. Approved equal.
D. Silencers:
1. Provide inlet and discharge silencers sized to match the blower inlet and outlet connections.
2. Multi-chamber type with internal porting for positive displacement blower suction and discharge
service.
3. Carbon steel plate with 2 shell layers.
4. Provide with high frequency adsorption device.
5. ANSI 125 flange connections.
6. Shop paint as specified in this Section.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Burgess-Manning.
b. Stoddard.
c. Universal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 6
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
E. Inlet Filter:
1. Flange mounted and designed for exterior installation (remote from blower) with horizontal inlet pipe.
2. Maximum head loss at design point: 0.25 psig.
3. Designed to provide at least 15 decibel noise reduction.
4. Filter media shall be pleated type able to remove 10 micron particles.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Burgess-Manning.
b. Stoddard.
c. Universal.
F. Drive:
1. V-belt design.
2. Belt guard shall conform with OSHA and other applicable safety codes.
3. Suitable for VFD application.
G. Flexible Connections:
1. Multiple-ply, reinforced rubber or synthetic elastomer.
2. ANSI 125 flange connections.
3. Install on inlet and discharge of blower.
4. Manufacturers:
a. General Rubber Corporation.
b. Unaflex Rubber Corporation.
c. Or equal.
H. Pressure Relief Valve:
1. Provide a spring or weight loaded relief valve mounted at the outlet of the discharge silencer.
2. Set at 12.0 psig.
3. Capable of discharging the full design flow of the blower.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Kunkle.
b. Or equal.
I. Pressure Gage:
1. One discharge pressure gage with shut-off cock for each blower.
2. Provide tap and install gage at the inlet of the discharge silencer.
3. Gage shall be liquid-filled type.
4. 4-1/2-inch diameter.
5. Black phenolic case.
6. 0-15 psig range.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Ashcroft, Type 1279.
b. Or equal.
J. Pressure Switches:
1. Provide 1 for each blower discharge silencer.
2. Adjustable, visual individual high and low pressure set points.
3. DPDT contacts for each set point.
4. 4-inch diameter face.
5. Visual gage pointer, 0.5 psig minor revisions.
6. Zero adjustment.
7. Power: 120 VAC
8. Pressure range: 0-15 psig.
9. Manufacturer:
a. Dwyer, Photohelic, Series 3000.
b. Or equal.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 7
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
K. Temperature Switches:
1. Provide 1 for each blower discharge silencer.
2. Bulb and capillary type.
3. Bulb length: 3-inch maximum.
4. Bulb connection: 3.4-inch NPT male.
5. Capillary length: 6-feet minimum.
6. Calibrated dial.
7. Visible adjustable set points.
8. Snap-action switch.
9. Adjustable deadband.
10. Maximum temperature: 250 degrees F.
11. SPDT contacts.
12. Manufacturer: Mercoid, Model DA-7035-153.
L. Base and Frame:
1. Fabricated steel.
2. Free standing and able to support all equipment specified.
3. Shop painting as specified in this Section.
M. Vibration Isolators:
1. Prevent transfer of blower vibratory load to housekeeping pad.
2. Materials: Zinc plated steel and neoprene.
3. Neoprene thickness as recommended by the Manufacturer.
4. Manufacturer and Model: Tech Products Corporation Heavy Duty Stable-Flex Mounts; or equal.
N. Check Valve:
1. Double door type.
2. Designed for air service.
3. Pressure rating: 125 psig.
4. Maximum head loss at maximum air flow and 70 degrees F: 0.05 psig.
5. Materials of Construction:
a. Body: cast iron or carbon steel.
b. Disc: aluminum.
c. Seal: Buna-N.
d. Spring: 316 stainless steel.
e. Connections: ANSI B16.1, Class 125 flat flanges or lug wafer.
f. Manufacturer:
1) Techno Corp.
2) Or equal.
O. Motor:
1. Power: 460 VAC, 60 Hz, 3 phase. Inverter duty rated.
2. Horsepower:
a. Adequately sized so as not to exceed the motor nameplate horsepower over the entire blower
curve.
b. Equalization tank blower: 25 hp minimum.
3. Speed: 1,800 RPM.
4. NEMA design B.
5. Bearings: grease lubricated.
6. Lifting lugs: capable of lifting the weight of the pump and motor.
7. Enclosure: ODP or TEFC.
8. Efficiency: premium.
9. Insulation: NEMA Class F.
10. Service Factor: 1.15.
11. Manufacturers:
a. U.S. Motors.
b. Reliance.
c. Baldor.
d. General Electric.
e. Lincoln.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 8
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
2.4 NON-CLOG HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
A. The following non-clog horizontal centrifugal pumps shall be provided.
1. Equalization Tank Motive:
a. Quantity: 2
b. Design Capacity:
1) 2,200 gpm at 20 feet TDH.
2) The Supplier shall verify that the design TDH value includes all header and nozzle losses
as well as the suction and discharge piping losses from the motive pump.
B. Pump Manufacturers:
1. Goulds.
2. Fairbanks-Morse.
3. Sulzer.
4. Deming.
5. Or equal.
C. Pump:
1. Impeller:
a. Dynamically balanced prior to shipment.
b. Material: ASTM A48 Class 30B cast iron.
c. Trimmed to match design points.
2. Volute/Casing:
a. Material: ASTM A48 Class 30B cast iron.
b. Equipped with taps for drain, suction gage, discharge gage and vent.
c. Suction and discharge connections: 150 pound ANSI flat-faced flanges.
d. Design to allow removal of the rotating assembly without disturbing the suction and discharge
piping.
3. Seal Assembly:
a. Flushed mechanical seal.
b. Material: Double carbon and ceramic construction, held in a mating position by a stainless steel
spring.
c. Pressurized and lubricated by plant service water.
d. Seal water flush fitting.
4. Bearing Frame:
a. Material: ASTM A48 Class 30B cast iron.
b. Space between upper and lower bearings shall be enclosed.
c. Provide jacking bolts for external impeller adjustment.
d. Bearing lubrication: grease.
5. Shaft Assembly:
a. Shaft and impeller screw: 316 stainless steel.
b. Shaft sleeve: renewable, 316 stainless steel with Brinell hardness of 300 to 350, through
packing box.
c. Bearings: designed for AFBMA L10 life of 100,000 hours at the best efficiency point.
6. Baseplate:
a. Base: fabricated steel.
b. Suitably constructed to support the full weight of the pump and motor under normal operation.
Vibration free under normal operation.
c. Pump and motor aligned and bolted in place prior to shipment.
7. Anchor Bolts:
a. Provide anchor bolts for baseplate.
b. Materials: stainless steel.
c. Adequately sized for all anticipated forces and vibration that may occur during normal operation.
8. Motor:
a. Power: 460 VAC, 60 Hz, 3 phase.
b. Horsepower:
1) Adequately sized so as not to exceed the motor nameplate horsepower over the entire
pump curve.
2) Equalization tank motive pumps: 20 hp minimum.
c. Speed: 1,200 RPM.
d. NEMA design B.
Hillshire Brands
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Procurement Package 2 - Aeration Equipment
Project Number G130547CD



/1
Jet Aeration Equipment

Section 46 51 17
46 51 17 9
Z:\2013\130547\WORK\SPECS\BP2\APPENDIX_46_51_17.DOCX
e. Bearings: grease lubricated.
f. Lifting lugs: capable of lifting the weight of the pump and motor.
g. Enclosure: TEFC.
h. Efficiency: premium.
i. Insulation: NEMA Class F.
j. Service Factor: 1.15.
k. Manufacturers:
1) U.S. Motors.
2) Reliance.
3) Baldor.
4) General Electric.
5) Lincoln.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide the services of a representative of the Manufacturer of the jet aeration equipment to assist the
Construction Manager during construction and verification after installation. At a minimum, include:
1. Providing the Construction Manager sufficient copies of all the necessary reviewed Shop Drawings
and installation manuals.
2. Coordinating all deliveries with the Construction Manager.
3. Providing the necessary on-site supervision during installation.
3.2 PAINTING
A. Surface Preparation - Shop:
1. Remove dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP1.
2. Abrasive blast clean surfaces to specification required for coating to be applied. Minimum
requirements to be SSPC-SP6 commercial blast cleaning.
3. Perform abrasive blast cleaning only when the relative humidity is no higher than 75% and the surface
temperature of the steel is at least 5 degrees F above the dew point.
4. Coat cleaned surfaces before visible rust forms on the surface. Do not leave cleaned surfaces
uncoated for more than 24 hours.
5. Apply coating as specified under this Section.
B. Coating Systems:
1. Interior Ferrous Metals - Non-Immersed: Gloss zinc/aliphatic acrylic polyurethane system:
a. (Shop) First Coat: 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (63%) 2.5 - 3.5 mils.
b. (Field Touch Up) Prime: 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (63%) 2.5 - 3.5 mils.
c. (Field) Second Coat: 69-Hi-Build Epoxoline II (69%) 4.0 - 6.0 mils.
d. (Field) Third Coat: 74 Endura-Shield IV (70%) 4.0 - 6.0 mils.


END OF SECTION 46 51 17